JP7428910B2 - pinball game machine - Google Patents

Description

This invention relates to a pinball game machine equipped with a game area where game balls are fired.

Conventionally, among the various pinball game machines, the so-called first-class pachinko game machine displays multiple symbols on a display area, such as a liquid crystal display, located approximately in the center of the game board. display (hereinafter, such display is referred to as "design variation" or "variation display", etc.). This gaming machine shifts to a special game called a jackpot, in which you can get more prize balls than in a normal game when the combination of symbols in multiple rows stops changing in a specific manner. known as a thing. The fluctuating display of symbols in the display area is not only about multiple symbols being displayed fluctuating, but also by changing the time of the fluctuating display in a state where if one more symbol is aligned, it will be a jackpot, as in the so-called reach screen. Performances are designed to heighten players' expectations, such as making the game longer than before. In addition, players' expectations are heightened by the use of characters in symbols and other images to give a story to the fluctuating displays, and by previewing effects that hint at high expectations for the transition to special games. (For example, see Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2003-230714

A large number of conventional gaming machines that employ the above-described configuration already exist. In order to differentiate from conventional models, there is a need to diversify and optimize the presentation.

The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can realize diversification and optimization of performances.

A pinball game machine according to an aspect of the present invention includes a game board in which a game area is formed, a first starting port provided in the game area, and a pinball game machine provided in the game area that makes it relatively difficult for the game ball to enter the game board. Win/fail determination based on a second starting port having a ball entry variation mechanism operable to change from a state to an easy state, and a lottery value obtained when a ball enters the first starting port or the second starting port. a symbol display device in which symbols are displayed in a fluctuating manner and the symbol is displayed in a static manner to indicate the result of the symbol determination; In this case, after the stop display, there is a special game control means that enables a special game that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game to be executed, and a special game control means that allows the player to execute a special game that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game, and a second starting state where the ball enters the second starting port from the normal ball entering state where the ease of entry is relatively low. The ball entry state control means is provided for shifting the ball to an easy entry state in which the ease of entering the ball into a starting hole is relatively high, and the performance control means for controlling the performance. If the transition to the easy-to-enter state occurs after the end of the special game, the number of changes in the symbol from the end of the special game until reaching a specific end of the easy-to-enter state becomes the first number; In some cases, the second number of times may be higher than the number of times remaining, and in an easy-to-enter state, it is possible to display the actual number of remaining times until reaching a certain end period or a false number of remaining times that is lower than the actual number of remaining times, and it is possible to display a false number of times remaining. When the remaining number of times is displayed, if the number of changes in the symbol after transitioning to the easy-to-enter state is less than the predetermined number of times, which is less than the first number of times, the number-of-numbers increase effect that increases the false number of remaining times cannot be performed. Yes, and if the number of changes in the symbol after transitioning to the easy entry state is equal to or more than a predetermined number of times, the number-of-times increasing effect can be executed.

Furthermore, any combination of the above components, or mutual substitution of the components and expressions of the present invention among methods, devices, systems, computer programs, recording media storing computer programs, data structures, etc. , is effective as an aspect of the present invention.

According to an aspect of the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can realize diversification and optimization of performances.

It is a diagram showing the basic structure on the front side of the Pachinko gaming machine. It is a diagram showing the basic structure on the back side of the Pachinko gaming machine. It is a diagram showing functional blocks of a pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing the functional configuration of the main board. FIG. 3 is a diagram schematically showing a validity determination table. It is a figure which shows typically the range setting of the success/failure lottery value for each setting value. It is a diagram schematically showing a symbol determination table. FIG. 3 is a diagram schematically showing a variation pattern table. FIG. 3 is a diagram schematically showing a prior validity determination table that is referred to in prior validity determination. It is a diagram schematically showing a prior propriety determination table corresponding to game settings. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a sub-board. 1 is a diagram schematically showing an outline of a mobile cooperation system. FIG. 2 is a block diagram schematically showing the hardware configuration of a main board and a subboard. It is a block diagram schematically showing the hardware configuration of the production control device. It is a flowchart showing control start processing of the main board in the Pachinko gaming machine. 16 is a flowchart showing details of the setting change process in S124 in FIG. 15. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing details of the setting confirmation process in S126 in FIG. 15. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing in detail the main processing of S120 in FIG. 15. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing details of interrupt processing. It is a flowchart showing control start processing of a sub-board in a pachinko game machine. 21 is a flowchart showing in detail the main processing of S518 in FIG. 20. 5 is a flowchart showing interrupt processing when a command is received from the main board. It is a flowchart showing interrupt processing when a timer interrupt for effect display control occurs. 12 is a flowchart showing interrupt processing when the sub CPU receives a command from the control CPU. 5 is a flowchart showing interrupt processing when a timer interrupt for controlling various devices occurs. It is a flowchart showing the process of special symbol variation display. It is a flowchart which shows the process of decorative pattern fluctuation display. It is a flowchart showing the process of a special game. It is a flowchart showing the process of a small winning game. It is a figure showing an example of a screen of an effect display device. FIG. 7 is a diagram schematically showing an example of shrinkage of a frame image in a screen deformation effect. FIG. 7 is a diagram schematically showing an example of swinging of a frame image in a screen deformation effect. It is a figure which shows typically the layer structure of the production screen in screen transformation production. FIG. 6 is a diagram schematically showing the process of a movable accessory performance that is executed simultaneously with a screen transformation performance. FIG. 3 is a diagram schematically showing a plurality of buffer areas obtained by dividing a frame buffer. FIG. 3 is a diagram schematically showing the relationship between the display size of a frame image and the capacity of a frame buffer area. FIG. 3 is a diagram schematically showing a process of transforming a frame image stored in a buffer area. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen of a 3rd special effect pattern. It is a figure which shows typically the process of using a buffer area in a 3rd special effect pattern. FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing the basic structure of the slot machine on its outer surface. FIG. 7 is a rear view of the housing door exposed when the housing door is opened. FIG. 3 is a front view showing the internal structure of the casing base that is exposed when the casing door is opened. It is a diagram showing the symbol arrangement of the reels. It is a functional block diagram of a slot machine. It is a flowchart showing the basic flow of a game in a slot machine. FIG. 2 is a block diagram schematically showing the hardware configuration of a main control device and a sub-control device. It is a block diagram schematically showing the hardware configuration of an effect display control section. It is a flowchart showing the main program control processing of the main control device in the slot machine. 3 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing in the main controller. It shows the transition of the game state after transitioning to the high probability state and easy ball entry state. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variation start processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the pattern stop process of a special pattern. It is a diagram showing a game flow according to an example. It is a figure which shows an example of the process of a fluctuation|variation effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the switching timing of a production mode. It is a figure which shows an example of the execution process of the 1st performance triggered by the operation instruction performance. It is a figure which shows an example of the execution process of the 2nd performance triggered by the operation instruction performance. It is a figure which shows an example of the execution process of an opening performance. It is a figure which shows an example of the execution process of an opening performance. FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating an example of an execution process of a normal color variation effect. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of an execution process of a special color variation effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the execution process of an accessory action|operation production. It is a figure which shows an example of the production|presentation process in which the execution mode of a suggestion production|presentation can be selected. It is a figure which shows an example of the execution process of the frequency|count increase effect. It is a figure showing an example of the execution process of individual performance. It is a figure which shows an example of the transition process of a variation pattern selection state when it transfers to latent mode. It is a figure which shows an example of the output of the test signal and outer edge signal regarding a ball entry easy state. It is a figure which shows an example of the output of the test signal and outer edge signal regarding a ball entry easy state.

(Prerequisite technology 1)
In the pachinko game machine of this embodiment, a plurality of games corresponding to the conventional type 1 pachinko game machine coexist. The second game is executed preferentially so that the first game and the second game as the plurality of games are not executed at the same time. In order to achieve both of these gaming features, it is equipped with a plurality of starting winning holes, a plurality of special symbol display devices, and a plurality of holding lamps. It is designed so that the number of jackpot balls in the second game is generally larger than the number of jackpot balls in the first game. For example, the second game has a higher probability of winning a jackpot with a variable probability, and the second game has a larger number of unit games that constitute a special game in the event of a jackpot (the opening time of the jackpot is longer). A long open unit game with a long opening time and a short open unit game with a short opening time are mixed in one special game, and even if the number of unit games is the same, the second game is more long open unit game than the first game. (including cases where the number of games is large), the second game is designed to have a relatively higher profit than the first game. On top of that, we created a gameplay in which you aim for the first hit in the first game, and after you are given time savings by hitting the jackpot in the first game, you repeat the aim in the second game to get more balls. Realize.

FIG. 1 shows the basic structure of the front side of a pachinko gaming machine. The pachinko gaming machine 100 is mainly composed of a gaming machine frame and a gaming board. The gaming machine frame of the pachinko gaming machine 100 includes an outer frame 101, a front frame 102, a transparent plate 103, a door 104, an upper ball tray 105, a lower ball tray 106, a firing handle 107, a speaker 108, a production button 109, a cross key 110, Includes a decorative lamp 111. The outer frame 101 is a frame body that has an opening and is used to fix the Pachinko gaming machine 100 at a position where it is to be installed. The front frame 102 is a frame body that matches the opening of the outer frame 101, and is attached to the outer frame 101 so as to be openable and closable by a hinge mechanism (not shown). The front frame 102 includes a mechanism for firing game balls, a mechanism for removably housing a game board, a mechanism for guiding or collecting game balls, and the like.

The transparent plate 103 is made of glass or the like, and is supported by the door 104. The door 104 is attached to the front frame 102 so as to be openable and closable by a hinge mechanism (not shown). The upper ball tray 105 has a mechanism for storing game balls, delivering the game balls to the firing rail, and extracting the game balls to the lower ball tray 106. The lower ball tray 106 has a mechanism for storing and extracting game balls. Speakers 108 are provided on the left and right sides at the upper part of the door 104, and output sound effects and music according to the game state and the performance by a means for controlling the performance. Most of the resin member making up the exterior of the door 104 is semi-transparent, and a decorative lamp 111 is provided inside the transparent part. The decorative lamp 111 is an LED that emits light in various colors depending on the game state, performance, etc. by a means for controlling the performance, and plays the role of performance by blinking or the like.

The game board 80 has a first starting port 11, a second starting port 12, a big winning port 20, a first operating port 31, a second operating port 32, and a general winning port 33 on a gaming area 81 divided by a rail 82. , an outlet 34, a performance display device 60, and a center decoration 64. The center decoration 64 is a decorative resin member provided so as to form a screen frame of the effect display device 60 over approximately the central part of the game area 81, its upper part, and the right side, and is a decorative resin member provided to form a screen frame of the effect display device 60, and serves as a flow path for the game ball, and the effect display device. It has 60 protection, decoration, etc. functions. A stage 65 is formed at the bottom of the center decoration 64 on which the game balls that have flown in roll, and depending on the way the balls roll, the falling direction from the stage 65 is the direction in which the ball enters the first starting port 11 and the direction in which the ball enters the first starting port 11. The ball is distributed to the side where the ball does not enter the ball. A movable accessory 66 is provided on the upper part of the center decoration 64, which is driven and performs a performance action according to the content of the performance. In the game area 81, mechanisms such as a plurality of game nails and windmills (not shown) are installed to form a flow path for game balls. In addition, in this specification, "hitting a ball," "winning a prize," and "falling in" may be mutually synonymous. In addition, each winning hole and each ball entry hole may be configured with a type of "passing hole" (also called a "gate" or "through chucker") through which the game ball passes; ”, “Award”, “Failure” and “Pass” may also be used as synonymous with each other.

The first starting hole 11 is provided as a starting winning hole corresponding to the first game, and the second starting opening 12 is provided as a starting winning hole corresponding to the second game. The first starting port 11 and the second starting port 12 are configured so that it is possible for the player to aim the ball into one of them by changing the firing strength or weakness of the game ball according to the player's intention. The first starting port 11 is provided approximately at the lower center of the gaming area 81, and the second starting port 12 is provided directly below the first starting port 11. If you hit the ball to the left, that is, if you hit the ball relatively weakly with the aim of making it flow toward the left-hand passage of the center decoration 64, the ball can or will easily enter the first starting port 11 and the second starting port 12, but if you hit the ball right-handed, In other words, if the ball is hit relatively strongly with the aim of flowing toward the right-hand passage of the center ornament 64, the ball can or will easily enter the second starting port 12, but the ball cannot enter the first starting port 11. A channel is formed by arranging the game nails so that it is difficult for the ball to enter. However, under normal conditions, the upper part of the opening of the second starting port 12 is covered by the first starting port 11, which prevents the inflow of game balls, so unless the expansion mechanism of the second starting port 12 is opened, the second starting port 12, it is impossible or difficult to enter the ball. The win/fail lottery is a lottery to determine whether or not to move to a special game that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game, and is performed every time a ball enters the first starting port 11 or the second starting port 12. Ru.

In addition, the first starting port 11 and the second starting port 12 may be provided at positions separated from each other to the extent that it is possible to target either one depending on the firing strength of the game ball. The first starting port 11 and the second starting port 12 may be installed separately on the left and right sides of the gaming area 81, respectively, so that a game ball aimed at one is difficult to enter the other. For example, the first starting port 11 is provided at a position where the ball can enter the ball or enter the ball easily when the ball is shot to the left, that is, when the ball is shot relatively weakly so as to flow toward the left passage of the center decoration 64. The second starting port 12 is provided at a position where the ball can enter or easily enter the ball when the ball is shot to the right, that is, when the ball is shot relatively strongly and aimed to flow to the right side passage of the center decoration 64.

The first starting port 11 includes a first starting winning detection device 16. The first starting winning detection device 16 is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the first starting opening 11, and generates first starting winning information indicating the ball entering when the ball enters. The second starting port 12 includes a second starting winning prize detection device 17, an ordinary electric accessory 90 (so-called electric tulip) that is an expansion mechanism, and an ordinary electric accessory solenoid 91 for opening and closing the ordinary electric accessory 90. Be prepared. The second starting winning detection device 17 is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the second starting opening 12, and generates second starting winning information indicating the ball entering when the ball enters.

The first operating port 31 is provided at a position on the left side of the game area 81 and includes a first passage detection device 36. The first passage detection device 36 is a sensor that detects the passage of the game ball to the first operating port 31, and generates passage information indicating the passage at the time of passage. The second operating port 32 is provided on the right side of the game area 81 and includes a second passage detection device 37. The second passage detection device 37 is a sensor that detects the passage of the game ball to the second operating port 32, and generates passage information indicating the passage at the time of passage. Passage of the game ball to the first operating port 31 or the second operating port 32 usually triggers an opening lottery to determine whether or not to expand the electric accessory 90. When the game ball passes through the first operating port 31 or the second operating port 32, a normal symbol, which is a symbol indicating the determination result of the open lottery, is displayed in a fluctuating manner on the normal symbol display section 45. Therefore, the open lottery is also called the "normal symbol lottery." After a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the fluctuation display of the normal symbol stops. When the normal symbol stops at the winning symbol, the normal electric accessory 90 is expanded by the driving force of the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 91, increasing the possibility of the ball entering the second starting port 12. In addition, as a modified example, the number of actuating ports may be one and it may be provided at a position on the left side of the gaming area 81.

The three general winning holes 33 are each equipped with a general winning detection device 38 for detecting the entry of game balls. The general winning detection device 38 is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the general winning opening 33, and generates general winning information indicating the ball entering when the ball enters.

The grand prize opening 20 includes a grand prize detection device 25 for detecting the entry of a game ball, and a grand prize opening solenoid 92 for opening and closing the grand prize opening 20. The big winning detection device 25 is a sensor that detects when a game ball enters the big winning opening 20, and generates big winning opening prize information indicating the ball entering when the ball enters the big winning opening. The big winning hole 20 is a horizontally rectangular winning hole that opens as a "jackpot" when the first special symbol 51 or the second special symbol 52 stops in a predetermined manner. The big prize opening 20 is provided at the upper right position of the out opening 34. In addition, as a modification, another grand prize opening may be provided at the lower center of the gaming area 81 or above or below the grand prize opening 20, and a plurality of grand prize openings may be provided. The out port 34 is a discharge port through which game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports are discharged, and is equipped with an out detection device 39. The out detection device 39 is a sensor that detects a game ball that passes through the out port 34 and is ejected, and generates ejection information indicating the detection at the time of detection. The out opening 34 is provided at the lowermost end of the center of the gaming area 81 so that all game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings can be guided and passed through. A specification may be adopted in which a plurality of out detection devices 39 are arranged side by side while ensuring a game ball passage with a sufficient width to prevent ball clogging in the out port 34.

A symbol display unit 120 is arranged outside and below the game area 81 on the game board 80. The symbol display unit 120 includes a first special symbol display section 41, a second special symbol display section 42, a first special symbol reservation display section 71, a second special symbol reservation display section 72, a normal symbol display section 45, and a regular symbol display section 45. Display sections such as a hold display section 75, a game status display section 76, and an abnormality notification section 77 are provided. Specifically, a first special symbol display section 41 corresponding to the first game and a second special symbol display section 42 corresponding to the second game are arranged side by side in the lower left position, and the first special symbol 51 and the fluctuation of the second special symbol 52 are displayed.

The first special symbol 51 is a symbol corresponding to the determination result of the first winning/failure lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 11, and when it is stopped in a predetermined winning manner, the special game A jackpot will occur. The second special symbol 52 is a symbol corresponding to the determination result of the second winning lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 12, and when the game ball is stopped in a predetermined winning manner, the special game A jackpot will occur. The first special symbol display section 41 and the second special symbol display section 42 are, for example, 8-segment LEDs consisting of 8 segments, 7 segments forming a "figure 8" and 1 segment representing a "dot". This is a display device. An 8-segment LED can express a numerical value of 8 bits by combining 8 segments. The first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52, which are represented by a combination of segments, are not necessarily in the form of letters or numbers, and may be symbols formed by a combination of segments that generally have no meaning. . These symbols are replaced one after another at high speed and displayed on the first special symbol display section 41 and the second special symbol display section 42, or a predetermined display (e.g. "-") and non-display (e.g. all lights out) are displayed. By displaying the symbol corresponding to the determination result after repeating for a predetermined period of time, the symbol fluctuation display of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 is realized. The first special symbol display section 41 and the second special symbol display section 42 are not 8-segment LEDs but LED dot arrays, and a plurality of types of first special symbol 51 and second special symbol 51 and second special symbol are displayed by combining the lighting patterns and lighting colors. A special pattern 52 may also be expressed.

In addition, since the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 do not necessarily have to have a dramatic role, in this embodiment, the first special symbol display section 41 and the second special symbol at the lower left of the gaming area 81 It is displayed in an inconspicuous size on the display section 42. However, if a method is adopted in which the special design itself has a dramatic role and is expressed without using a decorative design, the special design will be displayed on another display device such as a liquid crystal display instead of an 8-segment LED. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the

Above the first special symbol display section 41, a first special symbol reservation display section 71 is provided as a reservation lamp for special symbol fluctuations corresponding to the first game, and above the second special symbol display section 42, a second special symbol display section 71 is provided. A second special symbol pending display section 72 is provided as a pending lamp for special symbol variations corresponding to the game. The first special figure pending display section 71 is made up of two lamps, and the number of pending lottery values in the first game (hereinafter, the number of pending lottery values) is determined by the number of lights or blinking lamps. (also simply referred to as the "pending number"). The number of reservations in the first special symbol reservation display section 71 is the number of times (number) of lottery values obtained based on winnings in the first start opening 11 during fluctuation of the first special symbol 51 or execution of a special game. Yes, indicating the number of winning balls for which symbol variation has not yet been executed. The second special figure reservation display section 72 also consists of two lamps, and displays the number of reservations in the second game based on the number of lamps lit or blinking. The number of reservations in the second special symbol reservation display section 72 is the number of times (number) of lottery values obtained based on winnings in the second start opening 12 during fluctuation of the second special symbol 52 or execution of a special game. Yes, indicating the number of winning balls for which symbol variation has not yet been executed. The number of pending lottery values is also displayed at the bottom of the screen of the effect display device 60 in the form of the number of lit pending lamp images.

A normal symbol display section 45 is provided on the right side of the symbol display unit 120. For convenience, the normal symbol display section 45 is composed of two lamps, and the display state of the normal symbol is expressed by the lighting combination of these lamps. First, the fluctuation of the normal symbol is expressed by flashing the first lamp and the second lamp at the same time, and finally the stop symbol of the normal symbol is expressed by the combination of the lighting states of the first lamp and the second lamp. is expressed. For example, a winning stop pattern is expressed by turning on the first lamp and turning off the second lamp, a first winning mode is expressed by turning off the first lamp and turning on the second lamp, and a winning pattern is expressed by turning off the first lamp and turning off the second lamp. The second hit mode is expressed by lighting both the lamp and the second lamp.

Further, on the right side of the normal symbol display section 45, a normal symbol holding display section 75 is provided as a holding lamp for normal symbol fluctuations. The normal symbol holding display section 75 also includes two lamps, and displays the number of pending normal symbol variations based on the number of lamps lit or blinking. The pending number of normal symbol fluctuations is the number of game balls that passed through the first operating port 31 or the second operating port 32 during the normal symbol fluctuation, and the number of normal symbol drawings in which the normal symbol fluctuation has not yet been executed. shows.

Note that the symbol display unit 120 is provided with a game status display section 76 and an abnormality notification section 77. The gaming state display section 76 is a display section that displays a display corresponding to a gaming state such as a specific gaming state described later, and is composed of, for example, one lamp and one 7-segment LED. For example, each game state is notified by lighting up a lamp when the probability is changing, blinking when the ball is in an easy-to-enter state, and turning off the lamp when it is in the normal state, and a 7-segment LED when a special game is being executed. The number of unit games (number of rounds) to be executed in that special game is displayed. The abnormality notification unit 77 is a display unit that reports an abnormality in a part of the gaming machine, and is composed of, for example, a plurality of lamps, and reports an abnormality using a lighting pattern depending on the type of abnormality. Note that these display sections may not be arranged together in the symbol etc. display unit 120, but each display section may be configured individually, or may be configured separately into a plurality of display devices grouped together as appropriate. Further, the notification of a gaming state such as a specific gaming state may be configured to be made only for a predetermined period, such as a certain period of time after recovery from power-off, for example.

A performance display device 60 is provided approximately in the center of the game area 81 so that the screen is exposed from a screen frame formed by a center decoration 64, and displays a decorative pattern 61 that is linked to the first special pattern 51 or the second special pattern 52. Displays changes in the included effect images. Hereinafter, such a display will be referred to as a "symbol variation" or "variable display".

The performance display device 60 is a display device configured with a liquid crystal display that displays a decorative pattern 61 in a variable manner in conjunction with the variable display of the first special pattern 51 or the second special pattern 52. The decorative pattern 61 is a pattern for visually presenting the determination result display of the lottery shown by the first special pattern 51 and the second special pattern 52. The effect display device 60 displays, as a decorative pattern 61, a moving image in which a plurality of rows of symbols, simulating a slot machine game, fluctuate, for example, in the central area of the screen. In this embodiment, symbols consisting of numbers "0" to "9" are displayed in three rows and are varied, and a win or a miss is indicated by a combination of three symbols that are finally stopped and displayed. Each of the plurality of designs constituting the decorative design 61 is composed of numbers, letters, or symbols decorated with colors or patterns, but there is a picture or design common to all the designs for these numbers, letters, and symbols. It may be configured by adding different designs to each and integrating them. This pattern is a pattern depicting a motif related to the theme of decoration or performance set for the relevant model of Pachinko gaming machine 100, and may be a pattern depicting a human or animal character, for example. The decorative pattern 61 can be switched in accordance with the development of the production, between a case where a pattern including the pattern is displayed in a variable manner, and a case where the pattern is separated and only numbers, letters, and symbols are displayed in a variable manner. The configuration may be such that the In the background of the fluctuating display of the decorative patterns 61, a moving image having a presentation effect related to the decoration or presentation theme set for the relevant model of the Pachinko game machine 100 is displayed in conjunction with the pattern fluctuations.

The effect display device 60 is composed of a liquid crystal display that is a high-definition dot matrix type display device, and the width of its display area may be about half the width of the game area, or it may be large enough to be more than half the width of the game area. There may be. In the case of a large size, the game ball path on the right side of the performance display device is formed with a width that allows one game ball to pass through, and if the player hits the ball with maximum strength in what is called a "right-handed hit", it will almost certainly go through the right path. It is possible to pass the game ball to the ball, and it can be differentiated from what is called "left-handed hitting." The effect display device 60 may be configured not only by a single display device but also by a combination of a plurality of display devices. In the case of multiple displays, displays of different sizes may be combined, such as a combination of a main liquid crystal and a sub liquid crystal, and the sub liquid crystal may be placed adjacent to the main liquid crystal, or a position other than the game board, such as a firing handle. (upper sphere, right side decorative lamp, etc.). When installed near the firing handle, it may be configured in the form of a touch panel that allows the player to input operations. The effect display device 60 is not limited to a liquid crystal display, and may be configured with a display device such as an organic EL display, or may be configured with a mechanical display means such as a drum rotating type, or a display means such as an LED matrix type. .

The performance button 109 is an operation input means that is pressed by the player to input a predetermined instruction to the gaming machine according to the content of the performance, and changes are made to the content of the performance etc. in accordance with the manner in which the button is pressed. The production button 109 is provided in the front frame 102. The effect button 109 is normally stored in the front frame 102, but a rod-shaped member is attached to the back side of the effect button 109, and the rod-shaped member and the effect button 109 are arranged in a direction substantially perpendicular to the board surface. It is provided so that it can be protruded. The rod-shaped member and the performance button 109 function as a performance lever 112 in a state of protruding to the outside, and the player can grasp the performance button 109 and pull the performance lever 112 downward. This also allows the player to input predetermined instructions to the gaming machine. The cross key 110 is an operation input means by which a player inputs a direction instruction to the gaming machine, and is provided on the left outer wall surface of the upper ball tray 105.

The gaming method and control flow performed in the gaming machine configured as described above will be outlined. When the player manually rotates the firing handle 107, the game balls stored in the upper ball tray 105 are guided one by one by the rail 82 and fired into the game area 81 with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle. . When the player manually fixes the rotational position of the firing handle 107, the firing of game balls is repeated at regular time intervals. A game ball launched to the upper part of the game area 81 hits a plurality of game nails, a windmill, a center decoration 64, etc., and falls in a direction depending on how it hits. When a game ball falls into each winning hole of the general winning hole 33, the first starting hole 11, the second starting hole 12, and the big winning hole 20, the prize ball depending on the type of winning hole is placed in the upper ball tray 105 or the lower ball tray. The ball is dispensed into the ball tray 106. A game ball that has fallen into each winning hole such as the general winning hole 33 is treated as a safe ball, and a game ball that has fallen into the out hole 34 is treated as an out ball. The discharge of the safe ball may be excluded from detection by the out detection device 39, or the safe ball may also be guided to an area where the out detection device 39 is provided, and all discharged therefrom will be detected by the out detection device 39. You can also use it as Alternatively, a specification may be adopted in which the number of safe balls detected and the number of detected out balls is added to the number of detected out balls as the number of ejected balls, without guiding safe balls and detecting safe balls by the out detection device 39.

Further, when a game ball passes through the first operating port 31 or the second operating port 32, the normal symbol is displayed in a variable manner in the normal symbol display section 45, and is stopped and displayed after a variable display time determined prior to display has elapsed. When the normal symbols are stopped and displayed in the first winning mode or the second winning mode, the normal electric accessories 90 are expanded based on the winning mode of the stopped and displayed symbols and the game state when the symbols were stopped and displayed. . That is, when the gaming state when the symbols are stopped is the normal gaming state and the normal symbols are stopped and displayed in the first winning mode, a short opening of 0.1 seconds is executed as the opening of the normal electric accessory 90. In addition, if the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in the first winning mode during a specific game state (for example, an easy ball entry state), the normal symbol will be displayed in the second winning mode during normal and specific gaming states (for example, an easy ball entry state). When the stop display is displayed, a long opening of 6 seconds is executed as the opening of the electric accessory 90. Here, the winning probability of the normal symbol and the execution probability of the long open are set to differ depending on the gaming state. Specifically, in the opening lottery in the normal state, the normal symbol will win with a probability of 1/100, and in that case, the short opening execution probability (probability that the winning symbol in the first winning mode will be selected) is 1/100. 3. The execution probability of long opening (probability of selecting a winning symbol in the second winning mode) is set to 2/3. In addition, in an open lottery in a specific gaming state (for example, an easy-to-enter state), the normal symbol will win with a probability of 99/100, and the selection probabilities of the first winning mode and the second winning mode are the same as in the normal gaming mode. However, it is set so that the long opening will be executed no matter which way the prize is won. In this way, in the easy-to-enter state, there is a function to change the winning probability of the normal symbol (probability changes from 1/100 to 99/100) and an extension function to extend the opening time (the opening time when stopped and displayed in the first winning mode is 0). .1 seconds to 6.0 seconds), it is easier to enter the second starting port 12. Note that the function (long opening) for extending the operating period of the normal electric accessory 90 is sometimes referred to as "opening extension".

In addition, as mentioned above, by setting the probability of long opening in the normal state to be higher than the probability of short opening, when the normal symbol is won, long opening will be executed at a certain rate even in the normal state. . As a modified example, in the normal state, the probability of short opening may be higher than the probability of long opening, or the probability of both may be the same, or the specification may be such that short opening always occurs. good. Furthermore, when the ball is in the easy-to-enter state, it may be configured to use three functions, including a function to shorten the fluctuation time of the normal symbols, to enhance the ease of entering the ball into the second starting port 12. In this case, the normal symbol fluctuation time is, for example, 10 seconds in the normal state and 2 seconds in the easy ball entry state. Note that the winning probability of the opening lottery in the normal state may be set to zero (0/100), and the normal electric accessory 90 may be expanded only when the opening lottery is held in the easy entry state. Furthermore, when the normal electric accessory 90 expands, it may be notified in advance, or the suspension of the normal symbol change may be predicted and the notification may be made before the normal symbol begins to change, or the normal symbol change may be notified in advance. It may be notified during the fluctuation.

As a modification of the opening mode when the normal electric accessory 90 of the second starting port 12 is opened for a long time, the total opening time is increased to about 6 seconds by repeating the opening for 2 seconds, which is longer than the short opening, three times. It may also be a mode. Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which a plurality of combinations of opening time and number of openings are prepared and one is selected. For example, when opening for 2 seconds three times, the total opening time is the same as when opening for 6 seconds once, but if the interval period is included, the former is longer than the latter. Therefore, especially in the configuration of the modified example in which the second starting port 12 is arranged in the right-handed direction, if the player notices the opening and changes the direction of ball hitting from that point on to the second starting port 12, the ball will be hit by the former. It can be said that there is a long chance. Further, it may be configured such that there are a plurality of winning types of normal symbols, and the opening mode of the expanding mechanism may be different depending on the winning type. For example, when the normal symbol becomes the first hit, in the normal state it is opened for 0.1 seconds once, in the easy entry state it is opened for 1 second three times, and when it becomes the second hit, the normal state is In this case, the ball may be opened for 6 seconds once, and the ball may be opened for 2 seconds twice in the easy-to-enter state.

On the other hand, when the ball enters the first starting port 11 or the second starting port 12, the first special symbol 51, the second special symbol 52, , and a decorative pattern 61 are displayed in a variable manner. The variable display of the first special symbol 51, the second special symbol 52, and the decorative symbol 61 is stopped after the variable display time determined prior to display has elapsed. The first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 are displayed in a variable manner according to a predetermined variation pattern from the start to the stop of the variation. The decorative pattern 61 is displayed in a variable manner according to a variable presentation pattern in which the manner of variation from the start to the stop of the variation is determined. Multiple types of variation patterns and variation performance patterns are prepared, and each has varying lengths of time. While the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 are variably displayed in accordance with the variation pattern, the decorative symbol 61 is variably displayed in accordance with the variation performance pattern having the same variation time. For each variation pattern, a variation display time is determined for each pattern as an end condition for the symbol variation, and the first special symbol 51, second special symbol 52, and decorative symbol 61 change when the variation display time elapses. will be stopped. Hereinafter, while illustrating the variable display of the decorative symbols 61 displayed according to the variable effect pattern, the variable effect pattern will be briefly explained. Note that details such as a method for determining the fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation effect pattern will be explained separately.

As an example of the fluctuating display of the decorative symbols 61, first, when the fluctuation starts, the symbols in all three rows are fluctuated, like the rotation of the reels of a slot machine, and when the fluctuation end timing is approached, the symbols are stopped one by one, so that the final stop mode is achieved. Display the symbol combination as. Note that the operation when the decorative pattern 190 stops fluctuating may be controlled so that multiple rows are stopped at the same time instead of one row at a time to draw attention to effects other than the decorative symbols during the fluctuating display, or in a shorter fluctuating time. It may also be possible to display symbol variations. In addition, as an operation when the decorative pattern 190 starts to fluctuate, the start of fluctuation of some columns is controlled to be delayed depending on the subsequent development of the fluctuation (type of performance pattern, etc.) to create a sense of anticipation. You can also do this.

Next, the variable performance pattern will be briefly explained. The variable performance patterns include a normal out-of-reach performance pattern, a reach-out performance pattern, and a reach-out jackpot performance pattern. The normal winning performance pattern is a performance pattern when displaying a normal winning symbol combination. The out-of-reach performance pattern is a performance pattern when displaying an out-of-reach symbol combination after going through a reach-in state in which a jackpot is achieved if one more symbol is aligned. The reach jackpot performance pattern is a performance pattern when displaying a jackpot symbol combination after reaching the reach state. In particular, the patterns that go through the reach state include patterns with varying lengths of time, and reach patterns with relatively short fluctuation times are called "normal reach," and reach patterns with long fluctuation times are called "super reach." ”. The normal out-of-reach performance pattern, out-of-reach performance pattern, and reach-to-reach jackpot performance pattern each include a normal pattern that is displayed in a normal state and a time-saving pattern that is displayed in a time-saving state. However, even in the normal state, if the second symbol fluctuation corresponds to the ball entering the second starting port 12, the probability that the jackpot will change in probability or the probability that the number of unit games in the special game will increase will increase. Since this can be said to be a higher chance state than the first fluctuation corresponding to the ball entering the first starting hole 11, a pattern for chance performance may be used that indicates that there is a chance of a relatively advantageous jackpot. In the embodiment, a time saving pattern is used in the time saving state, but since time saving is involved in the variable probability state, the time saving pattern is also used in the variable probability state. However, in a modified example, a pattern for variable probability, which is different from that for time saving, may be used in the variable probability state. Alternatively, a specification may be adopted in which a common pattern is used for time saving and variable probability, or a specification in which a pattern for variable probability is used in a variable probability state without using a pattern for time saving.

In addition, when the number of pending lottery results reaches a predetermined number (for example, 3), the symbol variation time in the case of a loss is shortened compared to normal in order to increase gaming efficiency (hereinafter also referred to as "shortened variation"). Similarly, when the number of pending winning/failure drawings becomes 4, the symbol fluctuation time in the case of a miss is further shortened compared to the above case of 3 symbols (hereinafter also referred to as "super shortened fluctuation") in order to further improve gaming efficiency. ). When the first special symbol 51, second special symbol 52, and decorative symbol 61 at the time of stopping become a stopping state indicating a jackpot after the above-mentioned symbol fluctuations, the game state is more advantageous to the player than the normal game. The game shifts to a special game, and the opening/closing operation of the big prize opening 20 is started. The stopping mode of the decorative pattern 61 indicating a jackpot is, for example, a mode in which three types of symbols match.

There are two types of special games: a normal special game and a shortened special game, and there is a large difference in the profits depending on the winning prize balls. A normal special game is started by displaying an effect screen called a start demo time. After the start demonstration time is displayed on the screen, the big prize opening 20 is opened, and after the opening continues for about 30 seconds, or after nine or more game balls have fallen, it is temporarily closed. The process from opening to closing of the big prize opening 20 is basically called a unit game, but it may be opened for a short time multiple times during one unit game. After the opening/closing of the big prize opening 20 or the unit game is repeated a predetermined number of times, for example, 4 or 10 times, the normal special game is ended by displaying an effect screen called an end demonstration time. Normally, in special games, you can fully expect 9 or more balls to enter per unit game, and you can get enough prize balls (also called "balls out") by playing 10 unit games, making a big profit. is obtained. A special game in which unit games are repeated 10 times is also appropriately referred to as a "10R jackpot", and a special game in which unit games are repeated 4 times is also appropriately referred to as a "4R jackpot". Although the unit game is repeated 10 times, in some unit games, the big prize opening 20 is opened for a shorter time than usual (for example, 1.6 seconds), so that the unit game is actually repeated a small number of times. It is also possible to realize a normal special game (sometimes referred to as "substantially nR jackpot") similar to the above.

On the other hand, in the shortened special game, the start demonstration time and the end demonstration time are short or almost nonexistent (such as 0.1 seconds), and the big prize opening 20 is opened for only 1.6 seconds in one unit game. The shortened special game is completed by repeating this unit game twice. In the shortened special game, the opening of the big winning hole 20 for a very short period of time is repeated only twice, so very few balls can enter the big winning hole 20, and the number of balls actually coming out is almost zero or a small number (for example, only a few balls). This is a special game in which the number of payouts is equal to the number of payouts depending on the number of balls that enter one round, such as about 10 balls to about 1 to 2 balls per round. A special game in which two unit games are repeated is also appropriately referred to as a "2R jackpot". Although the number of unit games is the same as the normal special game, it is also possible to realize a shortened special game by opening the big prize opening 20 for a shorter time than usual in all unit games.

In addition, if the first special symbol 51 or the second special symbol 52 and the decorative symbol 61 at the time of stopping are in a predetermined small winning mode after the above-mentioned symbol fluctuations, a small winning game consisting of one unit game is played. Then, the opening/closing operation of the big prize opening 20 is executed. In one unit game constituting a small winning game, the big prize opening 20 is opened for only about 1.6 seconds, and the operation mode is similar in appearance to a 2R jackpot.

When a special game occurs and the winning stop symbol at that time is in a specific form (for example, "777"), after the special game ends, a probability change that is one of the specific games is further started. During probability change, a lottery with a higher probability of winning than in a normal probability state is performed, and a new special game can occur relatively early. It should be noted that the fact that the judgment result of the winning lottery is a specific jackpot, that is, a jackpot with variable probability, may not be clearly shown in the appearance, and may be in a latent probability variable state in which it is not explicitly reported as a decorative pattern or performance content. In that case, even if the game is changing with certainty, the effect display device 60 does not clearly indicate whether it is changing with certainty or not. In addition, if a predetermined condition is satisfied, it may be indicated on the effect display device 60 whether the change is definite or non-definite.

In the normal game after the special game ends, an easy-to-enter state that is one of the specific game states is started. In the easy-to-enter state, the winning probability of the open lottery is made higher than usual, and the opening extension is executed to extend the opening time of the normal electric accessory 90. Not only can the number of hits of normal symbols per certain period of time increase, but also the ease of entering the second starting port 12 increases, so there is a high possibility that the number of balls entering the second starting port 12 will increase. Therefore, the chances of winning a prize ball by entering the second starting port 12 are increased, and as a result, it becomes possible to continue playing the game while hardly reducing the number of balls you have or gradually increasing the number of balls you have.

In the ball entry easy state, as one of the specific game states, so-called time saving is further executed in which the variation time of the first special symbol 51, second special symbol 52, and decorative symbol 61 is shortened compared to the normal state. The fluctuation time of the first special symbol 51, the second special symbol 52, and the decorative symbol 61 is returned to the original fluctuation time after a predetermined number of fluctuations, for example, 100 fluctuations, is reached. If a jackpot occurs beforehand, the time saving will end once. In time saving, the variation time of the first special symbol 51, second special symbol 52, and decorative symbol 61 is shortened, so compared to the normal state where the symbol variations are made with the normal variation time, it will take until the jackpot occurs. It is possible to shorten the time required to obtain a jackpot, and to relatively increase the ease of winning a jackpot. In a modified example, a specification may be adopted in which the time saving of the special symbol is not performed in the easy-to-enter state.

FIG. 2 shows the basic structure of the Pachinko gaming machine on the back side. The power switch 150 is a switch that turns on and off the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100. The main board 200 controls the overall operation of the Pachinko gaming machine 100, and processes overall gaming operations, particularly the lottery when a prize is won in the first starting port 11 and the second starting port 12. The sub-board 300 includes a liquid crystal unit 151, controls the display content on the effect display device 60, and in particular changes the effect-like display content according to the determination result by the main board 200. The back setting mechanism 152 includes a prize ball tank 153, a flow path for prize balls, a payout device 154 for paying out prize balls, and the like. The payout device 154 pays out game balls supplied from the prize ball tank 153 to the upper ball tray 105 in response to winnings to each winning hole. The payout control board 155 controls the payout operation by the payout device 154. The firing device 156 fires the balls stored in the upper ball tray 105 into the game area 81 one ball at a time. The firing control board 157 controls the firing operation of the firing device 156. The power supply board 158 supplies power to each part of the pachinko gaming machine 100. A performance display section 159 is provided on the main board 200. The performance display section 159 is composed of four 7-segment LEDs that display, for example, a four-digit number, which indicates the ratio of the total number of awarded balls to the total number of fired balls, which is the sum of safe balls and out balls.

A setting change device 170 is provided on the main board 200 . The setting change device 170 is a device for changing settings to any one of a plurality of settings (also referred to as game settings) corresponding to a plurality of game specifications. For example, six levels of settings (settings 1 to 6) are prepared as game settings, and the probability of winning the jackpot can be varied depending on the game settings. Specifically, the larger the numerical value among settings 1 to 6, the more advantageous the game specifications can be to the player.If the jackpot probabilities from settings 1 to 6 are M1 to M6, then M1≦M2≦M3. The jackpot probability for each setting can be determined so that ≦M4≦M5≦M6. It is not essential to assign different jackpot probabilities to different game settings, and the jackpot probabilities may be the same between different game settings. For example, the same jackpot probability may be assigned to all game settings from setting 1 to setting 6.

The setting change device 170 includes a setting key cylinder 171 into which a setting key held by an employee of the game parlor is inserted, a setting change button 172 for changing the setting to one of a plurality of game settings, and a setting value that is set. It includes a setting display section 173 that lights up and displays, and a setting memory that stores set setting values. The setting key cylinder 171 is a turnkey type switch for transitioning to a state in which settings can be changed (hereinafter referred to as "setting change state") or a state in which settings can be confirmed (hereinafter referred to as "setting confirmation state"). First, turn off the power switch 150, insert a setting key into the setting key cylinder 171, turn the setting key to turn it on, and then turn on the power switch 150 to transition to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. To shift to the setting change state, turn on the power switch 150 while pressing down the RAM clear switch (sometimes referred to as "RWM clear switch"). On the other hand, to shift to the setting confirmation state, turn on the power switch 150 without pressing the RAM clear switch.

When transitioning to the setting change state, the number "1" indicating setting 1 is displayed as the initial value of the game setting on the setting display section 173, and the setting can be changed by pressing the setting change button 172. The setting display section 173 is composed of a 7-segment LED that displays a one-digit number. Each time the setting change button 172 is pressed once, the setting values displayed on the setting display section 173 are changed in the order of 1 → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 → 6 → 1 → . When the setting key inserted into the setting key cylinder 171 is returned to the OFF state after changing the setting, the setting value displayed on the setting display section 173 at that time is stored in the setting memory and the setting change is confirmed. , the state becomes playable. On the other hand, when transitioning to the setting confirmation state, the setting values stored in the setting memory are displayed on the setting display section 173. In the setting confirmation state, even if the setting change button 172 is pressed, the setting value displayed on the setting display section 173 does not change, and the setting cannot be changed. Thereafter, when the setting key inserted into the setting key cylinder 171 is returned to its original state and turned off, the game becomes ready for playing. Note that when the setting key is turned off and the game is enabled, the setting display section 173 turns off and the current setting value cannot be visually recognized.

Note that the setting change button 172 may also be used as a RAM clear switch. In this case, if the power is turned on while the RAM clear switch is pressed while the setting key is not turned (setting key off state), RAM clearing is executed. On the other hand, if the power is turned on while the RAM clear switch is pressed while the setting key is turned (setting key on state), the RAM clear is executed and the setting change state is entered. Furthermore, if the power is turned on without the RAM clear switch being pressed while the setting key is off, the power will be restored without clearing the RAM. On the other hand, if the power is turned on without pressing the RAM clear switch in the setting key-on state, the state shifts to the setting confirmation state. Further, the setting display section 173 may also be used as the performance display section 159. In this case, the dual-purpose display section may function as the performance display section 159 when in the game ready state, and may function as the setting display section 173 when in the setting change state or setting confirmation state. Alternatively, the setting change device 170 may not be provided so that game settings cannot be changed.

<Functional block>
FIG. 3 shows functional blocks of the pachinko gaming machine 100. Hereinafter, the functions realized using each configuration will be explained, but in this specification, in order to match the physical configuration and the functional configuration, for example, the main board 200, the payout control board 155, the firing control board 157, etc., the physical configuration For convenience, the terminology may be used as is for parts that have already been explained.

The pachinko gaming machine 100 includes a power supply board 158 that generates power to be used within the gaming machine based on alternating current power (AC 24V, etc.) supplied from outside the gaming machine, and a main control device that controls the basic operations of the game and the progress of the game. A main board 200 as a main board 200, a payout control board 155 as a frame control device that controls the payout of prize balls, a launch control board 157 that controls the launch of game balls into the gaming area, and a control board 157 that controls performance operations and processing. It is configured in such a manner that functions are shared with a sub-board 300 as a sub-control device.

The main board 200 includes a first starting port 11, a second starting port 12, a special winning port 20, a first operating port 31, a second operating port 32, and a group of general winning ports (first general winning port 33a, second general winning port). It is electrically connected to the opening 33b), the output opening 34, the symbol display unit 120, and the external information output terminal 160, and various control signals are transmitted and received therebetween. The payout control board 155 is electrically connected to the main board 200, the launch control board 157, and the payout device 154. The payout control board 155 indirectly controls the launch control board 157 by transmitting a launch permission signal to the launch control board 157 based on a signal indicating the prize ball payout and the control state of the main board 200 transmitted from the main board 200. At the same time, it also controls the payout of prize balls by the payout device 154. The dispensing device 154 includes a dispensing motor 166 and a ball counting sensor 167. The launch control board 157 is electrically connected to the payout control board 155, the launch device 156, and the ball sending device 164, and controls the ball sending device 164 and the ball sending device 164 based on a shooting permission signal transmitted from the payout control board 155. The device 156 is controlled to fire the game ball. The sub-board 300 includes a production display device 60, a movable accessory 66 (drive motor 67, position detection sensor 68), a speaker 108, a production input operation device 115 (production button 109, cross key 110), a decorative lamp 111, and an electrical connection. are connected to each other, and various control signals are sent and received between them.

Data is transmitted and received between the main board 200 and the sub-board 300 in one direction from the main board 200 to the sub-board 300. In order to realize the overall operation by transmitting and receiving data in one direction, each structure is connected to the main board 200. It is placed on the sub-board 300. Since the unidirectionality of data transmission from the main board 200 to the sub board 300 is maintained, data cannot be sent from the configuration included in the sub board 300 to the configuration included in the main board 200, and data transmission is I can't even make a request. Therefore, the sub board 300 cannot refer to the information generated by the main board 200 unless the information is transmitted. Furthermore, data is exchanged bidirectionally between the main board 200 and the payout control board 155, and between the payout control board 155 and the launch control board 157. However, as with the case between the main board 200 and the sub-board 300, data may be transmitted and received in one direction from the main board 200 to the payout control board 155, or in one direction from the payout control board 155 to the firing control board 157. It may also be configured to transmit and receive data.

The functional blocks included in the main board 200, dispensing control board 155, firing control board 157, and sub-board 300 described below are merely examples, and as a modification, some functional blocks may be attached to other boards. It may be installed. For example, the functional blocks included in the main board 200 may be mounted on the sub-board 300, or the functional blocks included in the launch control board 157 may be mounted on the payout control board 155. good. Further, for example, a part of the functional blocks included in the main board 200 may be configured to be mounted on the main board 200, and the remaining part may be mounted on the payout control board 155. may be divided into a plurality of substrates to form one functional block as a whole.

<Main board 200>
FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the functional configuration of the main board 200. The main board 200 includes a ball entry determination means 201, a performance display section 159, a random number generation means 202, a first lottery means 211, a second lottery means 212, a preliminary determination means 235, a regular lottery means 213, a reservation control means 240, a main Display control means 250, special game control means 260, small hit game control means 265, specific game control means 270, opening/closing control means 275, special figure adjustment means 276, main initial processing execution means 280, main power cut-off processing execution means 282, It includes a main error detection means 284, a setting change means 286, a setting confirmation means 287, and a command communication means 205.

<Ball entry determination means 201>
Ball entry determining means 201 determines whether a game ball enters each winning hole. Ball entry determination means 201 determines that the game ball has entered the first starting hole 11 when receiving the first starting winning information, and determines that the gaming ball has entered the second starting opening 12 when receiving the second starting winning information. to decide. A ball entry determining means 201 judges that the game ball has entered the large winning hole 20 when receiving the large winning hole winning information, and judges that the game ball has entered the general winning hole 33 when receiving the general winning information. The ball entry determining means 201 determines that the game ball has passed through the first operating port 31 or the second operating port 32 upon receiving the passage information. The ball entry determining means 201 determines that the game ball has passed through the out port 34 upon receiving the ejection information. The entering ball determining means 201 calculates the ratio of the total number of winning balls to the total number of launched balls, which is the sum of safe balls and out balls, and causes the performance display section 159 to display the ratio. The ball entry determining means 201 determines the number of balls paid out ÷ the number of out balls when the probability of hitting the jackpot is in a normal probability state and a normal ball entry state (so-called low probability and low ball entry state). The value of is displayed on the performance display section 159. Therefore, the performance display section 159 displays the base in the low base state.

<Random number generation means 202>
The random number generation means 202 generates random numbers for use in various decisions by the first lottery means 211, the second lottery means 212, and the common symbol lottery means 213. Specifically, the random number generation means 202 generates random numbers from "0" to "65535" as random numbers (also referred to as "win/fail lottery values") used in the win/fail lottery by the first win/fail judgment means 221 and the second win/fail judgment means 222. A random number within the range is generated by a predetermined means. Further, the random number generation means 202 generates a random number from "0" to "255" (also referred to as "symbol determination lottery value") used in symbol determination (symbol lottery) by the first symbol determination means 226 and the second symbol determination means 227. Random numbers in the range up to are generated by a predetermined means. The random number generation means 202 also generates random numbers ranging from "0" to "255" (also referred to as "fluctuation pattern determination lottery value") used in determining the fluctuation pattern by the first fluctuation pattern determination means 231 and the second fluctuation pattern determination means 232. '' is generated by a predetermined means. Further, the random number generation means 202 generates random numbers in the range from "0" to "99" by a predetermined means as random numbers to be used in the winning/failure lottery by the common symbol lottery means 213. Further, the random number generation means 202 generates random numbers in the range from "0" to "2" by a predetermined means as random numbers used when determining the normal symbol. Note that "random numbers" here include not only physical random numbers generated by a random number generation circuit and true random numbers in a mathematical sense, but also pseudorandom numbers such as random numbers using a 16-bit counter and software random numbers using a random number generation algorithm. But that's fine. Alternatively, it may be a random number generated by combining a hardware random number and a software random number. Further, the random numbers obtained by the first lottery means 211 and the second lottery means 212 may be generated by the same generation means, or may be generated by different generation means. .

<Puzu lottery means 213>
The normal symbol lottery means 213 generates a random number to be used for drawing the winning or not of the normal symbol and a random number to use for determining the stop symbol of the normal symbol when the game ball passes through the first operating port 31 or the second operating port 32. 202 and execute the lottery. The normal symbol lottery means 213 includes a normal symbol validity determination table (not shown) that is referred to for determining the validity of a regular symbol, and a regular symbol determination table (not shown) that is referred to for determining the stop symbol of a regular symbol to be displayed on the regular symbol display section 45. Hold the table. The normal symbol validity determination table defines the correspondence relationship between the lottery value for the validity lottery and the hit, and the normal symbol determination table defines the correspondence relationship between the lottery value for determining the stop symbol and the normal symbol, and as described above. The correctness of the normal symbol and the stopping symbol are determined based on the probability of winning and the probability of selecting the symbol. When the lottery value for the normal symbol winning/failure drawing corresponds to a hit, the normal symbol lottery means 213 determines the stopping symbol of the normal symbol by referring to the normal symbol determination table, and determines the lottery value for the winning/failure drawing of the normal symbol. If it corresponds to a miss, the mode of the miss symbol 1 is always determined. When the result of the judgment of the normal symbol is a hit and the normal symbol stops in a predetermined pattern (first winning mode or second winning mode), the opening/closing control means 275, which will be described later, changes the mode of the stopped symbol and the game state. The normal electric accessory 90 of the second starting port 12 is expanded accordingly. The expansion time is 0.1 seconds when the opening is short and 6 seconds when the opening is long. The lottery value of the normal symbol is temporarily suspended by a suspension control means 240, which will be described later. However, the lottery value is held on hold only if the predetermined hold limit number held by the hold control means 240 is not exceeded.

<First lottery means 211 and second lottery means 212>
The first lottery means 211 has the functions of executing the first lottery related to the first game, including a first lottery value acquisition means 216, a first success/failure determination means 221, a first symbol determination means 226, and a first variation pattern determination. The device includes means 231 and executes a first win/fail lottery as a win/fail lottery corresponding to the entry of a ball into the first starting port 11. Based on various lottery results by the first lottery means 211, the first special symbol 51 is displayed in a variable manner in the first special symbol display section 41 by the main display control means 250. Further, based on the information transmitted from the command communication means 205, the decorative pattern 61 is displayed in a variable manner in the display area of the effect display device 60. The second lottery means 212 includes a second lottery value acquisition means 217, a second validity determination means 222, a second symbol determination means 227, and a second fluctuation pattern determination means 232, and corresponds to the ball entering the second starting port 12. A second win/fail lottery is executed as a win/fail lottery. Based on various lottery results by the second lottery means 212, the main display control means 250 causes the second special symbol 52 to be displayed in a variable manner in the second special symbol display section 42. Further, based on the information transmitted from the command communication means 205, the decorative pattern 61 is displayed in a variable manner in the display area of the effect display device 60.

<First lottery value acquisition means 216 and second lottery value acquisition means 217>
The first lottery value acquisition means 216 acquires random numbers from the random number generation means 202 for various kinds of lottery and determination by the first lottery means 211 when the ball enters the first starting port 11 . Specifically, the first lottery value for determining the validity by the first validity determining means 221, the first symbol lottery value for determining the stop mode of the first special symbol 51 by the first symbol determining means 226, and the first fluctuation pattern. The first pattern lottery values for determining the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) of the first special symbol 51 by the determining means 231 are acquired from the respective corresponding random number generating means. The second lottery value acquisition means 217 acquires, from the random number generation means 202, random numbers for various kinds of lottery and determination by the second lottery means 212, triggered by the ball entering the second starting port 12. Specifically, the second lottery value for determining the validity by the second validity determining means 222, the second symbol lottery value for determining the stop mode of the second special symbol 52 by the second symbol determining means 227, and the second fluctuation pattern. The second pattern lottery values for determining the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) of the second special symbol 52 by the determining means 232 are acquired from the respective corresponding random number generating means.

The first win/fail determination means 221 executes a win/fail determination to determine whether or not to proceed to the special game based on the first win/fail lottery value. The second win/fail determination means 222 executes a win/fail determination to determine whether or not to proceed to the special game based on the second win/fail lottery value. In the win/fail judgment, more specifically, "Jackpot" indicates a transition to a special game, "Small win" indicates a transition to a small win game, and "Small win" indicates a transition to a special game or a small win game. It is determined which of the following applies. The first validity determination means 221 and the second validity determination means 222 hold a validity determination table that is referred to in the validity determination. In addition, in order to distinguish the propriety judgment performed at the time of starting symbol variation from the preliminary propriety judgment described later, it is also appropriately called "properness judgment as main judgment." Note that in this specification, the term "table" or "selection criteria" strictly refers to a table structure that defines the correspondence between a first parameter such as a lottery value and a second parameter such as a value indicating a choice. It does not only refer to data, but also broadly includes the case where such a correspondence relationship is realized by a program structure that derives a second parameter from a first parameter. Including these, the concept is essentially synonymous with "table" and is appropriately referred to as "selection criteria." In addition, when using a table structure, essentially one type of selection criteria may be configured by a combination of multiple structurally subdivided tables, but when referring to "multiple types of selection criteria", the subdivisions It indicates the actual number of types of tables, not the number of tables that are standardized.

The first validity determination means 221 and the second validity determination means 222 hold tables corresponding to respective validity determinations as validity determination tables to be referred to in the validity determination. Specifically, the validity determination table for validity determination by the first validity determination means 221 (also referred to as "first validity determination table"), and the validity determination table for validity determination by the second validity determination means 222 ("second validity determination table"). It holds a table (also referred to as "appropriate judgment table") and selects the table to be referred to depending on the judgment to be executed. In the plurality of success/failure determination tables, the determination results of jackpot, small win, and miss are associated with the win/fail lottery values, and the win/fail probability is determined according to the associated jackpot range setting. In addition, multiple types of success/failure determination tables corresponding to multiple game settings are prepared, and for example, for each of the game settings from setting 1 to setting 6, the success/failure determination table has a different correspondence between the win/fail lottery value and the win/fail determination result. will be prepared. Note that if the probabilities of jackpot, small win, and loss are the same among a plurality of game settings, a common success/failure determination table may be prepared for the plurality of game settings.

FIG. 5 is a diagram schematically showing the validity determination table. This figure shows a propriety judgment table corresponding to a specific game setting, and shows a propriety judgment table corresponding to setting 6. In the win/fail judgment table in this figure, the judgment results of jackpot, small hit, and miss are associated with the win/fail lottery values, and the jackpot win/fail probability and the small win win/fail probability are determined according to the associated range settings. is determined. The first validity determination means 221 and the second validity determination means 222 refer to the validity determination table shown in this figure in the validity determination as the main determination. In both the first lottery by the first lottery by the first lottery by the second lottery by the second lottery by the second lottery by the second lottery by the second lottery by the second lottery, a jackpot is usually won only when the lottery value falls within the range of 0 to 299. At the time of probability change, the range of jackpot is expanded, and a jackpot occurs not only when the lottery value falls within the range of 0 to 299, but also when it falls within the range of 300 to 2999. In this way, the range that corresponds to a jackpot changes depending on the gaming state. In addition, in this figure, the jackpot range for both normal and variable probability is shown using a single success/failure judgment table, but the success/failure judgment table may be prepared separately for normal and variable probability. It may be prepared separately for the first win/fail lottery and the second win/fail lottery.

In this embodiment, even if the lottery value does not fall within the jackpot range, if it falls within a predetermined range, it will be a small win. In the example of this figure, a small win occurs when the winning lottery value obtained by the first winning/failure determining means 221 falls within the range of 56,500 to 65,535, and the winning lottery value obtained by the second winning/failing determining means 222 falls within the range of 64,000 to 65,535. If it falls within the range, it will be a small hit. That is, the range that corresponds to a small win is wider in the first win/fail lottery than in the second win/fail lottery, and the small win is more likely to occur. In this way, if it does not correspond to a jackpot, it is originally a "lose", but in the example in this figure, the range of winning/fail lottery values when it does not correspond to a jackpot and does not correspond to a small hit. In particular, he describes it as ``outlier.'' In other words, if "win or fail" is understood from the perspective of "whether it is a jackpot or not," a "small hit" may be considered to be included in the broad sense of "miss" in the sense of "not a jackpot." In addition, when considering "win or no" from the perspective of "hit or not," a "small hit" may be considered to be included in a broader sense of "hit" along with a "big hit." Note that although this figure shows an example in which the judgment table for jackpot and the judgment table for small hit are realized in the form of a single judgment table, it is also possible to realize each as separate tables. good. Furthermore, the "small win" may be provided only in one of the first game and the second game, or may not be provided in either game. In that case, the value corresponding to the small hit is not set in the corresponding success/failure determination table.

FIG. 6 schematically shows the range setting of the win/fail lottery value for each set value. This figure (a) shows the correspondence between the first win/fail lottery value acquired by the first win/fail determining means 221 and the win/fail determination result. This figure (b) shows the correspondence between the second win/fail lottery value acquired by the second win/fail determining means 222 and the win/fail determination result. The range of the first win/fail lottery value and the second win/fail lottery value that result in a jackpot in normal and variable times is 0 to 294 if the setting value is "1", 0 to 295 if the setting value is "2", If the setting value is "3", it is 0 to 296; if the setting value is "4", it is 0 to 297; if the setting value is "5", it is 0 to 298; if the setting value is "6", it is 0 to 299. Therefore, the larger the set value is, the wider the range of winning/failure lottery values that will result in a jackpot in normal times increases the probability of a jackpot in normal times. In addition, the range of the first win/fail lottery value and the second win/fail lottery value that will result in a jackpot only when the probability is variable (in other words, it will be a miss during normal times) is 295 to 2949 if the setting value is "1", and 295 to 2949 if the setting value is "2". 296 to 2959, if the setting value is "3", 297 to 2969, if the setting value is "4", 298 to 2979, if the setting value is "5", 299 to 2989, if the setting value is "6", 300-2999. Therefore, as the set value increases, the range of lottery values that will result in a jackpot when the probability changes increases, and the probability of a jackpot when the probability changes also increases. Note that the range of the winning lottery value is determined so that the ratio between the normal jackpot probability, which is a jackpot in normal times, and the probability variable jackpot probability, which is a jackpot in probability variable situations, is constant regardless of the set value. In this diagram, the range of winning/failure lottery values is determined so that the jackpot probability during variable times is 10 times the jackpot probability during normal times, and is common to all setting values "1" to "6". . Further, the range of winning/failure lottery values is determined so that the probability of a small winning is also constant regardless of the set value. For all setting values "1" to "6", if the range of the first lottery value falls within the range of 56,500 to 65,535, it will be a small win, and if the range of the second lottery value falls within the range of 64,000 to 65,535, it will be a small win. It's a hit. The range of winning/failure lottery values outside the range of jackpot or small winning is considered a "miss". In this figure, the jackpot probability is different for each set value, but the correspondence between the winning lottery value and the winning/failing determination result may be determined so that the jackpot probability is the same between different setting values.

<First symbol determining means 226 and second symbol determining means 227>
Returning to FIG. 4, the first symbol determining means 226 and the second symbol determining means 227 determine the stopping symbol when the symbol starts changing based on the symbol lottery value obtained from the random number generating means 202 and the result of the validity determination. . The first symbol determining means 226 and the second symbol determining means 227 hold a plurality of symbol determination tables that are referred to in order to determine the stop symbol of the special symbol. Specifically, the first symbol determination means 226 holds a plurality of symbol determination tables according to the results of the validity determination by the first validity determination means 221, and the second symbol determination means 227 holds a plurality of symbol determination tables according to the results of the validity determination by the second validity determination means 222. A plurality of symbol determination tables are held according to the determination results. The first win/fail judgment means 221 holds a first symbol determination table for a jackpot to be referred to when a jackpot is won, a first symbol determination table for a small hit to be referred to for a small hit, and a first symbol determination table for a miss to be referred to when a miss is made. The second win/fail judgment means 222 holds a second symbol determination table at the time of a jackpot to be referred to at the time of a jackpot, a second symbol determination table at the time of a small hit to be referred to at the time of a small hit, and a second symbol determination table at the time of a loss to be referred to at the time of a loss. The first symbol determining means 226 and the second symbol determining means 227 select a symbol determination table to be referred to depending on the result of the validity determination. In addition, in order to distinguish the symbol determination performed at the start of symbol variation from the preliminary symbol determination described later, it is also appropriately referred to as "symbol determination as main determination."

FIG. 7 is a diagram schematically showing a symbol determination table. FIG. 7(a) is a table to be referred to when the result of the judgment is a jackpot, FIG. 7(b) is a table to be referred to when the result of the judgment is a loss, and FIG. 7(c) is a table to be referred to when the result of the judgment is a loss. This table is referred to when the result of the judgment is a small hit. The first symbol determining means 226 and the second symbol determining means 227 refer to the symbol determination table of the main symbol in symbol determination as the main determination. In each symbol determination table, a correspondence relationship between numbers "0" to "10" indicating the type of special symbol and the first symbol lottery value or the second symbol lottery value is defined. The types of special symbols are associated with the judgment results of jackpot, small hit, and miss, respectively, with "0" to "4" corresponding to the jackpot, "5" to "9" corresponding to the small win, "10" corresponds to a miss. Each type is assigned a plurality of special symbols, that is, a plurality of generally meaningless symbols formed by combinations of segments.

As shown in FIG. 7(a), the special symbol types "0" to "4" are associated with the presence or absence of a jackpot and a probability change after the jackpot. Specifically, the type "0" indicates a 10R jackpot with a probability change as a specific jackpot, and in the case of the first symbol lottery value, it is associated with "0 to 99", and in the case of the second symbol lottery value, it is associated with "0 to 99". 144”. Type "1" indicates a 4R jackpot (or "actual 4R hit") with variable probability as a specific jackpot, and in the case of the first symbol lottery value, it is associated with "100 to 149", and in the case of the second symbol lottery value, It is associated with "145-149". Type "2" indicates a 2R jackpot with variable probability, and type "2" is associated with both the first symbol lottery value and the second symbol lottery value being "150 to 189". Type "3" indicates a 10R jackpot with no probability change as a normal jackpot, and type "3" is associated with both the first symbol lottery value and the second symbol lottery value being "150 to 189". The type "4" indicates a 4R jackpot with no probability change as a normal jackpot, and the type "4" is associated with both the first symbol lottery value and the second symbol lottery value "230 to 255". In this way, the selection probability for each type of jackpot (that is, the content of the jackpot and the presence or absence of subsequent probability fluctuations) is determined by the size of the range of symbol lottery values.

In addition, it is possible to provide more types of special symbols, and in that case, by configuring the system so that one type of jackpot is determined according to the types of multiple special symbols, it is possible to increase the number of types of symbols and increase the number of jackpots. You can set fewer types. Alternatively, it is also possible to subdivide the jackpot into more types in response to the increased number of symbol types. Furthermore, it is also possible to provide different symbol types for the first lottery and the second lottery. In this case, one jackpot type is determined to correspond to each of the types of special symbols selected during the first lottery and the types of special symbols selected during the second lottery. However, it is desirable to set the probability fluctuation ratio to be the same between the first lottery and the second lottery.

As shown in FIG. 7(b), the type "10" is associated with the entire range of symbol lottery values when the result of the judgment is negative. Therefore, in the case of a miss, it is determined that the same special symbol is always stopped and displayed. It is also possible to provide a plurality of special symbols that are stopped and displayed when the player misses.

As shown in FIG. 7(c), special symbol types "5" to "9" are associated with small wins. The type "5" is associated with the symbol lottery value range "0-49", and the type "6" is associated with the symbol lottery value range "50-99". Type "7" is associated with the range of symbol lottery values "100-149", type "8" is associated with the range of symbol lottery values "150-199", and type "9" is associated with the range of symbol lottery values. It is associated with "200-255".

In this embodiment, in order to save the storage area on the main board 200, the table of FIG. 7 is referred to as the preliminary symbol determination table also in preliminary symbol determination. The first symbol determining means 226 and the second symbol determining means 227 determine the value of "0" to "10" indicating the type of special symbol as a result of preliminary symbol determination to determine whether it is a first winning lottery or a second winning lottery. It is transmitted to the effect determining means 303 together with the indicated value and the number of pending items. In addition, as a preliminary symbol determination table, it is also possible to use a table that is further subdivided to enable complex determinations, or a table that summarizes and simplifies the determination range of jackpot symbols for executing similar special games. . In addition, when a symbol is uniformly determined in the event of a miss as in this embodiment, a specific symbol can be selected without referring to the obtained symbol lottery value or without preparing a symbol determination table for the case of a miss. You may decide.

<First fluctuation pattern determining means 231 and second fluctuation pattern determining means 232>
Returning to FIG. 4, the first fluctuation pattern determining means 231 acquires from the random number generating means 202 a fluctuation pattern in which the display process of symbol fluctuations to be displayed on the first special symbol display section 41 and the performance display device 60 is determined. It is determined from among a plurality of variation patterns based on the one-pattern lottery value. The second variation pattern determining means 232 converts a variation pattern in which a display process of symbol variation to be displayed on the second special symbol display section 42 and the effect display device 60 is determined into a second pattern lottery value obtained from the random number generation means 202. Based on this, it is determined from among multiple fluctuation patterns. The first fluctuation pattern determining means 231 and the second fluctuation pattern determining means 232 each refer to the fluctuation pattern table and determine the fluctuation pattern of the symbol fluctuation when starting the symbol fluctuation. Further, the first fluctuation pattern determining means 231 and the second fluctuation pattern determining means 232 perform a preliminary pattern determination to determine which fluctuation pattern range the pattern lottery value corresponds to. The first fluctuation pattern determining means 231, the second fluctuation pattern determining means 232, and the control means of the main board 200 have a fluctuation pattern table to be referred to in order to determine a fluctuation pattern when a fluctuation start condition is satisfied, and a fluctuation pattern table to be referred to to determine a fluctuation pattern when a fluctuation start condition is satisfied. Preliminary pattern determination tables used to generate information for determining execution of prefetch processing at the time of ball entry are held or shared. The variation pattern has a fixed variation time from the start of the variation to the stop when the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and the variation time varies depending on the type. In other words, for each variation pattern in which the display process of symbol variation is determined, a variation display time is essentially determined for each pattern as the end condition of the symbol variation, and when the variation display time elapses, the special symbol is displayed. fluctuation is stopped. It should be noted that the variation pattern determination executed at the start of symbol variation is also appropriately referred to as "variation pattern determination as main determination" in order to distinguish it from the preliminary pattern determination. Furthermore, in order to contribute to the selection of a decorative pattern variation effect pattern to be described later, different types of variation patterns may be defined even though they have the same variation time.

FIG. 8 is a diagram schematically showing a variation pattern table. The first fluctuation pattern determining means 231 and the second fluctuation pattern determining means 232 refer to the table shown in FIG. 3(a) in the normal state, and refer to the table shown in FIG. 3(b) in the time saving state.

As shown in FIG. 8(a), in the normal state, if the judgment result is incorrect, if the pattern lottery value is 0 to 4, select "Super 1" which is the super reach of pattern range number "0", If the pattern lottery value is 5 to 9, "Super 2", which is the super reach of pattern range number "1", is selected. If the pattern lottery value is 10 to 19, select "Normal 1" which is the normal reach of pattern range number "2", and if the pattern lottery value is 20 to 29, select "Normal 1" which is the normal reach of pattern range number "3". 2". If the pattern lottery value is 30 to 255, select pattern range number "4", "Out of reach". For "no reach", different fluctuation patterns are selected depending on the number of reservations, such as a 10 second fluctuation pattern when the number of reservations is 0 to 2, a 7 second fluctuation pattern when the number of reservations is 3, and a fluctuation pattern of 7 seconds when the number of reservations is 3. When is 4, a 4-second variation pattern is selected.

In this figure, an example will be explained in which the variation is mainly classified into five types according to the variation time, but a plurality of variation effect patterns are prepared for each of these variation patterns on the sub-board 300, and there are several dozen types of variation effect patterns in total. is associated with the lottery value range of each classification.

The range of pattern lottery values assigned to "Normal 1", "Normal 2", and "Out of reach" also differs depending on the number of reservations. When the number of reservations is 0 or 1, it is as shown in this figure (a), but as the number of reservations increases, the lottery value range of "Normal 1" and "Normal 2" becomes narrower, and the lottery value of "Out of reach" The range becomes wider. The smaller the number of reservations, the wider the lottery value range of a variation pattern with a relatively long variation time, and the higher the probability that a variation pattern with a longer variation time will be selected. Therefore, the smaller the number of reservations, the longer the average fluctuation time, and the larger the number of reservations, the shorter the average fluctuation time. By using a variation pattern table in which the correspondence between the pattern lottery value range and the variation pattern differs for each number of reservations, it is possible to realize control in which a variation pattern with a long variation time is more likely to be selected when the number of reservations decreases.

In the normal state, if the result of the judgment is 4R jackpot or 10R jackpot, if the pattern lottery value is 0 to 123, select "Super 1" which is the super reach of pattern range number "5", and the pattern lottery value is If the number is 124 to 248, "Super 2", which is the super reach of pattern range number "6", is selected. If the pattern lottery value is 249 to 252, select "Normal 1" which is the normal reach of pattern range number "7", and if the pattern lottery value is 253 to 255, select "Normal 1" which is the normal reach of pattern range number "8". 2".

In the normal state, if the result of the judgment is 2R jackpot or small hit, if the pattern lottery value is 0 to 122, select "Super 3" which is the super reach of pattern range number "9", and the pattern lottery value is 0 to 122. If it is 123 to 255, select "Normal 3" which is the normal reach of pattern range number "10".

When the first variation pattern determination means 231 and the second variation pattern determination means 232 transmit the preliminary determination result to the effect determination means 303 as a so-called pre-read result, the value of the pattern range number (0 to 10) It is transmitted together with a value indicating whether it is a lottery or a second win/fail lottery and the number of pending items. In the example shown in FIG. 8, a table is provided for each success/failure determination result in the preliminary pattern determination. In addition to deriving only the information regarding which range the sub-board 300 is located, the control means of the sub-board 300 may be controlled to determine what kind of variation is to be executed together with the preliminary appropriateness determination result.

In the variation pattern table of FIG. 8B that is referred to in the time saving state, pattern lottery values are assigned to all the variation patterns for time saving. However, the correspondence between the range of pattern lottery values and the variation time is the same as in FIG. 8(a) except for "No reach shortfall", which is selected for a miss. “No-reach shortening” is a fluctuation pattern with a relatively short fluctuation time that is associated with the same lottery value range and pattern range number as “No-reach, no-reach” in FIG. 8(a). For "No Reach and Missing Shortening", different fluctuation patterns are selected depending on the number of reservations. When the number of reservations is 0 or 1, a 10 second fluctuation pattern is used, and when the number of reservations is 2 to 4, a 1 second fluctuation pattern is selected. are selected respectively. Note that the first variation pattern determination means 231 and the second variation pattern determination means 232 may refer to different variation pattern tables, or may refer to different variation pattern tables depending on the gaming state. For example, in a gaming machine where the second lottery is set to be more advantageous than the first lottery and the second lottery is processed with priority over the first lottery, the second lottery is set to be more advantageous than the first lottery. It is not desirable for the player to have a situation where the number of pending draws for the second lottery is exhausted and the first lottery is executed continuously. Therefore, in the out-of-ball variation in the first lottery in the easy-to-enter state, a variation pattern table is referred to in which a long variation pattern (for example, 10 seconds) that does not shorten the variation time is uniformly selected regardless of the number of reservations. It may also be a thing.

<Suspension control means 240>
Returning to FIG. 4, the reservation control means 240 includes a special symbol reservation means 241 and a regular symbol reservation means 242. The special symbol holding means 241 controls the symbol fluctuation corresponding to the previously acquired first lottery value or second lottery value when the first lottery value or the second lottery value is newly acquired. is displayed, the start of the symbol variation corresponding to the newly acquired first or second winning lottery value or second winning lottery value is suspended, and the winning lottery value is stored until the start of the variable display of the corresponding symbol. Here, for the first special symbols, the first win/fail lottery value, the first symbol lottery value, and the first pattern lottery value are stored, each with an upper limit of 4 pieces, and for the second special symbols, each with an upper limit of 4 pieces, A second winning/failure lottery value, a second symbol lottery value, and a second pattern lottery value are stored. The standard figure holding means 242 stores the standard figure lottery value acquired by the standard figure lottery means 213 as a reserved ball. These numbers of reservations are represented by the number of lights or blinking numbers of the first special symbol reservation display section 71, the second special symbol reservation display section 72, and the regular symbol reservation display section 75, respectively. The number of reservations made by the special figure reservation means 241 is also displayed on the effect display device 60.

The lottery value of the second winning lottery held in the special symbol holding means 241 is consumed preferentially over the lottery value of the first winning lottery, and symbol fluctuations are displayed. Therefore, even if the lottery value of the jackpot is held as the first lottery, as long as the lottery value is held as the second lottery, the symbol variation corresponding to the jackpot lottery value of the first lottery is not displayed. Therefore, even if a jackpot is suspended in the first lottery, it is possible to win a plurality of consecutive jackpots by continuing to hit until a jackpot is suspended in the second lottery.

<Main display control means 250>
The main display control means 250 includes a first special symbol control means 251, a second special symbol control means 252, and a regular symbol control means 254. The first special symbol control means 251 displays the fluctuation of the first special symbol 51 on the first special symbol display section 41 according to the fluctuation pattern determined in response to the determination result of the first lottery by the first lottery means 211. let The first special symbol control means 251 makes it a condition for starting a new symbol variation that the variation display of the symbol corresponding to the first win/fail lottery or the second win/fail lottery that was performed previously has been completed. The second special symbol control means 252 displays the fluctuation of the second special symbol 52 on the second special symbol display section 42 according to the fluctuation pattern determined according to the determination result of the second lottery by the second lottery means 212. let The second special symbol control means 252 also makes it a condition for starting a new symbol variation that the variation display of the symbol corresponding to the first win/fail lottery or the second win/fail lottery that was performed previously has been completed.

The first special symbol control means 251 reserves the start of the symbol variation display corresponding to the first prize lottery when the special symbol holding means 241 stores the winning lottery value of the second winning lottery. On the other hand, the second special symbol control means 252 starts displaying a symbol variation corresponding to the second lottery, regardless of whether the special symbol holding means 241 stores the lottery value of the first lottery. As a result, when lottery values are reserved for both the first lottery and the second lottery, the lottery values reserved for the second lottery are read out preferentially and symbol variations are displayed. In such a case, the lottery value held in the first win/fail lottery is not read out and its symbol variation does not start until the number of holds in the second win/fail lottery becomes 0.

The first special symbol control means 251 and the second special symbol control means 252 change the display of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 by a command communication means 205, which will be described later, at the timing of starting and stopping the variable display of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52. A start command and a fluctuation stop command are sent to the effect determining means 303 (sub-main). When transmitting the variation start command, the main judgment is the judgment result determined or determined, the stop symbol, the value indicating each of the variation patterns, and the value indicating whether it is the first lottery or the second lottery. It is transmitted to the performance determining means 303 together with the fluctuation start command. When transmitting the fluctuation stop command, a value indicating the stop symbol is again transmitted to the effect determining means 303 together with the fluctuation stop command. In addition, the performance determining means 303 (sub-main) sends a fluctuation start command, a fluctuation stop command, etc. to the performance control means 304 in order to control the fluctuating display of decorative symbols by the performance control means 304 (sub-sub). As a result, the variable displays by the main display control means 250 and the effect control means 304 (sub-sub) are synchronized and the interlocking is maintained. The ordinary symbol control means 254 causes the ordinary symbol display section 45 to display the determination result of the lottery by the ordinary symbol lottery means 213 as a fluctuating display of ordinary symbols.

<Special figure adjustment means 276>
The special symbol adjusting means 276 waits for the start of the variable display of the other while displaying one of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 in a variable manner. The special symbol adjustment means 276 adjusts the second special symbol based on the ball entering the second starting port 12, regardless of the order in which the game ball enters the first starting port 11 or the second starting port 12. 52 is given priority over the variable display of the first special symbol 51 based on the ball entering the first starting port 11. For example, when both the first win/fail lottery value and the second win/fail lottery value are reserved, the second win/fail lottery value is always used preferentially, and the second special symbol 52 is displayed in a continuous manner.

The special symbol adjustment means 276 in the modified example adjusts the variable display of the first special symbol 51 and the variable display of the second special symbol 52 in accordance with the order in which the balls enter the first starting port 11 and the second starting port 12. It may be selectively displayed in a variable manner. For example, when the ball enters the first starting hole 11, the first starting hole 11, and the second starting hole 12 in the order, the first special symbol 51, the first special symbol 51, and the second special symbol 52 are displayed in the order of fluctuations. be done. In this case, the special figure adjustment means 276 monitors the reservation control means 240 and stores the reservation order of the winning/failure lottery values. Since which special symbol should be changed is determined according to the order in which the game balls enter, that is, the order in which the winning lottery values are held in the holding control means 240, it is easy for the player to visually grasp the order of the changes.

In another modification, the special symbol adjustment means 276 may display the variable display of the first special symbol 51 and the variable display of the second special symbol 52 in a predetermined extinguishing order regardless of the order of ball entry. good. For example, priority may be given to alternately displaying the variable display of the first special symbol 51 and the variable display of the second special symbol 52. For example, when both the first win/fail lottery value and the second win/fail lottery value are on hold, the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 are alternately and variably displayed. Since which special symbol should be changed is simply alternated regardless of the order in which the game balls enter, the player can easily grasp the order of change intuitively.

Also, when one of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 is stopped in a winning manner, the special symbol adjusting means 276 waits for the start of the variable display of the other. In this case, since the variable display of the special symbols does not start while the special game is being executed, the player can concentrate on the special game.

<Prior determination means 235>
The preliminary determination means 235 includes a first lottery preliminary determination means 236 and a second lottery preliminary determination means 237. The first lottery pre-determination means 236 stores various random numbers acquired by the first lottery value acquisition means 216 before the first validity determination means 221, the first symbol determination means 226, and the first fluctuation pattern determination means 231 perform various determinations. is used to determine information regarding the variation in advance before the first special symbol control means 251 starts varying the first special symbol. The second lottery pre-determination means 237 stores various random numbers acquired by the second lottery value acquisition means 217 before the second validity determination means 222, the second symbol determination means 227, and the second variation pattern determination means 232 perform various determinations. is used to determine information regarding the variation in advance before the second special symbol control means 252 starts to vary the second special symbol.

The first lottery preliminary determination means 236 includes a first preliminary lottery value determination table, a first preliminary symbol lottery value determination table, and a first preliminary variation pattern random value determination as determination tables for preliminary determination related to the first lottery means 211. Hold the table. The first lottery preliminary determination means 236 uses the first preliminary lottery value determination table to determine the random number group to which the first lottery value stored in the special symbol holding means 241 belongs. The first lottery preliminary determination means 236 determines the random number group to which the first symbol lottery value stored in the special symbol holding means 241 belongs using the first preliminary symbol lottery value determination table. The first lottery advance determination means 236 determines the random number group to which the first fluctuation pattern lottery value stored in the special symbol holding means 241 belongs using the first advance fluctuation pattern determination table. Then, these determination results are temporarily stored as preliminary determination results, and information regarding the preliminary determination results is transmitted to the sub-board 300 by a command communication means 205 (sub-control command transmission means 207), which will be described later.

FIG. 9 is a diagram schematically showing an a priori appropriateness determination table that is referred to in the prior appropriateness determination. The first lottery preliminary determination means 236 (prior validity determination regarding the first game) refers to the first preliminary lottery value determination table of FIG. 9(a) when the ball enters the first starting port 11, and If the value is "0 to 299", a value of "1" indicating that is set as the prior validity determination result. If the winning lottery value is between "300 and 2999", a value of "2" indicating this is set as the preliminary winning judgment result. If the winning lottery value is "3000 to 56499", a value of "3" indicating that is set as the preliminary winning judgment result. If the winning lottery value is "56,500 to 65,535", a value of "4" indicating that is set as the preliminary winning/failure determination result. Next, referring to the first preliminary symbol lottery value determination table (not shown), if the first symbol lottery value is "0 to 99", a value of "0" indicating that is set as the preliminary symbol determination result. . When the first symbol lottery value is "100 to 149", a value of "1" indicating that is set as the preliminary symbol determination result. If the first symbol lottery value is "150 to 189", a value of "2" indicating that is set as the preliminary symbol determination result. If the first symbol lottery value is "190 to 229", a value of "3" indicating this is set as the preliminary symbol determination result. When the first symbol lottery value is "230 to 255", a value of "4" indicating that is set as the preliminary symbol determination result. Furthermore, with reference to the first preliminary variation pattern random value determination table (not shown), if the first pattern lottery value is "0 to 9", a value of "A" indicating that is set as the preliminary pattern determination result. . If the first pattern lottery value is "10 to 29", a value of "B" indicating this is set as the preliminary pattern determination result. When the first pattern lottery value is "30 to 255", a value of "C" indicating this is set as the preliminary pattern determination result. As mentioned above, the preliminary determination information set by the first lottery preliminary determination means 236 (prior validity determination regarding the first game) is transmitted to the first starting port 11 by the command communication means 205 (sub control command transmission means 207), which will be described later. The information indicating the entry of balls into the game (indicating that it is a first win/fail lottery), the information indicating the number of balls on hold, etc. are transmitted to the performance determining means 303 in accordance with the transmission timing.

The second lottery preliminary determination means 237 (prior validity determination regarding the second game) refers to the second preliminary lottery value determination table shown in FIG. 9(b) when the ball enters the second starting port 12, and If the value is "0 to 299", a value of "1" indicating that is set as the prior validity determination result. If the winning lottery value is "300 to 2999", a value of "2" indicating that is set as the preliminary winning judgment result. If the winning lottery value is "3000 to 63999", a value of "3" indicating that is set as the preliminary winning judgment result. If the winning lottery value is "64,000 to 65,535", a value of "4" indicating that is set as the preliminary winning judgment result. Next, with reference to the second preliminary symbol lottery value determination table (not shown), if the second symbol lottery value is "0 to 144", a value of "0" indicating that is set as the preliminary symbol determination result. . When the second symbol lottery value is "145 to 149", a value of "1" indicating that is set as the preliminary symbol determination result. If the second symbol lottery value is "150 to 189", a value of "2" indicating that is set as the preliminary symbol determination result. When the second symbol lottery value is "190 to 229", a value of "3" indicating this is set as the preliminary symbol determination result. When the second symbol lottery value is "230 to 255", a value of "4" indicating that is set as the preliminary symbol determination result. Furthermore, with reference to the second preliminary variation pattern random value determination table (not shown), if the second pattern lottery value is "0 to 9", a value of "A" indicating that is set as the preliminary pattern determination result. . If the second pattern lottery value is "10 to 29", a value of "B" indicating this is set as the preliminary pattern determination result. If the second pattern lottery value is "30 to 255", a value of "C" indicating this is set as the preliminary pattern determination result. As described above, the preliminary determination information set by the second lottery preliminary determination means 237 (prior validity determination regarding the second game) is transmitted to the second starting port 12 by the command communication means 205 (sub control command transmission means 207), which will be described later. The information indicating the entry of the ball (indicating that it is a second winning lottery), the information indicating the number of pending balls, etc. are transmitted to the performance determining means 303 in accordance with the transmission timing.

It should be noted that the various types of information temporarily stored as the preliminary determination results by the preliminary determination means 235 are stored in predetermined preliminary determination result storage areas up to four pieces each, similar to the number of pending memories. Note that the preliminary determination result may be stored using a suspension storage area stored by the suspension control means 240. The information may be deleted based on the fact that the preliminary determination result by the preliminary determination means 235 is transmitted to the effect determining means 303 by the command communication means 205 (sub-control command transmitting means 207), which will be described later. In this way, efficient use of the storage area in the main board 200 can be expected by sharing the area with other areas or erasing information based on completion of transmission. Further, as the judgment table for the preliminary judgment, a judgment table for the main judgment may be used without providing a table exclusively for the preliminary judgment, and the preliminary judgment regarding the first game and the preliminary judgment regarding the second game may be used. A part or all of a common preliminary determination table may be shared. In this way, by sharing the table with other determination tables, it can be expected that the data capacity on the main board 200 can be reduced. Note that the content to be transmitted as the determination result of the advance determination means 235 may be appropriately selected, such as transmitting only the determination result of validity, for example. In addition, the random number values obtained by the first lottery value acquisition means 216 and the second lottery value acquisition means 217 are transmitted to the sub-board 300 by the command communication means 205, without making a determination by the preliminary determination means 235, and 300 may be used to determine the content of the preliminary determination.

The advance determination unit 235 may refer to a preliminary success/failure lottery value determination table in which the correspondence between the success/failure lottery values and the preliminary success/failure determination results differs depending on the setting value set by the setting change device 170. Similar to the above-mentioned win/fail determination table, multiple types of advance win/fail lottery value determination tables corresponding to a plurality of game settings may be prepared, and the prior win/fail lottery value determination table to be referred to may be switched depending on the set value of the game settings. In addition, an advance lottery value determination table that can be used in common among a plurality of game settings may be used. In this case, the validity may be determined in advance based on a combination of the setting value of the game setting and the value of the preliminary validity determination result.

FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing a prior propriety determination table corresponding to game settings. This figure (a) is a preliminary propriety determination table referred to by the first lottery preliminary determination means 236, and this figure (b) is a preliminary propriety determination table referred to by the second lottery preliminary determination means 237. When the winning lottery value is “0 to 294”, the preliminary judgment result is “11”, indicating that all settings 1 to 6 result in a jackpot. When the win/fail lottery value is "295", the preliminary win/fail determination result is "12", indicating that a jackpot will be achieved in the normal setting of 2 or higher or in all settings during the probability change. When the win/fail lottery value is "296", the preliminary win/fail determination result is "13", indicating that the jackpot will be achieved at the normal setting of 3 or higher or at all settings during the probability change. When the win/fail lottery value is "297", the preliminary win/fail determination result is "14", indicating that a jackpot will be achieved in the normal setting of 4 or higher or in all settings in the probability variable. When the win/fail lottery value is "298", the preliminary win/fail determination result is "15", indicating that a jackpot will be achieved in the normal setting of 5 or more or in all settings in the variable probability. When the win/fail lottery value is "299", the preliminary win/fail judgment result is "16", indicating that the jackpot will be achieved at the normal setting 6 or all settings during the variable probability. Further, when the winning lottery value is "300 to 2949", the preliminary winning judgment result is "21", indicating that it is a jackpot in all settings at the time of probability variation. When the win/fail lottery value is "2950 to 2959", the preliminary win/fail judgment result is "22", indicating that a jackpot is achieved when the setting is 2 or higher at the time of probability change. When the win/fail lottery value is "2960 to 2969", the preliminary win/fail determination result is "23", indicating that a jackpot is achieved when the probability is set to 3 or higher. When the winning lottery value is "2970 to 2979", the preliminary winning judgment result is "23", indicating that a jackpot is achieved when the setting is 4 or more at the time of probability change. When the winning lottery value is "2980 to 2989", the preliminary winning judgment result is "25", indicating that a jackpot is achieved when the probability is changed to 5 or more. When the winning lottery value is "2990 to 2999", the preliminary winning judgment result is "26", indicating that a jackpot is achieved at setting 6 at the time of probability variation. Furthermore, if the first lottery value shown in (a) is "3000 to 56499", and if the second lottery value shown in (b) is "3000 to 63999", the preliminary prize determination result is " 30'', indicating a small hit in all settings. In addition, if the first lottery value shown in (a) is "56500 to 65535", and if the second lottery value shown in (b) is "64000 to 65535", the preliminary prize determination result is " 40'', indicating that all settings are out of range. By using such a preliminary propriety determination table, it is possible to show an appropriate preliminary propriety determination result for each set value of the game settings.

<Special game control means 260>
The special game control means 260 activates the special game when the first special symbol 51 is stopped in a predetermined jackpot mode when the first winning/failure lottery by the first lottery means 211 results in a transition to a special game. It is determined that the conditions have been met, and the special game is executed by opening the big prize opening 20. Similarly, when the second lottery by the second lottery means 212 indicates a shift to a special game, the special game control means 260 controls when the second special symbol 52 is stopped in a predetermined jackpot mode. It is determined that the special game operating conditions are satisfied, and the special game is executed by opening the big prize opening 20.

The special game is a game in which the operation of opening and closing the big prize opening 20 is continued a plurality of times in succession, and is composed of a plurality of unit games. The special games include a 10R jackpot in which a unit game is repeated 10 times, a 4R jackpot in which a unit game is repeated 4 times, and a 2R jackpot in which a unit game whose open time is shorter than the 10R jackpot and 4R jackpot is repeated only twice. The 10R jackpot is a jackpot in the second lottery, and the 4R jackpot is a jackpot in the first lottery. In the 10R jackpot and 4R jackpot, the jackpot 20 is opened for about 30 seconds in principle in one unit game. In the 2R jackpot, the jackpot 20 is opened for only about 1.6 seconds in one unit game. The special game control means 260 ends the special game when the set number of rounds of the unit game is exhausted. In addition, even in the case of a 2R jackpot, if a predetermined condition is met, the jackpot 20 may be opened in the same manner as the 10R jackpot and the 4R jackpot.

<Small winning game control means 265>
The small winning game control means 265 operates the small winning game when the first special symbol 51 is stopped in a predetermined small winning mode when the first lottery by the first lottery means 211 results in a small winning. It is determined that the condition is satisfied, and the opening/closing control means 275 opens the big prize opening 20, thereby executing a small winning game. Similarly, when the second lottery by the second lottery means 212 results in a small win, the small winning game control means 265 controls the small winning game control means 265 to control the small winning game when the second special symbol 52 is stopped in a predetermined small winning mode. It is determined that the win game operating conditions are satisfied, and the opening/closing control means 275 opens the big prize opening 20 to execute the small win game.

In the small winning game, the unit game is executed once, and the big prize opening 20 is opened and closed twice in one unit game. The small winning game control means 265 opens the large winning opening 20 for only about 0.8 seconds per opening and closing, and then closes the large winning opening 20 to end the small winning game.

<Specific game control means 270>
The specific game control means 270 controls the normal game in the variable probability state, time saving state, and easy ball entering state. A specific game control means 270 shifts the game state to a variable probability state, a time saving state, and an easy ball entry state after the special game ends when the special symbol is a specific jackpot symbol accompanied by a shift to a variable probability state. The variable probability state, time saving state, and easy entry state continue until the next jackpot occurs. In the time saving state, the first variation pattern determining means 231 and the second variation pattern determining means 232 select a variation pattern with a short variation time so that the variation display time of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 is approximately shortened. do. However, in the normal state, by referring to the fluctuation pattern table according to the number of reservations of the winning lottery value by the reservation control means 240, the smaller the number of reservations by the reservation control means 240, the more likely a fluctuation pattern with a longer fluctuation time will appear. In the easy entry state, entry into the second starting port 12 is performed by performing at least one of three functions: changing the probability of normal symbols, shortening the time of normal symbols, and extending the opening of the second starting port 12. Pitch frequency (ease of ball entry) improves. During the probability change state, the probability that the result of the judgment by the first judgment means 221 and the second judgment means 222 is a jackpot is maintained at a high value. In addition, the specific game control means 270 causes the second starting port 12 to be extended to open when a specific jackpot is reached, and further increases the winning probability of the open lottery only when the winning lottery is the second winning lottery. Transition to a variable state with a higher probability than the normal state.

<Opening/closing control means 275>
The opening/closing control means 275 controls opening/closing of the normal electric accessory 90 of the second starting opening 12 and the big winning opening 20. When the normal symbol is stopped in a specific manner, the opening/closing control means 275 sends an opening instruction to the normal electric accessory solenoid 91 to open the normal electric accessory 90 of the second starting port 12. The opening/closing control means 275 opens the second starting port 12 in the short opening or long opening time depending on the result of the opening lottery in the normal state, and opens the second starting port 12 in the long opening time in the ball entry easy state. 2 Open the starting port 12. This improves the ease of entering balls into the second starting port 12 and allows the player to continue playing the game without reducing the number of balls he has. The opening/closing control means 275 sends an opening instruction to the big winning hole solenoid 92 to open the big winning hole 20 in the special game.

<Main initial processing execution means 280, main power failure processing execution means 282, main error detection means 284>
The main initial processing execution means 280 executes a control start processing for the main board 200 when the Pachinko gaming machine 100 is powered on or when the power is restored from a power failure. The main power-off processing execution unit 282 executes abnormality response processing such as power-off processing on the main board 200 when a power abnormality such as a power-off occurs. The main error detection means 284 executes abnormality detection processing in the main board 200. Note that the control start process, abnormality response process, and abnormality detection process for the main board 200 will be described later.

<Setting change means 286, setting confirmation means 287>
The setting change means 286 executes a "setting change process" for changing game settings. When the power switch 150 is turned on while pressing the RAM clear switch while the setting key cylinder 171 is in the on state, the setting change means 286 causes the setting change state to be entered as described above. The setting change means 286 causes the setting display section 173 to display the setting values stored in the setting memory when the setting change state is entered. The setting change means 286 changes the setting values displayed on the setting display section 173 in the order of 1 → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 → 6 → 1 →... in response to the press of the setting change button 172. , updates the setting value stored in the setting memory to the same value as displayed on the setting display section 173. When the setting key cylinder 171 is turned off, the setting changing means 286 ends the setting changing state and turns off the setting display section 173.

The setting confirmation means 287 executes a "setting confirmation process" for confirming game settings. If the RAM clear switch is not pressed and the power switch 150 is turned on while the setting key cylinder 171 is in the on state, the setting confirmation means 287 shifts to the above-mentioned setting confirmation state. The setting confirmation means 287 causes the setting display section 173 to display the setting values stored in the setting memory when the state is shifted to the setting confirmation state. Unlike the setting change means 286 described above, the setting confirmation means 287 does not change the setting values displayed on the setting display section 173 even if the setting change button 172 is pressed, and also updates the setting values stored in the setting memory. do not. When the setting key cylinder 171 is turned off, the setting confirmation means 287 ends the setting confirmation state and turns off the setting display section 173.

Note that the setting value data managed in the setting memory may not be the numerical values of "1" to "6" but instead the numerical values of "0" to "5". In this case, the setting value "0" corresponds to setting 1, the setting value "1" corresponds to setting 2, the setting value "2" corresponds to setting 3, and the setting value "3" corresponds to setting 4. , the setting value "4" may correspond to the setting 5, and the setting value "5" may correspond to the setting 6. By using "0" as the normal value of the setting value data, it will not be judged as abnormal when the RAM is cleared when the RAM is abnormal and the setting value data is set to the initial value "0". can be simplified. Another advantage is that when performing some kind of lottery using setting value data, for example, when selecting a different table or data for each setting value in prefetch processing, the offset processing for selection can be simplified. . For example, when using "1" to "6" as set value data, additional processing such as subtracting the start address by 1 is required when using these values as offset data for table or data selection. On the other hand, when using "0" to "5" as the set value data, the numerical value of the set value data can be used as is as the offset data. Note that when the setting change means 286 and the setting confirmation means 287 use numerical values from "0" to "5" as the setting value data, they may display the numerical values of the setting value data as they are on the setting display section 173, or A value obtained by adding +1 to the value data may be displayed on the setting display section 173. In the latter case, the numerical data of "0" to "5" is converted to the numerical values of settings 1 to 6 in the game settings and displayed, so that the display can be easily understood by the administrator of the gaming machine.

<Command sending means>
The command communication means 205 includes a payout control command communication means 206 that transmits control commands necessary for execution of payout etc. to the payout control board 155, and a sub control command communication means 206 that transmits control commands necessary for execution of production control etc. to the sub board 300. It includes a command transmitting means 207. The payout control command communication means 206 transmits a payout command that instructs the payout of the number of prize balls corresponding to each winning hole based on the determination of ball entry into each winning hole by the ball entering determining means 201, and sends a payout command to the main board 200. Sends a command indicating the status of the error that occurred. When starting the symbol variation, the sub-control command transmitting means 207 transmits the determination result of the lottery corresponding to the symbol variation to the performance determining means 303 together with the symbol variation control command.

The sub-control command transmitting means 207 controls the variation at the timing at which the first special symbol control means 251 and the second special symbol control means 252 start and stop the variable display of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52. A start command and a fluctuation stop command are sent to the effect determining means 303 (sub-main). When transmitting the variation start command, the main judgment is the judgment result determined or determined, the stop symbol, the value indicating each of the variation patterns, and the value indicating whether it is the first lottery or the second lottery. It is transmitted to the performance determining means 303 together with the fluctuation start command. When transmitting the fluctuation stop command, a value indicating the stop symbol is again transmitted to the effect determining means 303 together with the fluctuation stop command. In addition, the performance determining means 303 (sub-main) sends a fluctuation start command, a fluctuation stop command, etc. to the performance control means 304 in order to control the fluctuating display of decorative symbols by the performance control means 304 (sub-sub). As a result, the variable displays by the main display control means 250 and the effect control means 304 (sub-sub) are synchronized and the interlocking is maintained. Further, the sub-control command transmitting means 207 transmits the preliminary determination result by the preliminary determining means 235 to the effect determining means 303. After the preliminary determination result is temporarily stored in the transmission buffer, the winning openings (first starting opening 11, second starting opening 11, second starting opening) corresponding to the preliminary determination result are It is transmitted to the effect determining means 303 together with the type information of the opening 12), the information on the number of pending tickets, the gaming state, etc., and is erased from the transmission buffer or overwritten later. As a result, the sub-board 300 realizes a process called "pre-reading" in which the sub-board 300 can inferentially recognize the validity result in advance, based on the received preliminary determination result, before the turn to start symbol variation comes around. Note that processing based on the preliminary determination information performed by the sub-board 300 will be described later. The sub-control command transmitting means 207 receives information regarding the special game by the special game control means 260, information regarding the small winning game by the small winning game controlling means 265, information on the lottery result by the general drawing lottery means 213, and information set by the setting changing means 286. Setting value information for game settings is transmitted to the sub-board 300. The sub-control command transmitting means 207 also controls various controls on the main board 200 or sends information to the main board 200, such as information regarding initial processing and information regarding errors by the main initial processing execution means 280 and the main error detecting means 284. Information regarding various signals and the like is transmitted to the sub-board 300 as appropriate.

FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the sub-board. The sub board 300 includes a symbol mode determining means 301, a pattern storage means 302, a performance determining means 303, a performance control means 304, a clocking means 307, a performance setting means 308, a sub initial processing execution means 360, a sub power cutoff processing execution means 362, It includes a sub-error detection means 364, a command reception means 370, and a sub-side preliminary determination means 371.

The pattern storage means 302 holds a plurality of effect patterns in which the effect image content and the display process to be displayed on the effect display device 60 when the decorative pattern 61 changes. The production patterns include a plurality of variation production patterns in which the variation process and performance process from the start of variation to the stop of variation in the variation display of the decorative symbols 61 are determined, and the expectation level for a jackpot that is displayed separately from the variation display of the decorative symbols. The display includes a plurality of preview effect patterns that preliminarily suggest the height of the variable display before the stoppage of the variable display.

The command receiving means 370 receives various commands transmitted from the command communication means 205, and the sub-side preliminary determination means 371 holds the preliminary determination results transmitted from the command communication means 205. The effect determining means 303 includes a normal effect determining means 373 and a look-ahead effect determining means 374. The normal performance determining means 373 causes the performance control means 304 to display the information on the performance display device 60 according to the information of the determination result of the first lottery or the determination result of the second lottery transmitted from the command communication means 205, 108, the content of the effect to be output to the decorative lamp 111 etc. is determined. The performance determining means 303 determines the content of the performance according to the setting values of the game settings transmitted from the command communication means 205. The pre-read effect determining means 374 determines the effect content to be displayed on the effect display device 60 by the effect control means 304 and output to the speaker 108, decorative lamp 111, etc., according to the preliminary determination result transmitted from the command communication means 205. . The normal performance determining means 373 selects from a plurality of variable performance patterns corresponding to the special symbol fluctuation pattern determined by the first fluctuation pattern determining means 231 or the second fluctuation pattern determining means 232 and transmitted from the command communication means 205. One of them is selected and read out from the pattern storage means 302. The normal performance determining means 373 sends information on the read variable performance pattern to the performance control means 304. The normal performance determining means 373 holds a pattern table to be referred to in order to select a variable performance pattern. Note that there may be cases where the normal effect determining means 373 determines the variable effect pattern by referring to the preliminary determination result transmitted from the command communication means 205, and the variable effect pattern may be determined in conjunction with the content of the pre-read effect by the pre-read effect determining means 374. There may be cases where a performance pattern is determined. The pre-read performance determining means 374 specifies the result of the main judgment with more precision based on the preliminary judgment result from the command communication means 205, the past preliminary judgment result held in the sub-board 300, the game state information, etc., and specifies the result. Based on the result, it is determined whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect before the main determination, and the content of the execution. Specifically, the look-ahead performance determining means 374 determines whether the current gaming state is in a probability-changing game, and then shifts to the normal gaming state based on the preliminary determination result that is earlier than the previously received preliminary determination result. Determine whether or not to do so. Based on the determination result, determine whether or not the final determination is valid or not based on the preliminary determination result received this time, the selected variation pattern, etc., and determine whether or not to execute the pre-reading effect and the execution contents of the pre-reading effect based on the specified results. . Note that the performance determining means 303 has many parts in which the normal performance determining means 373 and the look-ahead performance determining means 374 cooperate, so the description will be given as the performance determining means 303 that includes both, except for particularly necessary parts.

For each variation performance pattern, a variation time is determined for each pattern as a condition for ending the symbol variation, and the symbol variation is stopped when the variation time has elapsed. The effect determining means 303 selects a variable effect pattern of effect images having the same variation time according to a variable pattern of the special symbol.

The symbol mode determining means 301 determines the combination of the stop symbols of the decorative symbols 61 and their arrangement based on the determination result of the lottery by the first lottery means 211 or the second lottery means 212, the stop symbols of the special symbols, the variation patterns of the special symbols, the decorations, etc. Determined according to the fluctuation performance pattern of the symbol. The symbol mode determining means 301 transmits information indicating the determined combination of stopped symbols to the performance control means 304. The symbol mode determining means 301 holds a symbol range table that should be referred to in order to determine the stop symbols of decorative symbols.

The stop pattern of the decorative pattern 61 is formed as a combination of three symbols, and for example, when the result of the judgment by the first judgment means 221 and the second judgment means 222 indicates a transition to a special game of 4R jackpot or 10R jackpot. A specific combination, for example, a combination of three symbols such as "777" and "111" is selected. When the result of the judgment is a 2R jackpot or a small hit, a specific combination, such as "357", is also selected, but these specific combinations are not necessarily a combination of all three symbols. You don't have to. If the result of the judgment is neither a jackpot nor a small hit, it is a combination such as "312" or "946" where the three symbols are not aligned, and it is a specific combination selected at the time of a 2R jackpot or small hit. Combinations that are not applicable are selected. If the winning/failure judgment result is not a 4R jackpot or a 10R jackpot, and a fluctuating pattern indicating a miss with a reach is selected, a combination where only one symbol is not aligned, such as "191" or "727" Select.

The variation presentation pattern of the decorative pattern defines the variation display mode of the decorative pattern, that is, the presentation process from the start of variation to the stop of variation of the decorative pattern. The variable production patterns include a pattern when displaying a normal winning symbol, a pattern when displaying a winning symbol after going through a reach state where if one more symbol is aligned, it will be a jackpot, and a pattern when displaying a winning symbol after reaching a reach state. Contains patterns when doing so. In particular, the patterns when passing through the reach state include patterns with varying lengths of time. For each variation performance pattern, a variation time is determined for each pattern as a condition for ending the symbol variation, and the symbol variation is stopped when the variation time has elapsed. The performance determining means 303 selects a variation performance pattern of a decorative symbol whose variation time is equal to that of the special symbol, depending on the variation pattern of the special symbol.

In the time-saving state, if the variation pattern selected by the first variation pattern determination means 231 or the second variation pattern determination means 232 is a time-saving pattern, the performance determination means 303 selects a variation whose performance content for time-saving is determined. Select a production pattern. The time-saving production content is a production in which background video and audio are output to give the impression that the player is in an advantageous state due to time savings or probability changes.

The preview performance pattern is a performance pattern that temporarily displays an image, animation, or video of a specific character or motif on the screen, a performance pattern that causes a role model to move, or a performance pattern that outputs a specific sound. The performance based on the preview performance pattern is executed in parallel with the symbol variation, and it is suggested in advance that there is a high expectation that the symbol variation will stop in a jackpot manner. For example, there is a normal preview effect in which only one character image is displayed on the screen, and a group preview effect in which a group of characters is displayed as if they are passing from one end of the screen to the other. Further, a step-up preview performance is included in which the display process of the preview performance is divided into a plurality of stages, and the number of stages to be displayed is made variable so that the greater the number of stages, the higher the expectation of a jackpot.

The preview performance patterns include a pattern in which the display is executed at a timing after the display mode of the decorative pattern 61 becomes the ready-to-reach state and foretells the final stop state of the symbol (post-reach notice), and a pattern in which the display mode of the decorative pattern 61 becomes the ready-to-reach state (post-reach notice). There is a pattern (pre-reach notice) that simultaneously announces that the production will be executed at a timing that is not normally stopped and the reach state will be reached.

The performance determining means 303 determines whether or not to display a preview performance on the performance display device 60 according to the judgment result of the win/fail lottery or the pre-judgment result by a predetermined preview lottery, sets the preliminary performance, and also sets the preliminary performance. Determine the preview performance pattern. The performance determining means 303 holds a preview determination table to be referred to in order to decide whether to display a preview performance, and a preview type table to be referred to when selecting the type of preview performance pattern. The preview decision table is set so that different columns are referenced depending on the result of the lottery or preliminary determination, and the preview effect is displayed with a higher probability when the lottery is a win than when it is a loss. Thus, the correspondence between the determination result of the winning lottery and whether or not to display the preview effect is determined. Thereby, the display of the preview performance itself can indicate a high degree of expectation for a jackpot.

The performance control means 304 causes the performance display device 60 to variably display the performance image including the decorative pattern 61 in accordance with the selected variable performance pattern data. The effect control means 304 sets the reception of the command to start changing the decorative pattern 61 as a condition for starting the variable display of a new decorative pattern. When the performance determining means 303 determines that a preview performance is to be displayed, the performance control means 304 displays a preview performance according to the selected preview performance pattern on the performance display device 60 in a form that is superimposed on the symbol variation performance. let

The production control means 304 reserves the start of the symbol variation display corresponding to the first lottery when the winning lottery value of the second winning lottery is stored, and determines whether the winning lottery value of the first winning lottery is stored. Irrespective of whether the lottery is successful or not, the symbol variation display corresponding to the second lottery is started. As a result, if the lottery values are reserved for both the first lottery and the second lottery, the lottery values reserved for the second lottery are read out preferentially, and changes in the decorative symbols are displayed. . In such a case, the lottery values held in the first win/fail lottery are not read out and the decorative symbols do not start changing until the number of holds in the second win/fail lottery becomes 0. In this manner, the effect control means 304 causes the effect display device 60 to display a pattern variation effect including a variable display of the decorative patterns 61.

The effect control means 304 further controls the lighting and extinguishing of the decorative lamp 111 and the operation of the movable accessory 66. The performance control means 304 includes a performance display control means 305, an audio control means 306, and a lamp control means 309. The effect display control means 305 controls the display on the effect display device 60, and the audio control means 306 controls the audio output from the speaker 108. The lamp control means 309 controls lighting and extinguishing of the decorative lamp 111.

While the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 are changing, the effect display device 60 needs to display an image indicating that the symbol is changing. Normally, a normal-sized decorative pattern 61 having a certain size is displayed in a variable manner, but in a manner that obstructs the visibility of the variable display of the normal-sized decorative pattern 61, other than the variation of the decorative pattern 61 is treated as the main performance content. A special effect may be displayed. In this case, the fact that the symbols are changing is presented to the player by displaying an alternative symbol which is a decorative symbol smaller in size than the normal sized decorative symbol. Hereinafter, when simply referred to as a decorative pattern, it means a normal-sized decorative pattern, but when distinguishing it from an alternative pattern, a normal-sized decorative pattern is also referred to as a "normal decorative pattern" or a "main decorative pattern."

The alternative pattern is displayed while the visibility of the normal decorative pattern is obstructed, for example, while the normal decorative pattern is hidden. The alternative design is a form of decorative design for visually indicating the result of judgment, and has a display form that is simpler (in other words, simplified or simplified) than the normal decorative design, and It is displayed in a more simplified variation process. The alternative design usually has a display form in appearance corresponding to a part indicating the design type of the decorative design, for example, has a display form showing numbers, letters, and symbols indicating the design type. Further, the alternative design is displayed in a variable manner in a narrower area than the area in which the decorative design is normally displayed in a variable manner, and typically in a position where it is difficult to interfere with the main performance by elements other than the design, for example, in a corner of the screen of the performance display device 60. Fluctuations are displayed. Although the alternative designs are displayed relatively smaller than the normal decorative designs, they have a display form that allows at least the type of the design to be visually identified. The alternative design may be a reduced version of the normal decorative pattern, or may be the same as the normal decorative pattern except for the size.

The plurality of alternative symbols displayed in place of the plurality of normal decorative symbols suggest a high degree of expectation that the outcome of the lottery will be advantageous to the player due to the combination of the stop modes at the end of the variation. For example, when a plurality of alternative symbols are used, a ready-to-reach state in which two of the three alternative symbol types are available suggests that the expectation of a jackpot in the variation is high. In addition, the left and right symbols in the reach state may be specific types of symbols that suggest relatively high expectations such as "3" and "7", and the symbols that indicate relatively high expectations such as "1" and "2". By using a type of symbol that suggests a relatively low level, it may indicate whether the level of expectation of the reach state is high or low. Note that the alternative symbol does not appear to be in a definitive stopped state, but is in a temporary stopped state in which a slight oscillation is maintained. After the alternative symbol is temporarily stopped, a normal ornamental symbol may be displayed in place of the alternative symbol, and the normal ornamental symbol may be displayed in a fixed stopped state. Further, the normal decorative pattern and the alternative pattern may not be displayed exclusively, but may have overlapping display periods. Furthermore, at the time of a predetermined performance in which the visibility of the normal decorative pattern is obstructed, the variable display of the normal decorative pattern may be continued, and the variation of the alternative pattern may be displayed. Unlike the alternative symbols, during the fluctuation of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52, in a predetermined area of the effect display device 60, the special symbol is fluctuating with an image of the same size or smaller than the alternative symbol. A simple pattern that suggests something may be displayed in a variable manner. A simple pattern may be composed of a variable display of a combination of three symbols in the same way as a normal decorative pattern, a variable display of a single symbol, or a simple symbol (such as "○" or "×"). It may also be configured in such a way that they are sequentially switched. Simple symbols are not related to the variation display mode of normal decorative symbols or alternative symbols, and display a constant variation from the start of variation to the end of the variation of special symbols, and when they are stopped, they are related to the stop display mode of normal decorative symbols. may be displayed. It should be noted that the simple symbol may be one that at least gives a hint that the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner and the result of the special symbol, and can be changed as appropriate, such as displaying a combination of two symbols. Further, the simple design may be called a "simple decorative design", "sub-decorative design", "sub-design", "mini-decorative design", "mini-design", etc. Apart from the effect display device 60, a variable display of a decorative pattern called a fourth pattern, which shows a display equivalent to a simple pattern using a light emitting mode such as an LED, may be used. The fourth symbol is used to indicate the progress of the game (display during variation of special symbols, display of results) when a malfunction occurs in the performance display device 60. As an example of the display mode of the 4th symbol, the LED lights up sequentially in "white", "blue", "green", "yellow", "orange", and "red" (blinking including turning off is also possible). The variable display may be displayed in a variable manner, or the variable display may be indicated by flashing in a certain single color depending on the type of special symbol, and the type of loss or jackpot may be indicated by the emitted color when the display is stopped.

The clock means 307 is a clock circuit that outputs time information used for gaming. The clocking means 307 is a timer circuit that measures the time since the power is turned on with a counter and outputs it as time information. However, a real-time clock circuit with a built-in battery that can continue to measure date and time even when the pachinko game machine 100 is powered off or during a power outage may also be used. In the case of a real-time clock circuit, there may be slight differences in the time between each gaming machine due to individual differences or time differences, whereas in the case of a timer circuit, there is no difference in time between multiple gaming machines as long as the power is turned on at the same time. The possibility of this occurring is small.

The performance determining means 303 executes a synchronized performance that starts at a predetermined timing triggered by the time information output by the clock means 307 indicating a predetermined time. The synchronized performance is a performance that is displayed on the performance display device 60 in a synchronized performance period that is a period that is substantially asynchronous with the fluctuation period of symbol fluctuations and the gaming state. The synchronized performance period lasts several minutes, is longer than one symbol variation time, and can include multiple symbol variation periods. The performance pattern of the synchronized performance is stored in the pattern storage means 302, and the reproduction of a predetermined music and video is defined in the performance pattern. A plurality of types of performance patterns for the synchronized performance are prepared, and different types of performance patterns can be selected depending on the date and time such as the month, date, day of the week, and time.

The synchronized performance is executed regardless of whether the game is in a normal game or a special game. Here, "during normal gaming" also includes displaying a so-called standby demo screen. In other words, "normal game" includes (1) "normal game during fluctuating display" where symbols are being displayed in a fluctuating manner, and (2) "normal game while fluctuating is stopped" where symbols are not fluctuating and the standby demo screen is not being displayed. '', and (3) ``Normal game while displaying a standby demo screen'' in which the standby demo screen is being displayed instead of the changing symbols being displayed. The synchronization performance can be executed during any of the periods (1) to (3), but in the case of (2) and (3), the output mode that controls volume reduction, brightness reduction, etc. in the synchronization performance is (1). It may be different from when. In addition, while the standby demo screen is displayed, the player can input information regarding the mobile cooperation system, which will be described later, by operating the production button 109 or the cross key 110, and when this operation input is received, the video and audio of the synchronized production will be output. This will be suppressed, and priority will be given to screen displays such as performance customization using the mobile cooperation system.

The synchronized performance is, for example, a performance in which a predetermined music performance or video is played back at a predetermined time (referred to as a "synchronized performance start time"). The time that triggers the playback of the synchronization effect may be a time that arrives after a predetermined time interval from the time when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned on, or the time of every hour on the hour or half past the hour with reference to standard time. It may be. Alternatively, a time may be set that can vary depending on the date or day of the week, and instead of being set at regular intervals such as "every hour," the time may be set at different intervals, such as first after one hour, then after three hours, and so on. The interval may vary depending on the date or day of the week. It may be a variable setting in which the time can be specified by the game store clerk for each game store. However, it is set in advance so that the same synchronized performance is executed at least at the same time among a plurality of machines of the same model installed in the same game parlor. For example, in the case of a specification in which the timing is triggered by a time that arrives at a predetermined time interval from when the power is turned on, a plurality of machines at a game parlor are turned on at the same time. As a result, once the predetermined time has elapsed, the same synchronized performance is executed at the same time on the plurality of gaming machines. As a result, the production is displayed at the same time as if it were synchronized on multiple devices, and the same songs and videos are played at the same time, creating a synergistic and realistic feeling as if a live performance or movie was being shown on the spot. A dramatic effect can be obtained.

The synchronized performance function is similarly built into other game machines of the same model, and multiple game machines on the same game island are powered on at the same time by game store staff every day. Then, all of the plurality of gaming machines that are powered on at the same time reach the synchronized performance start time almost at the same time, and can execute the synchronized performance at the same time. This is called multi-device synchronized production. In that case, not only will the video display be synchronized on multiple devices, but the output of sound effects and background music will also be synchronized on multiple devices. It increases.

The performance setting means 308 stores the game history of the player. The game history includes a history of game results and a history of performance results. The game result history is the result of the game that leads to the ball that the player can obtain as a result of the game, such as the number of balls hit, the number of prize balls, the number of jackpots, the number of probability changes, and the number of time savings. The history of performance results is different from gaming profits, and is a performance record that is recorded in order to obtain benefits such as being granted the right to change the content and type of the performance, or the right to make it easier for a specific type of performance to appear. This is information such as scores. For example, in order to score the number of appearances of a predetermined performance, the result of a mini-game, etc. and give it to the player, encoded information, such as a two-dimensional code, indicating the score and game history is displayed on the screen. When the player reads and decodes the two-dimensional code with the camera of his or her mobile terminal, the points obtained through decoding and information on the game history are stored in the player's mobile terminal. A system for linking a gaming machine and a player's mobile terminal via a two-dimensional code will be described later. Note that the points mentioned here are necessary to expand the range of production customization described below, and the points must reach a predetermined cumulative value (for example, reaching 1000 points, every 100 points, etc.) This is a specification that will increase the number of customizable items.

The performance setting means 308 stores settings for selecting one of a plurality of performance content options as performance customization based on the player's selection instructions and game history. For example, as performance patterns to be displayed during a special game, a plurality of types of performance patterns with different motifs, characters, and songs to be displayed are prepared in the pattern storage means 302, and the player is allowed to select which of them to display. That's it. Alternatively, a plurality of types of motifs or character patterns are prepared in a pattern storage means 302 as designs of patterns included in decorative patterns to be varied, and the player is allowed to select which pattern is to be displayed. In those cases, when a player's operation of the effect button 109 or cross key 110 is accepted while the standby demo screen is displayed, and a effect pattern is selected through the operation, the effect setting means 308 selects the selected effect. Remember. The effect determining means 303 selects the type of effect pattern during the special game according to the settings stored by the effect setting means 308.

The sub-initial process execution means 360 executes a control start process for the sub-board 300 when the Pachinko gaming machine 100 is powered on or recovered from a power-off. The sub-power-off processing execution unit 362 executes abnormality response processing such as power-off processing in the sub-board 300 when a power abnormality such as a power-off occurs. The sub-error detection means 364 executes abnormality detection processing in the sub-board 300. When the sub-error detection means 364 detects a power-off, the sub-power-off processing execution means 362 backs up the data in the RAM to the backup RAM as a power-off process.

FIG. 12 is a diagram schematically showing the outline of the mobile cooperation system. As a premise of the mobile cooperation system, a player registers as a user in advance by setting an account and password on a game history server 358 provided with a dedicated site using a mobile terminal 354. When the player presses the performance button 109 at the start of the game, the performance display control means 305 displays on the screen of the performance display device 60 a two-dimensional code 350 that encodes the address of the dedicated site of the game history server 358, The player is made to read it with the camera of a mobile terminal and access the dedicated site of the game history server 358. Character information (also called "password information") that encodes the player's identification information and performance score history is transmitted from the dedicated site to the mobile terminal and displayed on the screen of the mobile terminal. The effect display control means 305 displays the input screen for the password information on the effect display device 60, and allows the player to input the password information through button operations such as the cross key 110. By decoding the input password information by the performance setting means 308 and registering it as the player's identification information and performance score history, the game content and performance score status of the player up to the previous time can be inherited. Input of this password information becomes an instruction to start recording the game history of the player and an instruction to start performance customization for selecting various performance elements. Thereafter, in the pachinko gaming machine 100, as the game and performance progresses, the performance setting means 308 adds up the points given to the player as performance benefits from time to time and accumulates them as performance score history. You can perform performance customization at any time and select and set your favorite elements as various performance elements. Points for performance are basically added for each symbol change, and the higher the expectation of transition to a special game, the higher the score is awarded to the type of performance, and the higher the score is also awarded when transition to the special game.

To customize the performance, the player uses a part of the accumulated points, and depending on the number of points used, colors, backgrounds, shapes, characters, etc. that make up the performance content displayed on the performance display device 60 You can change the performance elements such as music to your liking. The effect setting means 308 receives an instruction to change the effect element through a button operation by the player, and changes various effect elements in accordance with the instruction. Multiple types of items are prepared for each customizable performance element, and different values are set as the number of points required for each item. Therefore, when the accumulated score reaches a predetermined value, the number of customizable items increases, or a chance to increase the number of customizable items is provided. When the player operates a button to instruct the end of the game or performance customization, the performance setting means 308 generates a two-dimensional code 350 that encodes information such as performance benefits and performance score history, and uses this to control the performance display. The means 305 displays it on the effect display device 60. The player reads the two-dimensional code 350 with the camera of his or her mobile terminal and decodes the read two-dimensional code 352 to obtain information and store it in the mobile terminal 354. Further, the information is transmitted from the mobile terminal 354 to the game history server 358 with a dedicated site via the network 356, and is managed in association with the player's own account information. In this way, information such as performance benefits and performance score history is transmitted to the mobile terminal 354 via the transmission means of displaying and reading the two-dimensional code 350, and is managed by the game history server 358. The contents of the game and performance can be carried over to the next game. Also, by continuing to play the game for a long time, points can be earned as the number of symbol changes and the number of presentations increases.

FIG. 13 is a block diagram schematically showing the hardware configuration of the main board 200 and the sub board 300. The main board 200 includes electronic components such as a main CPU 290, a main RAM 291, and a main ROM 292. The main ROM 292 stores in advance a main control program and data for controlling overall gaming operations. A main control program or data is read from the main ROM 292 into the main RAM 291, and the main control program is executed by the main CPU 290. Each electronic component is connected by a bus such as a system bus or a data bus (not shown). Entry signals from each ball entrance, payout signals from the payout control board 155, and the like are acquired by the main CPU 290 via various interfaces (not shown). The main CPU 290 drives and controls external devices such as each winning hole solenoid, the first special symbol display section 41, and the second special symbol display section 42 using various drive circuits (not shown). In addition, commands necessary for performance control are transmitted from the main CPU 290 to the sub-board 300 together with information such as the results of the lottery, the results of determining symbols, and the results of determining fluctuation patterns. Signals are transmitted from the main board 200 to the sub board 300 by one-way communication.

The command data transmitted from the main board 200 to the sub-board 300 has a 2-byte configuration consisting of a combination of 1-byte command type data, so-called MODE data, and 1-byte command content data, so-called EVENT data. The main board 200 can send one command by associating command type data and command content data and transmitting them to the sub board 300. The instruction type data is a bit string indicating the type of instruction, and a unique type code is assigned in advance to each instruction type at the development stage. The instruction content data is a bit string indicating the content of the instruction. The most significant bit of the instruction type data and instruction content data is an identification bit that indicates whether it is instruction type data or instruction content data.When the most significant bit is 1, it indicates that it is instruction type data; When the bit is 0, it indicates instruction content data.

Communication from the main board 200 to the sub board 300 is designed to send 1 byte of data per data transmission, so two transmissions of 1 byte each are required to send 2 bytes of command data. . MODE data, which is the upper byte, is transmitted in the first communication, and EVENT data, which is the lower byte, is transmitted in the second communication. Considering the possibility of communication failure due to the influence of noise, etc., the main board 200 continuously transmits the same data, and when the same data is read twice in a row by the sub board 300, completion of the transmission and reception of that data is determined. . The main board 200 repeatedly transmits the same data until it is read twice in a row, up to a maximum of five times.

The sub-board 300 includes electronic components such as a sub-CPU 310, a sub-RAM 311, a sub-ROM 312, and a production control device 313. The sub ROM 312 is one of data storage means that holds a sub control program including performance pattern data in which a performance process is defined, display pattern data in which a performance display process is defined, and the like. A sub-control program including performance pattern data, display pattern data, and audio pattern data is read from the sub-ROM 312 into the sub-RAM 311, and performance control based on the sub-control program is executed by the sub-CPU 310. Each electronic component is connected by a bus such as a system bus or a data bus (not shown). Signals from external devices such as the production button 109 are acquired by the sub CPU 310 via various interfaces (not shown). The sub CPU 310 drives external devices such as the effect display device 60, the speaker 108, the decorative lamp 111, and the movable accessory 66 using the effect control device 313 and various drive circuits and control circuits (not shown) according to the effect pattern data, and outputs the display. , controls the performance through audio output, lamp lighting, and character object movements. Sub CPU 310 transmits display pattern data and audio pattern data to production control device 313. In this embodiment, an example will be described in which the sub-board 300 includes the production control device 313, but the sub-board 300 and the production control device 313 do not need to be integrated as a board, but can be separated and connected to each other. It may also be formed as a separate substrate.

FIG. 14 is a block diagram schematically showing the hardware configuration of the production control device 313. The production control device 313 includes a control CPU 320, a control RAM 322, a data ROM 324, a display control circuit 326, and an audio control circuit 314. The data ROM 324 is one of data storage means that holds material data such as effect image data and motion data used for effect display and audio data used for audio output in a compressed state. The performance image data is an image used for fluctuating display or performance display as a performance object indicating the judgment result of a winning/failure lottery, etc. For example, a sprite image of a decorative pattern used for decorative pattern variation, a sprite image used for a preview performance, a sprite image used for various performances, etc. This is a material image such as a video to be used. The motion data is data that defines an action when adding an action-like action to an image used for various effects at a predetermined timing. The audio data is audio data such as music, background sounds, sound effects, and characters' lines that are output during production.

Based on the display pattern data sent from the sub CPU 310, the effect image data and motion data specified by the display pattern data are read from the data ROM 324 to the control RAM 322, and effect display using the effect image data and motion data is performed. is executed by the control CPU 320. As a result, commands, effect image data, and motion data related to effect display are transmitted from the control CPU 320 to the display control circuit 326, and the display control circuit 326 performs display control. Similarly, commands and audio data related to audio output are transmitted from the control CPU 320 to the audio control circuit 314, and the audio control circuit 314 performs audio output control.

The display control circuit 326 includes a decoder 332, a drawing memory 334, a drawing circuit 336, a frame buffer 338, and a display circuit 340, each of which is connected via a bus 330. For convenience, the bus 330 in this figure comprehensively represents buses such as a system bus, a data bus, and an address bus.

The effect image data and motion data sent from the control CPU 320 are stored in the drawing memory 334, and the compressed data among these data is decoded by the decoder 332. The drawing memory 334 is a VRAM (Video RAM) that is used as a work area when the decoder 332 decodes effect image data and motion data, or as a work area when the drawing circuit 336 executes drawing processing or image processing. ).

The drawing circuit 336 uses the data stored in the drawing memory 334 to sequentially execute commands sent from the control CPU 320 to generate a display image, and stores the generated display image in a frame buffer as a frame of a moving image. 338. The frame buffer 338 is a VRAM that serves as a buffer memory that temporarily stores frames of moving images to be output to the effect display device 60.

The display circuit 340 outputs the display images stored in the frame buffer 338 to the effect display device 60 in the form of a video signal in the order in which they were stored. The frame buffer 338 has a memory area for two frames, for example, and while the display circuit 340 outputs a display image from the memory area for one frame, the drawing circuit 336 generates the next display image. Store in the memory area for one more frame.

Note that the data ROM 324 holds "detailed display pattern data" in which the display control process performed by the display control circuit 326 is defined. At this time, the display pattern data sent from the sub CPU 310 can be called "schematic display pattern data" in which the outline of the effect display process is defined. For example, the general display pattern data defines the general flow of a series of effect display processes, such as the start and stop timing of fluctuation of decorative patterns, the playback order of multiple moving images, and the playback start and stop timing. . On the other hand, the detailed display pattern data includes detailed display controls such as the display order of sprite images to realize fluctuating display of decorative patterns and the display processing order in frame units to display moving images based on motion data. The process is defined.

When performing display control based on the "general display pattern data" sent from the sub CPU 310, the production control device 313 reads "detailed display pattern data" necessary for the processing from the data ROM 324, and uses both display pattern data. and execute display processing. Therefore, it can be said that the production control device 313 executes the display control process based on the display pattern data including "general display pattern data" and "detailed display pattern data". Therefore, in this specification, unless explicitly mentioned, "general display pattern data" stored in the sub ROM 312 and "detailed display pattern data" stored in the data ROM 324 are not distinguished, and are simply "display pattern data". ”. For example, when the effect control means performs a specific process based on display pattern data held in the data storage means, this display pattern data includes "general display pattern data" and "detailed display pattern data". . In addition, in the modified example, the display pattern data is not divided into "general display pattern data" and "detailed display pattern data", and even if the display pattern data serving as both is held in the sub ROM 312 or the data ROM 324. good.

In this embodiment, the hardware configuration of the production control device 313 includes a control CPU 320, a control RAM 322, a data ROM 324, and a display control circuit 326. In a modification, the control CPU 320, control RAM 322, data ROM 324, and display control circuit 326 may be integrated instead of being configured as separate electronic components. Further, the processing performed by the display control circuit 326 may be performed by the control CPU 320, the control RAM 322, or the data ROM 324. For example, the control CPU 320 included in the production control device 313 may execute the processing executed by the decoder 332, the drawing circuit 336, and the display circuit 340 included in the display control circuit 326. Further, the control RAM 322 included in the effect control device 313 may also serve as the drawing memory 334 and the frame buffer 338. In addition, the production control device 313 may have a hardware configuration in which the display control circuit 326 is not included, and in this case, the processing executed by the display control circuit 326 is executed by the control CPU 320, control RAM 322, or data ROM 324. may be done.

Further, in this embodiment, the hardware configuration of the sub-board 300 includes a production control device 313 in addition to a sub-CPU 310, a sub-RAM 311, and a sub-ROM 312. In a modification, the sub CPU 310, the sub RAM 311, the ROM 312, and the production control device 313 may be integrated instead of being configured as separate electronic components. Further, the processing executed by the production control device 313 may be executed by the sub CPU 310, the sub RAM 311, or the sub ROM 312. For example, the sub CPU 310 may execute the processing of the control CPU 320, the sub RAM 311 may serve as the control RAM 322, and the sub ROM 312 may serve as the data ROM 324. In addition, the sub board 300 may have a hardware configuration in which the production control device 313 is not included, and in this case, the processing to be executed by the production control device 313 is executed by the sub CPU 310, the sub RAM 311, or the sub ROM 312. You can.

FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing a control start process for the main board 200 in the Pachinko gaming machine. This control start process is executed by the main initial process execution means 280, but will be described below assuming that it is executed by the main CPU 290 functioning as the main initial process execution unit 280. When the power switch 150 is turned on, the main CPU 290 sets a stack pointer (S100), permits access to the main RAM 291 (S102), and executes initial settings regarding the hardware such as setting the built-in registers of the main CPU 290. (S104).

The main CPU 290 checks the operating state of the setting key, and if the setting key is in the ON state (Y in S105), checks the operating state of the RAM clear switch. If the RAM clear switch is turned on (Y in S122), a setting change process is executed (S124). On the other hand, if RAM clear is OFF (N in S122), a setting confirmation process is executed (S126). Note that if the setting key is in the OFF state in S105 (N in S105), the processes in S122 to S126 are skipped.

Subsequently, depending on the operation state of the RAM clear switch, the value of the power-off information flag, and the state of the data stored in the main RAM 291, power-off recovery processing or initialization processing of the main RAM 291 is executed. Specifically, if the RAM clear switch is not turned on and both the value of the power-off information flag and the data stored in the main RAM 291 are normal, the process at the time of power-off recovery is executed. do. In other cases, that is, when the RAM clear switch is turned on, or even when the RAM clear switch is not turned on, either the power-off information flag or the data stored in the main RAM 291 is normal. If not, initialization processing of the main RAM 291 is executed.

The main CPU 290 checks the operating state of the RAM clear switch, and if the RAM clear switch is turned on (Y in S106), initializes the main RAM 291 (S116). If the RAM clear switch is not turned on (N in S106), the main CPU 290 checks the value of the power-off information flag (S108). If the value of the power-off information flag does not match the power-off normal data (N at S108), the main RAM 291 is initialized (S116). If the value of the power-off information flag matches the power-off normal data (Y in S108), the data stored in the main RAM 291 is inspected (S110). As will be described later, if the processing had completed normally when the power was last turned off, the checksum of the data stored in the main RAM 291 will have been stored in the main RAM 291, so the main CPU 290 will use the checksum to Inspect the data in main RAM 291. If the data stored in the main RAM 291 is not normal (N in S112), the data in the main RAM 291 is initialized (S116). If the data stored in the main RAM is normal (Y in S112), processing is executed to return to the state before the power was turned off (S114).

In the power-off recovery process (S114), power-on normal data indicating that the power was turned on normally is stored in the power-off information flag, and initial settings for various errors and communication initial settings with the payout control board 155 are executed. do. Subsequently, the command requests that have not been sent before the power is turned off are cleared, and commands for various information indicating the gaming status are requested to be sent. Subsequently, a production command corresponding to the number of activated balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is requested. Subsequently, the open/closed states of the second starting port 12 and the big winning port 20 are returned to the state before the power was cut off. Subsequently, a process for notifying the operating state of the special symbol probability variation function is executed.

In the RAM initialization process (S116), the power-on normal data is stored in the power-off information flag, the entire area of the main RAM 291 is cleared with 0, and the initial settings of the main RAM 291 and the initialization of the effect display are executed. Note that in the initialization process of S116, the setting values stored in the setting memory of the setting change device 170 are not cleared, and the setting values set in the setting change process of S124 are held as they are.

When the power-off recovery process (S114) or the RAM initialization process (S116) is completed, a count value is set to start an interrupt process to be described later, and the operation of the interrupt timer is started (S118). As a result, a timer interrupt is generated every predetermined time (for example, 4 milliseconds) from then on, and the interrupt processing described later is executed. Next, the main CPU 290 executes main processing for managing the gaming machine (S120).

FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing details of the setting change process in S124 in FIG. The value of the setting memory where the setting value of the game setting is to be stored is confirmed, and if the setting memory value is not normal (N of S132), the setting value is initialized to the initial value (S134). When using "1" to "6" as setting value data, "1" is set as the initial value, and when using "0" to "5" as setting value data, "0" is set as the initial value. If the setting memory value is normal (Y in S132), the process in S134 is skipped. Subsequently, the process moves to a setting change state (S136), and the setting values stored in the setting memory are displayed on the setting display section 173 (S138). If there is a change operation using the setting change button 172 (Y in S140), the setting value displayed on the setting display section 173 is updated, and the setting value stored in the setting memory is updated (S142). If there is no change operation (N at S140), the process at S142 is skipped. If the setting key remains ON (N at S144), the processes from S138 to S142 are repeated. If the setting key inserted into the setting key cylinder 171 is returned to its original state and turned OFF (Y in S144), the setting display section 173 is hidden to make the set value invisible (S146), and the process returns.

FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing details of the setting confirmation process in S126 in FIG. The value of the setting memory where the setting value of the game setting is to be stored is confirmed, and if the setting memory value is not normal (N of S152), the setting value is initialized to the initial value (S154). If the setting memory value is normal (Y in S152), the process in S154 is skipped. A transition is made to a setting confirmation state (S156), and the setting values stored in the setting memory are displayed on the setting display section 173 (S158). If the setting key remains ON (N in S160), the process of S158 is repeated to continue displaying the setting value, and if the setting key turns OFF (Y in S160), the setting display section 173 is hidden. The setting value is made invisible (S162), and the process returns.

FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing in detail the main processing of S120 in FIG. The main CPU 290 once prohibits timer interrupts (S200), starts operation of the watchdog timer (S202), and monitors power-off (S204). When a drop in the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply board 158 is detected in a power supply voltage monitoring circuit (not shown), a power-off memory is executed by inputting an unconditional interrupt request signal from the power supply voltage monitoring circuit to the main CPU 290. In the process, power-off confirmation data is stored in the power-off confirmation flag. Therefore, the main CPU 290 monitors the value of the power-off confirmation flag (S204), and if the value of the power-off confirmation flag matches the power-off confirmation data (Y in S206), executes the process for power-off. Therefore, the process advances to S212. If the value of the power-off confirmation flag does not match the power-off confirmation data (N of S206), in order to update the initial value random number per normal symbol, the initial value random number per special symbol, and the soft initial value random number per special symbol, Initial value random number update processing is executed (S208), timer interrupt is enabled (S210), and the process returns to S200. Thereafter, S200 to S210 are repeated. If a timer interrupt occurs while timer interrupts are disabled (S202 to S208), the timer interrupt is enabled in S210, and then interrupt processing, which will be described later, is executed.

When a power outage is detected in S206 (Y in S206), the main CPU 290 restarts the watchdog timer (S212) and checks the contents of the power outage information flag (S214). If the contents of the power-off information flag do not match the power-on normal data (N in S214), it is determined that the data at power-on is not saved normally, and the power-off abnormal data is stored in the power-off information flag. (S216) and proceeds to S222. If the contents of the power-off information flag match the power-on normal data (Y in S214), it is determined that the data at power-on has been saved normally, and the power-off normal data is stored in the power-off information flag. (S218). Subsequently, in order to check the backed up data in the main RAM 291 when the power is turned on next time, a checksum of the data stored in the main RAM 291 is calculated and stored in the main RAM 291 (S220). Next, access to the main RAM 291 is prohibited (S222), and a loop is performed until the power is turned off. Note that the above-mentioned processing at the time of power-off is executed by the main power-off processing execution means 282 implemented by the main CPU 290.

FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing details of interrupt processing. When a timer interrupt occurs in the main process (S120), the main CPU 290 executes the interrupt process. First, interrupt operating conditions are set (S300), and the watchdog timer is restarted (S302). Next, in order to manage the gaming machine, input processing (S304), various random number update processing (S306), initial value update type random number update processing (S308), initial value random number update processing (S310), timer subtraction processing (S312) , 2nd start opening valid period setting process (S314), winning monitoring process (S316), prize ball control process (S318), normal symbol activation gate monitoring process (S320), normal symbol control process (S322), normal symbol fluctuation start Monitoring process (S324), starting opening monitoring control process (S326), special symbol control process (S328), special electric accessory control process (S330), big prize opening valid period setting process (S332), special symbol fluctuation start monitoring control Processing (S334), abnormality detection processing (S336), ball entry passage time abnormality detection processing (S338), game state display processing (S340), handle state signal inspection processing (S342), LED output processing (S344), firing control signal Output processing (S346), test signal output processing (S348), solenoid output processing (S350), production control command transmission processing (S352), external information output processing (S354) are executed in order, and the next timer interrupt is permitted. (S356) and returns.

In the input processing (S304), the input port data of switches attached to the game board surface, disconnection/short circuit power abnormality detection signal, door/frame open signal, magnetic detection signal, radio wave detection signal, and touch state signal is monitored. , creates data indicating the input state and stores it in the main RAM 291. Note that the data indicating this input state includes level data (data at the input port at the time of the current interrupt), rising data or falling data (data at the input port at the time of the current interrupt, and data at the input port at the time of the previous interrupt). (data indicating which switch was found to have changed by comparing input port data using exclusive OR).

In various random number updating processes (S306), the normal symbol fluctuation pattern random numbers and the fluctuation pattern random numbers are updated. A normal symbol variation pattern random number is read from the main RAM 291, and if the value is less than a predetermined maximum value, the value is incremented and stored, and if the value is greater than or equal to the predetermined maximum value, 0 is stored. Further, a fluctuation pattern random number is read from the main RAM 291, and if the result of subtracting a predetermined value from the value is 0 or more, the subtraction result is stored, and if it is less than 0, a predetermined maximum value is stored. As a result, the normal symbol variation pattern random number and the variation pattern random number are updated every time a timer interrupt occurs.

In the initial value update type random number update process (S308), the random number per normal symbol, the random number per special symbol, and the soft random number per special symbol are updated. The respective random number values, maximum values, and initial values are read from the main RAM 291, and the random number values are incremented. If the incremented result exceeds the maximum value, the random number value is set to 0. Further, if the incremented result matches the initial value, the initial value random number is read from the main RAM 291 and the initial value is updated. As a result, the random number per normal symbol, the random number per special symbol, and the soft random number per special symbol are updated every time a timer interrupt occurs, and when the random number value returns to the initial value, that is, the random number range is completed once. Then, new initial values are set and random numbers are generated.

In the initial value random number update process (S310), the initial value random number per normal symbol, the initial symbol random value per special symbol, and the soft initial value random number per special symbol are updated. The initial value random number is read from the initial value random number update table in the main RAM 291, and the value of the initial value random number is incremented. If the incremented result exceeds the upper limit, the initial value random number is set to 0. Similar processing is performed in the initial value random number update processing (S208) in the main processing (S120).

In the timer subtraction process (S312), the 2-byte timer is updated. The values of timers for various controls are read from the main RAM 291 according to the respective tables, and if the timer values are other than 0, the values are sequentially decremented and stored. If the timer value is 0, no timer update is performed.

In the second starting port effective period setting process (S314), the effective period of the second starting port 12 is set. The second starting port 12 contains a validity period during which a prize ball will be paid out and a lottery related to the second special symbol will be executed when a game ball enters, and a valid period during which a prize ball will be paid out and a second special symbol will be drawn even if a game ball enters. An invalid period is set during which the lottery regarding the symbols is not executed. As will be described later, in the starting port monitoring control process (S326), the second starting port winning monitoring process is not executed during the invalid period of the second starting port 12, so no game ball enters the second starting port 12. Even if the prize ball is paid out and the lottery related to the second special symbol is not executed. The same applies to the case where a valid period and an invalid period are set for the first starting hole 11, the big winning hole 20, the first operating hole 31, the second operating hole 32, the general winning hole 33, etc. When the state of the normal symbol is "normal electric accessory in operation", data indicating that the second starting port 12 is in the valid period is stored in the second starting port valid period flag. If the state of the normal symbol is not "normal electric accessory in operation" and the value of the second starting port valid extension timer is not 0, the second starting port valid period flag indicates that the second starting port 12 is in the valid period. If the value of the second starting port validity extension timer is 0, data indicating that the second starting port is in an invalid period is stored in the second starting port valid period flag.

In the winning monitoring process (S316), the passage of the game ball through the switch is inspected, and when the game ball passes through the switch, the switch does not have an invalid period or is currently in its valid period, and the prize ball is paid out. If so, update the winning counter. It also requests the creation of a security output request to be output to the external information output terminal 160 and the transmission of a command.

In the prize ball control process (S318), monitoring data reception from the payout control board 155, requesting command transmission to the payout control board 155, sending command to the payout control board 155, and inspecting data received from the payout control board 155. Execute in order.

In the normal symbol operation gate monitoring process (S320), the passage of the game ball through the first operation port 31 and the second operation port 32 is monitored, and it is determined that the game ball has passed through the first operation port 31 or the second operation port 32. At that time, if the number of pending normal symbols is less than the upper limit of 4, the number of pending normal symbols is updated and the random number related to the normal symbols is stored in the main RAM 291.

In the normal symbol control process (S322), the state of the normal symbol is monitored, and if it is determined that the normal symbol is being controlled, processing related to the normal symbol display section 45 or the normal electric accessory 90 is executed. If the state of the normal symbol is "normal symbol fluctuating", the normal symbol fluctuating process is executed, and if the state is "normal symbol stopping symbol displaying", the normal symbol stopping symbol displaying process is executed, and the "normal symbol changing state" is executed. If "accessory object is in operation", normal electric accessory object operation process is executed, and if "normal electric accessory object operation end demonstration is in progress", normal electric accessory object operation end demonstration process is executed. In the normal symbol fluctuation processing, after the normal symbol fluctuation is performed, the fluctuation time is monitored, and if it is determined that the normal symbol fluctuation time has ended, the normal symbol fluctuation stop setting is executed and the state of the normal symbol is changed to " Set to "Normal symbol stop symbol display". In normal pattern stop pattern display processing, the stop pattern display time of the normal pattern is monitored, and when it is determined that the stop pattern display time of the normal pattern has ended, the normal pattern operation end setting corresponding to the result of hit determination is executed. In case of a hit, set the state of the normal symbol to "Normal electric accessory in operation", save the operating state of the normal electric accessory release extension function when the normal electric accessory starts operating, and start the normal electric accessory. The operation setting of the normal electric accessory solenoid 91 corresponding to the operating state of the ordinary electric accessory opening extension function at the time is executed. In the case of a miss, the state of the normal symbol is set to "waiting for normal symbol change." In the normal electric accessory operation process, if the winnings of the winning openings related to the ordinary electric accessory 90 of the game ball are monitored and it is determined that the number of winnings of the winning openings related to the ordinary electric accessory 90 has reached the maximum number of winnings. executes the operation termination setting of the normal electric accessory 90 and the setting of the second starting port effective extension time. If it is determined that the number of prizes in the winning opening related to the ordinary electric accessory 90 has not reached the maximum number of winnings, the opening/closing time of the entrance to the winning opening related to the ordinary electric accessory 90 is monitored, and the ordinary electric accessory 90 When the opening/closing of the entrance of the prize opening is set and it is determined that the opening of the entrance of the series of ordinary electric accessories 90 is completed, the operation termination setting of the ordinary electric accessory 90 and the activation of the second starting opening are performed. Execute extension time settings. In addition, if it is determined that the opening/closing time of the entrance of the winning opening related to the normal electric accessory 90 has not ended, the opening/closing setting of the entrance of the winning opening related to the ordinary electric accessory 90 is not executed. In the normal electric accessory operation end demonstration processing, the operation end demonstration time of the ordinary electric accessory 90 is monitored, and if it is determined that the operation end demonstration time of the ordinary electric accessory 90 has ended, the state of the normal symbol is changed to "normal symbol". "Waiting for change".

In the normal symbol variation start monitoring process (S324), the state of the normal symbol is monitored, and if it is "waiting for normal symbol variation" and the value of the number of normal symbol activation pending balls is other than 0, the normal symbol fluctuation is started. It is decided to start. When it is determined to start the fluctuation of the normal symbol, the number of normal symbol activation pending balls is decremented, and the hit judgment, determination of the stop symbol, setting of the fluctuation pattern number of the normal symbol, and setting of the fluctuation time of the normal symbol are executed. . Thereafter, the state of the normal symbol is set to "normal symbol fluctuating", and the area of the main RAM 291 used for the normal symbol state setting, hit determination, and fluctuation pattern determination is cleared.

In the starting hole monitoring control process (S326), winnings of the first starting hole 11 and second starting hole 12 of the game balls are monitored. If you confirm that a game ball has won when the number of pending balls for the first special symbol is less than 4, obtain a built-in random number, and add the value of the soft random number per special symbol to the obtained built-in random number. It is stored in a buffer as a special symbol per random number used in jackpot determination. Further, as random numbers related to special symbols, symbol random numbers and fluctuation pattern random numbers are acquired and stored. If the reservation of the second special symbol is to be extinguished in priority to the reservation of the first special symbol, only the renewal of the reservation related to the winning is executed, but if the reservation of the special symbol is to be consumed in the order of winning, In addition to updating the reservations related to the winnings, the total number of reservations is updated and the order of winnings is stored. Next, in order to request a preview production command corresponding to the random number stored at the time of winning the starting slot, the state of the gaming machine is checked, and if it is determined that it is the command transmission period, a winning preview production request, a winning symbol preview production request, a pattern notice Executes performance requests in order. Here, (1) if you want to store the random number related to the first special symbol while you are waiting for a hit and the normal symbol probability fluctuation function is not activated, (2) you are waiting for a hit and the normal symbol probability fluctuation function is not activated. When the random number related to the second special symbol is stored while the probability fluctuation function is not activated, (3) When the random number related to the second special symbol is stored during the jackpot or small win. , it is determined that it is the command transmission period. Next, a production command corresponding to the number of balls pending activation of the special symbol is requested. As a result, the sub-board 300 is notified that the number of reserved balls for special symbols has been updated. As described above, in pre-reading, four pieces of preliminary determination information (prior propriety determination information, preliminary symbol determination information, preliminary pattern determination information) and the number of reserved balls are transmitted to the sub-board 300 as a set. In the above example, the main CPU 290 controls the transmission of commands for preliminary determination processing, but in another example, when a ball enters the starting hole, the commands are uniformly transmitted and pre-reading is possible. The sub CPU 310 may make various situational judgments such as whether or not it is a period. Next, the value of the second starting port valid period flag is checked, and if the value of the second starting port valid period flag is data indicating that the second starting port 12 is in the valid period, the first starting port winning prize is As in the case, the second starting opening winnings monitoring process is executed. When the value of the second starting port valid period flag is data indicating that the second starting port 12 is in the invalid period, the second starting port winning monitoring process is not executed. In addition, if it is confirmed that a game ball has won a prize when the number of pending balls is 0, the number of pending balls is once changed from 0 to 1, and then the control process related to the start of fluctuation, which will be described later, is executed. .

In the special symbol control process (S328), a hit waiting state is checked, and if the special electric accessory is in operation, that is, a big hit or a small hit, the special symbol control process is ended. If the special electric accessory is not activated, the state of the special symbol is inspected, and if it is "waiting for special symbol change", the special symbol control general processing is ended, and if it is "starting to change", the special symbol is changed. A start process is executed, and if "special symbol is changing", special symbol varying processing is executed, and if "special symbol stopping symbol is being displayed", special symbol stopping symbol displaying processing is executed. In the special symbol variation start process, the selection number of the special symbol variation pattern is acquired based on the variation pattern random number, the variation time corresponding to the special symbol variation pattern number is determined, and the variation is started in order to start the effect display on the sub board 300. Request commands for additional symbol information, variation patterns, and character information, set the state of the special symbol to "Special symbol variation in progress," and clear the variation pattern judgment area used to determine the special symbol variation pattern to 0. . In the process during special symbol fluctuation, after performing special symbol fluctuation, the fluctuation time is monitored, and if it is determined that the special symbol fluctuation time has ended, the special symbol fluctuation stop setting is set and the state of the special symbol is changed to "special". Set to ``Symbols are stopped and symbols are being displayed.'' In special symbol stop symbol display processing, the stop symbol display time of the special symbol is monitored, and when it is determined that the stop symbol display time of the special symbol has ended, special symbol operation end setting is executed corresponding to the result of hit determination. In the case of a jackpot, in order to end the special symbol's operation, set the state of the special symbol to "waiting for special symbol change", set the number of times the special electric accessory will operate continuously, and set the special symbol's probability. Disable the variation function, special symbol variation time reduction function, normal symbol probability variation function, normal symbol variation time reduction function, and normal electric accessory opening extension function to prepare the state of the gaming machine for opening the big winning hole. Set the hit start demo display time, command request for hit start demo performance, and command request for firing position specification performance (command request to execute a performance that suggests a recommended firing position such as "Right hit") Execute. If the result of the hit determination is a small hit, it is determined that the special symbol's variation time shortening function and the normal symbol's probability variation function have finished operating, the variation pattern selection state is updated, a command request is made for the gaming state, and the special symbol In order to end the operation, set the state of the special symbol to "waiting for special symbol change", set the state of the gaming machine to the small hit start demonstration, set the win start demo display time, and set the win start demonstration performance. Executes command requests and command requests for firing position designation effects. If the result of the hit judgment is a failure, it is determined that the special symbol's variation time shortening function and the normal symbol's probability variation function have finished operating, the variation pattern selection state is updated, a command request is made for the gaming state, and the special symbol is changed. To end the operation, the state of the special symbol is set to "waiting for special symbol variation" and a command request for firing position designation performance is executed.

In the special electric accessory control process (S330), in order to execute the process related to the special electric accessory, the operating state of the condition device and the special electric accessory is inspected, and whether the condition device is in operation or the special electric accessory is in operation. If it is determined that this is the case, processing related to the special electric accessory is executed. Depending on the operating status of the special electric accessory, processing in preparation for opening the big winning opening, processing while the special electric accessory is in operation, processing while closing the big winning opening, processing during the jackpot end demonstration, processing during the small winning start demonstration, and small winning special call. Execute processing during operation, processing during closing of small winning large prize opening, and processing during small winning end demonstration.

In the grand prize opening validity period setting process (S332), in order to save the result of determining the validity period of the major prize opening 20, if the value of the major prize opening validity period is 0, the major prize opening validity period flag is set to If it is other than 0, the big winning opening valid period data is stored in the big winning opening valid period flag.

In the special symbol variation start monitoring control process (S334), the operating state of the special symbol is monitored and it is determined whether the special symbol is in a state where it can start varying. If the order of consumption of the reserved balls of the special symbol is priority consumption of the second special symbol, (1) the jackpot or small hit is not in progress, (2) the first special symbol is on standby for fluctuation, (3) ) The second special symbol is on standby to fluctuate, and (4) the number of balls pending activation of the special symbol is other than 0. When all of the following conditions are satisfied, the special symbol is ready to start fluctuating. It is determined that If the reserved balls of the special symbol are consumed in the order of winning, in addition to (1) to (3) above, (5) the total number of reserved balls of the special symbol is other than 0, and (6) the relevant When all of the following conditions are satisfied: the determination matches the order of consumption, that is, the order of winning, it is determined that the special symbols are ready to start changing.

When it is determined that the special symbol is ready to start changing, the number of pending balls of the special symbol is subtracted, and a performance command corresponding to the number of pending balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is requested. As a result, the sub board 300 is notified that the number of reserved balls of the special symbol has been updated.

Subsequently, a hit determination for the special symbol is executed. In the hit determination, it is determined whether it is a jackpot, small hit, or miss based on the special symbol per random number, and the determination result is stored in the special symbol determination flag. Next, decide on the pattern. In determining the symbols, if the hit determination is a jackpot, the jackpot symbol is determined based on the special symbol per symbol random number, if it is a small hit, the small win symbol is determined, and if it is a miss, the miss symbol is determined. is determined.

If the result of the hit determination is a jackpot, the operation content of the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is determined based on the value of the group determination number indicating the type of the winning symbol determined in the symbol determination process, and the operation content of the special symbol probability fluctuation function is determined. The game state after the jackpot is set, such as the operating details of the variable time reduction function and the easy winning state of normal symbols. Next, settings are made during the jackpot, such as the number of times the special electric accessory is activated in succession and the opening time of the jackpot. Next, the contents of the variation pattern selection state are set by selecting a variation pattern table to be referred to after the jackpot is completed based on the result of the hit determination and the operating state of the probability variation function of the normal symbol. Next, a start demonstration time and an end demonstration time are set by referring to a table selected based on the value of the group determination number indicating the game state and the type of winning symbol. Subsequently, the area of the main RAM 291 used for hit determination and symbol determination is cleared, and the state of the special symbol is set to "variation start".

If the result of the hit determination is a small hit, select the fluctuation pattern table to be referred to after the small hit ends, set the contents of the fluctuation pattern selection state, set the start demo time and end demo time, and confirm the winning. The area of the main RAM 291 used for judgment and symbol determination is cleared, and the state of the special symbol is set to "variation start". If the result of the hit determination is a loss, the area of the main RAM 291 used for the hit determination and symbol determination is cleared, and the state of the special symbol is set to "variation start".

In the abnormality detection process (S336), the main CPU 290, which functions as the main error detection means 284, inspects the magnetic detection signal, disconnection/short circuit power abnormality detection signal, radio wave detection signal, and door/frame open signal, and determines whether there is a change in the error state. If so, the error state is stored and a request is made to the sub-board 300 to display an error state representation of the gaming machine. At this time, the light emitting mode of a light emitting means such as an LED mounted on the control board may be controlled depending on the error state. If there is no change in the error state, the request to store the error state and display the error state performance is not executed.

In the ball entry passage time abnormality detection process (S338), the main CPU 290, which functions as the main error detection means 284, monitors the continuous on time of each switch level to detect the ball entry passage time abnormality, and calculates the continuous on time ( For example, if it is determined that the value of the counter that is incremented for each interrupt when the switch is on is an abnormal value, the incoming ball transit time abnormal setting, command transmission request, and security output to the external information output terminal 160 are determined to be abnormal. Step through the creation of output requests. At this time, the light emitting mode of a light emitting means such as an LED mounted on the control board may be controlled in accordance with the abnormality in the entrance and passage time. If it is determined that the continuous on time is not abnormal, no security output request is created.

In the game state display process (S340), in order to request the display of the number of times the special electric accessory is activated in succession, the error state, the number of pending activation balls for normal symbols, and the number of pending activation balls for special symbols, each display is required. Create data.

In the handle state signal inspection process (S342), the handle state is inspected to monitor the touch state of the handle, and if it is determined that there is a change in the handle state as a result of the inspection, the handle state monitoring timer is subtracted and the handle state is Updates, sets the handle state monitoring timer, and requests command transmission for handle state presentation. As a result of the inspection, if it is determined that there is no change in the handle state, a handle state monitoring timer is set. If the value of the handle state monitoring timer is decremented and the result is other than 0, it is determined that the timer is being decremented, and subsequent processing is not executed.

In the LED output process (S344), the display of special symbols, the display of normal symbols, the display of the number of balls on hold for special symbols, the display of the number of balls on hold for normal symbols, the display of the game status, and the special electric accessory are displayed in succession. Initialize the display in order to display the number of times the special electric accessory is activated, display the operating status of the special electric accessory when the accessory continuous activation device is not activated, display the division, display the error, and display the prize ball ratio. , acquire and output display data in sequence.

In the firing control signal output process (S346), in order to output a signal for prohibiting/permitting firing of game balls, setting of prohibiting/permitting firing corresponding to the communication state with the payout control board 155 and disconnection/short circuit power supply abnormality, and After acquiring the firing prohibition/permission data, a firing prohibition/permission signal is output.

In test signal output processing (S348), a signal to be output to the test device is created and output to the corresponding output port.

In the solenoid output process (S350), in order to output the output data of the normal electric accessory solenoid 91 and the big winning hole solenoid 92, the output data of the normal electric accessory solenoid 91 is acquired, and the output data of the big winning hole solenoid 92 is acquired. Executes acquisition and output data. The operation flag and operation timer of each solenoid are acquired, and output data corresponding to the acquired solenoid operation flag and solenoid operation timer is acquired. Next, the solenoid operation timer is updated and the output data is output to the solenoid output port.

In the production control command transmission process (S352), the presence or absence of a request to send a command to be sent to the sub-board 300 is checked, and if it is determined that there is a request to send a command, the requested command data is acquired and the used command buffer is set to 0. Clear, acquire MODE data corresponding to the acquired command data, output MODE data, hold MODE data, acquire EVENT data corresponding to the acquired command data, and output EVENT data in this order.

In the external information output process (S354), a signal to be output to the external information output terminal 160 is created, and the created signal is output to the external information output port.

The random numbers used in the operation process of the main board 200 described above will be explained in more detail. The random numbers used on the main board 200 mainly include a random number per normal symbol and a normal symbol variation pattern random number as random numbers related to the normal symbol, and a random number per special symbol (hard random number) as the random number related to the special symbol. , soft random numbers per special symbol, random symbol numbers per special symbol, and variable pattern random numbers. In addition, the initial value random number per normal symbol, the initial value random number per special symbol, and the initial value random number per special symbol are used as random numbers to give the initial values of the initial value update type random numbers. There are random numbers and soft initial value random numbers for each special symbol.

The random number per normal symbol is updated in the initial value update type random number update process (S308) of the interrupt process and stored in a predetermined location of the main RAM 291. The random number per normal symbol is the number of pending normal symbol fluctuations when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the first operating port 31 or the second operating port 32 in the normal symbol activation gate monitoring process (S320) of the interrupt process. is less than the upper limit of 4, it is acquired from a predetermined position in the main RAM 291 and stored in another area of the main RAM 291. The normal symbol random number is used for hit determination and stop symbol determination when it is determined in the normal symbol variation start monitoring process (S324) to start the variation of the normal symbol.

The normal symbol variation pattern random number takes, for example, a value of 0 to 232, is updated in various random number update processes (S306) of the interrupt process, and is stored in a predetermined location of the main RAM 291. The normal symbol fluctuation pattern random number is used to suspend the normal symbol fluctuation when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the first operating port 31 or the second operating port 32 in the normal symbol activation gate monitoring process (S320) of the interrupt process. If the number is less than the upper limit of 4, it is acquired from a predetermined position in the main RAM 291 and stored in another area of the main RAM 291. The normal symbol variation pattern random number is used to determine the normal symbol variation pattern when it is determined to start the variation of the normal symbol in the normal symbol variation start monitoring process (S324).

The random number per special symbol is determined in the start opening monitoring control process (S326) of the interrupt process, when it is confirmed that the game ball has won when the number of balls pending activation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is less than 4. , the value of the built-in random number and the soft random number per special symbol is obtained, and the generated value is generated by adding the two values, and is stored in a predetermined position of the main RAM 291. The special symbol per random number is used to execute the jackpot determination and the small hit determination in the special symbol variation start monitoring control process (S334) of the interrupt process.

The soft random number per special symbol is updated in the initial value update type random number update process (S308) of the interrupt process and stored in a predetermined location of the main RAM 291. The soft random number per special symbol is stored in the main RAM 291 when it is confirmed in the starting opening monitoring control process (S326) that a game ball has won when the number of pending balls of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is less than 4. , and is used to generate a random number per special symbol, as described above.

The symbol random number per special symbol takes a value of, for example, 0 to 999 (0 to 255 in the example of FIG. 7), is updated in the initial value update type random number update process (S308) of the interrupt process, and is stored in a predetermined location in the main RAM 291. Stored. The symbol random number per special symbol is stored in the main RAM 291 when it is confirmed that a game ball has won when the number of pending balls for the first special symbol or the second special symbol is less than 4 in the starting opening monitoring control process (S326). is acquired from a predetermined location and stored in another area of the main RAM 291. The special symbol per symbol random number is used to determine the jackpot symbol when the hit determination is a jackpot in the special symbol variation start monitoring control process (S334) of the interrupt process.

The fluctuation pattern random number takes a value of, for example, 0 to 49999 (0 to 255 in the example of FIG. 8), is updated in various random number update processes (S306) of the interrupt process, and is stored in a predetermined location of the main RAM 291. The fluctuation pattern random number is stored in a predetermined value in the main RAM 291 when it is confirmed that a winning game ball has won when the number of balls on hold for activation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is less than 4 in the starting opening monitoring control process (S326). It is acquired from the location and stored in another area of the main RAM 291. The fluctuation pattern random number is used to determine the special symbol fluctuation pattern in the special symbol control process (S328) of the interrupt process.

The initial value random number per normal symbol, the initial symbol random number per special symbol, and the soft initial value random number per special symbol have values in the same range as the random number per normal symbol, the random symbol per special symbol, and the soft random number per special symbol, respectively. It is updated in the initial value random number update process (S208) of the main process (S120) and the initial value random number update process (S310) of the interrupt process, and is stored in a predetermined location of the main RAM 291. The initial value random number per normal symbol, the initial symbol random number per special symbol, and the soft initial value random number per special symbol are set as the random number per normal symbol, the random symbol per special symbol, and the special random number in the initial value update type random number update process (S308). When updating the soft random numbers per symbol, it is used as the initial value of each random number.

Since the interrupt processing is executed at fixed time intervals by a timer interrupt, various random number update processing (S306) and initial value update type random number update processing (S308) included in the interrupt processing are also executed at fixed time intervals. Ru. That is, the random number per normal symbol, the random number in the normal symbol variation pattern, the random number in each special symbol, the soft random number in each special symbol, the random number in the symbol per special symbol, and the random number in the variation pattern are updated at regular intervals. On the other hand, the main process (S120) takes the time from the end of the interrupt process until the next timer interrupt occurs, that is, from the fixed time measured by the timer to the time required for the interrupt process. It will be repeated for the reduced time. The time required for interrupt processing differs depending on the gaming state, etc., so the initial value random number update process (S208) in the main process (S120) is different from various random number update processes (S306) and initial value update type random number update process (S308). ), it is not executed at regular intervals. Thereby, the initial value random number obtained when setting the initial value in the initial value update type random number update process (S308) can be made random every time.

FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing a control start process for the sub-board 300 in the Pachinko gaming machine. This control start process is executed by the sub-initial process execution means 360, but will be described below assuming that it is executed by the sub CPU 310 functioning as the sub-initial process execution unit 360. When control of the sub-board 300 is started, the sub-CPU 310 sets a stack pointer (S500), prohibits all interrupts until various initial settings are completed (S502), and performs functions such as register settings and port initialization of the sub-CPU 310. Initial settings regarding hardware are executed (S504). The control program is read from the sub-ROM 312 and placed in the sub-RAM 311, and among the various variables in the control program, variables with initial values are set to initial values, and variables without initial values are set to zero-clear data. By doing so, the sub RAM 311 is initialized (S506). Note that the interrupt processing in the sub-board 300 is executed with the highest priority, and includes processing at power-on and reset processing when various abnormalities occur when the watchdog function is enabled. The next highest priority level 7 interrupt process is command processing received from the main board 200, and the second highest priority level 3 interrupt process is CPU runaway detection using a watchdog timer. There is a time reset process. The next priority level 2 interrupt process is processing related to commands sent and received with the control CPU 320, and the lowest priority level 1 interrupt process is communication processing with the real-time clock. There are various device control processes such as lamps, solenoids, motors, etc. If interrupts related to the various processes described above occur at the same time, the interrupts with the highest priority, which is preset for each type of interrupt, are executed first. Note that the processing shown in this figure includes the processing at power startup, which is an interrupt with the highest priority level, the reset processing when various abnormalities occur, and the reset processing when a CPU runaway is detected, which is an interrupt with priority level 3. include.

Interrupts other than commands received from the main board 200 (priority level 7) are prohibited (S510), and various error information to be used for the model is set from all error information for all models stored in advance (S512). . All the lamps including the decorative lamp 111 are turned off (S514), the watchdog timer starts operating (S516), and main processing is executed (S518). Normally, the process does not return to this flow from the main process of S518, but when it returns, it shifts to sleep (low power consumption mode) (S520).

FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing in detail the main processing of S518 in FIG. In order to check whether the control program placed in the sub-RAM 311 in S506 of FIG. 20 is correctly placed in the main process of this figure, the start address at which to start the check is acquired (S530), and in the subsequent process. All interrupts are permitted (S532), and devices such as motors and solenoids are initialized (S534).

If the watchdog timer is set to be used, the watchdog timer is cleared (S536), the decorative pattern counter is updated so that the combination of missing decorative patterns becomes a random combination (S540), and the input port of the sub CPU 310 is updated. (S542). In addition, since S540 is a process in a method that uses a counter to determine the missing decorative symbols, in the case of a method that uses a lottery sheet that incorporates all symbol combinations that result in missing symbols to determine the missing decorative symbols. The process of S540 is not executed. The process of determining the missing decorative symbol using the lottery sheet is executed in S552 when a command indicating a stop symbol of the special symbol is received from the main board 200 as described later. The sub CPU 310 functioning as the sub error detection means 364 monitors the error state, and when detecting various errors, notifies the error (S544), executes processing according to the input state of the production button 109 (S546), A preview lottery is executed (S548). In addition, in the preview lottery in S548, in order to send the command for the preview performance to appear immediately after the start of symbol variation to the production control device 313 as early as possible, the lottery process is not processed in one loop but multiple times. It is divided into loops, and a preview effect that appears immediately after the start of symbol variation is drawn by lottery in the previous loop. If there is an operation request for a device such as a real-time clock, lamp, motor, or solenoid, the operation is executed (S550), the command stored in the command buffer is analyzed (S552), and if the command has just been analyzed, the process proceeds to S536. Returning (Y in S554), if it is not immediately after command analysis (N in S554), the software random number for lottery is updated as a low priority process that can be performed in free time (S556), and the process returns to S536. In addition, in S552, if the command to be analyzed indicates a variation pattern of the special symbol, the variation production pattern of the decorative symbol is determined in this process of S552, and if the command to be analyzed indicates a stop symbol of the special symbol, the lottery sheet is If the method is to use the method of determining the missing decorative symbol, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is determined in the process of S552.

FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing interrupt processing when a command is received from the main board 200. The main command received from the main board 200 is an interrupt command of priority level 7, which has the second highest priority after reset interrupts and error interrupts. The data received from the main board 200 is read to the input port, and when the same data is read twice in a row, the data is confirmed as a new command (Y in S600), and the confirmed command becomes the first command. (MODE data) (Y in S602), the first command is saved in the temporary storage area (S604). A hard random number is obtained for subsequent processing (S606), and the process returns to the original routine. By acquiring a hard random number every time there is an interruption of a main command from the main board 200 in this way, periodicity does not occur in the timing of acquiring random numbers, and the randomness of the values is increased. If the data read in S600 do not match twice in a row (can be read up to 5 times), S602 is skipped and the process returns to the original routine (N in S600).

In S602, if the confirmed command is not the first command but the second command (N in S602), if it is confirmed that the first command has already been properly received (Y in S608), the command buffer (command data The command write pointer, which is the read position in the ring buffer (for ring buffer), is acquired (S610), and the first command and second command are stored in the command buffer (S612). The command data stored in the command buffer is analyzed in S552 of FIG. The command write pointer is updated (S614), the first command stored in the temporary storage area is cleared (S616), and the process returns to the original routine. If the first command has not been received in S608, steps S610 and subsequent steps are skipped (N in S608) and the process returns to the original routine.

FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing an interrupt process when a timer interrupt for effect display control occurs. This timer interrupt is a priority level 2 interrupt for transmitting commands related to effect display from the sub CPU 310 to the control CPU 320, and occurs at a cycle of 500 μs. In this interrupt, the buffer is checked (S620), and if there is command data for transmission in the buffer (Y in S622), the command data is read (S624) and transmitted to the control CPU 320 (S626). Note that transmission of command data to the control CPU 320 is attempted up to three times at predetermined time intervals until the sub CPU 310 receives a command from the control CPU 320 indicating that the command has been normally received on the control CPU 320 side. After transmission, the buffer read address setting is updated (S628) and the process returns to the original routine. If there is no data for transmission in the buffer (N at S622), the process skips S624 and subsequent steps and returns to the original routine.

FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing interrupt processing when sub CPU 310 receives a command from control CPU 320. This interrupt is also a priority level 2 interrupt. The command that the sub CPU 310 receives from the control CPU 320 is mainly a command indicating that the command sent from the sub CPU 310 to the control CPU 320 has been successfully received. When a command is received from the control CPU 320, the received command data is read (S630), the command is analyzed (S632), the command is stored in the command buffer (S634), and the process returns to the original routine.

FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing interrupt processing when a timer interrupt for controlling various devices occurs. This timer interrupt is an interrupt for controlling lamps such as the decorative lamp 111, controlling the solenoids and motors that drive the movable accessory 66, and managing and controlling various timers, and occurs at a cycle of 1 ms. Since this is an interrupt with priority level 1, which has the lowest priority, interrupts with priority level 2 or higher are permitted (S640), and a signal indicating input from the production button 109, a signal indicating error detection, and a signal indicating power outage are generated. , processes the input/output of a port that inputs/outputs a drive signal, etc. to a controlled device such as a motor or a solenoid (S642). At this time, if a signal indicating a power outage is input, the process immediately moves to backup processing. Data related to device control, such as count processing based on control patterns of devices such as motors and solenoids, and on/off control of buffers for writing data to ports in S642, is updated (S644), and a timer is set to measure the timing of the performance. (S646), updates the timer for managing the valid input time of the production button 109 (S648), and updates the task control counter for lighting switching control of the decorative lamp 111, runaway monitoring control of the control CPU 320, etc. A 16 ms cycle is created (S650).

Note that the minimum unit for lighting switching control of the decorative lamp 111 is 16 ms. One frame of image display control is 16 ms or 32 ms, and by setting an integer multiple of that as the minimum unit of lighting switching control of the decorative lamp 111, lamp control and image display control can be easily synchronized. Furthermore, when counting a relatively long period of time, such as a 30 second error notification, if one interrupt (1 ms) period is used, the count value will become longer than necessary; The count value can also be shortened by setting it as a cycle count value.

There are 16 types of tasks in the task control, processes 0 to 15, one of which is lighting switching control of the decorative lamp 111, and two tasks are runaway monitoring control of the control CPU 320. The lighting switching control of the decorative lamp 111 is executed once every 16 interrupts according to the count value of the task control counter, thereby achieving switching at a cycle of 16 ms. The runaway monitoring control of the control CPU 320 is assigned to, for example, processing 0 and processing 8, and monitors the toggle signal from the control CPU 320 when the count value of the task control counter is 0 and 8, that is, once every 8 interrupts (S652). By doing so, monitoring at an 8ms cycle is realized.

Note that the control CPU 320 outputs a toggle signal that is inverted on and off every frame, and if this toggle signal remains the same value for 1600 ms continuously, it is determined that the control CPU 320 is out of control, and the sub CPU 310 The control CPU 320 transmits a reset signal to the control CPU 320, and upon receiving the reset signal, the control CPU 320 executes the reset. Since a toggle signal is received from the control CPU 320 at a cycle of one frame (16 ms or 32 ms), monitoring is performed at a cycle of 8 ms, which is shorter than that cycle. Finally, a timer for managing a relatively long error notification period, such as the above-mentioned error notification for 30 seconds, is subtracted (S654), and the error notification ends when the timeout expires.

FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the process of special symbol variation display. If the second winning lottery value is on hold (Y in S700), the second winning/failure determining means 222 reads out the second winning lottery value and determines whether the second special symbol 52 is correct (S702), and The determining means 222 determines the stop symbol of the second special symbol 52 (S704), the second fluctuation pattern determining means 232 determines the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol 52 (S706), and issues a fluctuation start command together with the determined result. It is transmitted to the sub-board 300 to start symbol variation of the second special symbol 52 (S716).

If the second winning/failure lottery value is not held (N at S700) and the first winning/failure drawing value is held (Y at S708), the first winning/failure determining means 221 selects the first winning/failure drawing. The value is read out and the validity of the first special symbol 51 is determined again (S710), the first validity determination means 221 determines the stop symbol of the first special symbol 51 (S712), and the first variation pattern determination means 231 determines the validity of the first special symbol 51 (S710). A variation pattern of the first special symbol 51 is determined (S714), and a variation start command is sent to the sub board 300 together with the determined result to start symbol variation of the first special symbol 51 (S716). If the first win/fail lottery value is not held, the processes from S710 to S722 are skipped (N in S708).

Process the symbol fluctuation display of the special symbol (S718), repeat S718 until a predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed and the symbol display stop timing is reached (S720 N), and after the predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed, the symbol display will stop. When the timing is reached (Y in S720), a fluctuation stop command is sent to the sub-board 300 to stop the symbol fluctuation being displayed at a predetermined stop symbol (S722), and the special symbol fluctuation display is ended. do.

FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the process of displaying decorative symbols in a variable manner. The effect determining means 303 of the sub-board 300 receives a command indicating the start of variation and the content of effect display from the main board 200 (S750), and stops the decorative pattern according to the received special symbol stop symbol, variation pattern, and validity determination result. A mode is determined (S752), and a variable effect pattern corresponding to the variable pattern is determined (S754). Here, if the precursor setting is turned on by advance determination (Y in S756), the already determined variable performance pattern is a pattern that includes specific performance content that should be avoided from being displayed overlapping with the preview performance. If not (S758, N), and if the symbol change is not the trigger for turning on the omen setting (S760, N), the setting to display a predetermined preview effect is executed (S764), and the omen setting is turned on. If it is the symbol change that was turned on (Y in S760), the omen setting is turned off (S762). If the precursor setting is not on (N at S756) or if the variable performance pattern includes specific performance content (Y at S758), the processing from S760 to S764 is skipped.

Thereafter, the display of the decorative pattern variation effect is started (S766), the process of displaying the variation effect of the decorative pattern (S768), and the display process of the preview effect (S770), until a variation stop command is received from the main board 200. S768 and S770 are repeated (N in S772), and when a fluctuation stop command is received (Y in S772), the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in the stop mode determined in S752, thereby stopping the symbol fluctuation display (S774). ), the variation effect of the decorative pattern is ended (S776).

FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the process of the special game. First, the effect display control means 305 starts the effect processing of the special game (S800), and the opening/closing control means 275 opens the grand prize opening 20 (S802). If the predetermined opening time has not elapsed (N in S804) and the number of balls entering the grand prize opening 20 has not reached 9 or more, the process returns to S804 (N in S806), and whether the predetermined opening time has elapsed ( (Y in S804), although the opening time has not elapsed (N in S804), if the number of balls entering the grand prize opening 20 reaches 9 or more (Y in S806), the opening/closing control means 275 closes the grand prize opening. 20 is closed (S810).

If the unit game has not reached the final round (N in S810), add 1 to the number of rounds and return to S802 (S812), and if the unit game has reached the final round (Y in S810), the effect is displayed. The control means 305 ends the production process of the special game (S814), the special game control means 260 ends the special game (S816), and starts execution of the specific game, that is, the probability change, time saving, easy entry state (S818) ).

FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the process of the small winning game. In the small winning game, a unit game that is executed only once is started (S819), the big prize opening 20 is opened (S820), and the opening is continued until a predetermined opening time has elapsed (N of S822), and the opening is continued. If the time has elapsed (Y in S822), close the big prize opening 20 (S824), and if the set number of openings and closings have not been completed (N in S826), add 1 to the number of openings and closings and return to S820. (S828), if the set number of openings and closings have been completed (Y in S826), the small winning game ends.

In the underlying technology, there are generally more jackpot balls in the second game than jackpot balls in the first game, that is, one jackpot in the second game than in the first game. However, in another example, the first game may be designed to have a higher expected value of winning prize balls than the second game. However, it may be designed so that the expected value of prize ball acquisition in the first game and the second game are approximately equal. In the latter case, the average number of unit games included in the special games executed in the first game and the special games executed in the second game may be designed to be equal. For example, in the first game, a special game is executed in which a unit game is executed 7 times with a 100% probability, and in the second game, a special game is executed in which a unit game is executed 4 times with a 50% probability. However, a special game may be executed in which the unit game is executed 10 times with a probability of 50%. In addition, in any case, a specific area is provided in the grand prize opening, and if the game ball that enters the grand prize opening enters or passes through the specific area, in the normal game after the special game ends. It may be configured such that a specific game such as a variable probability state is performed. In this case, the special game that is executed when a jackpot is achieved in the second game is easier to enter the specific area than the special game that is executed when the jackpot is achieved in the first game. may be configured so that the probability that the normal game with variable probability is executed after the special game is high is high. For example, a first win in which a special game is executed that makes it relatively difficult for the ball to enter a specific area, and a second win in which a special game is executed in which it is relatively easy to enter the specific area. The second game may be configured such that the second game has a higher probability of winning the second win than the first game. Alternatively, the probability of winning the second win in the first game is less than 100%, but the probability of winning the second win in the second game may be 100%.

(First example)
This embodiment proposes suitable control and performance in a pachinko game machine that includes a screen deformation performance as a special performance. Hereinafter, elements that are the same as or correspond to elements constituting the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the base technology will be described with the same reference numerals. In addition, contents that have already been explained in the basic technology will be omitted as appropriate, and mainly contents that are different from the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the basic technology will be explained.

<Special performance>
A screen transformation effect will be explained as a special effect in this embodiment. The screen transformation effect described here applies transformations such as enlargement, reduction, movement, distortion, rocking, color inversion, color conversion, etc. to the frame image included in the video being displayed, along with the frame images placed around it. It's a performance. There are two ways to transform frame images: one is to sequentially transform a single frame image included in the original video (also called "frame static effect"), and the other is to transform multiple frame images included in the original video (also called "frame static effect"). There are cases in which transformations are added to each of them in sequence (also called "frame video effect"). The in-frame still effect freezes the original video that was being displayed and then transforms the frame image at the time when it is frozen.This is a process similar to how a so-called screen capture image is inserted into a frame image as a still image and transformed. It's a performance. The in-frame video performance is a performance in which each frame image of the video being displayed is transformed, and the original video is inserted into the frame image as a video image and transformed. The frame images of the original video are temporarily stored in a frame buffer, and new frame images are sequentially generated by adding transformations such as enlargement, reduction, movement, distortion, fluctuation, color inversion, color conversion, etc. to the frame images. By storing it in the frame buffer, a new moving image is displayed as a screen transformation effect. In this way, by dynamically generating a transformed image for an image of one scene in a moving image, transformed frame images corresponding to many scenes in multiple moving images can be prepared in advance. There is no need for this, and it is possible to diversify performances while suppressing increases in the amount of data and processing load.

First, the screen before the screen transformation effect is executed will be described.
FIG. 30 shows an example of a screen of the effect display device 60. FIG. 30(a) shows a state where fluctuation is stopped. On the performance screen 500 of the performance display device 60, a normal decorative pattern 502 is vertically displayed as a decorative pattern 61 using most of the area in the center, and a simple decorative pattern 504 is vertically displayed as a decorative pattern 61 in the upper right corner. will be displayed in a variable manner. In this way, the decorative pattern 61 of this embodiment includes the normal decorative pattern 502 and the simple decorative pattern 504. The normal decorative pattern 502 is composed of a first normal decorative pattern 502a which is a left pattern, a second normal decorative pattern 502b which is a middle pattern, and a third normal decorative pattern 502c which is a right pattern.

A normal pending image 506 and a simple pending image 507 are displayed as pending images. At the bottom of the production screen 500, a normal pending image 506 is displayed that indicates the number of pending lottery values up to a maximum of four. In the figure, the first normal holding image 506a, the second normal holding image 506b, the third normal holding image 506c, and the fourth normal holding image 506d are arranged from left to right in the order of ball entry (that is, the order in which fluctuations start). are displayed horizontally. The first normal pending image 506a, the second normal pending image 506b, the third normal pending image 506c, and the fourth normal pending image 506d are normally displayed as images imitating a ball that lights up in a predetermined color (for example, blue). Each pending image lights up in a color corresponding to the high jackpot expectation level when it is determined that the jackpot expectation level is high based on the so-called pre-reading at the time of entering the ball, that is, the preliminary determination information of the lottery value corresponding to each hold. Displays an image imitating a ball. In the example of FIG. 30A, only the third normal pending image 506c is displayed as an image imitating a ball that lights up in a color different from blue (for example, red). This effect of lighting up in a color different from blue due to pre-reading is the pre-reading notice effect in this embodiment. For example, the performance determining means 303 suggests that the normal color "blue" suggests the lowest jackpot expectation, and "green", "red", and "rainbow color" indicate higher jackpot expectations in the order of determines the color of the normally reserved image 506. The number and color (or pattern) of these pending images indicate to the player the number of pending images and the degree of expectation of a jackpot. The symbol variation corresponding to the third normal pending image 506c, which is scheduled to start the symbol variation third, is the symbol variation that is the target of prefetching (the trigger for executing the prefetch notice performance), and is also referred to as a "target variation" hereinafter.

At the right corner of the production screen 500, a simple pending image 507, which is a simplified pending image smaller than the normal pending image 506, is displayed. The simple pending image 507 is an image that numerically indicates the number of displayed normal pending images 506, and in FIG. 30(a), the number "4" is displayed.

FIG. 30(b) shows a state in which symbol variation is being displayed. FIG. 30(b) is a state in which variation is being displayed after the start of symbol variation following the state in FIG. 30(a), and four normal pending images 506a to 4th normal pending image 506d in FIG. 30(a) are displayed. The normal pending images 506 are moved one pending image to the left from their respective positions. The first normal pending image 506a in FIG. 30(a) is moved to the left and displayed as a changing image 508. The fluctuating image 508 is an image showing a lottery value whose symbol is currently fluctuating, and is larger in diameter than the normal pending image 506, has a background pattern displayed around it, and is distinguished from the normal pending image 506 when the symbol is fluctuating. It is emphasized that Note that the changing image 508 and the normal pending image 506 are not different image data, but are common image data. Specifically, the image data includes only the image data of the changing image 508, and the normal pending image 506 is displayed by reducing the image data of the changing image 508. The second normal pending image 506b, the third normal pending image 506c, and the fourth normal pending image 506d in FIG. 3 becomes the normal pending image 506c. The first normal decorative pattern 502a has already finished its variable display and is displayed in a temporarily stopped state, that is, in a state in which it is substantially stopped but is slightly oscillating and its stop is not yet determined. The second normal decorative pattern 502b is rotating at high speed. The third normal decorative pattern 502c is in a state of rotating at a low speed and about to come to a stop after rotating at a high speed. The simple decorative pattern 504 is rotating at high speed, and when the first normal decorative pattern 502a, the second normal decorative pattern 502b, and the third normal decorative pattern 502c all stop (determined stop), the simple decorative pattern 504 also stops (determined stop). (stopped). Note that a fixed stop refers to a stop mode in which, unlike a temporary stop, there is no slight rocking and there is no slight movement. However, if the normal decorative pattern 502 is composed of numbers (or letters or symbols) and a pattern depicting human or animal characters, and the simple decorative pattern 504 is composed only of numbers (or letters or symbols). , the numbers (or letters or symbols) that are the simple decorative pattern 504 do not temporarily stop, but only make a definite stop, and at the time of a definite stop, there is no small swing and no slight movement. On the other hand, the normal decorative pattern 502 can be temporarily stopped, and when it is temporarily stopped, the numbers (or letters or symbols) and the pattern are slightly oscillated, and when it is fixed, the numbers (or letters or symbols) are also The pattern also does not make small movements and does not move slightly, but after a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the fixed stop, at least one of the numbers (or letters or symbols) or the pattern will stop at the fixed stop. However, small movements are made.

The simple hold image 507 displayed at the right corner of the production screen 500 is an image that numerically indicates the number of displayed normal hold images 506, and in FIG. 30(b), the number "3" is displayed. The movable accessory 520 is a movable decorative lamp with a logo of the model title of this game machine, and when operated at a predetermined timing, it visually suggests that the expectation of a jackpot is high. Although details will be described later, there are a plurality of movable accessories in this embodiment in addition to the movable accessory 520.

FIG. 31 schematically shows an example of contraction of a frame image in a screen transformation effect. FIG. 31(a) shows a state in which an enemy character 512 appears at a predetermined timing in a predetermined symbol variation production such as a super reach production whose motif is a story in which a battle with an enemy character 512 takes place. Note that while such a predetermined symbol variation effect (super reach effect) is being executed, it is preferable to hide the normal pending image 506 and the changing image 508 as shown in FIG. The middle image 508 may continue to be displayed even when the normally reserved image 506 is not displayed. For example, when a super reach effect develops, the pending image 506 is normally not displayed, but the changing image 508 is configured to be displayed during at least a part of the execution period (for example, the first half) of the super reach effect. You may. Furthermore, during execution of such a predetermined symbol variation effect (super reach effect, etc.), as shown in FIG. In the case of a normal decorative pattern 502 consisting of and a picture, it may continue to be displayed (as only numbers). For example, when a super reach performance develops, the normal decorative pattern 502 is configured to be displayed in a reach mode in a small size and/or with only numbers during at least a part of the execution period (for example, the first half period) of the super reach performance. You may. Here, when performing an in-frame static effect as a screen transformation effect, as shown in FIG. 31(b), the image of the enemy character 512 that has been displayed on the screen as shown in FIG. 31(a) is frozen, The still frame image is reduced to a slightly smaller size, and a frame image 510 like a picture frame that has not been displayed until then is displayed around the reduced frame image. Although not particularly shown in the figure, when performing an in-frame video effect as a screen transformation effect, similar to the in-frame static effect, each of the multiple frame images included in the original video is sequentially subjected to deformation processing such as reduction. A plurality of frame images will also be included in the transformation target unless otherwise mentioned. Note that at least a portion of this frame image 510 may be displayed in advance (for example, a part of the area closer to the inside of the frame image 510 may be displayed). The inside of the frame image 510 will be referred to as an in-frame image 514 hereinafter. Here, the frame image 510 that was not displayed on the effect screen 500 in the state of FIG. 31(a) is displayed around the in-frame image 514 in the state of FIG. 31(b). Although the display control process itself is actually being executed by the effect display control means 305 even at the time of FIG. This is an image portion that was not displayed on the production screen 500 and was not visualized. Note that, as shown in the figure, in this embodiment, the entire frame image 510 is visualized, but only the upper part of the frame image 510 is visualized (that is, the other part is invisible). Alternatively, only the left and right portions of the frame image 510 may be made visible (that is, the top and bottom portions may be invisible).

Here, the in-frame image 514 obtained by reducing the frame image in FIG. 31(a) does not include the simple decorative pattern 504 and the simple reserved image 507. That is, the simple decorative pattern 504 and the simple pending image 507 are not subject to the screen transformation effect, and are displayed in a layer on the front side of the layer in which the screen transformation effect is displayed. The normal decorative pattern 502, the normal pending image 506, and the changing image 508, which were displayed at the stage of FIG. That is, by hiding the normal decorative pattern 502 while continuing to display the simple decorative pattern 504, the display of the decorative pattern is ensured (it is possible to recognize whether or not it is changing), and the normal reserved image 506 and The display of the pending image is ensured by continuing to display the simple pending image 507 while the changing image 508 is hidden. ). In a modified example, the normal decorative pattern 502 and the changing image 508 may also be included in the frame image 514 to be transformed. In other words, as described above, when the normal decorative pattern 502 and the fluctuating image 508 are configured to continue to be displayed even in a predetermined symbol variation performance (such as a super reach performance), the normal decorative symbol 502 and the fluctuating image 508 are displayed within the frame. It may also be included in the image 514 and used as a target for screen transformation effects. In addition, the normal pending image 506 is also configured to be continuously displayed in a predetermined pattern variation effect (super reach effect, etc.), and is included in the frame image 514 like the normal decorative pattern 502 and the changing image 508, and the screen is deformed. It can also be used as a performance target. The frame image 514 is an image obtained by reducing the frame image in FIG. 31(a) as described above, and in addition, inverting the colors (also referred to as "negative-positive inversion"). The frame image 514 and the frame image 510 are objects to be subjected to subsequent transformation processing, and are therefore referred to as target objects 516.

FIG. 32 schematically shows an example of swinging of a frame image in a screen deformation effect. After the target object 516 is further reduced in size than the state shown in FIG. 31(b), the object that has been changed two-dimensionally is further changed in the depth direction and transformed three-dimensionally. As a result, the target object 516 is displayed on one side of the three-dimensional object as a frame image of the moving image that had been displayed until just before (in the case of a static effect within the frame, an image such as a captured image of a still moving image of the effect). If it is an in-frame video production, the image will look like a pasted or projected frame image that changes one after another. As shown, the target object 516 has a shape in which a frame image 514 is placed inside a curved frame image 510, and although it is not a strict rectangle, it will be assumed to be rectangular for convenience of explanation, and its shape will be The left end side will be referred to as the left side, the right end side as the right side, the upper end side as the upper side, and the lower end side as the lower side. In FIG. 32A, four-vertex transformation is performed to make the left side of the target object 516 appear to be moved toward the front and the right side to appear to be moved toward the back. That is, the left side is lengthened, the right side is shortened, the upper and lower interior angles of the left side are made smaller than a right angle, and the upper and lower interior angles of the right side are transformed into a trapezoid that is larger than the right angle. In FIG. 32(b), 4-vertex deformation is performed to make it appear as if the right side of the target object 516 is moved toward the front and the left side is moved toward the back. That is, the right side is lengthened, the left side is shortened, the upper and lower interior angles of the right side are made smaller than a right angle, and the left side is transformed into a trapezoid with upper and lower interior angles larger than the right angle. By alternately repeating the states of FIGS. 32(a) and 32(b) at high speed, the left side and right side can be alternately rotated back and forth in the front and rear directions, making it appear as if the target object 516 is shaking.

<First aspect>
(Feature 1) The performance determining means 303 determines whether or not to perform a screen transformation performance as the performance content to be displayed on the performance screen 500 of the performance display device 60 according to a variation pattern. The screen transformation effect is a new frame image that is created by combining at least an image of the target object 516 obtained by transforming the frame image stored in the frame buffer 338 at a predetermined timing, a background image 518, and an image showing the game situation. are sequentially generated and stored in the frame buffer 338 to be displayed as a moving image. Here, the background image 518 is solid black (black paint), but the display mode is not limited to this, for example, a display in which a moving image with the word "CHANCE" flowing like a telop is played in a loop. It may also be a mode.

FIG. 33 schematically shows the layer structure of the effect screen 500 in the screen transformation effect. The layer structure of the effect screen 500 includes an error display layer 521, a volume light amount display layer 522, a game situation layer 523, a effect layer 524, and a background layer 525 in this order from the front to the back. The error display layer 521 at the forefront displays an error warning image 536 that indicates that an error has occurred and the type of error. The next layer, the volume/light level display layer 522, displays a volume setting image 532 showing an interface for volume adjustment by the player, and a light level setting image 534 showing an interface for light volume adjustment by the player. Ru.

The next layer, the game status layer 523, displays images such as, for example, a simple decorative pattern 504, a simple pending image 507, a changing image 508, and a guide display 530 that guides right-handed players, and the display contents are constantly updated. . As a modification, the changing image 508 may be displayed on the effect layer 524 instead of the game situation layer 523. The next layer, the effect layer 524, is a layer in which changes in the normal decorative pattern 502, the normal reserved image 506, and the target object 516 are mainly displayed. Although the shape, color, and display position of the target object 516 are constantly updated, the contents of the frame image 514 included in the target object 516 may be subject to changes such as deformation or movement in the case of static production such as screen capture. The content is fixed unless otherwise specified, and in the case of an effect in which a moving image is inserted into the frame image 514, the frame images included in the original video are sequentially inserted. The normal decorative pattern 502 and the normal reserved image 506 may be transformed as part of the target object 516 in the screen transformation effect. Furthermore, as described above, if the changing image 508 is displayed on the effect layer 524 instead of the gaming situation layer 523, the changing image 508 will also be displayed as part of the target object 516 in the screen transforming effect. It may also be a target. The last background layer 525 is a solid black background image 518. By displaying the background image 518 on the background layer 525, it is possible to make it look like a three-dimensional space with a sense of depth, and the target object 516 displayed on the rendering layer 524 can also be made to look three-dimensional. The effect images that can be displayed on the effect display device 60 include at least one or more first images belonging to the first image group and one or more second images belonging to the second image group, and in the screen transformation effect, A special first image obtained by deforming the first image in a predetermined manner and a second image not deformed in the predetermined manner are displayed. The first image group refers to images that constitute a transformation target effect described later, that is, a collection of images that are categorized as images that are subject to transformation processing, and the second image group refers to images that constitute a transformation target effect described later. It refers to a collection of images that are categorized as images other than the constituent images, that is, images that are not subject to transformation processing. The first image is an image that can be transformed in the screen transformation effect, and is an image that can be displayed on the effect layer 524. The first image group includes, for example, the target object 516 as the first image, and may further include the normal decorative pattern 502 and the normal reserved image 506. The second image is an image that is not subject to transformation in the screen transformation effect, and is an image that is displayed in a layer other than the effect layer 524. The second image group includes, for example, a simple decorative pattern 504, a simple pending image 507, a changing image 508, and a guide display 530 as second images. The special first image is, for example, the target object 516 after transformation, and when the normal decorative pattern 502 or the normal pending image 506 is the object of transformation in the screen transformation effect, the normal decorative pattern 502 after the transformation or the normal pending image 506 after the transformation An image 506 may also be included.

(Feature 2) The effect determining means 303 selects one of a plurality of types of variable effect patterns as the variable effect pattern. The plurality of types of fluctuating performance patterns include a fluctuating performance pattern that is a target for executing a screen transformation performance in the performance process, and a fluctuating performance pattern that is not a target for performing a screen transformation performance. The variable performance pattern that is the target of the screen transformation performance may be defined so that the screen transformation performance may or may not be executed depending on a separate lottery result, or the screen transformation performance may always be executed. may be defined as As a result, even if the variable performance pattern is the same, or even if the progress of the performance is the same up to the middle, it is possible to make the performance look different depending on whether or not the screen transformation performance is executed from the middle. . For example, in the case of the flow of a performance that develops into a super reach performance, the performance may be as follows: "Start of fluctuation → Formation of reach state → Development of super reach performance → No screen deformation performance during super reach performance → End of super reach performance → End of fluctuation" The process flow may be one of the following: "Start of variation → Formation of reach state → Development of super reach performance → Screen deformation performance occurs during super reach performance → End of super reach performance → End of fluctuation."

The performance determining means 303 selects one of a plurality of types of preview performance patterns as the preview performance pattern. Multiple types of preview performance patterns include preview performances that are subject to screen transformation performance during the production process (for example, in addition to the above-mentioned production that freezes the enemy character during the super reach performance, A step-up preview performance that is part of the preview performance, etc.) and a preview performance that is not the target of the screen transformation performance (for example, a preview performance that is part of the preview performance before reaching the reach state, where the normal decorative pattern 502 temporarily stops and then A preview effect pattern in which a special normal decorative pattern 502 (for example, a normal decorative pattern 502 with the word "NEXT" attached) is displayed during a pseudo-continuous effect that changes again in the above-mentioned super reach. (such as a preview performance pattern in which the movable accessory 520 is driven after the performance in which the enemy character is made to stand still is completed, and the screen is displayed in a rainbow color accordingly). The preview performance that is the target of the screen transformation performance may be defined such that the screen transformation performance may or may not be executed depending on a separate lottery result, or may be defined such that the screen transformation performance is always executed. may be defined as follows. Thereby, even with the same preview effect pattern, the way the effect is presented can be made different depending on whether the screen transformation effect is executed or not. Note that the performances that are the execution targets of the screen transformation performance, that is, the symbol variation performances and preview performances in which the screen transformation performance can be executed during the performance process, are hereinafter referred to as "transformation target performances."

(Feature 3) The performance determining means 303 uses so-called pre-reading to indicate in advance the high degree of expectation that the determination result of the winning lottery will be a hit, triggered by the occurrence of a hold corresponding to a new ball entering the starting hole. It is determined whether or not to execute the preview performance according to the advance judgment information (the advance information transmitted from the main board 200 as the main control device when a new ball enters the ball). In addition, the degree of expectation that the screen transformation effect will be executed differs depending on the mode of the advance notice effect (preread notice). In other words, if a hold related to a target change is a hold related to a change in which a screen deformation effect is scheduled to be executed, or a hold related to a change that has a high probability of a screen deformation effect being executed (furthermore, (If the preview effect that is the target of the screen transformation effect is a hold related to a change to be executed), a preview with a higher expectation level than when there is no such hold (if it is a hold change effect described later, the blue color The red normal pending image 506 is a look-ahead preview with higher expectations than the normal pending image 506). In this case, even if the performance pattern is the same, it is preferable to configure the system so that the expectation of a jackpot is higher when the screen transformation effect is executed than when the screen transformation effect is not executed, for example. , it is better to perform the effect that makes the enemy character stand still during the super reach effect (screen deformation effect is executed) than to perform the effect that makes the enemy character stand still during the super reach effect (the screen deformation effect is executed). It is preferable to configure the system so that the expectation of a jackpot is higher than when the enemy character does not stand still and the enemy character does not stand still. For example, the preview performance based on pre-reading is a performance (pending change performance) that suggests the expectation level of a jackpot or execution of a screen transformation performance by the lighting color of the normal pending image 506 corresponding to the target change targeted for pre-reading, as shown in FIG. ). Thereby, the ease with which the screen transformation effect is executed can be made different depending on the type of advance notice effect, that is, the lighting color of the normal pending image 506. For example, it is better to display the red normal pending image 506 (for example, jackpot expectation level 50%) than the blue normal hold image 506 (for example, jackpot expectation level 10%) in terms of the target fluctuation that is the target of the look-ahead. Screen transformation effects are easily performed. Such a holding change effect may be performed not only as the normal holding image 506 but also as the changing image 508. For example, when the first normal holding image 506a moves and becomes the changing image 508, (1) The first normal pending image 506a displays the blue normal pending image 506, and the changing image 508 also displays the blue normal pending image 506 (more precisely, the blue changing image 508). It can be understood that the expected jackpot is 10%, and (2) the first normal pending image 506a displays the blue normal pending image 506, and the fluctuating image 508 displays the red normal pending image 506 (more precisely, By displaying the red fluctuation image 508), it can be understood that the jackpot expectation level of the current fluctuation has increased from 10% to 50%. In addition, when a variable performance pattern that is the target of the screen transformation performance is selected, whether or not to execute the screen transformation performance is determined at the start of the symbol fluctuation by that fluctuation performance pattern, and the look-ahead that has been executed up to the start of the fluctuation The probability of executing the screen transformation effect differs depending on the type of notice. As a modified example, at the time when the pre-read notice is executed (at the time when the execution of the pre-read notice is decided), it is determined whether or not to execute the screen transformation effect based on the variation (target variation) that triggered the execution of the pre-read notice. You can.

(Feature 4) The degree of expectation that the screen transformation effect will be executed differs depending on the manner of the preview effect of the change. The fluctuation mentioned here means the current fluctuation, and if a look-ahead notice has been executed, it is the change (target change) that triggered the execution of the look-ahead notice, and the change that has triggered the execution of the look-ahead notice. It is not the fluctuation that is running (the fluctuation before the target). In addition, the aspect of the preview performance of the change referred to here is the mode of the preview performance (excluding the screen transformation performance) that is executed in the variation in which the preview performance that is the target of the screen transformation performance is executed, and is the mode of the preview performance (excluding screen transformation performance). It should be noted that this is not the mode of the preview effect, that is, it is not the mode of the preview effect in a change that precedes the change in which the preview effect that is the target of the screen transformation effect is executed. In addition, whether or not to execute the preview effect of the change and its mode, and whether to execute the preview effect and whether to execute the screen change effect that is the target of the screen transformation effect are both determined by separate drawings at the start of the change. . In this way, even when a variable performance pattern that is a target for performing a screen transformation performance is selected, the screen transformation performance is not always executed. For example, as a form of the preview performance of the change, a dialogue preview performance that displays the dialogue of the appearing character in the form of a speech bubble (this dialogue preview performance is a preview performance that is the target of the screen transformation performance in the change) When the speech bubble is executed at a timing earlier than when the speech bubble is executed), the expectation of execution of the screen transformation effect is higher when the color of the speech bubble is a giraffe pattern (a display mode with higher expectation of jackpot than blue) than when the color of the speech bubble is blue. It may be configured such that the degree is high. As a modified example, at the start of the variation, the execution or non-execution of the preview performance of the change, its mode, the execution of the preview performance that is the target of the screen transformation performance, and the execution or non-execution of the screen transformation performance are determined all at once in the same lottery at the start of the change. You may.

Depending on whether or not the screen transformation effect is executed, even if the content of the progress of the effect is the same, the presentation can be made different. Further, by combining the presentation contents of the look-ahead preview and the presentation contents of target variation, which are executed in advance, expectations regarding the difference in presentation of the presentation can be made gradual. Note that the above-mentioned pending change effect and dialogue preview effect can be executed both during target variation and variation before the target. For example, by displaying the red normal pending image 506 in advance preview, the screen transformation effect can be executed. After making it appear that expectations are high, it is possible to make it appear as if the expectations for execution of the screen transformation effect are low by displaying a blue speech bubble in a target change effect. Further, for example, after displaying the blue normal pending image 506 in the pre-read preview to make it appear that there is low expectation for execution of the screen transformation effect, the screen is transformed by displaying a speech bubble with a giraffe pattern in the target change effect. It is possible to make it appear as if the level of expectation for execution of the performance has increased. In the modified example, a series of processes from the start of execution of a look-ahead notice (change before the target) to a target change, or a series of processes from a look-ahead notice to the execution timing of a screen transformation effect at a target change are determined all at once. If this is made into a specification, it is possible to prevent the degree of execution expectations of the screen transformation performance from being hindered midway through.

<Second aspect>
FIG. 34 schematically shows the process of the movable accessory performance that is executed in parallel with the screen transformation performance. FIG. 34(a) shows the initial stage of the operation of the movable accessory 520, and FIG. 34(b) shows the state in which the movable accessory 520 is in operation. The movable accessory 520 in this embodiment includes a first movable accessory 520a, a second movable accessory 520b, a third movable accessory 520c, and a fourth movable accessory 520d. The first movable accessory 520a is a movable decorative lamp in which the logo of the model title of this gaming machine is modeled, and is designed to fall downward at a predetermined timing during a predetermined presentation as shown in FIG. 34(b). By moving a lot, it visually suggests that the expectation of a jackpot is high. The second movable accessory 520b and the third movable accessory 520c are scissor arm-shaped decorative members, and as shown in FIG. The third movable accessory 520c extends from the right side of the performance screen 500 to the center of the performance screen 500, thereby visually suggesting that the expectation of a jackpot is high. The fourth movable accessory 520d is a decorative lamp shaped like a saw blade, and can be moved in a large manner so as to loom upward as shown in FIG. 34(b) at a predetermined timing during a predetermined performance. , which visually suggests that there is a high expectation of winning the jackpot. As shown in FIG. 34(b), in the simple decorative pattern 504 and the simple reserved image 507, all of the first movable accessory 520a, the second movable accessory 520b, the third movable accessory 520c, and the fourth movable accessory 520d are It is displayed in a position where visibility is not obstructed even when it is in operation. In addition, by configuring that none of the movable accessories moves, that is, at the initial position, when the fluctuation stops and during a predetermined period of time until the fluctuation stops (for example, from 2 seconds before the fluctuation stops until the fluctuation stops), More reliable visibility can be ensured at least at the boundary between games (that is, when the game progress is temporarily stopped). In addition, as a modification, the simple decorative pattern 504 and the simple reservation image 507 are at least one of the first movable accessory 520a, the second movable accessory 520b, the third movable accessory 520c, and the fourth movable accessory 520d. The movable accessory may be displayed at a position where its visibility is not obstructed when the movable accessory is in operation. For example, the simple decorative pattern 504 and the simple reserved image 507 are displayed in a position where visibility is obstructed when the third movable accessory 520c is in operation, but visibility is not obstructed when the other movable accessory is in operation. In such a configuration, the frequency at which the third movable accessory 520c operates is such that any one of the first movable accessory 520a, the second movable accessory 520b, and the fourth movable accessory 520d operates. It is preferable that the frequency is lower than the frequency, and it is also preferable that the time during which the third movable accessory 520c operates within one fluctuation is shorter than the time during which the third movable accessory 520c does not operate. be. In such a configuration, in all variation patterns (variation time), the time during which the third movable accessory 520c operates within one variation is shorter than the time during which the third movable accessory 520c does not operate. It is more preferable to do so.

(Feature 5) The movable accessory 520 is provided in the vicinity of the effect display device 60, and operates in an effect manner in conjunction with the effect displayed on the effect display device 60. The presence or absence of the movement of the movable accessory 520 and the execution or non-execution of the screen transformation effect are associated so that the display of the screen transformation effect and the operation of the movable accessory 520 are relatively frequently executed in parallel. . For example, screen deformation effects are more effective than other types of effects that do not involve screen deformation effects (e.g., capture effects, reversal effects, step-up previews, dialogue previews, pending change effects, group previews, etc.), and are more effective when using movable characters. 520 are often executed concurrently. Further, for example, the screen transformation effect is more often accompanied by the movement of the movable accessory 520 than when it is not accompanied by the movement of the movable accessory 520. The performance control means 304 operates the movable accessory 520 according to whether or not the movable accessory 520 operates as determined by the performance determination means 303. By linking the screen transformation effect and the movement of the movable accessory 520 in this manner, it is possible to further enhance the three-dimensional effect and dynamic feeling of the effect content displayed on the effect display device 60 when executing the screen transformation effect. That is, not only a three-dimensional effect and dynamic movement are expressed in the displayed effect content, but also a three-dimensional effect and a dynamic sense are expressed in the surroundings of the effect display device 60. On the other hand, in a screen transformation performance that does not involve the movement of the movable accessory 520, by refraining from the movement of the movable accessory 520, the content of the screen transformation performance itself can be made more prominent. In addition, when the state in which the movable accessory 520 is in operation is viewed from the front, the first movable accessory 520a, the second movable accessory 520b, the third movable accessory 520c, and the fourth movable accessory are shown in FIG. 520d operates so as to have a position and shape that does not obstruct the visibility of the simple decorative pattern 504.

(Feature 6) The decorative patterns include a normal decorative pattern 502 that is displayed as a main pattern on the effect display device 60 at least when the special pattern is stopped, and a normal decorative pattern 502 that is displayed as a main pattern on the effect display device 60 at least when the normal decorative pattern 502 is difficult to see. A simple decorative pattern 504 displayed in a simplified display format is included. The normal decorative pattern 502 is a pattern displayed in a larger size than the simple decorative pattern 504. The normal decorative pattern 502 is composed of three symbols, and as a general rule, each symbol is stopped one by one after being displayed in a variable manner. The simple decorative pattern 504 is also composed of three symbols, but the three symbols are stopped at the same time after being displayed in a variable manner. As the combination of stop symbols of the simple decorative pattern 504, the same combination as the combination of stop symbols of the normal decorative pattern 502 is displayed.
Note that during the execution of the super reach effect, the normal decorative pattern 502 may be configured to be displayed in a small size (an alternative pattern may be displayed) for at least a part of the period, or the normal decorative pattern 502 may be hidden ( However, in such a situation, the simple decorative pattern 504 is always displayed in a variable manner. This simple decorative pattern 504 is displayed in a small size at the upper right of the effect display device 60, and is displayed in a variable manner while the special symbol is changing, and is displayed in a stopped state while the special symbol is stopped. As with the normal decorative pattern 502, three patterns are displayed in a variable manner and in a stationary manner. By providing this simple decorative pattern 504, a situation in which the normal decorative pattern 502 is desired to be made smaller or hidden (for example, when performing a super reach effect, the center of the effect display device 60 is Even if the number is hidden (for example, the result is hidden), it is possible to notify that the result is changing (in other words, that the result of acceptance or rejection has not been determined). In other words, this simple decorative pattern 504 can be said to be a pattern for display guarantee (for compensating the display state of the normal decorative pattern 502). In addition, when this simple decorative pattern 504 is displayed in a variable manner, it is preferable that the variable display is always continued from the start of the variation of the special pattern until the stop display is performed, that is, the normal decorative pattern 502 temporarily stops on the way. Even if the special normal decorative pattern 502 displaying characters such as "NEXT" is temporarily stopped when performing a pseudo-continuous performance, the simple decorative pattern 504 will not be temporarily stopped midway. (Therefore, the simple decorative pattern 504 is not provided with a special pattern that displays characters such as "NEXT", and the simple decorative pattern 504 only performs a fixed stop), and , In order to prevent players from mistakenly thinking that a winning fluctuation is a jackpot, and to prevent players from knowing that it is a jackpot in advance if it is a jackpot fluctuation, whether it is a losing fluctuation or a jackpot fluctuation, (For example, if the type of the simple decorative pattern 504 is "1" to "7", "123" → "234" → "345" → "456" ” → “567” → “671” → “712” → “123” → etc.) is preferable. Furthermore, when the normal decorative pattern 502 and the simple decorative pattern 504 start to fluctuate from a fixed stop, the symbol combination that becomes the starting point (the first symbol combination immediately after the start of fluctuation) is one step from the symbol combination at the fixed stop. However, if the simple decorative pattern 504 starts to fluctuate from a fixed stop, the starting point of the pattern combination will be a predetermined pattern combination, regardless of the combination at the fixed stop. . For example, when the normal decorative pattern 502 and the simple decorative pattern 504 start to fluctuate in a situation where both the number combinations related to the normal decorative pattern 502 and the simple decorative pattern 504 are fixed and stopped at "243", the normal decorative pattern 502 and the simple decorative pattern 504 start to fluctuate. The starting point of the symbol combination is "354", but the starting point of the simple decorative symbol 504 is fixed at "123", and both the number combinations of the normal decorative symbol 502 and the simple decorative symbol 504 are "333". When the normal decorative pattern 502 and the simple decorative pattern 504 start to fluctuate in a situation where the normal decorative pattern 502 and the simple decorative pattern 504 are fixed and stopped at "444", the pattern combination that is the starting point of the normal decorative pattern 502 is "444", but the starting point of the simple decorative pattern 504 is The symbol combination is fixed at "123". In addition to this, the role of the simple decorative pattern 504 can be clearly differentiated from that of the normal decorative pattern 502 by having the following characteristics.
(1) The display area of the normal decorative pattern 502 that is easy for the player to recognize is larger than the display area of the simple decorative pattern 504 for display guarantee (for compensating the display state of the normal decorative pattern 502). This is a situation where the normal decorative pattern 502 and the simple decorative pattern 504 are fixed and stopped, and the normal decorative pattern 502 is just after forming a reach state (a reach state without developing into a super reach effect), and a simple decoration. The symbol 504 is not limited to the situation where it is being displayed in a variable manner, but also in the situation where the normal decorative symbol 502 is a small symbol such as during a super reach effect, and the simple decorative symbol 504 is in a situation where it is being displayed in a variable manner. It is preferable to configure it as follows.
(2) The display position of the normal decorative pattern 502 is in the first production mode (for example, normal mode or stage A in normal mode) or in the second production mode (for example, rush mode or stage B in normal mode) By setting the display position to be different depending on the display mode, it is possible to realize a variety of presentations with the normal decorative pattern 502 depending on the presentation mode. On the other hand, since the simple decorative pattern 504 only has to play the role of compensating the display state of the normal decorative pattern 502, it is unnecessary to use the same display position regardless of whether it is in the first presentation mode or the second presentation mode. It is preferable to eliminate the need for extensive development and design. Note that the details of the production mode will be described later.
(3) The display mode of the normal decorative pattern 502 is the first production mode (for example, normal mode or stage A in normal mode) or the second production mode (for example, rush mode or stage B in normal mode) By using different display modes depending on the display mode, it is possible to realize a variety of presentations with the normal decorative pattern 502 depending on the presentation mode. For example, in the first presentation mode, the normal decorative pattern 502 is composed of only the normal decorative pattern 502 of numbers (normal decorative patterns 502 such as "1", "2", ..., "7"), and in the second presentation mode, A normal decorative pattern 502 is constructed by combining the normal decorative pattern 502 of numbers and the normal decorative pattern 502 of an ally character ("1" + "character a", "2" + "character b", ..., "7"+"Characterg" (normal decorative pattern 502). On the other hand, since the simple decorative pattern 504 only has to play the role of compensating the display state of the normal decorative pattern 502, the same display mode is required regardless of whether it is the first presentation mode or the second presentation mode. For example, it is preferable to configure the simple decorative pattern 504 with only the normal decorative pattern 502 of numbers, so that unnecessary development and design can be avoided.
(4) The display area of the normal decorative pattern 502 changes (moves, becomes a small pattern) depending on the fluctuation situation (for example, whether or not the normal reach is in progress, whether the super reach effect is in progress, etc.) By doing so, it is possible to give variety to the presentation of the normal decorative pattern 502. On the other hand, since the simple decorative pattern 504 only needs to play the role of compensating the display state of the normal decorative pattern 502, the display area of the simple decorative pattern 504 is not changed (does not move, does not become a small pattern), so that unnecessary unnecessary It is preferable to eliminate the need for development design.
(5) The normal decorative pattern 502 can vary in speed, such as slow, medium, high, or ultra-high, depending on the fluctuation situation (for example, whether it is at the start of the fluctuation, in the middle of the fluctuation, or just before the end of the fluctuation, etc.) By doing so, it is possible to give variety to the presentation of the normal decorative pattern 502. On the other hand, since the simple decorative pattern 504 only needs to play the role of compensating the display state of the normal decorative pattern 502, the speed of variation of the simple decorative pattern 504 is not variable, or the number of steps in which it is variable is reduced (for example, low speed It is preferable to avoid unnecessary development and design by using only high speed and high speed). Regarding the direction of variation, the normal decorative pattern 502 allows variation not only from top to bottom but also from bottom to top (varies in multiple directions), while the simple decorative pattern 504 , it is preferable to make the fluctuation only from top to bottom.
(6) The normal decorative pattern 502 is a temporary stop (a temporary stop during the fluctuation of the special pattern, which is a temporary stop accompanied by minute fluctuations) before a fixed stop (a stop at the timing when the special pattern stops). At that time, a specific pattern that is a normal decorative pattern 502 other than numbers (for example, a normal decorative pattern 502 with the word "super" written on it that foretells the development to a super reach effect) is temporarily stopped. By doing so, it is possible to create a relationship between the presentation of the normal decorative pattern 502 and other presentations. On the other hand, since the simple decorative pattern 504 only needs to play the role of compensating the display state of the normal decorative pattern 502, the simple decorative pattern 504 is not required to temporarily stop or temporarily stop the specific pattern. It is preferable to eliminate the need for extensive development and design.
(7) The normal decorative pattern 502 overlaps with the display area of other preview effects (for example, comment preview effects, step-up preview effects, etc.), that is, is displayed in a superimposed manner. In order to use as much of the area on the performance display device 60 as possible to create a powerful performance, such superimposed display is allowed. In order to achieve this, it is desirable that the display area of the simple decorative pattern 504 be designed so as not to overlap (not be displayed in a superimposed manner) with the display area of the other preview effects. However, regarding the relationship with special preview effects that inevitably overlap (for example, a group preview effect displayed on the entire effect display device 60, a background preview effect, etc.), the display priority of the simple decorative pattern 504 may be changed to the corresponding one. It is preferable to set the display priority higher than the display priority of the special preview performance (set so that the simple decorative pattern 504 is displayed in front of the special preview performance). In addition, a right-handed hitting notification image (a right-handed hitting notification image exclusively for the high base state that is displayed during the high base state, unlike the image displayed during the special game; however, it may be an image that is common to the image during the special game) ) is also desirably visible to the player, so it is desirable to design so that the display area of the simple decorative pattern 504 and the display area of the right-hand hit notification image do not overlap (do not display in an overlapping manner). . However, if the display area of the normal decorative pattern 502 is moved or expanded, the display area of the normal decorative pattern 502 and the display area of the right-hand hit notification image may be overlapped (displayed in a superimposed manner). In that case, the display priority of the normal decorative pattern 502 should be set lower than the display priority of the right-handed hitting notification image (set so that the normal decorative pattern 502 is displayed behind the right-handed hitting notification image). is suitable.
(8) During the special game, only one normal decorative pattern 502 may be displayed instead of a combination display. For example, if a special game is executed after "777" has been confirmed and stopped, "7" will be displayed during the special game, and if a special game is executed after "222" has been confirmed and stopped, "2" is displayed during the special game. Thereby, it is possible to recognize which normal decorative pattern 502 has won the jackpot during the special game. As a modified example, only the normal decorative pattern 502 corresponding to a jackpot with a high advantage (for example, "333", "555", "777", etc. indicating a jackpot of 7R or more or a jackpot of 10R) is displayed during the special game. may be displayed. In this way, the display area that displays one normal decorative pattern 502 displayed during the special game is the other display area during the special game, such as the round display area, the right-handed display area, the prize ball acquisition display area, and the cumulative prize. It is desirable that the display area not overlap with the pitch count display area, that is, be configured not to be displayed in an overlapping manner (however, the highlighted display may be displayed in an overlapping manner, and in that case, the highlighted display has a higher display priority). Furthermore, although it is preferable that the simple decorative symbols 504 be hidden during the special game (because no variable display is performed during the special game), they may be displayed during the special game, and such When configuring this area, it should be configured so that it does not overlap with the other display areas during the special game, such as the round display area, right-handed hit display area, prize ball acquisition display area, and cumulative prize ball count display area. Preferably, it is not highlighted or displayed in an overlapping manner.
(9) In addition to performing fluctuations (for example, moving from top to bottom), the normal decorative pattern 502 also performs predetermined actions at the start of fluctuation, immediately after a temporary stop, after a reach is established, during a temporary stop, etc. (The actions in each situation may be referred to as a fluctuation start action, a temporary stop action, a reach action, and a shaking action). For example, if it becomes a non-reach (when the normal decorative pattern 502 and the simple decorative pattern 504 are displayed as "624" at the time of fixed stop), at the start of fluctuation, the left pattern, middle pattern, right pattern in the normal decorative pattern 502 After performing an action that causes the entire symbol to expand, it begins to fluctuate, and then, when the left symbol temporarily stops, it performs a bouncing action, and after "6" temporarily stops, it begins to swing. Then, when the right symbol temporarily stops, it performs a bouncing motion, and after "4" temporarily stops, it continues the shaking motion, and then, when the middle symbol temporarily stops, After performing a bouncing motion, "2" temporarily stops and performs a slight shaking motion, and then, at the final stop timing, all motions of the left, middle, and right symbols are completed. In this case, the simple decorative pattern 504 does not perform any operations. In addition, in the case of normal reach (when the normal decorative pattern 502 and simple decorative pattern 504 are displayed as "212" at the time of fixed stop), at the start of fluctuation, the left pattern, middle pattern, and right pattern in the normal decorative pattern 502 It starts to fluctuate after performing an action in which all of Then, when the right symbol temporarily stops, it performs a bouncing motion, and after "2" temporarily stops, it continues the shaking motion, and then moves to the left to notify that it is a reach. The symbol and the right symbol perform a rotating motion, then continue the oscillating motion again, and then, when the middle symbol temporarily stops, it performs a bouncing motion, and then "1" temporarily stops and the oscillating motion is slightly reduced. Then, at the fixed stop timing, all the operations of the left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol are completed (the middle symbol does not rotate). In this case, the simple decorative pattern 504 does not perform any operations.
In addition, when developing into a super reach effect (when the normal decorative pattern 502 and the simple decorative pattern 504 are displayed as "232" at the time of fixed stop), at the start of variation, the left and middle symbols in the normal decorative pattern 502 , All of the right symbols expand, then begin to fluctuate, and then, when the left symbol temporarily stops, it performs a bouncing motion, and "2" temporarily stops, then The shaking motion continues, and then, when the right symbol temporarily stops, it performs a bouncing motion, and after "2" temporarily stops, it continues the shaking motion, and then announces that it is reach. Therefore, the left and right symbols perform a rotating motion and continue the shaking motion again, and then, while the left and right symbols are performing the shaking motion, the middle symbol changes (at this time, the middle symbol changes). The symbols are enlarged and move from top to bottom, and the symbols on the left and right, which previously did not overlap or had a low overlap rate, are now overlapping or have a high overlap rate), After that, in order to execute the super reach effect, the normal background changes to the reach background, and when the super reach effect is notified that the result is a failure, the reach background changes to the normal background, and after the transition, the left The symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol continue to swing for a predetermined period of time, and then, at the fixed stop timing, all the motions of the left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol end (the middle symbol performs both bouncing and rotating motions. do not have). In this case, the simple decorative pattern 504 does not perform any operations. With this configuration, it is possible to give diversity to the presentation of the normal decorative pattern 502, while the simple decorative pattern 504 only needs to play the role of compensating the display state of the normal decorative pattern 502. It is preferable that the decorative pattern 504 be configured so that it does not perform any particular movement, so that unnecessary development and design can be avoided. In addition, even during the period from when the fluctuation stops until the standby demonstration effect is displayed, the normal decorative pattern 502 performs a shaking motion after a predetermined period of time has passed (for example, 10 seconds) after the fluctuation has stopped. However, even in this situation, it is preferable that the simple decorative pattern 504 does not perform any movement. With this configuration, it is possible to stimulate the desire to play even when the game is on standby (the symbols are stopped), and the simple decorative pattern 504 does not perform a swinging motion, making it easy to notice that the game is on standby. Information can be guaranteed. In addition, when a standby demonstration effect is displayed, the normal decorative pattern 502 is hidden, but it is preferable that the simple decorative pattern 504 continues to be displayed. By doing so, it is possible to emphasize the display of the standby demonstration effect screen while ensuring that what kind of symbol is stopped is displayed. However, if the standby demonstration performance is in progress, no game is being played, so the simple decorative symbols 504 may also be hidden.
Further, a specific pattern (for example, the medium pattern "7") among the normal decorative patterns 502 may be configured so that a predetermined action is not performed or the probability of performing it is low compared to other symbols. This predetermined motion may be, for example, the above-mentioned temporary stop motion (bouncing motion) (particularly regarding the medium symbol "7" after the reach is established). By configuring in this way, it is possible to increase the rarity of the motion in a specific symbol. Note that the normal decorative pattern 502 is constructed by combining the normal decorative pattern 502 of numbers and the normal decorative pattern 502 of the ally character ("1" + "character a", "2" + "character b", etc.). , "7" + "character g" (normal decorative pattern 502), the normal decorative pattern 502 of the number and the normal decorative pattern 502 of the ally character both perform the shaking motion. is the swing width (swing distance; for example, if it swings up and down, the distance between the state where the normal decorative pattern 502 during the swing motion is displayed at the top and the state where it is displayed at the bottom) A dynamic swinging motion may be achieved by varying the width of the normal decorative pattern 502 of the numbers. It may also be configured such that the normal decorative pattern 502 of the number does not perform the swinging motion, and only the normal decorative pattern 502 of the ally character performs the swinging motion.

The normal decorative pattern 502 is included in the image of the target object 516 in the screen transformation effect and can be the object of transformation, that is, it can be included in the first image belonging to the first image group, and is displayed on the effect layer 524. be done. On the other hand, the simple decorative pattern 504 is not included in the image of the target object 516 in the screen transformation effect and is not a target of transformation, that is, it is included in the second image belonging to the second image group, whereas in the screen transformation effect, the simple decorative pattern 504 is This is an object that can be included in an image showing the situation, and is displayed in the game situation layer 523. In addition, in a predetermined situation where the screen deformation process is executed including the normal decorative pattern 502 as a target (for example, while the normal decorative pattern 502 is changing, temporarily stopped, or when a ready-to-reach state is formed) In this situation, the screen is not a static screen, but the scrolling movement of the normal decorative pattern 502, the shaking movement when temporarily stopping, and when forming a ready-to-reach state continues. The movable accessory 520 can also be operated when the image is deformed while being reproduced and displayed. When the movable accessory 520 in operation is viewed from the front, at least one of the first movable accessory 520a, the second movable accessory 520b, the third movable accessory 520c, and the fourth movable accessory 520d in operation. As a result, the visibility of the normal decorative pattern 502 during screen deformation is obstructed, but the first movable accessory 520a, second movable accessory 520b, third movable accessory 520c, and In any of the four movable accessories 520d, the visibility of the simple decorative pattern 504 during the screen transformation effect is not obstructed. Note that, as described above, the display may be configured to be displayed at a position where visibility is not obstructed during the operation of at least one of the movable accessories.
In order to create a sense of unity in the screen deformation performance, on the contrary, the pattern variation performance that does not involve the screen deformation performance and the normal decorative pattern 502 are configured to move in the same way. On the other hand, in order to make it easier to understand whether the symbol is currently changing or not, and if the symbol is temporarily stopped, at which symbol it is temporarily stopped, the simple decorative symbol 504 is transformed by screen transformation effect. The visibility of the simple decorative pattern 504 is ensured by excluding it from the object. In that case, the visibility of the simple decorative pattern 504 is more reliably ensured by making the movement of the associated movable accessory 520 such that it does not impede the visibility of the simple decorative pattern 504. Note that the relationship between the normal decorative pattern 502 and the simple decorative pattern 504 may be applied to the relationship between the normal pending image 506 (fluctuation image 508) and the simple pending image 507. In other words, in a predetermined situation where the screen deformation process is executed including the normal pending image 506 (image 508 undergoing change) (for example, while displaying the normal pending image 506 (image 508 undergoing change), In this situation, if the normal pending image 506 (fluctuating image 508) is displayed with rotation animation or light emission animation instead of a static screen, then the animation The movable accessory 520 can also be operated when the image is deformed while being continuously reproduced and displayed. When the movable accessory 520 in operation is viewed from the front, at least one of the first movable accessory 520a, the second movable accessory 520b, the third movable accessory 520c, and the fourth movable accessory 520d in operation. As a result, the visibility of the normally reserved image 506 (image 508 during change) during the screen transformation effect is obstructed, but as shown in FIG. Neither the movable accessory 520c nor the fourth movable accessory 520d impedes the visibility of the simple hold image 507 during the screen transformation effect. Note that, as described above, the display may be configured to be displayed at a position where visibility is not obstructed during the operation of at least one of the movable accessories.
In order to create a sense of unity in the screen deformation performance, on the contrary, the symbol variation performance that does not involve the screen deformation performance and the normal pending image 506 (image 508 during fluctuation) are configured to move in the same way. On the other hand, in order to make it easier to understand whether the symbol is currently changing or not, and if the symbol is temporarily stopped, at which symbol it is temporarily stopped, the simple pending image 507 is transformed by screen transformation effect. The visibility of the simple hold image 507 is ensured by excluding it from the target. In that case, the visibility of the simple pending image 507 is more reliably ensured by setting the operation of the associated movable accessory 520 in such a manner that the visibility of the simple pending image 507 is not obstructed.

<Third aspect>
(Feature 7) In screen transformation effects, regardless of the content of the frame image as the first image to be transformed, the background image 518 as the second image is used in other screen transformation effects in which other images are the targets of transformation. The content is common to the background image 518. For example, the common background image 518 in this embodiment is an image entirely black, and is displayed on the background layer 525 in each screen transformation effect. By making the background image of each screen transformation effect a common black image, it is possible to suppress an increase in display processing load and an increase in image capacity. Note that, as described above, the background image 518 may be displayed in a display mode in which, for example, a moving image in which the word "CHANCE" flows like a telop is played in a loop.

<Fourth aspect>
(Feature 8) The production display device 60 displays predetermined errors (for example, a door opening error or a frame opening error that occurs when a door/frame opening signal is detected, a shortage of game balls, an upper ball tray 105, a lower ball If a prize ball payout error (such as a prize ball payout error in which the payout of prize balls stops when the game balls in the tray 106 becomes full) occurs, an error warning image 536 indicating the error (indicating the occurrence of the error and the type of error) is displayed. be done. Furthermore, when the screen transformation effect is executed in a situation where the error warning image 536 is being displayed due to an error occurring before the execution of the screen transformation effect, the error warning image 536 continues to be displayed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 33, the error warning image 536 is displayed on the frontmost error display layer 521 and is not displayed on the production layer 524, so the target object, which is the frame image to be transformed, is 516, and no transformation processing is performed. As a result, not only can the configuration be configured so that the execution of the screen transformation effect is not hindered even when an error occurs, but also the visibility of the error warning image 536 is not inhibited by excluding the error warning image 536 from the screen transformation effect. It can be configured as follows.
Note that even if the error warning sound is output at the maximum volume, which is the specified volume, it is possible to adjust the volume level (volume adjustment) through the player's operation at the same time. A volume setting image 532 can be displayed on the volume light amount display layer 522. Depending on the type of error that occurs during the game (the type of error warning sound), the sound effects that accompany the game progress (for example, the BGM of the super reach performance or the sound effects that occur along with the screen transformation performance) may differ depending on the type of error that occurs during the game. It is configured so that it is not output due to the priority output of the warning sound. For example, if an error occurs during screen transformation, and the error is a prize ball payout error, both the error warning sound and the performance sound will be output (however, the error warning sound will be played at the maximum volume of the specified volume). (The production sound will be output at a volume corresponding to the currently set volume level), but if there is a door opening error, only the error warning sound will be output, and no production sound will be output (or if there is a prize ball payout error) The system is configured to output the performance sound at a lower volume than when it occurs. Note that the types of errors are just examples. If such an error occurs while the game is in progress, even if the screen transformation effect is executed, the volume setting image 532 is also not displayed on the effect layer 524, so the target object 516, which is the frame image to be transformed, is is not included and no transformation processing is performed. As a result, not only can the configuration be configured so that the execution of volume adjustment is not hindered even when an error occurs, but also the visibility of the volume setting image 532 can be prevented from being inhibited by excluding the volume setting image 532 from the screen transformation effect. It can be configured as follows.
In the volume setting image 532, it is possible to display what the currently set volume level is (for example, it is possible to display "volume level is 1", "volume level is 5", etc.), When the volume level is adjusted by the player's operation, the display contents will change (for example, if the volume level is changed from 1 to 2, the display will change from "Volume level is 1" to "Volume level is 5") ). Here, the volume setting image 532 is displayed by the player's operation while the screen transformation effect is being executed, and when the player further performs the operation while the screen transformation effect is being executed and the volume setting image 532 is being displayed, the volume can be adjusted and When the display of the volume setting image 532 is changed, the volume setting image 532 while the screen transformation effect is being executed and before the display change (for example, the display of "Volume level is 1") and the volume setting image 532 during the screen transformation effect and after the display change are displayed. All of the volume setting images 532 (for example, the display of "Volume level is 2") are displayed in a display mode without screen deformation. Also, immediately before the screen transformation effect is executed, the volume setting image 532 is displayed by the player's operation, and immediately after that (while the volume setting image 532 is being displayed), the screen transformation effect is executed, and while the volume setting image 532 is being displayed and the screen If the volume is adjusted and the display of the volume setting image 532 is changed by the player's operation during the execution of the transformation effect, the volume setting image 532 before the screen transformation effect is executed and before the display change (for example, "Volume level The volume setting image 532 (for example, the display of "The volume level is 2") after the screen transformation effect is executed and the display change (for example, the display of "The volume level is 2") is displayed in a display mode without screen transformation. be done. Note that in order to ensure visibility, it is preferable that the error warning image 536 and the volume setting image be configured so that they are not displayed overlappingly (displayed in different display areas).

<Fifth aspect>
(Feature 9) As shown in FIG. 30, on the effect display device 60, when a hold is stored, a normal hold image 506 indicating the number of holds is displayed. In addition, when a hold corresponding to a new ball enters the ball, in order to show that the hold has occurred, instead of displaying the normal hold image 506 suddenly, an animation is displayed gradually (details will be described later). ), and while the animation of the normal pending image 506 is being displayed, that is, from the start of the animation of the normal pending image 506 until it is completed (until the display of the normal pending image 506 is completed) Even when a transformation effect is executed, the animation display is not stopped. The animation display of the normal hold image 506 referred to here is not only the animation display when a hold occurs normally (when a hold occurs without a look-ahead notice), but also when the color or pattern of the normal hold image 506 is changed as a look-ahead notice effect. (For example, an animation in which the normal pending image 506 lights up white when a hold occurs and then changes color, or a small character appears and applies magic to the currently displayed normal pending image 506 to change the color.) animations etc.). However, during the execution of the screen transformation effect, or during the change in which the screen transformation effect is executed (in a situation where the screen transformation effect is scheduled to be executed in the change, but the execution timing has not been reached), the screen transformation effect In order to attract attention, if the system is configured so that the advance preview is not executed (no lottery or determination is made) even when a new ball enters, or if the animation display effect is not executed when the normal hold occurs, the screen deformation effect is The specification that does not stop the animation display when it is executed is only for the animation display when a normal hold occurs (when a hold occurs without advance notice).
The animation display of the normal hold image 506 when a normal hold occurs (when a hold occurs without advance notice) is, for example, a fade-in display of the normal hold image 506, an animation that appears by moving from outside the screen such as from the bottom of the screen, rotation. These include animations that cause the object to oscillate, animations that add color changes such as momentary lighting, and animations that momentarily expand or contract the size. Normally, the pending image 506 is displayed on the effect layer 524, so if a screen transformation effect is executed in the middle of an animation display when a hold occurs, the frame images including the image in the middle of the animation display are sequentially transformed. Alternatively, the display contents may be updated so that the animation display of the normal pending image 506 included in the target object 516 is continued while the screen transformation effect is being displayed, that is, while the target object 516 is being transformed. In this way, even if the screen transformation effect is executed while the animation of the normal hold image 506 is being displayed when the hold occurs, the animation display is continued without being stopped, thereby preventing the flow of the effect from becoming unnatural or uncomfortable. It can be prevented.
Note that even if the holding occurrence occurs continuously and the animation display at the time of holding occurrence continues, the normal holding image 506 corresponding to the subsequent ball entering is displayed without stopping the animation display of the normal holding image 506 corresponding to the previous ball entering. The animation display of 506 is executed in parallel. Therefore, depending on the hold occurrence timing, (1) If the previous ball enters while the screen transformation effect is being executed, the normal If the animation display of the held image 506 is executed, and a subsequent ball enters while the screen transformation effect and the animation of the normal held image 506 corresponding to the previous ball entered are displayed, the normal hold image 506 corresponding to the previous ball entered is displayed. Without stopping the animation display of the image 506, the screen transformation effect, the animation display of the normal holding image 506 corresponding to the previous ball entering, and the animation display of the normal holding image 506 corresponding to the subsequent ball entering are performed simultaneously in parallel. (2) If the execution start timing of the screen transformation effect is reached while the animation display of the normal hold image 506 corresponding to the previous ball entering is being executed, the animation display of the normal hold image 506 corresponding to the previous ball entering is executed. If a screen transformation effect is executed during the execution, and a subsequent ball enters the screen during the animation display of the normal pending image 506 corresponding to the previous ball entering, and the screen transformation effect is executed, the screen transformation effect corresponds to the previous ball entry. Without stopping the animation display of the normal holding image 506, the animation display of the normal holding image 506 corresponding to the previous ball entering, the screen transformation effect, and the animation display of the normal holding image 506 corresponding to the subsequent ball entering are simultaneously displayed. (3) If a subsequent ball enters during the animation display of the normal hold image 506 corresponding to the previous ball enter, execute the animation display of the normal hold image 506 corresponding to the previous ball enter. During the animation display of the normal holding image 506 corresponding to the later ball entering, and the animation display of the normal holding image 506 corresponding to the previous ball entering and the animation of the normal holding image 506 corresponding to the subsequent ball entering. When the execution start timing of the screen transformation effect is reached while the display is being executed, the animation display of the normal hold image 506 corresponding to the previous ball entering and the animation display of the normal hold image 506 corresponding to the subsequent ball entering are stopped. Instead, the animation display of the normal pending image 506 corresponding to the previous ball entering, the animation display of the normal holding image 506 corresponding to the subsequent ball entering, and the screen transformation effect are simultaneously executed. In addition, in any of the situations (1) to (3), there is a further ball that enters in that situation (in a situation where the execution is concurrently executed) and that ball enters the jackpot expectation level. Even if there is a high hold (for example, a hold that a super reach effect is scheduled to be executed, a hold that is scheduled to be a jackpot), in that situation, the normal hold image 506 is displayed as a preview preview effect for the hold. It is preferable not to perform the animation display that is performed when changing the color or pattern of.

(Feature 10) In this embodiment, there are a plurality of types of performance modes, and it is determined for each performance mode which type of performance, such as a symbol variation performance or a preview performance, can be executed.
To specifically explain the performance mode and the performance content executed in the performance mode, for example, multiple types of performance modes are set, such as "normal mode", "chance mode", and "rush mode", and the game state (or the fluctuating pattern selection state), the number of fluctuating displays of the special symbol, etc., one of multiple types of production modes is alternatively set, and a fluctuating production according to the set production mode is executed. be done. Basically, "Normal mode" is set when the gaming state is normal, "Chance mode" is set when the gaming state is time saving, and "Rush mode" is set when the gaming state is variable. mode” is set. When any production mode is set, a background image dedicated to the production mode (a background that is displayed behind the decorative pattern 61 image) is displayed, and BGM dedicated to the production mode is output from the speaker 108. In this way, the background image and BGM are set to be different for each production mode, so it is possible for the player to recognize which production mode the player is currently in based on the type of background image or BGM. ing. Specifically, the "Normal Mode" has four stages: "Stage A", "Stage B", "Stage C", and "Look-ahead Stage", and it is possible to prevent the progress of 20 fluctuations or more or the super reach effect to be missed. Taking this opportunity, the stage moves from "Stage A" to "Stage B", from "Stage B" to "Stage C", from "Stage C" to "Stage A", and depending on the pre-reading preview performance judgment, the "pre-reading stage" If you win the execution (transition), you will move from the stage you are currently staying on to the "pre-reading stage" (the execution of the super reach effect will be confirmed when you move to the "pre-reading stage", and if you win the jackpot, you will be able to move to the "pre-reading stage"). Stage" will display a double number, and if it misses, a number other than double number will be displayed on the "Look-ahead stage", and the next change will return to the stage before moving to the "Look-ahead stage"). The BGM (stage BGM) is different for each of "Stage A", "Stage B", "Stage C", and "Look-ahead stage" (different from the stage BGM of "Chance mode" and the stage BGM of "Rush mode"). , In "Stage A", the stage BGM is interrupted (completed) triggered by the stop of fluctuation (determined stop) of the non-reaching deviation (a deviation without forming a reach state, for example, a random number such as "351"). ), the stage BGM starts from the beginning when the next fluctuation starts, and in "Stage B", "Stage C", and "Look-ahead stage", even if the fluctuation stops (definite stop) due to non-reach, the stage BGM continues. There is no interruption (never ends), and the stage BGM is output continuously after the next variation (the "chance mode" and "rush mode" are also configured to be continuously output).
Here, although it is possible to perform a pseudo continuous performance in any of "Stage A", "Stage B", "Stage C", and "Look-ahead stage", in any stage, when temporarily stopping in a pseudo continuous performance, (When a predetermined pseudo-continuous symbol (for example, a symbol with the letters "NEXT") as a middle symbol is fluctuated and displayed in the vicinity of a predetermined temporary stop position and then temporarily stopped), the stage BGM is not output. (interruption), the stage BGM is started from the beginning with the re-fluctuation display (re-fluctuation after a temporary stop), or it is switched to a specific BGM different from the one before the re-fluctuation display. After that, when developing to super reach performance in "Stage A", "Stage B", "Stage C", and "Look-ahead stage", the background image of each stage (the stage you were staying at) will be changed to the background image of the super reach performance. The stage BGM will not be output during the execution of the super reach performance, and a performance indicating the failure of the super reach performance will be displayed, and the super reach performance will be executed. The background image of each stage will be switched again (the background image of the stage that was displayed before the development of the super reach effect) within the fluctuating display, but in that situation, the stage background will remain unchanged until the next fluctuating display starts. Even if the image is displayed, the stage BGM is not output, and the BGM dedicated to the super reach performance is also not output (it is silent, or a specific BGM different from the stage BGM and the BGM dedicated to the super reach performance is output). Therefore, even if the fluctuation stops (determined stop) due to non-reach, the stage BGM will not be interrupted (will not end), and the stage BGM will continue to be output after the next fluctuation. C", "Look-ahead stage" (even if it is not "Stage A"), if you lose through the super reach effect, the stage will be canceled before the fluctuation stop (determined stop). The BGM will be interrupted, and the stage BGM will start from the beginning when the next variation starts.
It should be noted that in the "chance mode" and "rush mode", the pseudo continuous effect is not executed. Here, special effects that suggest that a pseudo continuous effect will be executed (for example, a continuation dialogue notice, ``Continue!'', which confirms the execution of the subsequent pseudo continuous effect, By executing unconfirmed performances such as "Maybe it will continue?", it is suggested that a pseudo-continuation performance (re-fluctuation display) will be performed afterwards, but this special performance is limited to "Stage A" and " It is displayed only in "Stage C" and not in "Stage B" and "Look-Ahead Stage". In other words, by preparing in advance both stages where the possibility of a pseudo-continuous performance can be detected and stages where the possibility cannot be detected, and by repeating stage transitions between these stages, a performance that does not make the player bored is realized. are doing. Note that in "Stage A", a special performance using character A as a motif is performed, while in "Stage C", a special performance using character B as a motif is performed. In addition, this is a different effect from a special effect, and it is a pseudo continuous effect that confirms that the pseudo continuous effect will be executed after that just by occurring (for example, when character C appears, the line "Continuation confirmed!" is always displayed) In addition, there is also a special performance and a pseudo-continuation-confirmed production, which is a development-confirmed production that is different from the special production and the pseudo-coupled production, and which only occurs when it is confirmed that the pseudo-coupled production will not be executed afterward and will develop into a super reach production. (For example, an effect in which the line "Development confirmed!" is always displayed whenever character D appears) is also provided. This pseudo-continuation confirmation performance and development confirmation performance can be executed in any of "Stage A", "Stage B", "Stage C", and "Look-Ahead Stage". In this way, when a pseudo continuous effect is performed or when a pseudo continuous effect is not performed, by displaying a combination of one or more of the special effect, the pseudo continuous effect, and the advanced confirmed effect, the expectation of execution of the pseudo continuous effect, It is possible to diversify the degree of development expectations for super reach performance. In addition, during one fluctuation display, all of the special effects, pseudo-continuation confirmation effects, and development confirmation effects may be executed. ) may include a pattern in which a special effect is executed, a pattern in which a pseudo-continuation confirmation effect is executed, and a pattern in which a development confirmation effect is executed. In a pattern in which a special effect is executed during the first or second time (the first or second time), after the special effect is executed during the certain re-fluctuation display, the pseudo-continuation confirmation effect may be further executed during the certain re-fluctuation display.
In this embodiment, in addition to being able to perform different types of effects depending on which effect mode is being executed, the type of effect to be transformed differs depending on the effect mode, and the effect to be transformed is different depending on the effect mode. The types of suggestive performances that suggest that they can be executed and whether or not the suggestive performances are executed differ. In addition, in this embodiment, at the timing when "NEXT" of the pseudo continuous effect is displayed, the screen transformation effect is not executed (although it is not a transformation target effect) in order to make the player aware that the pseudo continuous effect is being executed. , but the present invention is not limited thereto, and a screen transformation effect may be executed (or may be a transformation target effect). In that case, the screen may be more sensitive than other predetermined preview effects (for example, the above-mentioned effect that makes the enemy character stand still during the super reach effect, or the step-up preview effect that is part of the preview effect before entering the reach state). It is preferable to configure the system so that the possibility of deformed effects is low.

<Sixth aspect>
(Feature 11) First, whether it is a symbol variation in which a screen transformation effect is executed or a symbol variation in which a screen transformation effect is not executed, a ready-to-win state can be formed during the symbol variation. In addition, the degree of expectation that the screen deformation effect will be executed differs depending on the mode of the symbol variation effect and the mode of the ready-to-reach symbol when the symbol becomes a reach. Specifically, for example, the reach symbol mode is changed so that the screen transformation effect is more likely to be executed when the "7" symbol becomes a reach than when the "2" symbol becomes a reach. Whether or not the screen transformation effect is executed (execution probability) is associated with the screen transformation effect. More specifically, when reaching with the symbol "7", the ratio of when the screen transformation effect that freezes the enemy character during the super reach effect is executed and when it is not executed is 5:5, When a reach is achieved with the symbol "," the ratio between when a screen transformation effect that makes the enemy character stand still during the super reach effect is executed and when it is not executed is 2:8. It may be configured such that when the screen transformation effect is executed, it is easier to reach the "7" symbol.For example, if the screen transformation effect is executed in the step-up notice effect and then it becomes the reach state, The probability of becoming a reach with the symbol "7" is 10%, and the probability of becoming a reach with the symbol "2" is 15%, but the screen deformation effect is not executed during the step-up notice effect and the probability of becoming a reach state after that. In this case, the probability of a ``7'' symbol being a reach is 1%, and the probability of a ``2'' symbol being a lichi is 20%.

<Seventh aspect>
(Feature 12) In the screen transformation effect, the normal decorative pattern 502 may be included in the effect layer 524 as a target object 516, but the simple decorative pattern 504 is not included in the target object 516, and is included in the game situation layer 524 as an image indicating the game situation. may be included in Further, even while the screen transformation effect is being executed, the volume setting image 532 for adjusting the volume can be displayed and the volume can be adjusted according to the player's operation.

(Feature 13) When the screen transformation effect is executed in a situation where the volume setting image 532 is displayed before the execution of the screen transformation effect, the volume setting image 532 is in a form that is not included in the frame image to be transformed; That is, the volume setting image 532 continues to be displayed on the volume light amount display layer 522, which is a layer different from the effect layer 524, and the volume can be adjusted by the player's operation.

(Feature 14) The normal pending image 506 can be transformed by the screen transformation effect, but the simple retention image 507 cannot be transformed by the screen transformation effect. In addition, since the movable accessory 520 can be operated even in a situation where a screen transformation effect including the normally reserved image 506 as a transformation target is being executed, when the movable accessory 520 in operation is viewed from the front, the movable accessory 520 Therefore, the visibility of the simple pending image 507 is not obstructed. In this case, the visibility of the normally reserved image 506 may also be displayed in such a way that it is not obstructed by the movable accessory 520, or may be such that it can be obstructed. Alternatively, a specification may be adopted in which the normally reserved image 506 is not subject to transformation by the screen transformation effect.

(Feature 15) When a screen transformation effect is executed, a specific effect sound (sound effect) is configured to be output. Specifically, at the start of the screen transformation effect (1 second from the start), a sound effect of "Pikin!" is output, and during the execution of the screen transformation effect (1 second from the start to 1 second from the start) (before), a sound effect of "Gugugu" is output, and when the screen transformation effect ends (for one second until the end), a sound effect of "Pishan!" is output. In this case, the sound effect at the beginning or end of the screen transformation effect will be louder than the sound effect in the middle of the screen transformation effect under the same volume level when adjusting the volume ( By configuring the screen so that this relationship holds regardless of which volume level is set, it is possible to make the screen transformation effect not only visually but also aurally sharp. Can be done. Regarding the transformation degree/transformation ratio of the transformation target performance, at the start or end of the screen transformation performance, compared to before the screen transformation performance started, unlike the volume, the transformation degree/transformation ratio of the transformation target performance changes. On the other hand, in the middle of the screen transformation performance, compared to before the screen transformation performance started, It is preferable to configure the transformation target performance to have a large degree of transformation/transformation ratio (if it is to be reduced, the reduction ratio is large; if it is to be transformed by four vertices, the initial position movement distance of each vertex is long), and By configuring as such, it is possible to create an unexpected production in which the visual sharpness and the auditory sharpness are reversed. In addition, the volume level for volume adjustment is provided with, for example, five levels, and the volume adjustment can be set to any of levels 1 to 5, and the production sound corresponding to various productions will be adjusted to the volume according to the set volume level. is output. Here, even if the volume level is the same, the volume differs depending on the type of performance. For example, as mentioned above, the sound effect "Pikin!" at the start of the screen transformation effect (1 second from the start) and the sound effect "Pishaan!" at the end of the screen transformation effect (1 second until the end) is louder than the "gugugu" sound effect during the execution of the screen transformation effect (from 1 second after the start to 1 second before the end), no matter which volume level is set ( For example, at volume level 1, the sound effects of "Pikin!" and "Pishaan!" are 30 dB, and the sound effects of "Gugugu" are 20 dB, and at volume level 5, "Pikin!" The sound effect for "Pishaan!" is 80 dB, and the sound effect for "Gugugu" is 70 dB).
(Feature 16) As described above, the normal pending image 506 and the changing image 508 may also be included in the target object 516 and displayed as objects of transformation in the screen transformation effect.
(Feature 17) Alternatively, as shown in the game status layer 523 in FIG. 33, the normal pending image 506 and the changing image 508 are not included in the target object 516 as objects of transformation in the screen transformation effect, but are placed in a separate layer. The specifications may be displayed on the situation layer 523.

<Eighth aspect>
(Feature 18) When a predetermined error occurs, an error warning image 536 indicating the error is displayed on the effect display device 60. If an error occurs during execution of the screen transformation effect, the error warning image 536 is not included in the frame image to be transformed, but is placed in the error display layer 521, which is a layer different from the effect layer 524 on which the screen transformation effect is displayed. Is displayed.

(Feature 19) The production process of the super reach production has a first half and a second half, and when it involves the execution of screen transformation production, the first half will more definitely develop into the second half, which is the so-called back button production. Or, a red light emitting effect that suggests high expectations is likely to occur. It is preferable that the screen transformation effect is performed before the super reach effect, for example, when the screen transformation effect is executed in a step-up preview effect before reaching the reach state. For example, in the first half, a screen deformation effect that makes the enemy character stand still during the super reach effect is executed, and if the screen deformation effect is executed in the first half, the red color that suggests the appearance of the back button effect is better. It may be possible to make it easier for the light emission effect to occur. The back button effect is such that although no button image or button operation instructions are displayed on the screen, when the player operates the effect button 109 at a predetermined timing, a specific effect (here, a light emitting effect) appears. Here, the first half is executed. In addition, the light emitting effect is a effect that changes the emitted light color of the decorative lamps 111 around the effect display device 60 and the color (color as an image) of the effect display imitating light on the effect display device 60, and the emitted light color The level of expectation increases in the order of blue → green → red (the level of expectation for development in the second half or the level of expectation for a jackpot increases). Note that the back button effect can also be automatically repeated by pressing and holding the effect button 109. As a modified example, if the screen transformation effect that makes the enemy character stand still is executed in the second half of the super reach effect instead of the first half, if the screen transformation effect is executed in the second half, then the screen transformation effect is Compared to the case where it is not executed, the color of the emitted light from the decorative lamps 111 around the effect display device 60 changes when the effect of repeatedly pressing the effect button 109 in the first half of the super reach effect (automatic continuous presses are possible by long-pressing the effect button 109). And the color of the effect display imitating light on the effect display device 60 is configured so that it tends to be red, which indicates that the development of the second half of the super reach effect is certain or highly anticipated, instead of blue or green. Good too.

(Feature 20) When a screen transformation effect is executed, button images that are not a normal color (for example, white), such as a red button image or a rainbow-colored button that suggests that the expectation of a jackpot is relatively high, are displayed. Images are easily displayed. The button image here may be a button image before entering the reach state or a button image during a super reach effect, and the player may actually operate the effect button 109 while this button image is being displayed. Taking this as an opportunity, effects other than the button images are displayed. For example, if the button image is displayed before reaching the reach state and you operate the performance button 109, a dialogue preview performance (a performance with different jackpot expectations depending on the content of the dialogue and the color of the speech bubble) is displayed, and during the super reach state (second half When the button image is displayed at the end of the game (the final stage) and the production button 109 is operated, a cut-in production (a production in which a cut-in screen of an ally character is displayed, and the cut-in color and the type of character displayed in the cut-in) are displayed. Perform performances with different jackpot expectations). Here, it is better to display a button image that is not a normal color than a button image that is a normal color. In the case of a presentation, a red cut-in presentation is more likely to be displayed when the presentation button 109 is operated than a blue cut-in presentation. In addition, in this embodiment, when the screen transformation effect is executed before the button image is displayed, the normal color button image is Button images that are not displayed are more likely to be displayed. Note that an effect that instructs (encourages) a player to perform an operation by displaying a button image is referred to as an operation instruction effect (button effect).
Furthermore, in this embodiment, there is a button appearance prompting performance that is a performance that prompts whether or not an operation instruction performance (button performance) is started. In this button appearance promotion, a silhouette image representing the silhouette of the production button 109 is displayed on the screen in advance, and then a button image imitating the production button 109 appears (in other words, the operation instruction production is started). It will be a performance that makes you look forward to it. In this button appearance inciting effect, when the silhouette image of the effect button 109 gradually changes to a button image, the inciting effect becomes successful. On the other hand, when the silhouette image of the button appearance 109 fades out from the screen in this button appearance promotion, the promotion fails. Note that when displaying a button image, it is not always necessary to perform such a button appearance promotion effect, and the button image may be displayed immediately without going through the button appearance promotion effect. Here, this button appearance inciting effect may have multiple types of display modes, and if configured in such a way, for example, a button appearance inciting effect with a red effect will be more attractive than a button appearance inciting effect with a blue effect. The configuration may be such that the possibility of changing to a button image is higher. In addition, as another modification example, when a button appearance promotion effect is executed, it may always change to a button image, and if configured in this way, a red effect will be used instead of a button appearance promotion effect accompanied by a blue effect. A button appearance inciting effect accompanied by a button appearance may be configured so that the expectation of a jackpot is higher, or it may include multiple types of button images (such as a blue button image and a red button image, and the red button image is more likely to be used than the blue button image). (For example, a red dialogue announcement is more likely to be executed than a blue dialogue announcement), and a button appearance announcement with a red effect is more likely to be executed than a button appearance announcement with a blue effect. The effect may be a specific button image (for example, a red button image). In addition to the above, if you make sure that the button image changes to the button image when the button appearance stimulation effect is executed, in addition to the above, there is a possibility that the button appearance stimulation effect for a long time (for example, 4 seconds) is better than for a short time (for example, 2 seconds). ) may be configured so that the expectation of a big hit is higher in a button appearance promotion effect, and a button appearance promotion effect for a long time (for example, 4 seconds) than a short time (for example, 2 seconds) button appearance promotion effect may be configured. The inciting effect may be configured to be a specific button image (for example, a red button image). In addition, when configuring to have multiple types of display modes for the button appearance stimulation effect, the latter half of the variable display (specific timing after reach) is better than the first half of the variable display (predetermined timing before reach). It may be configured so that the highly anticipated button appearance promotion effect is more likely to be executed, or the button appearance promotion effect may not be executed during the first half of the fluctuating display (at a predetermined timing before reach), and the button appearance promotion performance may be executed during the second half of the fluctuating display. It may be configured such that the button appearance promotion effect can be executed only at certain times (specific timing after reach).
During execution of the operation instruction performance, an operation valid period (input valid time) during which the operation of the performance button 109 is valid is set. The valid operation period is a period during which the operation is effectively accepted when the effect button 109 is operated. "Effectively accepting the operation of the effect button 109" means that when the effect button 109 is operated, the operation of the effect button 109 is effectively accepted by the sub-board 300, and a predetermined process is performed based on the effective operation. means to be done. Note that the predetermined process corresponds to a process of proceeding with a dialogue preview effect triggered by the operation of the effect button 109. During this valid operation period, the production button 109 (LED element built into the production button 109) is displayed with light emission, and a button image imitating the production button 109 and the remaining period of the operation validity period are visually displayed on the screen. An indicator image shown is displayed to notify that the operation of the effect button 109 is valid or to prompt the user to input the operation. Further, on the screen, an annular effect image (referred to as a "specific image") that emits sparks is displayed around the button image. This specific image gradually enlarges as the operation validity period passes. Then, when the production button 109 is operated during the valid operation period, the speech preview production progresses. Note that when the effect button 109 is operated, the display mode of the specific image is forcibly changed to the final display mode. The final display mode of the specific image is the display mode when the specific image is displayed at maximum enlargement. Note that this operation instruction performance (button performance) is a performance (button performance pattern A) in which a specific image is displayed while the button image and indicator image are displayed (during the operation validity period), but other The button performance (button performance other than the operation instruction performance) is a performance (button performance pattern B) in which a specific image is not displayed while the button image and the indicator image are displayed (during the operation validity period).
A dialogue preview is a performance in which one of multiple characters (the aforementioned friendly characters and enemy characters) appears and utters a predetermined dialogue, and a specific image is displayed around this character as the final Continuously displayed in the display mode. In this dialogue preview performance, the expectation level of a jackpot is suggested according to the display mode (display color) of the dialogue uttered by the character. In this embodiment, three types of dialogue display colors are set: "blue", "red", and "giraffe pattern", and the jackpot expectation level is set in the order of "blue"<"red"<"giraffepattern". becomes higher one step at a time. Note that when the dialogue preview performance is started (when the performance button 109 is operated), the button image and the indicator image are hidden, but the specific image is continuously displayed. In addition, as a modification of this embodiment, the dialogue preview presentation may be configured as a step-up presentation. This step-up performance is set so that the display process of the preview performance is divided into a plurality of stages, and the number of stages to be displayed is made variable so that the higher the number of stages, the higher the expectation of a jackpot. is an advanced performance that changes the performance mode (characters and lines) in stages according to a predetermined order, and suggests or informs the high degree of expectation of a jackpot depending on the number of stages that develop. For example, a step-up performance may be composed of two performance steps (Step-up 1, Step-up 2), and the performance mode (character and dialogue) displayed in Step-up 1, which is the first performance step. The presentation mode (characters and lines) displayed in Step Up 2, which is the second presentation step, may be made different.
The flow of the performance is as follows.
(A) Button Appearance When the effect is started, a silhouette image representing the silhouette of the effect button 109 is displayed on the screen. When this silhouette image gradually changes to a button image and the activation is successful, an operation instruction performance is started.
(B) When the operation instruction performance is started, the operation validity period of the performance button 109 is set, and the performance button 109 is displayed with light emission, and a button image imitating the performance button 109 and the remaining period of the operation validity period are displayed. An indicator image that visually indicates this is displayed on the screen. Furthermore, a ring-shaped specific image (effect image) that emits sparks is displayed around the button image. Such a display prompts the user to operate the effect button 109 within the valid button operation period.
(C) As the button operation valid period elapses, the display mode (remaining period) of the indicator image changes, and the specific image is enlarged and displayed around the button image. At this time, if the performance button 109 is operated within the valid operation period, the operation instruction performance is switched to the dialogue preview performance. At this time, the button image and indicator image are hidden. On the other hand, the effect image is forcibly changed to the final display mode and continues to be displayed.
(D) When the speech preview effect starts, a character and the line ``This is a big chance'' are displayed on the screen, and the display color of the line indicates the degree of expectation of a jackpot. A specific image is continuously displayed in the final display mode around the character and the lines. By displaying the specific image across the operation instruction performance and the dialogue preview performance in this way, it is possible to suggest to the player that the dialogue preview performance will occur upon operating the performance button 109 (this time). It is suggested that the button production is a dialogue preview production).
In addition, as a modification of the above-described embodiment, whether or not the button appearance inciting effect can be executed is determined by lottery, and the case where the button appearance inciting effect is executed is better than the case where the button appearance inciting effect is not executed. It may be configured such that the expectation level of jackpot in the variable display is relatively high. In addition, the longer the execution time of the button appearance stimulation effect (the display time of the silhouette image above), the higher the expectation of a jackpot in the variable display, or the higher the probability of a jackpot being triggered by a button operation. It may be configured so that high performance occurs. At that time, when executing the line preview performance (button appearance promotion performance) at the timing of the win/loss branch (the specific timing after reaching, which is the second half of the variable display mentioned above), the production time of the button appearance promotion performance ( It is preferable that the display time of the silhouette image is set to be longer than the effective period of operation of the effect button 109. Note that, contrary to this configuration, the production time of the button appearance promotion production (display time of the silhouette image) may be set to be shorter than the operational validity period of the production button 109. In addition, as another modification, multiple types of display modes (for example, a blue button image, a red button image, a rainbow button image, a large button image, a small button image, etc.) may be prepared as the display mode of the button image. good. In that case, whether or not the button appearance promotion effect can be executed and the effect time when it is executed may be varied depending on the display mode of the button image scheduled to be executed thereafter.
In addition, as a further modified example, it is possible to execute the dialogue preview performance even during one or more variable displays (pre-read variable displays that are fluctuations before the target) before the pre-read target action pending ball is exhausted. (button image can be displayed), and the button appearance excitement effect is better when the look-ahead fluctuation display is being executed than during the execution of the fluctuation display (the fluctuation display) when the action pending ball that is the target of this look-ahead is exhausted. The possibility that this will be executed may be lowered, and the possibility that this pre-reading fluctuation display is being executed is higher than during the execution of the fluctuation display when the action pending ball that is the target of this pre-reading is exhausted (the relevant fluctuation display). , the possibility of a highly anticipated button appearance stimulation performance (such as a button appearance stimulation performance with a red effect as described above, a button appearance stimulation performance for a long time (for example, 4 seconds), etc.) may be lowered. . As another modification example, the button appearance excitement effect is not executed in the first half of the fluctuating display (predetermined timing before reach) (or the button appearance excitement effect with a low expectation level is not executed and the button appearance excitement effect with a high expectation level is not executed). ), and execute the button appearance excitement effect in the second half of the variable display (specific timing after reach) (or execute the button appearance excitement effect with high expectations instead of the low expectation button appearance excitement effect) ), the longer the period between the predetermined timing before reach, which is the first half of the variable display, and the specific timing after reach, which is the second half of the variable display (for example, 90 seconds is better than 60 seconds). , it may be configured so that the expectation of a jackpot is high, or the button image at a specific timing after the reach, which is the second half of the fluctuating display, is likely to be an image with a high expectation (for example, a red button image instead of a blue button image). It may be configured so that the In addition, in the first half of the fluctuating display (predetermined timing before reach), button performance pattern A is used, and in the second half of the fluctuating display (specific timing after reach), button performance pattern B is configured. Good too. In addition, although the details will be described later, the timing for displaying the button image at a predetermined timing before the reach, which is the first half of the fluctuating display, starts from the start of the fluctuating display, and in the second half of the fluctuating display. The timing for displaying the button image at a specific timing after a certain reach starts from the start of a specific effect (normal reach effect or super reach effect), and at a predetermined timing before reach which is the first half of the variable display. The clock time for displaying the button image at a specific timing after reach, which is the second half of the variable display, may be longer than the clock time for displaying the button image.

(Feature 21) A screen transformation effect may be performed as a preview effect based on pre-reading. In such a configuration, the screen transformation effect will not be executed from the symbol change being executed at the new ball entry timing, which is the look-ahead timing, but from the next variation (the next variation after the new ball entry timing). A screen transformation effect is executed. Specifically, the variation in which a new ball enters is a normal symbol variation (the normal decorative symbol 502 changes without the screen deforming), and immediately after the start of the next variation (for example, 0.5 from the start of the variation). Seconds later), it is the same normal pattern variation (the normal decorative pattern 502 fluctuates without the screen deforming), but after that, it is during the target variation that is subject to look-ahead (for example, 10 seconds after the target variation starts). (seconds later), the screen transformation effect is executed and the symbol fluctuation continues. The pattern variation after the screen transformation effect is executed is, for example, a variable display of the normal decorative pattern 502 in a state where the screen is tilted or in a state where the screen is reduced. As mentioned above, in the target variation that is the target of pre-reading, the screen transformation effect continues until the middle, and then switches to the normal symbol variation effect. Note that this will change at least until it develops into a super reach performance. Even if a power failure such as a power outage occurs due to the fluctuation in front of the target during the screen deformation effect that continues over these multiple symbol change effects, and the power is restored from the power outage, as a general rule, the If there is a change in , the original screen deformation effect cannot be restored. However, the screen deformation effect may be executed again in the case of a target change that is subject to pre-reading.

(Feature 22) If the pre-transformation effect that should be displayed in the frame image to be transformed does not start due to an error occurring before the execution of the screen transformation effect, the timing for starting the pre-transformation effect is However, the screen transformation effect is not executed. For example, there is a case where a malfunction occurs in the timer that measures the timing of the performance by the clocking means 307 of the sub-board 300, so that the performance before transformation that should be displayed in the frame image to be transformed does not start. As a modified example, even if the pre-transformation effect is not started due to a timer malfunction or the like, the screen transformation effect may be executed by deforming only the background effect being displayed.

(Feature 23) Although the standby demo screen is displayed on the effect layer 524, it is not subject to transformation by the screen transformation effect. In a modified example, a standby demo screen may be displayed on the game status layer 523.
(Feature 24) When the screen transformation performance is executed in response to the operation of the performance button 109 by the player, the execution start timing of the screen transformation performance depends on the operation start timing of the performance button 109. Although the button image is also displayed on the effect layer 524, it is not subject to transformation by the screen transformation effect, and the screen transformation effect is executed after the effect button 109 is operated and the button image is erased. In a modified example, a button image may be displayed on the game situation layer 523. In a further modified example, when the display timing of a button image is reached during the execution of a screen transformation effect, the button image may also be a target (transformation target) of the screen transformation effect, and the effect while the button image is being displayed may be The effect displayed in response to the operation of the button 109 may also be a target of screen transformation effect (transformation target). In addition, if the button image starts to be displayed while the screen transformation effect is being executed, and if the button image's display end timing is earlier than the execution end timing of the screen transformation effect, the screen transformation effect will continue for the button image from the start of display to the end. However, if the display end timing of the button image is later than the execution end timing of the screen transformation effect, the button image will be displayed as the screen transformation effect from the beginning to the middle of the display, and from then on until the end, it will be displayed normally. (without deformation). This also applies to the effects that are displayed when the effect button 109 is operated while the button image is being displayed, and the effect that is displayed when the effect button 109 is operated while the button image is being displayed while the screen transformation effect is being executed. starts to be displayed, if the display end timing of the effect that is displayed in response to the operation of the effect button 109 while the button image is being displayed is earlier than the execution end timing of the screen transformation effect, the effect that is displayed when the effect button 109 is displayed while the button image is being displayed is The effect that is displayed in response to the operation is displayed as a screen transformation effect from the start to the end of the display, but it is displayed in response to the operation of the effect button 109 while the button image is being displayed, rather than the timing at which the execution of the screen transformation effect ends. If the display end timing of the effect is later, the effect displayed when the effect button 109 is operated while the button image is displayed will be displayed as a screen transformation effect from the start of the display to the middle of the display, and from then on until the end, the normal mode will be displayed. (without transformation).

<9th aspect>
(Feature 25) During the execution of the screen transformation effect, if a hold corresponding to a new ball has occurred, and the prior information corresponding to the hold is information that allows the execution of a pre-read preview effect (for example, , in the case of a hold with a high degree of expectation that a super reach effect can be executed, in the case of a hold that will lead to a jackpot, etc.), the execution of the pre-read preview effect is restricted. For example, while the screen transformation effect is being executed, the control may be performed so as not to execute the prefetch preview effect triggered by a new ball entering the ball, or may be controlled so that the prefetch itself is not executed.

<10th aspect>
(Feature 26) When the screen transformation effect is executed, the simple decorative pattern 504 is displayed in a form that is included in the image showing the game situation of the game situation layer 523, which is not the object of transformation in the screen transformation effect. Therefore, the simple decorative pattern 504 that was displayed at a position within the performance screen 500, that is, at a position overlapping the frame image 514 before the start of the screen transformation performance, is changed when the frame image 514 is reduced in the screen transformation performance. The simple decorative pattern 504 can be displayed outside the frame image 514, for example, at a position overlapping the frame image 510, which is the special first image, and the background image 518, which is the second image (at a predetermined timing during the execution of the screen transformation effect (for example) , in the middle). On the other hand, the normal decorative pattern 502 is not included in the image showing the game situation in the game situation layer 523 in the screen transformation effect, but can be included in the frame image to be transformed in the effect layer 524. Therefore, in the screen deformation effect, the normal decorative pattern 502 can be displayed, for example, at a position overlapping with the frame image 514, which is the special first image, but is not displayed at a position overlapping with the background image 518, which is the second image. It is preferable that such a display relationship is always satisfied while the screen transformation effect is being executed, but as a modification example, such a display relationship may be satisfied at least at a predetermined timing (for example, in the middle) while the screen transformation effect is being executed. It may be a related specification (as long as it is not at a predetermined timing, it may be displayed at a position overlapping with the background image 518). In addition, as another modification, the normal decorative pattern 502 may also be displayed in a form that is included in the image showing the gaming situation of the gaming situation layer 523.

(Feature 27) When the screen transformation effect is executed, the simple pending image 507 is displayed in a form that is included in the image showing the game situation of the game situation layer 523 that is not the target of transformation in the screen transformation effect. On the other hand, the normal pending image 506 is not included in the image showing the game situation in the game situation layer 523 in the screen transformation effect, but can be included in the frame image to be transformed in the effect layer 524. As a modified example, the normal pending image 506 may also be displayed in a form that is included in the image showing the gaming situation of the gaming situation layer 523.

(Feature 28) As mentioned above, in addition to performing fluctuations (for example, moving from top to bottom) in the normal decorative pattern 502, at the start of fluctuation, immediately after a temporary stop, after a reach is established, during a temporary stop, etc. , when the display is configured to perform a display accompanied by a predetermined action (action at the start of fluctuation, action at temporary stop, action at reach completion, swinging action), as a further predetermined action, a symbol such as "777" may be displayed. When forming a combination of three jackpot symbols by aligning them, a jackpot operation such as enlarging and displaying the symbols may be configured to be executable. In such a configuration, it is preferable that the screen transformation effect is not executed when a jackpot operation is executed, but that the screen transformation effect can be executed when other predetermined operations are executed, and While the screen transformation effect is being executed, the jackpot operation is not executed, but it is preferable that other predetermined operations can be performed.

(Feature 29) If a new hold occurs during the execution of the screen transformation effect, the normal hold image 506 may also be included in the transformation by the screen change effect, or the normal hold image 506 may be included in the transformation by the screen change effect. It is also possible to specify specifications that are not included in the target. In a fluctuation that develops into a super reach effect, it is preferable to set this as a specification during the fluctuation period until it develops into a super reach effect. Since the reserved image 506 is normally not displayed while the super reach effect is being displayed, when the screen transformation effect is executed for the super reach effect, it is not included in the transformation by the screen transformation effect in any case. Note that the duration of the processing to transform the frame image in the screen transformation effect (that is, the execution period of the screen transformation effect) will be longer than the animation display time when the hold occurs, no matter what type of effect the transformation target is. It is set as follows.

<Eleventh aspect>
(Feature 30) When a hold is stored during a normal performance, a normal hold image 506 indicating the number of holds is displayed on the effect display device 60. Among the normal pending images 506, the normal pending image 506 corresponding to the lottery value for which symbol variation display has been started is switched to a changing image 508 indicating that the symbol is changing. Here, while the screen transformation effect is being executed, the normal pending image 506 is hidden, while the changing image 508 continues to be displayed. Frame static effect, which is one of the screen transformation effects, is a effect that freezes the previously displayed effect like a pause display and transforms the frame image that is the still image. In this case, since it is preferable for presentation to not include moving images, the normally reserved image 506 is hidden. On the other hand, since the changing image 508 does not increase or decrease while the symbol is changing, it continues to be displayed even while the screen transformation effect is being performed. In a modified example, the changing image 508 may also be hidden while the screen transformation effect is being performed.

While the screen transformation effect is executed, the simple pending image 507 continues to be displayed. As a result, even if a new hold occurs while the screen transformation effect is being executed, the normal hold image 506 is not additionally displayed, but the number of hold images shown in the simple hold image 507 does not interfere with the screen transformation effect. will be increased.

(Feature 31) When executing an in-frame static effect, which is one of the screen transformation effects, a normal hold image 506 is added to the frame image, which is a still image that freezes the effect that has been displayed until then, like a pause display. May be included. If an animation display is being executed when the hold occurs, that animation display is also included in the frame image in a static state. A display of the changing image 508 may also be included in the frame image, and its animated display is also included in the frame image in a stationary state. Note that while the screen transformation effect is executed, the simple pending image 507 continues to be displayed. As a result, even if a new hold occurs while the screen transformation effect is being executed, the normal hold image 506 is not additionally displayed, but the number of hold images shown in the simple hold image 507 does not interfere with the screen transformation effect. will be increased.

(Feature 32) When executing an in-frame static effect, which is one of the screen transformation effects, the normal decorative pattern 502 is added to the frame image, which is a still image that freezes the previously displayed effect like a pause display. You can hide it without including it. On the other hand, the simple decorative pattern 504 continues to be displayed in a variable manner. In addition, one round of fluctuation of the simple decorative pattern 504 (as mentioned above, for example, if the type of the simple decorative pattern 504 is "1" to "7", "123" → "234" → "345" → " 456" → "567" → "671" → "712" → "123" → ..., the period from the first "123" to the next "123" is 1. The static time of the screen transformation performance is longer than the time of In this way, if it is possible to recognize that the simple decorative pattern 504 rotates at least once during the screen transformation effect, it is possible to distinguish whether the current gaming situation is a temporary stop or a real stop (the game is not progressing). can.

(Feature 33) Also, unlike feature 32, when executing an in-frame static effect, which is one of the screen transformation effects, the effect that was being displayed until then is a still image that is frozen like a pause display. The normal decorative pattern 502 may be included in the frame image, but in that case, the normal decorative pattern 502 is fixedly displayed. That is, the normal decorative pattern 502 is not displayed in a variable manner or in an animated manner. On the other hand, the simple decorative pattern 504 continues to be displayed in a variable manner. In addition, one round of fluctuation of the simple decorative pattern 504 (as mentioned above, for example, if the type of the simple decorative pattern 504 is "1" to "7", "123" → "234" → "345" → " 456" → "567" → "671" → "712" → "123" → ..., the period from the first "123" to the next "123" is 1. The static time of the screen transformation performance is longer than the time of In this way, if it is possible to recognize that the simple decorative pattern 504 rotates at least once during the screen transformation effect, it is possible to distinguish whether the current gaming situation is a temporary stop or a real stop (the game is not progressing). can.

(Feature 34) In the in-frame static effect, which is one of the screen transformation effects, an image in which the color of the still image that was previously displayed is frozen like a pause display is targeted as the in-frame image 514. It may be included in the object 516, and its stillness and color inversion may be processed at the same time, or its transformation may be processed at the same time. However, while the in-frame still effect, which is one of the screen transformation effects, is being executed, the in-frame still effect is executed in which the frame image, which is a still image that is frozen like a pause display, is subject to transformation. However, the transformation process will not start while the performance is still.
(Feature 35) Even while the screen transformation effect is being executed, the volume setting image 532 can be displayed and the volume can be adjusted.
(Feature 36) If the screen transformation effect is executed in a situation where the volume setting image 532 is displayed before the screen transformation effect occurs, the display of the volume setting image 532 continues as it is, and the player performs operations in parallel. It is also possible to adjust the volume via .

(Feature 37) When the screen transformation effect is executed in a situation where an error warning image 536 is displayed due to an error occurring before the execution of the screen transformation effect, the error warning image 536 continues to be displayed. Note that even if the error warning sound is output at the maximum volume, which is the specified volume, the volume can be adjusted through the player's operation in parallel, and the volume setting image 532 is displayed in the volume light amount display layer 522 in FIG. 33. can be displayed. However, the volume setting image 532 is not included in the transformation target in the screen transformation effect. More specifically, the volume setting image 532 is displayed by the player's operation while the screen transformation effect is being executed, and the player further performs the operation while the screen transformation effect is being executed and the volume setting image 532 is being displayed. When adjusting the volume and changing the display of the volume setting image 532, the volume setting image 532 (for example, displaying "Volume level is 1") while the screen transformation effect is being executed and before the display change is displayed while the screen transformation effect is being executed and displayed. Any of the changed volume setting images 532 (for example, a display of "Volume level is 2") is displayed in a display mode without screen deformation. Also, immediately before the screen transformation effect is executed, the volume setting image 532 is displayed by the player's operation, and immediately after that (while the volume setting image 532 is being displayed), the screen transformation effect is executed, and while the volume setting image 532 is being displayed and the screen If the volume is adjusted and the display of the volume setting image 532 is changed by the player's operation during the execution of the transformation effect, the volume setting image 532 before the screen transformation effect is executed and before the display change (for example, "Volume level The volume setting image 532 (for example, the display of "The volume level is 2") after the screen transformation effect is executed and the display change (for example, the display of "The volume level is 2") is displayed in a display mode without screen transformation. be done.

(Feature 38) During the animation display of the normal hold image 506 at the time of hold occurrence, an in-frame static effect (a effect similar to a pause display of the previously displayed effect), which is one of the screen transformation effects, is executed. In this case, when maintaining the display of the normal hold image 506, the animation display of the normal hold image 506 may be stopped (that is, the normal hold image 506 continues to be displayed, but is displayed without animation). . The animation display of the normal hold image 506 referred to here is the animation display when normal hold occurs, and does not include displays that change the color or pattern of the normal hold image 506 as a pre-read preview effect.

(Feature 39) In a screen transformation effect, it is a frame image of the video that was displayed up to that point (if it is a static effect within a frame, it is a single frame image that is frozen like a pause display; if it is a moving image within a frame, it is a single frame image that is frozen) When a plurality of frame images that are sequentially switched) are to be color inverted (transformed), the volume setting image 532 can be displayed even during color inversion, and the volume setting image 532 can be displayed in parallel through operations by the player. Volume adjustment is possible. In addition, the following "color inversion" will also apply color inversion processing to both the frame image that is held still like a pause display in the in-frame static effect, and the multiple frame images that are sequentially switched in the in-frame video effect. do.
(Feature 40) In a situation where the volume setting image 532 is displayed before color reversal is performed, even if color reversal is performed after that, the volume setting image 532 continues to be displayed, and the player performs operations in parallel. It is also possible to adjust the volume via .
(Feature 41) In a situation where an error occurs and the error warning image 536 is displayed before color reversal is performed, the error warning image 536 continues to be displayed even if color reversal is performed thereafter. Note that even if the error warning sound is output at the maximum volume, which is the specified volume, the volume can be adjusted through the player's operation in parallel, and the volume setting image 532 is displayed in the volume light amount display layer 522 in FIG. 33. can be displayed. However, the volume setting image 532 is not subject to color inversion. More specifically, the volume setting image 532 is displayed by the player's operation while the color inversion is being executed, and the player's operation is further performed while the color inversion is being executed and the volume setting image 532 is being displayed, so that the volume can be adjusted. In addition, when the display of the volume setting image 532 is changed, the volume setting image 532 during color reversal and before the display change (for example, display of "Volume level is 1") and the volume during color reversal and after the display change are displayed. All of the setting images 532 (for example, the display of "Volume level is 2") are displayed in a display mode in which the colors are not inverted. In addition, the volume setting image 532 is displayed by the player's operation immediately before the color inversion is executed, and immediately after that (while the volume setting image 532 is being displayed), the color inversion is executed, and while the volume setting image 532 is being displayed and the color inversion is If the volume is adjusted and the display of the volume setting image 532 is changed by the player's operation during execution, the volume setting image 532 (for example, "The volume level is 1") before color inversion and before the display change is Both the volume setting image 532 (for example, the display of "Volume level is 2") after performing the color inversion and after the display change is displayed in a display mode in which the color is not inverted.
(Feature 42) If color inversion is performed during the animation display of the normal hold image 506 when the hold occurs, and if the display of the normal hold image 506 is to be maintained, the animation display of the normal hold image 506 may be stopped. (In other words, the normal pending image 506 continues to be displayed, but is displayed without animation). The animation display of the normal hold image 506 referred to here is the animation display when normal hold occurs, and does not include displays that change the color or pattern of the normal hold image 506 as a pre-read preview effect.

<Twelfth aspect>
FIG. 35 schematically shows a plurality of buffer areas into which the frame buffer is divided.
(Feature 43) The effect display control means 305 includes a frame buffer 338 that temporarily stores frame images forming a moving image to be displayed on the effect display device 60. The frame buffer 338 includes a first buffer area 540, a second buffer area 542, a third buffer area 544, a fourth buffer area 546, and a fifth buffer area 548, each having a capacity that can store a frame image. It is divided to include five buffer areas.
(Feature 44) In the effect pattern for executing the screen transformation effect, three buffer areas, for example, a first buffer area 540, a second buffer area 542, and a third buffer area 544 are used.

FIG. 36 schematically shows the relationship between the display size of a frame image and the capacity of the frame buffer area.
(Feature 45) The frame buffer 338 of this embodiment includes a first buffer area 540 having a capacity capable of storing a frame image of a first display size exceeding the screen area size of the effect display device 60; is a different area, and has a capacity capable of storing a frame image of a second display size that is the same as the screen area size of the effect display device 60 or smaller than the screen area size of the effect display device 60; Contains at least As schematically represented in FIG. 36, the first buffer area 540 has a capacity capable of storing the image of the target object 516 (ie, the above-mentioned "frame image of the first display size"). The second buffer area 542 has a capacity that can store the frame image 514 (that is, the above-mentioned "frame image of the second display size"), but has a capacity that cannot store the entire target object 516. When the image of the target object 516 is controlled to be displayed at 100% size, the display size exceeds the screen area size of the effect display device 60, and mainly the frame image 510 part falls outside the screen area, so it is actually is displayed on the effect display device 60 so that almost only the in-frame image 514 is visible to the player. That is, when controlling the display of the target object 516 at 100% size, most of the frame image 510 is not displayed on the effect display device 60, or even if it is partially displayed, it is hidden behind the center decoration 64 and cannot be seen by the player. is almost difficult to see. The first buffer area 540 is used as a frame buffer when displaying at least an effect that can be the target of a screen transformation effect, and the second buffer area 542 is used as a frame buffer when displaying an effect that is not a target of the screen transformation effect. do. The plurality of types of performance patterns include a first special performance pattern in which a performance that can be the target of the screen transformation performance is defined, and a second special performance pattern in which a performance that is not the target of the screen transformation performance is defined. It will be done.

As shown in FIG. 35, the third buffer area 544, fourth buffer area 546, and fifth buffer area 548 also have the same capacity as the second buffer area 542, and have the capacity to store the frame image 514. However, the capacity is such that the entire target object 516 cannot be stored. In this way, the first buffer area 540 is the only buffer area that can store the target object 516 including the frame image 510, and the other buffer areas cannot store up to the target object 516 but can store the frame image 514. I'm suppressing it. As a result, even if the frame buffer 338 does not necessarily have an abundant data capacity, five buffer areas can be secured by suppressing the capacity of each buffer area to the minimum necessary limit. Furthermore, this makes it possible to efficiently diversify effects while avoiding conflicts in the use of buffer areas in drawing processing and suppressing the processing load.

The first special effect pattern uses the first buffer area 540 as a frame buffer, and displays a frame image of a first display size stored in the first buffer area 540 at a predetermined timing within the screen area of the effect display device 60. New frame images are sequentially generated by combining an image transformed so that it can be displayed, an image showing the gaming situation, and a background image, and are stored in the first buffer area 540, thereby transmitting the moving image to the effect display device 60. The first special effect to be displayed is a determined effect pattern. The second special effect pattern uses the second buffer area 542 as a frame buffer, and displays a game situation and an image obtained by transforming the frame image of the second display size stored in the second buffer area 542 at a predetermined timing. The first special effect is an effect in which a moving image is displayed on the effect display device 60 by sequentially generating new frame images by combining the displayed image and the background image and storing them in the second buffer area 542. This is a performance pattern in which a different second special performance is determined.
(Feature 46) For each of the plurality of types of special effect patterns, it is determined which buffer area among the plurality of buffer areas is to be used as a frame buffer.

<13th aspect>
(Feature 47) For example, the first special effect pattern uses the first buffer area 540, the second special effect pattern uses the second buffer area 542, and the third special effect pattern uses the third buffer area 544. , the fourth buffer area 546 is used. In this way, it is possible to define multiple types of special effect patterns that use different buffer areas according to the size of the frame image to be transformed by the screen transformation effect, improving the efficiency of drawing processing and the efficiency of use of the frame buffer 338. It is possible to add diversity to the production while maintaining the same.
(Feature 48) In the fourth special effect pattern, it is determined that the first buffer area 540 is used as in the first special effect pattern, and in the fifth special effect pattern, as in the second special effect pattern, it is determined that the first buffer area 540 is used. There may be a plurality of types of special effect patterns in which the buffer areas to be used overlap, for example, it is determined that two buffer areas 542 are to be used.
(Feature 49) The first special effect pattern and the second special effect pattern are not executed concurrently (by design, they are not executed within the same variation, or even if they are executed within the same variation, the execution timing overlaps) (not possible). In addition, the fourth special effect pattern and the fifth special effect pattern are not executed simultaneously (by design, they are not executed within the same variation, or even if they are executed within the same variation, the execution timing may overlap). (not obtained). The third special effect pattern is not executed concurrently with the first special effect pattern, the second special effect pattern, the fourth special effect pattern, and the fifth special effect pattern (by design, the same variation (or, even if they are executed within the same variation, the execution timing cannot overlap).

(Feature 50) For multiple special effect patterns that are scheduled to be displayed at the same time (by design, they can be executed within the same variation, and the execution timing may overlap within the same variation), each It is defined that a buffer area is to be used. However, for multiple special effect patterns that are not scheduled to be displayed simultaneously (due to design, they are not executed within the same variation, or even if they are executed within the same variation, the execution timing cannot overlap), one special effect pattern If it is decided to display the effect using the other special effect pattern while the effect is being displayed, the effect based on the other special effect pattern that was determined later will be displayed over the effect based on the one special effect pattern that was displayed first. Display with priority. For example, if a first special effect pattern and a fourth special effect pattern that use the same first buffer area 540 are executed concurrently, the effect of the special effect pattern that was executed first is The execution is stopped, and execution of the special performance pattern ordered later is prioritized and started. Similarly, if the second special effect pattern and the fifth special effect pattern that use the same second buffer area 542 are executed in parallel, the effect of the special effect pattern that was executed first The execution of the special performance pattern ordered later is given priority and started.

Here, "cancel execution of the previously executed special effect pattern" means to cancel the execution of the screen transformation effect that was being executed up to that point and play back the video before starting the execution of the screen transformation effect. It may also be a process of returning to . As a result, even if the number of special performance patterns to be transformed by the screen transformation performance is increased, it is possible to avoid problems in processing when buffer areas to be used conflict with each other. Further, even if screen deformation effects overlap, by canceling the screen deformation effects and switching between the effects to be prioritized, normal image processing can be maintained and the burden of image processing can be reduced. As a modified example, the design may be configured so that multiple types of special effect patterns that use the same buffer area are executed simultaneously (in other words, it is possible to configure the design so that multiple types of special effect patterns that use the same buffer area are executed simultaneously in parallel). In the case of such a configuration, for example, when the first special effect pattern and the fourth special effect pattern that use the same first buffer area 540 are executed in parallel. stops the performance of the special performance pattern that was executed earlier, and starts executing the performance of the special performance pattern ordered later with priority. Similarly, when a second special effect pattern and a fifth special effect pattern that use the same second buffer area 542 are executed in parallel, the effect of the previously executed special effect pattern is The execution is stopped, and execution of the special performance pattern ordered later is prioritized and started.

FIG. 37 schematically shows the process of transforming the frame image stored in the buffer area. First, at a predetermined timing when the screen transformation effect starts to be executed, the frame image stored in the first buffer area 540 of the frame buffer 338 is read out to the drawing memory 334 (S900). This frame image is a target object 516 including a frame image 514 and a frame image 510, and is one frame of the moving image that has been displayed up to that point. This frame image is read out to the drawing memory 334 and transformed, but the frame image following the moving image that had been displayed up to that point is the frame image that was originally scheduled to be displayed, but from now on, it will be replaced with that frame image. , a new frame image generated by transformation processing and composition processing will now be displayed. Therefore, the enemy character included in the content of this frame image, which had previously been shown moving in the frame stillness effect, becomes still in this frame image, so it looks like a captured image of a moving image. become. In the case of in-frame video production, by sequentially switching the frame images read into the drawing memory 334, enemy characters included in the content of those frame images are displayed as they continue to move.

When the target object 516 is stored in the first buffer area 540 and displayed on the effect display device 60, the frame image 510 is located outside the screen area of the effect display device 60 and is not substantially visible to the player. condition, or there are only a few visible areas. This target object 516 is reduced (S902) so that the frame image 510 fits within the screen area of the effect display device 60, thereby making the entire target object 516 visible. For convenience, this figure depicts a state where the size of the target object 516 in S10 is 100%, and the target object 516 is reduced to about 80% in S12. However, in actual drawing processing of moving images, instead of switching instantly from 100% to 80%, microscopically, drawing is repeated by reducing the size by 1% each time a new frame image is generated. This is a gradual reduction process. A foreground image 517 and a background image 518 are superimposed on the target object 516 reduced in this way (S904). In this figure, as an example of the foreground image 517, a lightning bolt-shaped object is overlapped as the foreground of the target object 516, but other images indicating the game situation such as the simple decorative pattern 504 and the simple pending image 507 are also used as frame images. Overlay as the foreground while updating the content each time. The images superimposed in S14 are combined to form the next frame image 519 (S906), which is written to the first buffer area 540, thereby becoming the next frame image forming the moving image.

The target object 516 in S14 is deformed little by little when subsequent frame images are sequentially drawn. For example, the color of the target object 516 in S14 is inverted, another foreground image 517 is superimposed on that image (S908), and images and backgrounds showing the gaming situation such as the simple decorative pattern 504 and the simple pending image 507 whose contents have been updated. The images 518 are superimposed, and these superimposed images are combined to form a new frame image 519 (S910), which is written to the first buffer area 540 and becomes the next frame image forming the moving image. . Thereafter, the target object 516 is sequentially deformed for each subsequent frame image, a foreground image 517 and a background image 518 are superimposed, and images indicating the game situation such as the updated simple decorative pattern 504 and the simple pending image 507 are superimposed (S912). In this way, new frame images are combined to form a moving image.

<Fourteenth aspect>
(Feature 51) The effects based on the first special effect pattern and the fourth special effect pattern are formed so as to surround a main image portion with a display size equivalent to the screen area size of the effect display device 60 and the outer periphery of the main image portion. A frame image 510 to be displayed constitutes one effect image, and initially at least a part of the frame image 510 located outside the screen area of the effect display device 60 is displayed within the screen area of the effect display device 60. A moving image is displayed on an effect display device 60 by sequentially generating new frame images in which an image in which the display ratio and shape of an image for effect are changed and an image showing a game situation are combined so that the display ratio and shape of the effect image can be changed. In this way, when executing the screen transformation effect, by intentionally showing the frame image 510, which is a part that is normally difficult to see, and making it expand/contract or swing, it is possible to create an even more dynamic effect. can. If the normal pending image 506 is to be displayed in the frame image 510, the image including the normal pending image 506 may be transformed by screen transformation effect.

The performances using the second special performance pattern, the third special performance pattern, and the fifth special performance pattern are such that one performance image is displayed in the main image portion of the display size equivalent to the screen area size of the performance display device 60. The moving image is displayed on the effect display device 60 by sequentially generating new frame images in which an image in which the display ratio and shape of the effect image are changed and an image indicating the game situation are combined.
(Feature 52) The frame image 510 is not displayed in the effects based on the second special effect pattern, the third special effect pattern, and the fifth special effect pattern. Note that the display of the frame image 510 is not controlled even in a specific situation such as on a standby demo screen or during a jackpot.

<15th aspect>
FIG. 38 shows a screen example of the third special effect pattern. The third special effect pattern is an effect accompanied by a screen deformation effect whose deformation timing is determined by the operational input of the effect button 109. In the third special effect pattern, a button image 550 is displayed at a predetermined timing to prompt the player to input an operation of the effect button 109. When the player operates the performance button 109, the frame image is transformed by screen transformation performance. The button image 550 is displayed a plurality of times, and each time the effect button 109 is operated according to the button image 550, the frame image is transformed by the screen transformation effect.

(Feature 53) In the third special effect pattern, when an operation input is made on the effect button 109, a new frame is created by combining an image obtained by deforming the frame image at the timing of the operation input and an image indicating the gaming situation. The moving images are displayed on the effect display device 60 by sequentially generating images and storing them in the first buffer area 540. Furthermore, when an operation input is made on the production button 109, a new frame image is created by combining an image obtained by transforming the frame image stored in the first buffer area 540 at the timing of the operation input and an image indicating the gaming situation. The moving images are displayed on the effect display device 60 by sequentially generating them and storing them in the second buffer area 542.

FIG. 39 schematically shows the process of using the buffer area in the third special effect pattern. In the third special effect pattern, frame images are alternately stored in the third buffer area 544 and the fourth buffer area 546 each time the player operates the effect button 109. That is, the frame images of the currently displayed moving image are sequentially stored in the third buffer area 544, and the button image 550 is displayed at a predetermined timing (S920). When the button image 550 is operated by the player, a frame image is read from the third buffer area 544 (S922), an image modified by the screen transformation effect is generated (S924), and the next frame image is stored in the fourth buffer. It is stored in the area 546 (S926). The frame images of the moving image are sequentially stored in the fourth buffer area 546, and the button image 550 is displayed again at a predetermined timing.

When the button image 550 is operated by the player, a frame image is read from the fourth buffer area 546 (S928), an image modified by the screen transformation effect is generated (S930), and the next frame image is stored in the third buffer. It is stored in the area 544 (S932). Frame images of a moving image are sequentially stored in the third buffer area 544, and the button image 550 is displayed again at a predetermined timing. When the button image 550 is operated by the player, a frame image is read from the third buffer area 544 (S934), an image modified by the screen transformation effect is generated (S936), and the next frame image is stored in the fourth buffer. It is stored in the area 546 (S938). Frame images of moving images are sequentially stored in the fourth buffer area 546.

In this way, storing frame images that are moved little by little while being used alternately in the third buffer area 544 and the fourth buffer area 546 is repeated. As a result, when executing a screen transformation effect, the player can clearly confirm the progress and display of the effect that the player must see, such as the effect button 109 and the image showing the game status, while maintaining the dynamic feeling. By doing so, it is possible to achieve both a sense of dynamism in the performance and visibility of the progress of the performance. Furthermore, when executing a performance that requires a high processing load, such as repeated screen deformation effects, by dividing the buffer area into a plurality of areas and processing them alternately, the processing load can be distributed and problems can be avoided.

(Feature 54) In the performance based on the third special performance pattern, the button image 550 is not included in the transformation target by the screen transformation performance.
(Feature 55) It may further include a sixth special effect pattern. The performance based on the sixth special performance pattern is not subject to transformation by the screen transformation performance, but includes a performance mode as if the screen transformation performance had been executed. However, since this is not a screen transformation effect, both the first display element and the second display element are operated in a dramatic manner, but the first display element and the second display element are completely synchronized like a screen transformation effect. It is not a visual movement, but a dramatic movement in which the first display element and the second display element are not synchronized (for example, the first display element is a background display, and the second display element is a normal decorative pattern 502 or a display specific to the effect). etc.)

The present invention has been described above based on examples. Those skilled in the art will understand that this embodiment is merely an illustration, and that various modifications can be made to the combinations of these components and processing processes, and that such modifications are also within the scope of the present invention. be.
Furthermore, during the execution of the special game in this embodiment, a count-up effect (for example, If the number of prize balls currently acquired is "2000" and there are 15 prize balls, it is possible to perform a production that counts up by 1 like 2000 → 2001 → 2002 → ... 2015, and also counts up. When the number of prize balls on the display reaches a specific number, it is possible to display a highlighted display to emphasize that the number has reached a specific number (for example, the number of prize balls on the display that is counting up). When the number of prize balls reaches 2500, in addition to the count-up display, the number "2500" is displayed larger than the number of prize balls on the count-up display. Regarding these effects and displays, the specifications described below may be adopted. In addition, when the big prize opening 20 is opened in one unit game, it is closed when nine game balls enter (the prize ball for one ball entered is "15"). In this way, the number of game balls, which is the condition for ending the unit game (the condition for closing the big prize opening 20), is referred to as the specified count number.
(1) The count-up effect corresponding to the arrival of game balls within the specified count number (especially the count-up effect corresponding to the 9th count, which is the specified count number) is currently being performed, and there are still 15 balls left. If an over-win (balls entered exceeding the specified number of balls) occurs when the count-up for the 15 balls has not yet been completed, the count-up for the count-up effect for which the count-up for the 15 balls has not yet been completed will be completed. It is desirable that the count-up effect corresponding to the over winning is started after the counting of 15 balls is completed. Here, if the said over winning is detected near the end of the interval period (the pause time from when the end of each unit game is set until the setting of the next unit game or end demo starts), if the said over winning is detected, The count-up performance corresponding to winnings will overlap with the execution period of the next round (the next round that starts after the interval period has elapsed), but the execution period of the next round (the next round that starts after the interval period has elapsed) ), even if a ball enters the grand prize opening 20 during the execution of the count-up effect corresponding to the said over-winning, the timing of the entry of the ball is such that the count-up effect corresponding to the said over-winning is performed. If the count-up for 15 pitches has not been completed yet, wait until the count-up for the count-up effect that has not yet completed the count-up for 15 pitches is completed (the count-up for 15 pitches is completed). It is preferable that the count-up effect corresponding to the entry of the ball into the big winning hole 20 in the next round is started.
(2) The count-up time for one prize ball (the time required to count up from "N" to "N+1") is set to "0.03 seconds", that is, in "0.03 second" increments. is counted up. The execution time of the count-up effect is the time value required to count up one prize ball, plus the number of prize balls awarded when one game ball enters the big prize opening 20 (unit prize ball number). It is derived by multiplying the values, and the execution time of the count-up effect is "15 (unit prize ball number) x 0.03 seconds (count-up interval) = 0.45 seconds". However, even if the special game is being executed, the count-up effect is not executed during the execution of the start demonstration and the execution of the end demonstration. Further, the execution time of the count-up effect is set shorter than the interval time (also referred to as "interval period") set after the end of each unit game. The interval time is the waiting time set between each unit game or between the final unit game and the end demonstration, and is the period during which the closing of the big prize opening 20 is maintained from the start of the closing operation. This is the waiting time or end demo waiting time, and is set to "2 seconds" in common to all round games. In addition, by configuring the count-up performance time (0.45 seconds) to be shorter than the interval time (2 seconds), it is possible for the game ball to enter the big prize opening 20 just before the end of a certain unit game. Even if the count-up performance is performed based on the above, the count-up performance will be completed within the interval time after the end of the unit game. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the count-up effect will be carried out beyond the interval period until the next unit game or end demo (if you win too much, there is a possibility that the interval period will be exceeded) , the break between each unit game or the break between the final unit game and the end demonstration can be made clear.
(3) The count-up performance time is set shorter than the execution time of the end demo. As mentioned above, the count-up performance time is set to "0.45 seconds". The execution time of the end demonstration is set to "20 seconds" in common for all jackpot types (jackpot performance). The execution time of the end demonstration is the waiting time from when the interval time after the end of the last unit game in the special game has elapsed until the special game ends. That is, the execution time of the end demonstration does not include the interval time set after the end of the final unit game. In other words, during the interval time after the end of the final unit game, the entry of the game ball into the big prize opening 20 is effectively detected (in other words, it is detected as a winning ball payout target, and it is determined that the ball entered illegally). Although it is set as the remaining time (grace time) of the unit game where there is a possibility that the game will not be detected, the execution time of the end demo is valid for the game ball to enter the big prize opening 20 within that time. This is set as the preparation time for the game (performance mode) after the end of the special game separated from the unit game, which has no possibility of being detected. By configuring the count-up performance time (0.45 seconds) to be shorter than the end demo execution time (20 seconds), the game ball enters the big prize slot 20 just before the end of the final unit game. Even if a count-up effect is performed based on the ball being hit, or even if an over-win occurs in the final unit game, the big winning opening 20 will be closed after the final unit game. If the count-up effect is performed even after the end of the demo period (even during the end demo period), the count-up effect will be completed within the end demo period. Therefore, the count-up effect does not extend beyond the end demo period to the fluctuating display after the end of the special game, and the break between the end of the special game and the start of the fluctuating display for the first rotation is clearly defined. can do.
(4) When a prescribed count number of game balls enters the big prize opening 20 in one unit game, the total time of count-up performance time for the prescribed count number in this one unit game (one unit The count-up performance for the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the game) is configured to be shorter than the execution time of the jackpot end demonstration. Specifically, the total time of the count-up performance time for the specified count number is "0.45 seconds (count-up performance time) x 10 balls (specified count number) = 4.5 seconds." On the other hand, as described above, the execution time of the jackpot end demonstration is set to "20 seconds" in common to all jackpot types (jackpot medium performance). In this embodiment, by configuring the total time (4.5 seconds) of the count-up performance time for the specified count number to be shorter than the execution time (20 seconds) of the jackpot end demo, the unit of the final round Even if multiple count-up effects are performed consecutively based on multiple game balls entering the big winning hole 20 in succession just before the end of the game, after the final unit game If the count-up effect is performed even after a particular jackpot opening 20 is closed (even during the jackpot end demonstration period), the count-up effect will be completed within the jackpot end demonstration period. Therefore, the count-up effect will not be performed beyond the jackpot end demo period to the fluctuating display after the end of the special game, and the break between the end of the special game and the start of the fluctuating display for the first rotation is clearly defined. It can be done.

Note that the techniques described in the examples and modifications may be specified by the following aspects.

[First aspect]
A game board on which a game area is formed;
a starting prize opening, which is provided at a predetermined position in the gaming area, and where the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery;
A win/fail lottery means that executes a win/fail lottery based on a lottery value for determining whether or not to proceed to a special game that is more advantageous to the player than a normal game when a ball enters the starting prize opening. ,
a symbol display device in which symbols are displayed in a fluctuating manner to indicate the determination result of the winning/failure lottery;
fluctuation pattern determining means for selecting one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns in which the fluctuation display process of the symbol is determined;
When a new ball enters the starting prize opening, if a symbol change corresponding to the previous ball is displayed, the lottery value corresponding to the new ball entering the starting prize hole is stored as pending up to a predetermined number. Holding control means;
a production display device that displays production content;
production determining means for determining production content to be displayed on the production display device;
Effect display control means for displaying the effect content determined by the effect determining means on the effect display device,
When a new ball enters, transmitting advance information regarding a lottery value corresponding to the new ball to the performance determining means,
The effect image that can be displayed on the effect display device includes at least one or more first images belonging to a first image group and one or more second images belonging to a second image group,
It is possible to perform a special effect that displays a special first image in which the first image is transformed in a predetermined manner and a second image that is not transformed in the predetermined manner;
Based on the prior information, it is possible to execute a specific performance that suggests the degree of expectation for moving to a special game related to the hold corresponding to the prior information on a symbol change that precedes the change in the symbol related to the hold corresponding to the prior information. can be,
There are a plurality of types of the specific effects, and the trigger for executing the specific effect is determined according to the type of the specific effect that is executed in a symbol variation before the symbol change related to the hold that triggered the execution of the specific effect. A pinball game machine characterized in that the degree of expectation as to whether or not the special performance will be executed differs depending on the symbol variation related to the hold that has become.

[Second aspect]
A game board on which a game area is formed;
a starting prize opening, which is provided at a predetermined position in the gaming area, and where the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery;
A win/fail lottery means that executes a win/fail lottery based on a lottery value for determining whether or not to proceed to a special game that is more advantageous to the player than a normal game when a ball enters the starting prize opening. ,
a symbol display device in which a special symbol is variably displayed to indicate the determination result of the winning/failure lottery;
Variation pattern determining means for selecting one of a plurality of types of variation patterns in which a variation display process of the special symbol is determined;
a production display device that displays production content;
a predetermined movable accessory that is provided in the vicinity of the performance display device and operates in a performance manner in conjunction with the performance displayed on the performance display device;
production determining means for determining production content to be displayed on the production display device;
performance control means for displaying the performance content determined by the performance determining means on the performance display device,
It has a decorative pattern that is a pattern that visually indicates the determination result of the winning/failure lottery, and the decorative pattern is a normal decorative pattern that is displayed as a main pattern on the performance display device at least when the special pattern is stopped; A simple decorative pattern that is displayed in a display form that is simpler than the normal decorative pattern,
The effect image that can be displayed on the effect display device includes at least one or more first images belonging to a first image group and one or more second images belonging to a second image group,
It is possible to perform a special effect that displays a special first image in which the first image is transformed in a predetermined manner and a second image that is not transformed in the predetermined manner;
When the special performance is performed, the movements of the predetermined movable accessory are performed in parallel relatively more often than when the special performance is not performed,
In the special effect, the normal decorative pattern may be included in a first image belonging to the first image group, while the simple decorative pattern may be included in a second image belonging to the second image group. A pinball game machine.

[Third aspect]
A game board on which a game area is formed;
a starting prize opening, which is provided at a predetermined position in the gaming area, and where the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery;
A win/fail lottery means that executes a win/fail lottery based on a lottery value for determining whether or not to proceed to a special game that is more advantageous to the player than a normal game when a ball enters the starting prize opening. ,
a symbol display device in which symbols are displayed in a fluctuating manner to indicate the determination result of the winning/failure lottery;
fluctuation pattern determining means for selecting one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns in which the fluctuation display process of the symbol is determined;
a production display device that displays production content;
production determining means for determining production content to be displayed on the production display device;
Effect display control means for displaying the effect content determined by the effect determining means on the effect display device,
The effect image that can be displayed on the effect display device includes at least one or more first images belonging to a first image group and one or more second images belonging to a second image group,
It is possible to perform a special effect that displays a special first image in which the first image is transformed in a predetermined manner and a second image that is not transformed in the predetermined manner;
A pinball game machine characterized in that even if the first image to be transformed in the special performance is of a different type, the second image that is not to be transformed in the special performance is a common image.

[Fourth aspect]
A game board on which a game area is formed;
a starting prize opening, which is provided at a predetermined position in the gaming area, and where the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery;
A win/fail lottery means that executes a win/fail lottery based on a lottery value for determining whether or not to proceed to a special game that is more advantageous to the player than a normal game when a ball enters the starting prize opening. ,
a symbol display device in which symbols are displayed in a fluctuating manner to indicate the determination result of the winning/failure lottery;
fluctuation pattern determining means for selecting one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns in which the fluctuation display process of the symbol is determined;
a production display device that displays production content;
production determining means for determining production content to be displayed on the production display device;
Effect display control means for displaying the effect content determined by the effect determining means on the effect display device,
The effect image that can be displayed on the effect display device includes at least one or more first images belonging to a first image group and one or more second images belonging to a second image group,
A special effect can be executed to display a special first image in which the first image is transformed in a predetermined manner and a second image that is not transformed in the predetermined manner,
When a predetermined error occurs, a warning image indicating that the predetermined error has occurred can be displayed,
When the execution of the special effect is started in a situation where the warning image is displayed due to the occurrence of the predetermined error before the start of execution of the special effect, the warning image is not transformed into the predetermined mode. A pinball game machine characterized in that the display continues while maintaining the display mode before the start of execution of the special performance.

[Fifth aspect]
A game board on which a game area is formed;
a starting prize opening, which is provided at a predetermined position in the gaming area, and where the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery;
A win/fail lottery means that executes a win/fail lottery based on a lottery value for determining whether or not to proceed to a special game that is more advantageous to the player than a normal game when a ball enters the starting prize opening. ,
a symbol display device in which symbols are displayed in a fluctuating manner to indicate the determination result of the winning/failure lottery;
fluctuation pattern determining means for selecting one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns in which the fluctuation display process of the symbol is determined;
When a new ball enters the starting prize opening, if a symbol change corresponding to the previous ball is displayed, the lottery value corresponding to the new ball entering the starting prize hole is stored as pending up to a predetermined number. Holding control means;
a production display device that displays production content;
production determining means for determining production content to be displayed on the production display device;
Effect display control means for displaying the effect content determined by the effect determining means on the effect display device,
The effect image that can be displayed on the effect display device includes at least one or more first images belonging to a first image group and one or more second images belonging to a second image group,
It is possible to perform a special effect that displays a special first image in which the first image is transformed in a predetermined manner and a second image that is not transformed in the predetermined manner;
Triggered by the occurrence of a hold corresponding to a new ball entry, a hold image corresponding to the hold can be displayed,
When displaying the held image, the display can be started with a predetermined animation display,
Even if the display of the pending image starts accompanied by the predetermined animation display before the start of execution of the special effect, and the special effect starts execution while the predetermined animation display is being executed, the predetermined A pinball game machine characterized in that the animation display is continuously executed without being stopped.

[Sixth aspect]
A game board on which a game area is formed;
a starting prize opening, which is provided at a predetermined position in the gaming area, and where the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery;
A win/fail lottery means that executes a win/fail lottery based on a lottery value for determining whether or not to proceed to a special game that is more advantageous to the player than a normal game when a ball enters the starting prize opening. ,
a symbol display device in which symbols are displayed in a fluctuating manner to indicate the determination result of the winning/failure lottery;
fluctuation pattern determining means for selecting one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns in which the fluctuation display process of the symbol is determined;
When a new ball enters the starting prize opening, if a symbol change corresponding to the previous ball is displayed, the lottery value corresponding to the new ball entering the starting prize hole is stored as pending up to a predetermined number. Holding control means;
a production display device that displays production content;
production determining means for determining production content to be displayed on the production display device;
Effect display control means for displaying the effect content determined by the effect determining means on the effect display device,
When a new ball enters, transmitting advance information regarding a lottery value corresponding to the new ball to the performance determining means,
The effect image that can be displayed on the effect display device includes at least one or more first images belonging to a first image group and one or more second images belonging to a second image group,
It is possible to perform a special effect that displays a special first image in which the first image is transformed in a predetermined manner and a second image that is not transformed in the predetermined manner;
Based on the prior information, it is possible to execute a specific performance that suggests the degree of expectation for moving to a special game related to the hold corresponding to the prior information on a symbol change that precedes the change in the symbol related to the hold corresponding to the prior information. can be,
There are a plurality of types of the specific effects, and the trigger for executing the specific effect is determined according to the type of the specific effect that is executed in a symbol variation before the symbol change related to the hold that triggered the execution of the specific effect. The degree of expectation as to whether or not the special effect will be executed varies depending on the symbol change related to the hold that has become,
Whether it is a symbol variation in which the special effect is executed or a symbol variation in which the special effect is not executed, a reach state can be formed during the symbol variation,
In the case of a symbol variation that forms the ready-to-reach state, the degree of expectation as to whether or not the special effect will be executed with the symbol variation varies depending on the type of symbol that forms the ready-to-reach state. Pinball game machine.

[Seventh aspect]
A game board on which a game area is formed;
a starting prize opening, which is provided at a predetermined position in the gaming area, and where the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery;
A win/fail lottery means that executes a win/fail lottery based on a lottery value for determining whether or not to proceed to a special game that is more advantageous to the player than a normal game when a ball enters the starting prize opening. ,
a symbol display device in which a special symbol is variably displayed to indicate the determination result of the winning/failure lottery;
Variation pattern determining means for selecting one of a plurality of types of variation patterns in which a variation display process of the special symbol is determined;
a production display device that displays production content;
a predetermined movable accessory that is provided in the vicinity of the performance display device and operates in a performance manner in conjunction with the performance displayed on the performance display device;
production determining means for determining production content to be displayed on the production display device;
performance control means for displaying the performance content determined by the performance determining means on the performance display device,
It has a decorative pattern that is a pattern that visually indicates the determination result of the winning/failure lottery, and the decorative pattern is a normal decorative pattern that is displayed as a main pattern on the performance display device at least when the special pattern is stopped; A simple decorative pattern that is displayed in a display form that is simpler than the normal decorative pattern,
The effect image that can be displayed on the effect display device includes at least one or more first images belonging to a first image group and one or more second images belonging to a second image group,
A special effect can be executed to display a special first image in which the first image is transformed in a predetermined manner and a second image that is not transformed in the predetermined manner,
When the special performance is performed, the movements of the predetermined movable accessory are performed in parallel relatively more often than when the special performance is not performed,
In the special effect, the normal decorative pattern may be included in a first image belonging to the first image group, while the simple decorative pattern may be included in a second image belonging to the second image group,
Even while the special effect is being executed, the volume can be adjusted based on player operations, and when performing the volume adjustment, a volume setting image can be displayed;
When the execution of the special effect is started in a situation where the volume adjustment image is displayed before the start of execution of the special effect, the volume adjustment image is not transformed into the predetermined mode and is displayed before the start of execution of the special effect. A pinball game machine characterized in that the display continues while maintaining the display mode.

[Eighth aspect]
A game board on which a game area is formed;
a starting prize opening, which is provided at a predetermined position in the gaming area, and where the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery;
A win/fail lottery means that executes a win/fail lottery based on a lottery value for determining whether or not to proceed to a special game that is more advantageous to the player than a normal game when a ball enters the starting prize opening. ,
a symbol display device in which symbols are displayed in a fluctuating manner to indicate the determination result of the winning/failure lottery;
fluctuation pattern determining means for selecting one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns in which the fluctuation display process of the symbol is determined;
a production display device that displays production content;
production determining means for determining production content to be displayed on the production display device;
Effect display control means for displaying the effect content determined by the effect determining means on the effect display device,
The effect image that can be displayed on the effect display device includes at least one or more first images belonging to a first image group and one or more second images belonging to a second image group,
It is possible to perform a special effect that displays a special first image in which the first image is transformed in a predetermined manner and a second image that is not transformed in the predetermined manner;
Even if the types of the first images to be transformed in the special performance are different, the second images that are not to be transformed in the special performance are common images,
When a predetermined error occurs, a warning image indicating that the predetermined error has occurred can be displayed,
A pinball game machine characterized in that when the predetermined error occurs during execution of the special performance, the warning image is displayed without being transformed into the predetermined mode.

[Ninth aspect]
A game board on which a game area is formed;
a starting prize opening, which is provided at a predetermined position in the gaming area, and where the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery;
A win/fail lottery means that executes a win/fail lottery based on a lottery value for determining whether or not to proceed to a special game that is more advantageous to the player than a normal game when a ball enters the starting prize opening. ,
a symbol display device in which symbols are displayed in a fluctuating manner to indicate the determination result of the winning/failure lottery;
fluctuation pattern determining means for selecting one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns in which the fluctuation display process of the symbol is determined;
When a new ball enters the starting prize opening, if a symbol change corresponding to the previous ball is displayed, the lottery value corresponding to the new ball entering the starting prize hole is stored as pending up to a predetermined number. Holding control means;
a production display device that displays production content;
production determining means for determining production content to be displayed on the production display device;
Effect display control means for displaying the effect content determined by the effect determining means on the effect display device,
When a new ball enters, transmitting advance information regarding a lottery value corresponding to the new ball to the performance determining means,
The effect image that can be displayed on the effect display device includes at least one or more first images belonging to a first image group and one or more second images belonging to a second image group,
It is possible to perform a special effect that displays a special first image in which the first image is transformed in a predetermined manner and a second image that is not transformed in the predetermined manner;
Based on the prior information, it is possible to execute a specific performance that suggests the degree of expectation for moving to a special game related to the hold corresponding to the prior information on a symbol change that precedes the change in the symbol related to the hold corresponding to the prior information. can be,
When a predetermined error occurs, a warning image indicating that the predetermined error has occurred can be displayed,
When the execution of the special effect is started in a situation where the warning image is displayed due to the occurrence of the predetermined error before the start of execution of the special effect, the warning image is not transformed into the predetermined mode. The display continues while maintaining the display mode before the start of execution of the special effect,
A pinball gaming machine characterized in that, when a suspension corresponding to a new ball entry occurs during execution of the special performance, execution of the specific performance corresponding to the suspension is restricted.

[Tenth aspect]
A game board on which a game area is formed;
a starting prize opening, which is provided at a predetermined position in the gaming area, and where the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery;
A win/fail lottery means that executes a win/fail lottery based on a lottery value for determining whether or not to proceed to a special game that is more advantageous to the player than a normal game when a ball enters the starting prize opening. ,
a symbol display device in which a special symbol is variably displayed to indicate the determination result of the winning/failure lottery;
Variation pattern determining means for selecting one of a plurality of types of variation patterns in which a variation display process of the special symbol is determined;
a production display device that displays production content;
production determining means for determining production content to be displayed on the production display device;
performance control means for displaying the performance content determined by the performance determining means on the performance display device,
It has a decorative pattern that is a pattern that visually indicates the determination result of the winning/failure lottery, and the decorative pattern is a normal decorative pattern that is displayed as a main pattern on the performance display device at least when the special pattern is stopped; A simple decorative pattern that is displayed in a display form that is simpler than the normal decorative pattern,
The effect image that can be displayed on the effect display device includes at least one or more first images belonging to a first image group and one or more second images belonging to a second image group,
It is possible to perform a special effect that displays a special first image in which the first image is transformed in a predetermined manner and a second image that is not transformed in the predetermined manner;
Triggered by the occurrence of a hold corresponding to a new ball entry, a hold image corresponding to the hold can be displayed,
When displaying the held image, the display can be started with a predetermined animation display,
Even if the display of the pending image starts accompanied by the predetermined animation display before the start of execution of the special effect, and the special effect starts execution while the predetermined animation display is being executed, the predetermined The animation display continues without being stopped,
At a predetermined timing in the special performance, the simple decorative pattern may be displayed overlappingly with the special first image and the second image in the special performance, while the normal decorative pattern may be displayed together with the special first image in the special performance. may be displayed overlappingly, but not overlappingly displayed with the second image.

[Eleventh aspect]
A game board on which a game area is formed;
a starting prize opening, which is provided at a predetermined position in the gaming area, and where the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery;
A win/fail lottery means that executes a win/fail lottery based on a lottery value for determining whether or not to proceed to a special game that is more advantageous to the player than a normal game when a ball enters the starting prize opening. ,
a symbol display device in which symbols are displayed in a fluctuating manner to indicate the determination result of the winning/failure lottery;
fluctuation pattern determining means for selecting one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns in which the fluctuation display process of the symbol is determined;
When a new ball enters the starting prize opening, if a symbol change corresponding to the previous ball is displayed, the lottery value corresponding to the new ball entering the starting prize hole is stored as pending up to a predetermined number. Holding control means;
a production display device that displays production content;
production determining means for determining production content to be displayed on the production display device;
Effect display control means for displaying the effect content determined by the effect determining means on the effect display device,
It is possible to perform a special performance in which a predetermined performance content displayed on the performance display device is temporarily stopped and displayed at a predetermined timing,
When a hold corresponding to a new ball enters occurs, a hold image corresponding to the hold can be displayed, and among the hold images, the hold image corresponding to the lottery value for which symbol variation display has started is displayed. , can be displayed as a fluctuating image corresponding to the symbol fluctuating display,
A pinball game machine characterized in that during execution of the special performance, the suspended image is hidden, while the fluctuating image continues to be displayed.

[Twelfth aspect]
A game board on which a game area is formed;
a starting prize opening, which is provided at a predetermined position in the gaming area, and where the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery;
a win/fail determination means for executing a win/fail determination based on a lottery value for determining whether or not to proceed to a special game which is more advantageous to the player than a normal game when a ball enters the starting prize opening; ,
special game control means that executes the special game when the result of the win/fail determination is a jackpot;
a performance display device for displaying the content of the performance;
performance determining means for determining one of a plurality of types of performance patterns as the performance content to be displayed on the performance display device;
a performance display control means for displaying performance content based on the determined performance pattern on the performance display device;
Equipped with
The effect display control means has a frame buffer that temporarily stores frame images forming a moving image to be displayed on the effect display device,
The frame buffer is
a first buffer area capable of storing a frame image of a first display size exceeding the screen area size of the effect display device;
a second buffer area that is different from the first buffer area and can store a frame image of a second display size that is less than or equal to the screen area size of the effect display device;
including at least
The multiple types of performance patterns include:
The first buffer area is used as a frame buffer, and the frame image of the first display size stored in the first buffer area at a predetermined timing is transformed so as to be displayed within the screen area of the effect display device. A first special effect is determined in which a moving image is displayed on the effect display device by sequentially generating new frame images in which the image shown in the image and the image showing the game situation are combined and stored in the first buffer area. The first special performance pattern,
The second buffer area is used as a frame buffer, and an image obtained by deforming the frame image of the second display size stored in the second buffer area at a predetermined timing is combined with an image showing the gaming situation. A second special performance, which is different from the first special performance, is defined, which is a performance that displays a moving image on the performance display device by sequentially generating new frame images and storing them in the second buffer area. A second special performance pattern,
A pinball game machine characterized by comprising:

[13th aspect]
A game board on which a game area is formed;
a starting prize opening, which is provided at a predetermined position in the gaming area, and where the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery;
a win/fail determination means for executing a win/fail determination based on a lottery value for determining whether or not to proceed to a special game which is more advantageous to the player than a normal game when the ball enters the starting prize opening; ,
special game control means that executes the special game when the result of the win/fail determination is a jackpot;
a performance display device that displays the content of the performance;
performance determining means for determining one of a plurality of types of performance patterns as the performance content to be displayed on the performance display device;
a performance display control means for displaying performance content based on the determined performance pattern on the performance display device;
Equipped with
The effect display control means has a frame buffer that temporarily stores frame images constituting a moving image to be displayed on the effect display device, and the frame buffer has a plurality of buffer areas each capable of storing frame images. including,
Each of the plurality of types of performance patterns determines which of the plurality of buffer areas is used as a frame buffer, and an image obtained by transforming the frame image stored in the buffer area at a predetermined timing and the game situation. a plurality of special effect patterns in which a special effect is defined for displaying a moving image on the effect display device by sequentially generating new frame images by combining them with an image showing the image and storing the new frame images in the buffer area,
The effect display control means includes:
For multiple special performance patterns that are designed so that their execution timings may overlap within the same variation, it is stipulated that different buffer areas are used for each.
For multiple special performance patterns whose execution timings are designed to not overlap within the same variation, if the display of the performance of one special performance pattern is started even though the performance of the other special performance pattern is being displayed. A pinball game machine characterized in that a performance based on the other special performance pattern determined later is displayed with priority over a performance based on the one special performance pattern that was displayed earlier.

[14th aspect]
A game board on which a game area is formed;
a starting prize opening, which is provided at a predetermined position in the gaming area, and where the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery;
a win/fail determination means for executing a win/fail determination based on a lottery value for determining whether or not to proceed to a special game which is more advantageous to the player than a normal game when a ball enters the starting prize opening; ,
special game control means that executes the special game when the result of the win/fail determination is a jackpot;
a performance display device for displaying the content of the performance;
performance determining means for determining one of a plurality of types of performance patterns as the performance content to be displayed on the performance display device;
a performance display control means for displaying performance content based on the determined performance pattern on the performance display device;
Equipped with
A main image portion having a display size that can be displayed within the screen area of the effect display device, and an outer frame image portion formed to surround the outer periphery of the main image portion constitute one effect image,
In the performance image in the initial situation, part or all of the outer frame image portion is not displayed within the screen area of the performance display device,
In the effect image in a predetermined situation different from the initial situation, part or all of the outer frame image portion that was not displayed within the screen area of the effect display device in the initial situation is Sequentially new frame images are created by combining an image in which at least one of the display ratio and shape of the performance image and an image indicating the game situation are combined so as to be displayed within the screen area of the performance display device. A pinball game machine characterized in that it is possible to perform a special effect that causes the effect display device to display a moving image by generating it.

[15th aspect]
A game board on which a game area is formed;
a starting prize opening, which is provided at a predetermined position in the gaming area, and where the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery;
a win/fail determination means for executing a win/fail determination based on a lottery value for determining whether or not to proceed to a special game which is more advantageous to the player than a normal game when a ball enters the starting prize opening; ,
special game control means that executes the special game when the result of the win/fail determination is a jackpot;
a performance display device for displaying the content of the performance;
performance determining means for determining one of a plurality of types of performance patterns as the performance content to be displayed on the performance display device;
a performance display control means for displaying performance content based on the determined performance pattern on the performance display device;
an operation input means for accepting operation inputs from a player;
Equipped with
The effect display control means includes a frame buffer that temporarily stores frame images constituting a moving image to be displayed on the effect display device, and the frame buffer has a plurality of buffer areas each capable of storing frame images. including,
The plurality of types of production patterns include, when an operation input is made by the operation input means, a new frame image that is a composite of an image obtained by deforming the frame image at the timing of the operation input and an image indicating the gaming situation. By sequentially generating the moving images and storing them in the first buffer area, the moving images are displayed on the effect display device, and further, when an operation input is made from the operation input means, the first buffer at the operation input timing. New frame images are sequentially generated by combining an image obtained by transforming the frame image stored in the area with an image showing the gaming situation, and are stored in the second buffer area, thereby transmitting the moving image to the effect display device. A pinball game machine characterized by including a special effect pattern in which a special effect to be displayed is determined.

(Prerequisite technology 2)
The basic configuration of a slot machine will be explained as the underlying technology.
FIG. 40 is a perspective view showing the basic structure on the outside of the slot machine 1010. The slot machine 1010 includes a housing base 1102 which is mainly a box-shaped body, a housing door 1104 provided on the front surface of the housing base 1102, and various types of slots provided on the housing base 1102 and the housing door 1104. A device. The housing door 1104 is a door attached to the opening of the housing base 1102 so as to be openable and closable. By integrating the housing base 1102 and the housing door 1104, the housing of the slot machine 1010 is opened. Form. The housing door 1104 is locked during business hours of the gaming parlor to prevent unauthorized access to the inside of the slot machine 1010. Access to the inside becomes possible only when the housing door 1104 is unlocked by an employee of the game parlor.

A transparent window 1132 is provided at approximately the center of the front surface of the housing door 1104, and the reel rotating inside can be viewed through the transparent window 1132. A presentation display device 1130 for displaying presentation contents is provided at the upper front of the housing door section 1104. A first bet button 1112a, a second bet button 1112b, a settlement button 1113, a cross key 1118, a production button 1120, and a medal slot 1110 are provided in an operation area provided below the transparent window 1132 in the case door 1104. It will be done. The first bet button 1112a is a button for placing one medal (hereinafter also referred to as "bet"), and the second bet button 1112b is a so-called max bet button, which is a button for placing one medal (hereinafter also referred to as "bet"). This is a button for hanging medals. The settlement button 1113 is a button that instructs the player to pay out medals inserted through the medal slot 1110 and stored as stored medals or bet medals. The cross key 1118 and the production button 1120 are operation input means that accept operation inputs from the player as production. A start lever 1114 is provided below the bet buttons 1112a and 1112b for the player to instruct the start of rotation of the reels. On the right side of the start lever 1114, there are provided a left stop button 1116a, a middle stop button 1116b, and a right stop button 1116c for respectively instructing the rotation of the three reels to stop. A medal payout port 1108 and a medal receiving tray 1106 are provided in front of the medal payout port 1108 below the housing door portion 1104, and speakers 1122 are provided on the left and right sides of the payout port 1108. A plurality of presentation lamps 1124 are provided at a plurality of locations such as the outer periphery of the housing door portion 1104.

At the top (not shown) of the performance display device 1130, a status display lamp, a number display lamp, a stored number display lamp, and a payout number display lamp are provided. For example, the status display lamp lights up when a bonus game or AT (assist time) starts, and goes out when it ends. The number display lamp is a 7-segment display that displays the number of bonus games, AT executions, etc. The stored number display lamp is a 7-segment display that displays the number of stored (credited) game medals. The payout number display lamp is a 7-segment display that displays the number of game medals that are paid out when a small winning combination is established. When an abnormality (error) occurs in the slot machine 1010, the payout number display lamp displays alphabetical characters indicating the type of error. Examples include a hopper empty error, a game medal payout error, a game medal retention error, a game medal backflow error, an auxiliary storage full error, a rotating drum stop error, and a set value error. The hopper empty error is an error that occurs when the game medals in the hopper tank 1162 become empty. A game medal payout error is an error that occurs when game medals are paid out at a timing different from the original one. The game medal retention error is an error that occurs when game medals are jammed inside the medal slot 1110. The game medal backflow error is an error that occurs when the game medal advances in a direction different from the original route, such as when the game medal enters from a position different from the medal slot 1110. The auxiliary storage full error is an error that occurs when the game medals in the hopper tank 1162 become full. The reel stop error is an error that occurs when each reel does not stop at a predetermined position. A set value error is an error that occurs when a set value falls outside a predetermined numerical range.

FIG. 41 is a rear view of the housing door 1104 exposed when the housing door 1104 is opened. A transparent window 1132 is provided approximately in the center. At the top, a sub-control device 1300, called a so-called sub-board, is installed to control the performance in the game. A medal selector 1150 is provided below the transparent window 1132, a medal guide path 1152 is provided to the right of the medal selector 1150, and a medal return path 1154 is provided below. When a medal is inserted into a medal slot described later, the medal selector 1150 distributes the medal to a medal guide path 1152 if the medal can be accepted, and to a medal return path 1154 if the medal cannot be accepted. The medals distributed to the medal guideway 1152 are stored in a hopper tank described later through the medal guideway 1152.

FIG. 42 is a front view showing the internal configuration of the housing base 1102 exposed when the housing door 1104 is opened. A left reel 1160a, a middle reel 1160b, and a right reel 1160c are rotatably provided approximately at the center of the housing base 1102. The left reel 1160a, the middle reel 1160b, and the right reel 1160c are rotating members with a plurality of symbols printed on their outer peripheral surfaces, and when they are rotated by the driving force of a stepping motor, the rotational movement of the symbols is caused through the transparent window 1132. Visible to players.

At the top of the housing base 1102, a main control device 1200, which is a so-called main board, is installed to control the progress of the game. In the main control device 1200, a setting change switch 1168 is provided on the right side thereof. The setting change switch 1168 includes a button for changing game specifications in six stages, a keyhole into which a setting key held by an employee of the game parlor is inserted, and a setting memory for storing set setting values. Among the six levels of setting values, each associated with a different game specification, from setting 1 to setting 6, the larger the value, the more advantageous the game specification is to the player. When an employee of the game parlor inserts the setting key into the keyhole and turns it, the player can operate the buttons to change the settings.

A hopper tank 1162 is provided at the bottom of the housing base 1102, and a payout device 1164 (hereinafter also referred to as "hopper") that pays out medals from a payout opening 1108 is provided below the hopper tank 1162. A power supply board 1166 that supplies power to each part of the slot machine 1010 is provided on the left side of the hopper tank 1162.

FIG. 43 is a diagram showing the symbol arrangement of the reels. On the outer peripheral surface of each of the left reel 1160a, middle reel 1160b, and right reel 1160c, symbol rows as shown in the table of the figure are printed. On each reel, 20 symbols corresponding to symbol numbers 0 to 19 are arranged at equal intervals. When a combination of symbols that stop on the active line among these symbols becomes the same symbol or a predetermined combination that makes a predetermined winning combination, the winning of that winning combination is determined. On the other hand, the lines lined up with symbols also include combination lines that are not set as active lines and are not treated as winning combinations even if the same predetermined symbols or predetermined combinations stop.

In the slot machine 1010 described above, the player inserts one to three medals into the medal slot 1110 to bet on medals. If medals are stored as credits, the player presses the first bet button 1112a, the second bet button 1112b, or the settlement button 1113 to place one or three medals. When the player operates the start lever 1114, the left reel 1160a, middle reel 1160b, and right reel 1160c start rotating, and the symbol rows on the reels move vertically at high speed. When the player presses the left stop button 1116a, middle stop button 1116b, and right stop button 1116c in any order, the left reel 1160a, middle reel 1160b, and right reel 1160c stop rotating in the order corresponding to the pressing order, One of the symbols is displayed at each stop position. If the combination of symbols stopped on a predetermined active line corresponds to one of multiple types of winnings, it is determined that the winning result is won, and the number of medals corresponding to the type of winning is paid out, or the gaming state migration is performed.

FIG. 44 is a functional block diagram of the slot machine 1010. The slot machine 1010 includes a main controller 1200 and a sub-control device 1300. The main control device 1200 is electrically connected to the reels 1160a-c, bet buttons 1112a, b, settlement button 1113, start lever 1114, stop buttons 1116a-c, and setting change switch 1168, and the sub-control device 1300 is connected to the production lamp. 1124 , an effect display device 1130 , a speaker 1122 , a cross key 1118 , and an effect button 1120 are electrically connected. The main control device 1200 and the sub-control device 1300 each include elements such as a ROM and RAM for storing data and programs, and a CPU used for arithmetic processing in terms of hardware, but in this figure, they mainly consist of software. We will explain the functional blocks from this perspective.

Note that any of the functional blocks included in the main control device 1200 may be installed in the sub control device 1300 instead of the main control device 1200. Similarly, any of the functional blocks included in the sub-control device 1300 may be installed in the main control device 1200 instead of the sub-control device 1300. However, since data transmission and reception between the main control device 1200 and the sub-control device 1300 is unidirectional from the main control device 1200 to the sub-control device 1300, the entire operation is realized by transmitting and receiving data in such one direction. Each component is arranged in the main control device 1200 and the sub-control device 1300 so as to perform the following operations. In this way, since the unidirectionality of data transmission from the main control device 1200 to the sub-control device 1300 is maintained, data cannot be sent from the configuration included in the sub-control device 1300 to the configuration included in the main control device 1200. cannot request data transmission. Therefore, the information generated by the main control device 1200 cannot be referenced from the sub control device 1300 unless the main control device 1200 unilaterally transmits it to the sub control device 1300.

The main control device 1200 includes a winning combination lottery means 1202, a random number determination means 1204, a winning flag control means 1206, a reel control means 1208, a stop position determination table 1210, an operation order detection means 1212, a winning determination means 1214, a payout means 1216, and a special game It includes a control means 1218 and a setting change means 1220.

Triggered by the player's operation of the start lever 1114, the role lottery means 1202 executes a role lottery to determine a winning role from a plurality of types of roles, and transmits the result of the role lottery to the sub-control device 1300. do. Types of winning combinations include small winning combinations, special winning combinations, and replay winning combinations, and if none of the winning combinations is determined, the winning combination is a loss. There are multiple types of small roles, and a number of medals are paid out depending on the type. The special prizes include a regular bonus (also called "RB") and a big bonus (also called "BB"). A replay combination is also called a "replay" and is a combination in which the same number of medals are inserted without inserting new medals, and the game can be played again. The random number determining means 1204 acquires the value of the random number used for the prize lottery as a lottery value. Note that the "random number" referred to in this application does not have to be a random number generated mathematically, but may be a pseudo-random number generated using a hardware random number, a software random number, or the like. The winning combination lottery means 1202 determines the winning combination based on whether the lottery value acquired by the random number determining means 1204 falls within any lottery value range assigned to each winning combination.

The winning flag control means 1206 turns on the flag corresponding to the winning combination among the plurality of flags corresponding to each winning combination. If the winning combination for which the flag is turned on is a small winning combination, the winning is not carried over, so the flag is turned off when the game ends regardless of whether or not a prize is won. If the winning combination for which the flag is turned on is a special winning combination, the winning is carried over until the prize is won, so the flag is kept on until the prize is won, and the flag is turned off when the prize is won. If the winning combination for which the flag is turned on is a replaying combination, the winning is not carried over, so the flag is turned off when the game ends.

The reel control means 1208 controls the start of rotation of the left reel 1160a, middle reel 1160b, and right reel 1160c in response to the operation of the start lever 1114, and also outputs information indicating the operation of the start lever 1114 as a subdirectory. It is transmitted to the control device 1300. The reel control means 1208 selects one of the plurality of stop position determination tables 1210 according to the result of the winning lottery. The reel control means 1208 is triggered by individual presses of the left stop button 1116a, middle stop button 1116b, and right stop button 1116c, and stops the rotation of the left reel 1160a, middle reel 1160b, and right reel 1160c in response to the presses. It performs control and also transmits information indicating that the stop button has been pressed to the sub-control device 1300. Reel control means 1208 controls rotation and stopping of left reel 1160a, middle reel 1160b, and right reel 1160c by controlling the driving of stepping motors provided for each.

Based on the stop position determination table 1210, the reel control means 1208 controls the left reel 1160a, the middle reel 1160b, and the right reel 1160c according to the timing and order in which the left stop button 1116a, middle stop button 1116b, and right stop button 1116c are pressed. Determine the stopping position. The operation order detection means 1212 detects the order in which the left stop button 1116a, the middle stop button 1116b, and the right stop button 1116c are pressed. The reel control means 1208 detects reference positions of the rotational positions of the left reel 1160a, the middle reel 1160b, and the right reel 1160c using the corresponding photosensors.

The stop position determination table 1210 includes the result of the lottery, the positions of the reels 1160a to 1160c when the stop buttons 1116a to 1116c are pressed, the order in which the stop buttons 1116a to 1116c are pressed, and the plurality of reels 1160a to 1160c. A correspondence relationship is determined as to which of the symbols should be stopped on the active line. That is, individual stop position determination tables 1210 are prepared according to the type of small winning combination, the type of special winning combination, and the type of replaying winning combination, and the timing and order in which the stop buttons 1116a to 1116c are pressed are determined as winning conditions for each winning combination. It is defined in each stop position determination table 1210. When any winning combination is won, the reel control means 1208 controls the reel control means 1208 based on the stop position determination table 1210 corresponding to the winning combination, and when the timing and order of pressing of the stop buttons 1116a to 1116c satisfy the winning conditions. The stopping positions of the reels 1160a to 1160c are determined so that the symbol combinations corresponding to the winning combinations are aligned on the active line. Even if one of the winning combinations is won, if the pressing timing and pressing order of the stop buttons 1116a to 1116c do not satisfy the winning conditions, the reel control means 1208 determines the stop position according to the winning combination. Based on the table 1210, the stopping positions of the reels 1160a to 1160c are determined so that the symbol combinations corresponding to winning combinations are not aligned on the active line. If none of the winning combinations has been won, the reel control means 1208 moves the reels 1160a to 1160c to stop positions based on the stop position determination table 1210 corresponding to the winnings so that the symbol combinations corresponding to the winning combinations do not line up on the active line. Determine.

Note that in this specification, the term "table" strictly refers only to data in which the correspondence relationship between a first parameter such as a lottery value and a second parameter such as a value indicating an option is defined in a table structure. However, it also broadly includes cases where such correspondence is realized by a program structure that derives the second parameter from the first parameter. These are also referred to as "selection criteria" as the concept is essentially synonymous with "table". In addition, when using a table structure, essentially one type of selection criteria may be composed of a combination of multiple structurally subdivided tables, but when referring to "multiple types of selection criteria", the subdivisions It indicates the actual number of types of tables, not the number of tables that have been created.

The winning determination means 1214 determines that a prize has been won when the symbol combinations corresponding to any winning combination are aligned on the active line, and determines the number of payout medals corresponding to the winning combination. The payout means 1216 adds the number of payout medals determined by the winning determination means 1214 to the number of stored medals. However, when the number of stored medals exceeds 50, the extra medals are paid out by the payout device 1164. In addition, if the winning combination is a re-gaming combination, the same number of medals as the number of inserted medals multiplied in the previous game are multiplied again. The winning determination means 1214 transmits information regarding winnings and information on the number of medals to be paid out to the sub-control device 1300.

The special game control means 1218 controls the transition from the normal game to the special game when winning a special winning combination, and controls the transition from the special game to the normal game when the special game ending condition is satisfied. The special games include an RB game, which is transferred to when the RB is won, and a BB game, which is transferred to when the BB is won. The RB game ends when a predetermined symbol or a predetermined combination stops on the active line eight times, or when a game result is obtained 12 times. The BB game ends when the total number of medals paid out when a predetermined symbol or a predetermined combination stops on the active line exceeds 465 medals.

The setting change means 1220 determines the game specification corresponding to the setting value set by the setting change switch 1168 among the six levels of game specifications, and changes the winning probability of each role in the role lottery by the role lottery means 1202. In the 6-level game specification, the higher the value from setting 1 to setting 6, the higher the probability of winning. Each time you operate the setting change switch 1168, the setting value is incremented by 1 as follows: "Setting 1" → "Setting 2" → "Setting 3" → ... → "Setting 6" → "Setting 1" The increments are cycled by returning from "Setting 6" to "Setting 1." Finally, by operating the start lever 1114, the setting value selected at that time is determined, and the setting change is confirmed.

The sub-control device 1300 includes a pattern storage means 1302, a performance determining means 1304, and a performance control means 1306. The pattern storage means 1302 stores a plurality of types of performance patterns. The effect pattern includes the effect content to be displayed on the effect display device 1130 as the game progresses, the lighting pattern of the effect lamp 1124, the sound pattern output from the speaker 1122, and the like. The performance determining means 1304 receives information from the main control device 1200, such as information indicating the operation of the start lever 1114, information indicating the press of the stop button 1116, information indicating the result of the winning lottery, information regarding winnings, and information on the number of medals to be paid out. Receive. The performance determining means 1304 stores data in the pattern storage means 1302 according to the winning result, winning status, and gaming status by the winning role drawing means 1202, triggered by the operation of the start lever 1114 or the stop buttons 1116a to 1116c, or the stop of the reels 1160a to c. Select one from a plurality of stored performance patterns. The effect control means 1306 controls the display on the effect display device 1130, the lighting of the effect lamp 1124, and the output from the speaker 1122 according to the effect pattern selected by the effect determining means 1304. The effect control means 1306 changes the content displayed on the effect display device 1130, the lighting pattern of the effect lamp 1124, the audio output from the speaker 1122, etc. in accordance with the input contents of the effect button 1120 and cross key 1118. If the bet buttons 1112a and 1112b or the start lever 1114 are newly operated while the performance based on the performance pattern is being controlled, the performance control means 1306 cancels the performance being displayed, and the performance determination means 1304 starts a new game. A corresponding performance pattern is selected, and the performance control means 1306 starts a performance based on the selected performance pattern.

FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the basic flow of the game in the slot machine 1010. First, assume that none of the reels 1160a to 1160c are rotating yet (N in S1010) and no medals have been bet (N in S1012). In this state, if there are medals stored as credits (Y in S1014), if either of the bet buttons 1112a or 1112b is pressed (Y in S1016), a bet is placed for the number of medals corresponding to the pressed bet button. Set (S1018). If there are no credits, the routine of this flow is exited and the remaining processing is skipped until medals are inserted (N in S1014). Even if the bet buttons 1112a and 1112b are not pressed in S1016, the routine of this flow is exited and the remaining processing is skipped until the bet buttons 1112a and 1112b are pressed (N in S1016). If a bet has already been placed in S1012, steps S1014 to S1018 are skipped (Y in S1012).

If the start lever 1114 is operated with a bet set (Y in S1020), the winning combination lottery means 1202 executes the winning combination lottery (S1022), and the winning flag control means 1206 selects the winning combination according to the result of the winning combination lottery. The flag corresponding to the winning combination is turned on (S1024), and the stop position determination table 1210 corresponding to the winning lottery result is selected (S1025). If 4.1 seconds have not elapsed since the end of the previous game, the reel control means 1208 waits (N in S1026), and if it has elapsed (Y in S1026), the reel control means 1208 starts rotating the reels 1160a to 1160c ( S1028), the routine of this flow is exited. If the start lever 1114 is not operated in S1020, the routine of this flow is exited and the remaining processing is skipped (N in S1020).

In S1010, if at least one of the reels 1160a to 1160c is rotating (Y in S1010), and if any of the stop buttons 1116a to 1116c is pressed (Y in S1030), the state of the flag indicating the winning combination; The reel stop position is determined based on the stop button press timing, press order, and stop position determination table 1210 (S1032), and the reel corresponding to the pressed stop button is stopped (S1034). If the stop button is not pressed, S1032 and S1034 are skipped (N in S1030). When all the reels 1160a to 1160c are in a stopped state (Y in S1036), it is determined whether a winning combination has been won based on their stopping positions (S1038), and if there is a winning combination, medals are awarded with the number of payouts corresponding to the winning combination. is paid out (S1040). If all reels are not in a stopped state, S1038 and S1040 are skipped (N in S1036).

The reel stop management process involves setting a wait time, generating a control command including information indicating that the reels are waiting to start rotating, writing them into the command buffer, and setting initial values of various data used to accelerate the reels. It is stored in the storage area of . It is determined whether all reels are rotating at a constant speed, and if it is determined that they are not rotating at a constant speed, it is determined whether or not the rotation of all reels is abnormal. Once again, the initial values of various data used for accelerating the reels are stored in a predetermined storage area, and the confirmation of all reels is completed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the reels are rotating at a constant speed or if it is determined that the rotation is not abnormal, the confirmation of all reels is immediately finished.

Note that when the medals cannot be stored in the payout mode, hopper payout is executed. In this hopper dispensing process, first, the hopper starts driving and waits until dispensing is detected (if dispensing is not detected until a predetermined time has elapsed, a hopper empty error occurs). If the payout is detected, the number of payouts is added up, and it is determined whether the payout has ended or not. If the payout has not ended, the payout process is repeated, and if the payout has ended, the drive of the hopper is ended.

FIG. 46 is a block diagram schematically showing the hardware configuration of main control device 1200 and sub-control device 1300. Main control device 1200 includes electronic components such as main CPU 1250, main RAM 1252, and main ROM 1254. The main ROM 1254 stores in advance a main control program and data for controlling overall gaming operations. A main control program or data is read from main ROM 1254 into main RAM 1252, and the main control program is executed by main CPU 1250. Each electronic component is connected by a bus such as a system bus or a data bus (not shown). A signal indicating the insertion of a medal, a signal indicating the press of the bet buttons 1112a and 1112b, a signal indicating the press of the settlement button 1113, a signal indicating the operation of the start lever 1114, a signal indicating the press of the stop buttons 1116a to 1116c, and a signal indicating the press of the reels 1160a to 1160a. A signal indicating the position of c is acquired by the main CPU 1250 via various interfaces (not shown). The main CPU 1250 drives and controls external devices such as stepping motors for the reels 1160a to 1160c using various drive circuits (not shown). In addition, commands necessary for performance control are transmitted from the main CPU 1250 to the sub-control device 1300 together with the results of the lottery, winning information, and information indicating the operation of each button and lever.

The sub-control device 1300 includes electronic components such as a sub-CPU 1350, a sub-RAM 1352, a sub-ROM 1354, and a performance display control section 1360. The sub ROM 1354 is one of data storage means that holds a sub control program including performance pattern data in which a performance process is defined, display pattern data in which a performance display process is defined, etc., and is similar to the pattern storage unit 1302 in FIG. This is a hardware configuration that functions as A sub-control program including performance pattern data and display pattern data is read from the sub-ROM 1354 into the sub-RAM 1352, and performance control by the sub-control program is executed by the sub-CPU 1350. Each electronic component is connected by a bus such as a system bus or a data bus (not shown), and is connected to each other through bidirectional communication capable of transmitting and receiving signals. For example, when sending a command from the sub CPU 1350 to the effect display control unit 1360, the command is sent multiple times, and as soon as the effect display control unit 1360 properly receives the command at least once, it sends an acknowledgment (ACK) to the sub CPU 1350. By replying, communication errors due to noise etc. can be avoided. If the order of reception of the plurality of commands is different from normal, the effect display control section 1360 ignores the ACK without replying, and replies only to appropriate commands. A signal from an external device such as the effect button 1120 is acquired by the sub CPU 1350 via various interfaces (not shown), and a corresponding command is transmitted to the effect display control unit 1360 depending on the reception of the signal or the number of times the signal is received. The sub CPU 1350 drives an external device such as the speaker 1122 using various drive circuits and control circuits (not shown) in accordance with the performance pattern data to control the performance by audio output. Further, the sub CPU 1350 transmits display pattern data to the effect display control section 1360. The sub CPU 1350 and the effect display control section 1360 are hardware configurations that function as the effect determining means 1304 and the effect controlling means 1306 in FIG. In this embodiment, an example will be described in which the sub-control device 1300 includes the effect display control section 1360, but the sub-control device 1300 and the effect display control section 1360 do not need to be integrated as a board, but can be separated. They may also be formed as separate substrates that are connected together.

FIG. 47 is a block diagram schematically showing the hardware configuration of the effect display control section 1360. The effect display control section 1360 includes a control CPU 1362, a control RAM 1364, a data ROM 1366, and a display control circuit 1370. The data ROM 1366 is one of the data storage means that stores material data such as effect image data, motion data, and three-dimensional image object definition data used for effect display in a compressed state. This is a hardware configuration that functions as means 1302. The performance image data is an image used for performance display as a performance object that indicates a winning determination result, etc., and is, for example, a material image such as a sprite image used for various performances or a moving image used for various performances. The motion data is data that defines an action when adding an action-like action to an image used for various effects at a predetermined timing. The object definition data is data in which the shape of a three-dimensional object is defined.

Based on the display pattern data sent from the sub CPU 1350, material data such as effect image data, motion data, and object definition data specified in the display pattern data is read from the data ROM 1366 to the control RAM 1364, and the material data is read out from the data ROM 1366 to the control RAM 1364. The effect display used is executed by the control CPU 1362. As a result, commands and material data related to effect display are transmitted from the control CPU 1362 to the display control circuit 1370, and the display control circuit 1370 performs display control. If a signal indicating the operation of a new bet button 1112a, b or start lever 1114 is received while the effect is being displayed, the sub CPU 1350 determines a new effect pattern and sends a command indicating the new effect display to the control CPU 1362. . The sub CPU 1350 and the display control circuit 1370 are hardware configurations that function as the effect determining means 1304 and the effect controlling means 1306 in FIG.

The display control circuit 1370 includes a decoder 1374, a drawing memory 1376, a drawing circuit 1378, a frame buffer 1380, and a display circuit 1382, each of which is connected via a bus 1372. For convenience, the bus 1372 in this figure is a comprehensive representation of buses such as a system bus, data bus, and address bus.

Material data such as effect image data, motion data, and object definition data sent from the control CPU 1362 are stored in the drawing memory 1376, and compressed data among these data is decoded by the decoder 1374. The drawing memory 1376 is a VRAM (Video RAM) that is used as a work area when the decoder 1374 decodes effect image data and motion data, or as a work area when the drawing circuit 1378 executes drawing processing or image processing. ).

The drawing circuit 1378 uses the data stored in the drawing memory 1376 to sequentially execute commands sent from the control CPU 1362 to generate a display image, and stores the generated display image in the frame buffer as a frame of a moving image. 1380. The frame buffer 1380 is a VRAM that serves as a buffer memory that temporarily stores frames of moving images to be output to the effect display device 1130. Note that the frame buffer 1380 and the drawing memory 1376 may be formed by a single VRAM so that the areas thereof are shared.

The display circuit 1382 outputs the display images stored in the frame buffer 1380 to the effect display device 1130 in the form of a video signal in the order in which they were stored. The frame buffer 1380 has a memory area for two frames, for example, and while the display circuit 1382 outputs a display image from the memory area for one frame, the drawing circuit 1378 generates the next display image. Store in the memory area for one more frame.

The slot machine 1010 is supplied with power from a power supply board 1166 that functions as a power supply device. A power switch and a reset switch are connected to the power supply device, and signals from these switches are transmitted to the main CPU 1250. The power switch is a switch that accepts operations to power on and power off the slot machine 1010 from the power supply device. The reset switch is a switch for resetting each circuit installed in the main controller 1200 when an error occurs in the slot machine 1010. Power from the power supply device is supplied to main control device 1200 and sub-control device 1300. A power supply monitoring means is provided on the power supply path from the power supply device to the main control device 1200 and the sub-control device 1300 to monitor the supply voltage and detect a power outage in which the voltage drops below a predetermined voltage. The power monitoring means determines that the power has been cut off when the supply voltage has decreased to a predetermined voltage, and outputs a power cutoff detection signal to the main CPU 1250 or the sub CPU 1350. Note that the reference voltage value for detecting a power-off of the main controller 1200 is set to a higher value than the reference voltage value for detecting a power-off of the sub-control device 1300. The main controller 1200 executes a process (power-off process) that is programmed to be executed when the power is cut off.

FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the main program control processing of main controller 1200 in slot machine 1010. In the game control process executed by the main control device 1200, first, a game start process is executed (S1100), a game medal management process is executed (S1102), and the start condition is that the number of bets matches the specified number, and If the operation of the start lever is accepted (Y in S1104), a lever acceptance process is executed (S1106), and if at least one of the start conditions is not met (N in S1104), the process returns to S1102. Following S1106, a role determination process is executed (S1108), and whether or not to execute a freeze (performance) as a freeze lottery process and the mode of performance during the freeze are determined (S1110). When the pseudo game freeze is selected in the freeze lottery, the pseudo game is executed (S1112). Reel stop management processing such as waiting time is executed (S1114), and stop display symbol determination processing is executed to determine whether or not a gaming combination is established (S1116). Next, a game medal payout process is executed (S1118), a game end process is executed (S1120), and the process returns to S1100 to repeat the flow of this figure.

FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing in main controller 1200. In this timer interrupt processing, processing such as reading each game operation signal outputted in response to a game operation such as a bet operation performed by a player, detecting (confirming) the signal level, and transmitting each control command is performed. This is performed at regular intervals (for example, every 2.235 milliseconds). First, interrupt initial processing (saving registers, disabling interrupts, etc.) is executed (S1200), and it is determined whether or not a power outage is detected. If a power outage is detected (Y in S1202), the power A disconnection process is executed (S1204). In the power-off processing, registers are saved, stack pointers are saved, interrupt states are saved, etc. In addition, the holding of information related to the winning combination result and information related to the RT gaming state, calculation and storage of a checksum, etc., which are stored in a predetermined storage area, are processed. If power outage is not detected (N in S1202), timer measurement is executed (S1206). Timer measurement is to measure the elapsed time of an arbitrary timer set in the game control process. Next, control of the display lamp (updating the display value in the display lamp based on the control data output to the output port, etc.) is executed (S1208), and further reading of the input port is executed (S1020). When reading the input port, the signal level of each game operation signal input to the input port is read and stored, and the signal level is determined.

Next, reel drive control (S1212) for controlling acceleration, deceleration, constant speed maintenance, stop maintenance, etc. of the rotation of the reels is repeated until all reels are completed (S1214). Next, port output processing for excitation output of the reel, hopper, blocker, etc. is executed (S1216), and control command transmission processing is executed (S1218). Reads the outer end signal data stored in a predetermined storage area and outputs the outer end signal (S1220), executes interrupt termination processing (register restoration, interrupt permission, etc.) (S1222), and returns the interrupt. do.

Note that another control process executed by the main controller 1200 is a main control power-on process. The main control power-on process is a process that is performed when power supply to the main controller 1200 starts (when the power is turned on), and a temporary stack pointer is set, a checksum is calculated, checked, etc., and the power return process is executed. Processed so that it can be done. The stack pointer is restored and an interrupt is activated, and a game is played based on information regarding the winning combination result, information regarding the RT gaming state, etc. that was stored in a predetermined storage area when the power was turned off.

(Second example)
This embodiment proposes suitable control and performance in a pachinko game machine equipped with a fall determination means. Hereinafter, elements that are the same as or correspond to the elements constituting the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the base technology 1 and the first embodiment will be described with the same reference numerals. In addition, contents already explained in the base technology will be omitted as appropriate, and mainly contents that are different from the base technology 1 and the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the first embodiment will be explained.

In this embodiment, a fall determination from a variable probability state (also referred to as a high probability state) to a normal probability state (also referred to as a low probability state) is performed. When the state is shifted to a high probability state after the end of the special game, a fall determination is executed in a variation start process executed at the start of symbol variation. If the fall determination is successful, the high probability state ends after the fall determination and transitions to the low probability state. On the other hand, if the fall determination is not successful, the high probability state continues even after the fall determination.

In this embodiment, the first lottery means 211 in FIG. 4 is further provided with a first fall determination means, and the second lottery means 212 is further provided with a second fall determination means. The first fall determination means executes fall determination based on the lottery value acquired by the first lottery value acquisition means 216. The second fall determination means executes fall determination based on the lottery value acquired by the second lottery value acquisition means 217. The first lottery value acquisition means 216 acquires from the random number generation means 202 a first fall lottery value for use in determining a fall by the first fall determination means when the ball enters the first starting port 11 . The first falling lottery value acquired by the first lottery value acquisition means 216 is acquired separately from the first win/fail lottery value, the first symbol lottery value, and the first pattern lottery value. The second lottery value acquisition means 217 acquires, from the random number generation means 202, a second fall lottery value for use in determining a fall by the second fall determination means when the ball enters the second starting port 12. The second fall lottery value acquired by the second lottery value acquisition means 217 is acquired separately from the second win/fail lottery value, the second symbol lottery value, and the second pattern lottery value. As a modification, the first falling lottery value may not be acquired when the ball enters the first starting port 11, but may be acquired in the process of starting the variation of the first special symbol 51. Similarly, the second falling lottery value may not be obtained when the ball enters the second starting port 12, but may be obtained during the fluctuation start process of the second special symbol 52.

The first falling lottery value acquired by the first lottery value acquisition means 216 and the second falling lottery value acquired by the second lottery value acquisition means 217 are held on hold until a new symbol change corresponding to the lottery value starts. It is held in the means 241. The advance determination means 235 is capable of determining in advance the first falling lottery value and the second falling lottery value held in the special symbol holding means 241 before the start of symbol fluctuation corresponding to the lottery values. The preliminary determination means 235 pre-determines the transition of the gaming state based on the preliminary determination results of the first falling lottery value and the second falling lottery value, and determines the gaming state when the lottery value subject to the preliminary determination is actually determined. It is possible to determine in advance whether the state will be a high probability state or a low probability state. The advance determination means 235 is capable of prior determination of the lottery value to be reserved in the special symbol retention means 241 according to the transition of the game state determined in advance.

In this embodiment, the specific game control means 270 in FIG. 4 is provided with probability state control means and ball entry state control means. The probability state control means shifts from a low probability state in which the probability that the result of the judgment is a jackpot is normal to a high probability state in which the probability that the result of the judgment is a jackpot is higher than the predetermined probability. The probability state control means causes the state to shift to the high probability state after the special game ends if the conditions that enable the shift to the high probability state are satisfied. The probability state control means causes the state to shift to the low probability state after the end of the special game or at the start of symbol variation when the conditions that enable the shift to the low probability state are satisfied. The ball entry state control means changes the ball entry state from a normal ball entry state (also referred to as a low ball entry state) in which the ball enters the second starting port 12 with relative ease to a relatively low ball entry state where the ball enters the second starting port 12 with relative ease. The state is caused to transition to a state where it is easy to enter a ball (also referred to as a state where it is easy to enter a ball). The ball entry state control means causes the ball entry state to shift to the easy ball entry state after the special game ends or at the end of symbol variation when the conditions that enable the transition to the ball entry easy state are satisfied. If the conditions for ending the easy ball entry state (or the conditions for transitioning to the normal ball entry state) are satisfied, the ball entering state control means normally controls the ball entering state after the end of the special game or upon the start or end of symbol variation. Shift to ball entering state.

The probability state control means makes it possible to shift to a high probability state after the end of a special game in which a predetermined type of jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed. For example, as types of symbols that indicate a jackpot, a variable jackpot symbol (first jackpot symbol) and a variable jackpot symbol (second jackpot symbol) are prepared, and a special jackpot symbol that is executed after the first jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed is prepared. After the end of the game, the state is shifted to a high probability state, and after the end of the special game executed after the second jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, the state is shifted to a low probability state. In addition, only jackpot symbols that can transition to a high probability state are prepared, and the probability changes state depending on whether or not the game ball enters a specific area within the big prize opening that is opened during the special game after hitting the jackpot. It may be determined whether or not. In other words, it may be a configuration called "Tama-kaku" or "V-kaku" in which the transition to the probability variable state is determined by the ball entering a specific area (V win) during the special game. As the grand prize openings that can be opened during the special game, there are provided a first grand prize opening in which a specific area is not provided within the grand prize opening, and a second grand prize opening in which a specific area is provided within the grand prize opening; A first unit game in which the first big winning hole is opened and a second unit game in which the second big winning hole is opened may be executed during the special game. In this case, it is possible to execute a second unit game in which the opening mode and opening time of the second big prize opening are different depending on the type of jackpot symbol, and it is possible to execute a second unit game in which the ease of entering a specific area is different. Therefore, the probability of transition to the probability fluctuating state may be made different depending on the type of jackpot symbol. For example, when a special game is executed due to a jackpot with jackpot symbol A, a second unit game is executed in which the opening time of the second jackpot is relatively long, making it easier to enter the specific area. You can do it like this. On the other hand, when a special game is executed due to a jackpot with jackpot symbol B, a second unit game is executed in which the opening time of the second jackpot is relatively short, and it is difficult to enter the specific area. You may do so. In addition, by varying the opening timing of the big winning hole and the activation timing of the distribution mechanism for sorting game balls into either a specific area or a non-specific area within the big winning hole depending on the type of jackpot symbol, A special game (jackpot pattern A) in which it is easy or possible to enter a specific area or a special game (jackpot pattern B) in which it is difficult or impossible to enter a specific area may be executed. In addition, only a big prize opening with a specific area is provided, and in unit games other than the specific number of times that are the first unit game (for example, rounds other than the 4th round), the game ball is placed in either the specific area or the non-specific area. The system does not operate the distribution mechanism for distributing the game balls, but operates the distribution mechanism for distributing the game balls to either the specified area or the non-specified area in a specific number of unit games (for example, the 4th round) that is the second unit game. A special game that makes it easier or possible for the ball to enter a specific area by activating it and changing its operating mode depending on the type of jackpot symbol (Jackpot symbol A, distribution that allows the ball to enter a specific region) The time value is 10 seconds), and a special game in which it is difficult or impossible for the ball to enter a specific area (Jackpot symbol B, the distribution time value that allows the ball to enter the specific area is 0.05 seconds) is executed. You can do it like this. In this case, in either the special game where it is easy or possible to enter the specific area (jackpot pattern A) or the special game where it is difficult or impossible to enter the specific area (jackpot pattern B), the jackpot The opening time may be the same (for example, 30 seconds, and may be uniformly 30 seconds for unit games of a specific number of times and unit games other than the specific number of times). In this case, the operation timing of the distribution mechanism (timing to start the operation of distributing to a specific area) may be the timing when the number of balls entering the big winning hole reaches a specific number (for example, 2 balls). For example, when a specific number of balls enter (for example, 2 balls) in a specific number of unit games (for example, the 4th round), the distribution mechanism is activated from a mode of distributing to non-specific areas to a mode of distributing to specific areas. A special game (jackpot symbol A, jackpot symbol A, The period for maintaining the manner in which the ball is distributed to a specific area is 10 seconds) and the special game in which it is difficult or impossible to enter the specific area (Jackpot symbol B, the period for maintaining the manner in which the ball is distributed to the specific area is 0.05 seconds). ) may be executed.

In the configuration of the above-mentioned "V-kaku", the first special symbol 51 becomes a jackpot and the special game is executed, and the second special symbol 52 becomes a jackpot and the special game is executed. By making the execution mode of the second unit game different when it is executed, the probability of transition to the probability fluctuation state may be made to be different. For example, when the first special symbol 51 becomes a jackpot and a special game is executed, the opening time of the second big prize opening in the second unit game is relatively shortened so that the ball entering the specific area is relatively short. On the other hand, when the second special symbol 52 becomes a jackpot and a special game is executed, the opening time of the second big prize opening in the second unit game is relatively lengthened so that the specific area The ball may be relatively easy to enter. To give a specific example, when the first special symbol 51 becomes a jackpot and a special game is executed, the probability of the ball entering a specific area in the second grand prize opening is set to be about 50%, while the second When the special symbol 52 becomes a jackpot and a special game is executed, the probability of the ball entering the second grand prize opening may be about 80%. In addition, when the second special symbol 52 becomes a jackpot and a special game is executed, the opening time of the second grand prize opening in the second unit game is lengthened (for example, 5 seconds or more, 10 seconds or more, or 20 seconds or more). By doing so, the second unit game may be configured such that if the game ball is fired toward the second grand prize opening during the special game, the ball will almost certainly enter the second big prize opening. Thereby, when the second special symbol 52 becomes a jackpot and a special game is executed, the probability of the ball entering the specific area in the second big prize opening may be substantially 100%. In other words, the probability of transition to the probability fluctuation state when the second special symbol 52 becomes a jackpot may be substantially 100%. In this case, the probability of transition to the probability fluctuation state when the first special symbol 51 becomes a jackpot may be less than 100%, and the probability of transition to the probability fluctuation state when the first special symbol 51 becomes a jackpot may be less than 100%. It may be about 50% to 80%. That is, in the configuration of "V sure", the first special symbol 51 may have a probability variation of less than 100%, and the second special symbol 52 may have a probability variation of 100%.

If the fall determination is successful, the probability state control means shifts to a low probability state immediately after the fall determination. In the variation start process when the symbol variation of the special symbol starts, each process is executed in the order of fall determination process, right/fail determination process, symbol determination process, and fluctuation pattern determination process, and after each process is executed, the special symbol fluctuation is started. Display starts. If the fall determination is successful, the processes are executed in the following order: fall determination, transition from a high probability state to a low probability state due to the fall, and success/failure determination. Therefore, when a symbol variation that wins a fall judgment starts, the gaming state (probability state) before the start of the symbol variation is a high probability state, but the gaming state ( probability state) is a low probability state. Therefore, in the determination of the winning symbol variation in the fall determination, the determination is performed in a low probability state, and for example, the determination is performed with reference to the low probability determination table. On the other hand, in the validity determination related to symbol variations that do not win the fall determination, the validity determination is executed in a high probability state, and for example, the validity determination is performed with reference to the high probability validity determination table.

In this embodiment, when transitioning to the high probability state after the end of the special game, the transition is to the high probability state and easy ball entry state. The easy-to-enter state continues until the number of symbol variations after the end of the special game is at least a predetermined number of times (for example, 120, and 220 times), and when the number of symbol variations reaches the predetermined number. Whether or not the easy-to-ball state can be continued is determined depending on whether the high-probability state continues or whether the ball has fallen into a low-probability state. Specifically, if the probability state is high when the number of symbol variations reaches a predetermined number (for example, the 120th time), the easy-to-ball state continues. After that, when the number of symbol fluctuations exceeds a predetermined number (for example, after 121 times) and the fall judgment is won in the fluctuation start process related to symbol fluctuations and the transition to the low probability state occurs, the state changes to the low probability state and the normal ball entry state. The gaming state during the transition and the symbol variation in which the fall determination is won becomes a low probability state and a normal ball entering state. On the other hand, if the probability state is low when the number of symbol variations reaches a predetermined number (for example, the 120th time), the ball entry easy state is shifted to the normal ball entry state upon completion of the symbol variation. That is, until the end of the symbol variation a predetermined number of times (for example, the 120th time), the ball enters the easy state, but when the symbol variation exceeds the predetermined number of times (for example, after the 121st time), the ball enters the normal state. As a modified example, if the probability state is low when the number of symbol variations reaches a predetermined number (for example, the 120th time), the start of the symbol variation may be used as an opportunity to transition from the easy ball entry state to the normal ball entry state. . In other words, it is easy to enter the ball until the end of the symbol change just before the number of symbol changes reaches a predetermined number (for example, the 119th time), but if the number of symbol changes is after the predetermined number of times (for example, after the 120th time), it is normal to enter. It may be in a spherical state. Note that the "number of symbol variations" refers to the total number of variations of the first special symbol 51 and the number of variations of the second special symbol 52. In most cases, only the second game in which the second special symbol 52 changes is played in the easy ball entry state, so the number of symbol changes that can be the end of the easy ball entry state is the cumulative variation of the second special symbol 52. It can match the number of times.

FIG. 50 shows the transition of the gaming state after the transition to the high probability state and the easy ball entry state. In this figure, the high probability state is "high probability", the low probability state is "low probability", the easy ball entry state is "high ball entry", and the normal ball entry state is "low ball entry". FIG. 50(a) shows a case where a fall determination is won in the first symbol change after the end of the special game. In this case, the ball stays in a low-probability, high-ball entry state until the end of the symbol fluctuation when the number of symbol fluctuations after the end of the special game reaches a predetermined number (for example, the 120th time). Thereafter, when the number of symbol variations exceeds a predetermined number (for example, after the 121st time), a low probability and low ball entry state will occur. Since the high ball entry state is a game state in which the ball should be hit to the right, in the high ball entry state, a right hit image is displayed on the effect display device 60 indicating that the game state is a game state in which the ball should be hit to the right. On the other hand, the low ball entry state is a game state in which the player should hit left-handed, so the right-handed hit image is not displayed in the low ball entry state. In the case of FIG. 50(a), the right-handed image is displayed from the start of the easy entry state until the symbol stops changing when the number of symbol fluctuations reaches a predetermined number (for example, the 120th), ) The right-handed image disappears when the symbol stops being displayed.

FIG. 50(b) shows that the fall judgment is not won in the first symbol variation after the end of the special game, and the fall judgment is determined in the symbol variation in which the number of symbol variations is within a predetermined number (for example, 2nd to 120th time) excluding the first time. Indicates the case where the candidate is elected. In this case, the first symbol change after the end of the special game is a high probability and high ball entry state. After that, if a fall judgment is won in a symbol change that occurs within a predetermined number of times (for example, the 2nd to 120th time) excluding the first time, a symbol whose number of symbol changes becomes a predetermined number of times (for example, the 120th time) from the symbol change that won the fall judgment. The ball stays in a low probability and high ball entry state until the end of the fluctuation. Thereafter, when the number of symbol variations exceeds a predetermined number (for example, after the 121st time), a low probability and low ball entry state will occur. In the case of FIG. 50(b), the right-handed image is displayed from the start of the easy entry state until the symbol stops changing when the number of symbol fluctuations reaches a predetermined number (for example, the 120th time), ) The right-handed image disappears when the symbol stops being displayed.

FIG. 50(c) shows a case where the fall determination is not won in the symbol fluctuations in which the number of symbol fluctuations is within a predetermined number (for example, the 1st to 120th times). In this case, the high probability and high ball entry state continues until the fall judgment is won. After that, when the number of symbol variations exceeds a predetermined number (for example, after the 121st time) and a fall judgment is won, a low probability and low ball entry state is achieved from the symbol variation that has won the fall judgment. In addition, in FIG. 50(c), the number of symbol changes exceeds a predetermined number (for example, after the 121st time) without winning the fall judgment until the symbol change exceeds a predetermined number (for example, after the 121st time). When a jackpot is achieved by winning the winning determination due to symbol variation, a low probability and low ball entry state results from the symbol variation winning the winning determination. In the case of Fig. 50(c), the right-handed image is displayed from the start of the easy ball entry state until just before the start of the symbol variation that wins the fall judgment or the win/fail judgment, and is triggered by the start of the symbol change that wins the fall judgment or the win/fail judgment. The right-handed image will be hidden.

In this embodiment, in addition to the easy-to-enter state (also referred to as A-time reduction) that can be transitioned to when a special game is executed, the easy-to-enter state (also referred to as A shortened time) that can be transitioned to when the result of the winning/failure determination is other than a jackpot. (also referred to as B time saving or C time saving) is provided. A time saving is a state where it is easy to enter the ball after the special game ends when the result of the judgment becomes a jackpot and the special game is executed. A time saving may be possible to shift to the easy-to-enter state in the case of a specific jackpot. A time saving game state may be a low probability state and an easy ball entry state, or a high probability state and an easy ball entry state. If the state is a high probability state and an easy-to-enter state, a fall determination is executed, and if the fall determination is successful, the state is shifted to a low probability state.

B time saving is an easy-to-enter state that is triggered when the cumulative number of symbol changes reaches a predetermined ceiling number without a jackpot occurring in a low probability state. The ceiling number of times is 2.5 times or more and 3 times or less (for example, 798 to 957 times) of the denominator (for example, 319) of the probability that a jackpot occurs in a low probability state. Only one type (for example, 900 times) is set for the ceiling number of times for B time saving. When the cumulative number of symbol fluctuations in the low probability state reaches a predetermined ceiling number (for example, 900 times), the ball entry easy state is entered after the symbol fluctuations reach the ceiling number. In other words, the ball enters the easy state from the next symbol variation after the symbol variation that has reached the ceiling number of times. In addition, after the symbol variation that has reached the ceiling number of times ends (after it is stopped), it will transition to the easy entry state, so for example, after the symbol variation that has reached the ceiling number of times ends (after it is stopped), the first lottery value will be suspended. Or, even if there is no hold of the second lottery value remaining and the next symbol variation after the symbol variation that reached the ceiling number does not start, the game after the symbol variation that reached the ceiling number ends (after it is stopped). It is in a state where it is easy to enter the ball while it is on standby (while the symbol is stopped). The cumulative number of symbol changes in the low probability state is initialized by the occurrence of a jackpot or RAM clear processing, but is not initialized by the transition to B time saving. If the B time saver ends without a jackpot occurring during the B time saver, the ceiling number of B time savers will not be initialized unless a jackpot occurs after that, so if a jackpot does not occur after that, the game will shift to B time saver again. It will not be done.

C time saving is a state where it is easy to enter the ball when the result of the winning/failure determination is other than a jackpot in a low probability state and the winning/failure lottery value or symbol lottery value falls within a specific range. For example, a specific symbol (also referred to as C time saving symbol) indicating that it is possible to shift to C time saving symbol is prepared, and when the C time saving symbol is stopped and displayed in a low probability state, the transition to C time saving symbol is triggered. If it is not a low probability state, that is, if it is a high probability state, even if the C time saving symbol is stopped and displayed, it will not shift to the C time saving state. The C time-saving symbol is a symbol that indicates something other than a jackpot. The C time-saving symbol in a gaming machine that does not have a small hit is a symbol that indicates a loss, and the C time-saving symbol in a gaming machine that has a small win is a symbol that indicates a loss or a small win. This is a pattern that indicates something. If the low probability state continues without a jackpot, the transition to C time reduction may be made multiple times while the low probability state continues. For example, when the C time saver ends without a jackpot occurring during the C time saver, the C time saver may be shifted to the C time saver again with the stop display of the C time saver symbol as a trigger even if no jackpot occurs after that. C time saving may be transferable only when the C time saving symbol is stopped and displayed in a low probability and low ball entry state. In this case, when the C time saving symbol is stopped and displayed in a low probability and high ball entry state, it is not necessary to shift to C time saving. That is, if the C time saving symbol is stopped and displayed during the execution of A time saving, B time saving or C time saving, the shift to C time saving is not made. In this case, only the first special symbol 51 may be provided with a C time-saving symbol, and the second special symbol 52 may not be provided with a C time-saving symbol. In the specification that does not shift to C time saving when the C time saving symbol is stopped and displayed during the execution of A time saving, B time saving or C time saving, the C time saving symbol is prepared only in the second special symbol 52, and the first special symbol 51 does not need to be prepared with C time-saving symbols. C time saving may be transferable when the C time saving symbol is stopped and displayed in a low probability and high ball entry state. For example, if the C time saving symbol is stopped and displayed during execution of A time saving, B time saving, or C time saving, A time saving, B time saving, or C time saving may be ended and transition to C time saving. In this case, the C time-saving symbol may be prepared for both the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52, or the C time-saving symbol is prepared only for the second special symbol 52, and the first special symbol 51 is provided with the C time-saving symbol. C Time-saving symbols may not be prepared.

FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variation start processing. The process shown in FIG. 51 is executed immediately before the variable display of special symbols starts. That is, after the processing of the flow shown in FIG. 51, the variable display of the special symbols is started. At the beginning of the fluctuation start process, the current gaming state is stored (S1300). The game states that are stored include the probability state (low probability state or high probability state), ball entry state (low ball entry state or high ball entry state), fluctuation pattern selection state, and cumulative number of symbol variations (high ball entry state). (total number of fluctuations in the low probability state), etc. If the current gaming state is a high probability state (Y in S1302), a fall determination is performed (S1304). If the fall determination is successful (Y in S1306), the state shifts to a low probability state (S1308). In the case of transitioning to the low probability state, if the remaining number of balls in the high ball entry state is 0 (Y in S1310), the state shifts to the low ball entry state (S1312), and a judgment is made in the low probability state. (S1314). If the remaining number of balls in the high ball entry state is not 0 in S1310 (N in S1310), the process in S1312 is skipped, and the validity determination is performed in the low probability state (S1314). If the fall determination is not successful in S1306 (N in S1306), the high probability state is continued, and the validity determination is executed in the high probability state (S1316). If the result of the judgment in S1316 is a jackpot (Y in S1318) and the remaining number of times in the high ball entry state is 0 (Y in S1320), the state shifts to a low probability and low ball entry state (S1322). If the result of the judgment in S1318 is other than a jackpot (N in S1318), or if the remaining number of balls in the high ball entry state is not 0 in S1320 (N in S1320), the process in S1322 is skipped and the high probability And the high ball input state is maintained. If the current gaming state is a low probability state in S1302 (N in S1302), the processes of S1304 to S1312 are skipped, and the validity determination is executed in the low probability state (S1314).

The "remaining number of high input balls" in S1310 and S1320 refers to the remaining number of times until the cumulative number of fluctuations after transitioning to the high input ball state reaches a predetermined number. The “remaining number of times in the high ball entry state” in FIG. 51 is the cumulative number of changes in the easy ball entry state that is transferred after the special game ends when the state shifts to the easy ball entry state after the end of the special game (that is, A time reduction). It may be the number of times remaining until reaching a predetermined number of times (such as 120 times or 220 times). When the high ball entry state is entered, a predetermined number of times (for example, 120) is set as the remaining number of times of the high ball entry state. The remaining number of balls in the high ball state is subtracted when the symbol stops. Therefore, when the symbol fluctuation stops for the first time in the high ball entry state, the remaining number of times becomes the number of times (for example, 119 times) that is the predetermined number of times minus 1. In the variation start process related to the symbol variation in which the number of symbol variations in the high ball entry state reaches a predetermined number (for example, the 120th time), the remaining number of symbol fluctuations in the high ball entry state becomes 1. Therefore, the remaining number of high input balls in the fluctuation start process related to the symbol fluctuation in which the number of symbol fluctuations in the high input ball state reaches a predetermined number (for example, the 120th time) is not 0, so the process in S1310 is N, and the fluctuation start process The state is not changed to low ball entry state. On the other hand, if the number of symbol variations after transitioning to a high probability and high ball entry state is within a predetermined number (for example, the 1st to 120th) and the fall judgment is not won, if the number of symbol variations after the transition to the high probability and high ball entry state is within the predetermined number (for example, the 1st to 120th), the fall judgment is not won. ) The remaining number of high balls in the fluctuation start process related to symbol fluctuation is 0. If the fall judgment is won with the remaining number of high balls entered being 0 (Y in S1306), the state is shifted to a low probability state (S1308), and when the process in S1310 becomes Y, the state is shifted to a low probability state. (S1312). In other words, if the number of symbol changes after transitioning to a high probability and high ball entry state exceeds a predetermined number of times (for example, from the 121st time onwards) and the fall judgment is won, the low probability and low ball entry state will be performed in the fluctuation start process. state. Also, if the number of symbol variations after transitioning to a high probability and high ball entry state is within a predetermined number of times (for example, the 1st to 120th), the jackpot occurs without winning the fall judgment in the variation start process related to symbol variation. (Y in S1318), since the remaining number of high-input balls is 1 or more, the process in S1320 becomes N, thereby maintaining a high probability and high-input ball state. On the other hand, if the number of symbol fluctuations after transitioning to a high probability and high ball entry state exceeds a predetermined number of times (for example, after the 121st time), a jackpot occurs without winning the fall judgment in the fluctuation start process related to symbol fluctuation (S1318 Y), since the remaining number of high-input balls is 0, the process in S1320 becomes Y, and the state is shifted to a low probability and low-input ball state in the fluctuation start process.

Subsequently, the symbol type of the special symbol is determined based on the result of the validity determination and the symbol lottery value (S1324). Next, the variation pattern selection state is determined (S1326), and the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the determined variation pattern selection state and the pattern lottery value (S1328). In the process of determining the variation pattern selection state in S1326, the variation pattern selection state may be determined, for example, based on the gaming state before the start of variation stored in S1300 and the gaming state at the time of S1326.

FIG. 52 is a flowchart illustrating an example of special symbol pattern stop processing. The process shown in FIG. 52 is executed in response to the start of the stop display of the special symbol, and is executed within the stop display period from the stop of the special symbol until the start of the next symbol variation. A special symbol indicating anything other than a jackpot (miss or small hit) is stopped and displayed (Y in S1330), and if the remaining number of balls in the high ball state is greater than 0 (Y in S1332), the remaining number of balls in the high ball state is subtracted by 1 (S1334). The process of S1334 is a process of counting the remaining number of times until the cumulative number of fluctuations after transitioning to the high ball entry state reaches a predetermined number (for example, 120 times), and can also be called a time-saving number subtraction process. The “remaining number of times in the high ball entry state” in FIG. 52 means that the cumulative number of fluctuations in the easy ball entry state when the state shifts to the easy ball entry state after the end of the special game (that is, A time reduction) is the predetermined number of times (120 or 220 times), but the cumulative number of changes in the easy-to-enter state when transitioning to the easy-to-enter state after a symbol other than a jackpot stops (i.e. short B time or short time C) is the predetermined number. It may be the number of times remaining until reaching the number of times (100 times or 200 times). If the remaining number of balls in the high ball entry state becomes 0 as a result of the subtraction process in S1334 (Y in S1336), the process shifts to the low ball entry state (S1338). If the remaining number of balls entering the high ball state is not 0 (N at S1336), the process of S1338 is skipped, and the high ball entering state continues. If the remaining number of high ball entry states is not greater than 0 in S1332 (N in S1332), the processes in S1334 to S1338 are skipped.

Next, if the game state stored at the beginning of the fluctuation start process is a low probability and low ball entry state (Y in S1340), and the C time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed (Y in S1342), the C time-saving symbol is The remaining number of high-input balls (for example, 100) is set (S1344), and the state shifts to a high-input ball state (S1346). If the game state stored at the beginning of the fluctuation start process is not a low probability and low ball entry state (N in S1340), or if symbols other than C time-saving symbols are stopped and displayed (N in S1342), the processes in S1344 to S1346 are performed. Skip. The processes from S1340 to S1346 are processes for determining the transition to C time saving, and can also be called C time saving entry processing.

Next, if the current gaming state when the symbols are stopped is a low probability state (Y in S1348), the remaining number of times the ceiling has been reached is subtracted by 1 (S1350). The remaining number of times the ceiling is reached refers to the number of times remaining until the cumulative number of fluctuations in the low probability state reaches the ceiling number that is the condition for transitioning to B time reduction. The remaining number of times the player reaches the ceiling is initialized by the occurrence of a jackpot or RAM clearing processing, and the number of times the player reaches the ceiling (for example, 900 times) is set as the initial value of the remaining number of times the player reaches the ceiling. The process of S1350 is a process of counting the remaining number of times until reaching the ceiling number of times that is a condition for transitioning to B time saving, and can also be called a process of subtracting the number of times for B time saving. If the remaining number of balls to reach the ceiling becomes 0 as a result of the subtraction process in S1350 (Y in S1352), the remaining number of high balls to reach the ceiling (for example, 200) for B time saving is set (S1354), and the state shifts to the high balls to reach state (S1354). S1356). If the current gaming state is not a low probability state at S1348 (N at S1348), the processing at S1350 to S1356 is skipped. If the remaining number of times the ceiling has been reached is not 0 in S1352 (N in S1352), the processes in S1354 to S1356 are skipped. Note that when the process enters B time saving in the processing of S1354 and S1356, the remaining number of times the ceiling is reached is not initialized, and the remaining number of times the ceiling is reached remains 0. Since the gaming state during B time saving is a low probability state, in the symbol stop processing during B time saving, S1348 becomes Y and the remaining number of times the ceiling is reached is subtracted by 1 in S1350, so the remaining number of times the ceiling is reached is less than 0. It becomes a small negative value and is subtracted. Thereafter, even if time saving B ends, the remaining number of times the ceiling is reached is not initialized, so it continues to be subtracted as a negative value, and the remaining number of times the ceiling is reached will not become zero. As a result, unless a jackpot occurs after shifting to B time saving and the remaining number of times the player reaches the ceiling is not initialized, the shift to B time saving will not occur again.

When the special symbol indicating a jackpot is stopped and displayed in S1330 (N in S1330), the remaining number of times the ceiling is reached is initialized, the number of times the ceiling is reached (for example, 900 times) is set as the initial value (S1358), and the The state is shifted to a high probability and low ball entry state (S1360). After that, a special game is started.

As a modification, instead of executing the transition process to the high ball entry state in S1346 and S1356, a flag indicating that the transition to the high ball entry state is possible may be turned on. In this case, at the end of the flow shown in FIG. 52, if a flag indicating that it is possible to shift to the high ball entry state is on, processing may be executed to shift to the high ball entry state. Note that if the flag is off, the process of transitioning to the high ball entry state is skipped.

FIG. 53 is a diagram showing a game flow according to the embodiment, and shows transitions between a plurality of production modes. In this embodiment, a normal mode, A time saving mode, B time saving mode, C time saving mode, latent mode, extension mode, and special mode are prepared as performance modes selected according to the gaming state. When the first special symbol 51 becomes a jackpot in the first game in which players are left-handed, for example, there is a 90% probability that it will be a 4R jackpot, and a 10% probability that it will be a 10R jackpot. When the second special symbol 52 becomes a jackpot in the second game where the player is right-handed, for example, there is a 100% probability of a 10R jackpot. In the normal mode, the transition of the performance mode triggered by the jackpot in FIG. 53 is triggered by the jackpot of the first special symbol 51 in the first game, which is a left-handed hit, and in modes other than the normal mode, it is a right-handed hit. This is triggered by the jackpot of the second special symbol 52 in the second game. The special mode will only transition if the second lottery value is held in the production mode before the transition, and if the second lottery value is not held, the game will change to the normal mode instead of the special mode. Transition. In this embodiment, only jackpot symbols that can be transitioned to a high probability state are prepared, and the probability changes depending on whether or not the game ball enters a specific area within the jackpot opening that is opened during a special game after a jackpot. It is configured to determine whether to transition to the state. In this example, the 4R jackpot is a special game in which it is difficult or impossible for the ball to enter a specific area (jackpot symbol B, the period during which the ball is distributed to the specific area is maintained for 0.05 seconds), and the 10R jackpot is a special game in which it is difficult or impossible to enter the specific area. This is a special game in which it is easy or possible for the ball to enter the area (jackpot symbol A, the period during which the manner in which the ball is distributed to the specific area is maintained is 10 seconds). Therefore, in this embodiment, the game ball does not enter the specific area in the 4R jackpot, and the game ball enters the specific area in the 10R jackpot, and the transition of the production mode triggered by the jackpot is shown. The following description is also based on these assumptions.

The normal mode is a performance mode corresponding to the first game in which the game state is a low probability and low ball entry state (low low state), and the player is left-handed, and is an initial mode set at the start of the game. In normal mode, the right-handed image is not displayed. If a 4R jackpot occurs in the normal mode, the game is shifted to the A time saving mode after the special game ends. If a 10R jackpot occurs in the normal mode, the game shifts to the latent mode after the special game ends. In the normal mode, when the cumulative number of symbol fluctuations in the low probability state reaches a predetermined ceiling number (for example, 900 times), the mode is shifted to the B time saving mode. When the C time saving symbol is stopped and displayed in the normal mode, the mode is shifted to the C time saving mode.

The A time saving mode is a production mode corresponding to the second game in which the game state is a low probability and high ball entry state (low and high state) and the ball is hit to the right. In time saving mode A, a right-handed image is displayed. In the A time saving mode, the number of times the high pitch state continues (that is, the final stage) is set to 200 times. If a jackpot is achieved in the A-time saving mode, the game is shifted to the latent mode after the special game ends. When a predetermined final period (200 times) of the high ball entry state is reached in the A time saving mode, a transition is made to the special mode after the end of the symbol fluctuation that is the predetermined final period (200th time).

When the mode is shifted to the A time saving mode, the cumulative number of symbol changes in the low probability state (for example, the remaining number of times reaching the ceiling) is initialized by the execution of the special game that triggered the shift to the A time saving mode. Since the final number of times in A time saving mode (200 times) is less than the ceiling number of times (900 times) which is the condition for transitioning to B time saving mode, the transition condition to B time saving mode is satisfied while A time saving mode is being executed. Never. Therefore, there is no direct transition from time saving mode A to time saving mode B. As a modified example, if the final number of times in the A time saving mode is greater than the ceiling number which is the condition for transitioning to the B time saving mode, the game is triggered when the cumulative number of symbol changes in the A time saving mode reaches the specified ceiling number. B may be shifted to time saving mode.

When the C time saving symbol is stopped and displayed in the A time saving mode, it may be impossible to shift to the C time saving mode. For example, it may be possible to shift to the C time saving mode only in a low probability and low ball entry state, and not to shift to the C time saving mode in a low probability and high ball entry state. The time-saving mode A is more advantageous for the player than the time-saving mode C, and the number of times the time-saving mode A is continued (200 times) is greater than the number of times the time-saving mode C is continued (100 times). Therefore, if the time saving mode C is entered after the start of the time saving mode A, there is a possibility that the remaining number of times in the high ball entry state will be extremely reduced, which may be disadvantageous for the player. To prevent such a situation, transition from time saving mode A to time saving mode C is prohibited. In a modified example, when the C time saving symbol is stopped and displayed in the A time saving mode, it may be possible to shift to the C time saving mode. For example, when the C time saving symbol stops in a low probability and high ball entry state, the mode may be shifted to the C time saving mode.

B time saving mode is a production mode corresponding to the second game in which the game state is a low probability and high ball entry state (low and high state), and the ball is hit to the right. In the B time saving mode, a right-handed image is displayed. In the B time saving mode, the number of continuations (final stage) of the high ball entry state is set to 200, and the number of continuations of the high ball entry state is the same as in the A time saving mode. In the B time saving mode, for example, the same effects as in the A time saving mode can be executed. If a jackpot is achieved in the B time saving mode, the game is shifted to the latent mode after the special game ends. When the predetermined final period (200 times) of the high ball entry state is reached in the B time saving mode, a transition is made to the special mode after the end of the symbol variation that is the predetermined final period (200 times). In the case of a specification that allows transition to the C time saving mode only in a low probability and low ball entry state, if the C time saving symbol is stopped and displayed in the B time saving mode, the transition to the C time saving mode is not made. In a modified example, when the C time saving symbol is stopped and displayed in the B time saving mode, the mode may be shifted to the C time saving mode. Note that the number of times the high ball entry state continues in the B time saving mode may be set to be greater than the number of times the high ball entry state continues in the A time saving mode, for example, it may be set to 500 times, 1000 times, etc. good.

The C time saving mode is a production mode corresponding to the second game in which the game state is a low probability and high ball entry state (low and high state) and the ball is hit to the right. In the C time saving mode, a right-handed image is displayed. In the time saving mode C, the number of times the high ball entry state continues (final stage) is set to 100, and the number of times the high ball entry state continues is smaller than in the A time saving mode and the B time saving mode. Therefore, it can be said that the time saving mode C is disadvantageous for the player compared to the time saving mode A and the time saving mode B. In the C time saving mode, for example, a different effect from that in the A time saving mode and the B time saving mode can be executed. C If a jackpot is achieved in the time saving mode, the game is shifted to the latent mode after the special game ends. C When a predetermined end period (100 times) of the high ball entry state is reached in the time saving mode, a transition is made to the special mode after the end of the symbol fluctuation that is the predetermined end period (100 times).

When the cumulative number of symbol changes in the low probability state reaches a predetermined ceiling number (for example, 900 times) during the C time saving mode, the C time saving mode is transferred to the B time saving mode. B time saving mode has a higher number of continuous high ball entry states than C time saving mode and is more advantageous for the player than C time saving mode, so transition from C time saving mode to B time saving mode does not need to be prohibited. . In order to prohibit the transition from A time saving mode or B time saving mode to C time saving mode, if the specification allows transition to C time saving mode only in low probability and low ball entry conditions, the C time saving symbol will be stopped and displayed in C time saving mode. If it is, it will not be re-transferred to C time saving mode. In a modified example, when the C time saving symbol is stopped and displayed in the C time saving mode, the mode may be changed to the C time saving mode again. For example, if the C time saving symbol is stopped and displayed at the 50th symbol change in the C time saving mode, the stop display will trigger the C time saving mode to end, a new C time saving mode will start, and a high ball entry state will occur. may be reset to 100 times.

The latent mode is a production mode corresponding to the second game in which the game state is a high probability and high ball entry state (high high state) or a low probability and high ball entry state (low high state), and the player is right-handed. . In hidden mode, a right-handed image is displayed. The game state at the start of hidden mode is a high probability and high ball entry state (high high state), but if you win the fall judgment during hidden mode, the game state is low probability and high ball entry state (low high state). will be moved to In addition, if it is a "Tama-katsu" specification in which the transition to a high probability state is confirmed by winning a V prize during a special game, if you win a V prize during a special game, you will enter a high probability state at the start of the hidden mode, and during the special game. If there is no V win, a low probability state may be entered at the start of the latent mode. In the latent mode, the high ball entry state continues at least until a predetermined number of times (120 or 220 times). The predetermined number of times that the high ball entry state can continue in the latent mode is determined, for example, depending on the type of jackpot symbol that triggered the transition to the latent mode, and for example, the jackpot symbol that is the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol 52. Among jackpot symbols a, b, c, d, and e, the predetermined number of times is set to 120 for jackpot symbols a to c, and the predetermined number of times is set to 220 for jackpot symbols d to e. If a jackpot is achieved in the latent mode, the game is shifted to the latent mode after the special game ends. If the number of symbol variations in hidden mode is within the predetermined number (120 or 220) and the fall judgment is won, the game will move to special mode after the symbol variation is the predetermined number (120 or 220). be done. If the number of symbol variations in hidden mode is within the predetermined number of times (120 or 220) and the fall judgment is not won, the extension mode will be applied after the symbol variation is the predetermined number of times (120th or 220th). will be moved to

The extension mode is a production mode corresponding to the second game in which the game state is a high probability and high ball entry state (high-high state), and the ball is hit to the right. The extension mode continues until the fall judgment is won in the extension mode, and when the fall judgment is won, the transition to the special mode is made after the symbol variation that resulted in the fall judgment is completed. If a jackpot is achieved in the extended mode, the game will be shifted to the latent mode after the special game ends. If the fall judgment is won in the extended mode, the ball is shifted to a low probability and low ball entry state (low low state) immediately after the fall judgment. Therefore, in the extension mode, the gaming state in the symbol fluctuation that won the fall judgment is a low probability and low ball entry state (low low state), and when the symbol fluctuation that won the fall judgment stops, the remaining number of times the ceiling is reached is subtracted by 1. Ru. In the extended mode, the right-handed image is displayed until just before the start of the symbol variation that wins the fall determination or the win/fail determination, and the right-handed image is hidden at the start of the symbol variation that wins the fall determination or the win/fail determination. Note that the transition to the B time saving mode is not triggered by the subtraction of the remaining number of times the vehicle reaches the ceiling in the final change of the extension mode. This is because the game state from the end of the special game until just before the final change in the extension mode is a high probability and high ball entry state, so the remaining number of times the ceiling is reached remains at the initial value (for example, 900 times). When the remaining number of times the ceiling is reached is subtracted by 1 when the final variation in the extension mode is stopped, the remaining number of times the ceiling is reached after the subtraction process is a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the initial value (for example, 899 times).

The special mode is a production mode corresponding to the first game in which the game state is a low probability and low ball entry state (low low state), and the player is left-handed. In the special mode, the right-handed image is hidden. The special mode is entered when the second lottery value is reserved at the end of the easy entry state, and the second special symbol 52 is variably displayed by using the second lottery value. In the special mode, special effects that can only be executed in the special mode can be executed, and for example, special effects that are not executed in the normal mode, time saving mode, latent mode, and extended mode are executed. In the special mode, for example, an effect is performed that stimulates whether or not the player will be able to return to the high ball entry state due to the occurrence of a jackpot. If a jackpot is achieved in the special mode, the game is shifted to the hidden mode after the special game ends. When the second lottery value is completely reserved in the special mode, the mode is shifted to the normal mode.

Since the second special symbol 52 is variably displayed in the special mode, when the C time-saving symbol is prepared only in the first special symbol 51, the C time-saving symbol is not displayed in a stopped state in the special mode. In this case, there is no direct transition from the special mode to the C time saving mode. In addition, when the C time-saving symbol is prepared in the second special symbol 52 (when the C time-saving symbol is prepared only in the second special symbol 52, or when the C time-saving symbol is prepared in the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52), If both of the special symbols 52 are prepared), the C time-saving symbol may be stopped and displayed in the special mode, and the special mode may be directly transferred to the C time-saving mode after the C time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed.

In the game flow of this embodiment, when the time saving mode, latent mode, or extended mode selected in the high ball entry state ends, a transition is made to the common special mode until the remaining reservation of the second lottery value is exhausted. . In the high ball entry state, game balls are likely to enter the second starting port 12, so the state in which the second lottery value is held at the maximum (for example, 4 balls) is often maintained. In most cases, the second lottery value is reserved when the time-saving mode, latent mode, or extended mode ends. Therefore, after the time saving mode, latent mode, or extended mode ends, in most cases, the mode is shifted to the special mode, and after the remaining reservation of the second lottery value is exhausted, the mode is shifted to the normal mode. Note that if the second lottery value is not held at the end of the time saving mode, latent mode, or extended mode, the mode is directly shifted to the normal mode instead of the special mode.

As an irregular situation that may occur in the game flow according to this embodiment, it is conceivable that the first special symbol 51 instead of the second special symbol 52 becomes a jackpot during a game in which the player should hit right. In this embodiment, only jackpot symbols that can transition to a high probability state are prepared, and the probability changes depending on whether the game ball enters a specific area within the jackpot opening that is opened during a special game after a jackpot. If the configuration is such that it is determined whether or not to move to the state, the 4R jackpot is a special game in which it is difficult or impossible to enter the specific area (jackpot symbol B, the period for maintaining the mode of being allocated to the specific area is 0.05 seconds), and the 10R jackpot is a special game in which it is easy or possible to enter a specific area (jackpot pattern A, the period during which the ball is distributed to the specific area is maintained for 10 seconds), so it is a 4R jackpot. After the special game ends, the probability becomes low. Therefore, if the first special symbol 51 becomes a 4R jackpot during a right-handed game (that is, A time saving mode, B time saving mode, C time saving mode, latent mode, and extension mode), the game will be transferred after the special game ends. The state becomes a low probability state. If the game state to be transitioned to after the end of the special game is a low probability state, in principle it is possible to transition to A time saving mode, but even if you hit the jackpot while hitting right, you will be transferred to A time saving mode again. If this happens, it will be a great disadvantage to the player. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the first special symbol 51 becomes a 4R jackpot during a right-handed game, the transition is not made to the A time saving mode, but to the latent mode in which a low probability and high ball entry state is set 220 times. to be done. The latent mode that is transferred after the end of the 4R jackpot special game can be said to be an irregular latent mode in which the game state at the start is a low probability and high ball entry state. The number of consecutive low probability and high ball entry states set in irregular latent mode (220 times) is higher than the number of consecutive low probability and high ball entry states set in A time saving mode (200 times). many. By setting the number of continuations (220 times) when shifting to the irregular latent mode to be greater than the number of continuations (200 times) of A time-saving mode, an unfortunate event occurred in which a 4R jackpot occurred during a right-handed game. Even in such cases, the disadvantage to the player can be prevented from becoming excessively large. Note that the number of times that the low probability and high ball entry state is continued set in the irregular latent mode may be any number (for example, 500 times) that is greater than the number of times that the A time saving mode is continued (200 times).

Some characteristic features of this embodiment will be described below.

(Aspect 2-1: Fluctuation performance that suggests jackpot expectation and time-saving expectation)
FIG. 54 is a diagram illustrating an example of the process of variable production. A symbol variation performance accompanied by a variable display of decorative symbols can be executed within one symbol variation period from the start of special symbol variation to the stop display. In the symbol variation performance, it is possible to execute a specific performance that suggests the degree of expectation of a jackpot. There are multiple types of specific effects, and there are at least a first specific effect, a second specific effect, and a third specific effect. The level of expectation for a jackpot is in the order of first specific performance < second specific performance < third specific performance. In other words, the second specific performance suggests that there is a higher expectation of a jackpot than the first specific performance, and the third specific performance has a higher expectation of a jackpot than the first and second specific performances. suggests that.

An example of the first specific performance is a long reach performance, which has a higher degree of expectation of a jackpot than a normal reach performance, but a lower degree of expectation of a jackpot than a SP reach performance. Specific examples of long-reach production include episode production, in which episodes related to characters that appear are displayed in sequence in a story format, and mission production, in which the process of a character achieving a specific mission is displayed. After execution of the first specific performance, there may be a jackpot or a non-jackpot (miss or small hit). If the result is something other than a jackpot after the execution of the first specific performance, the C time saving mode is not entered. In other words, the C time saving symbol will not be stopped and displayed upon completion of the first specific presentation. If the jackpot does not occur after the execution of the first specific performance, the shift to C time saving mode is denied.

An example of the second specific performance is the SP reach performance. A specific example of the SP reach effect is a battle effect in which a process in which a main character battles an enemy character is displayed. After the execution of the second specific performance, there are cases where a jackpot is achieved and cases where the C time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed. After the execution of the second specific performance, symbols other than the jackpot symbol, which is different from the C time-saving symbol, are not stopped and displayed. Therefore, the second specific performance suggests that there will be a jackpot or that the game will be shifted to the C time saving mode. When the second specific performance is executed, a transition is made to a first easy-to-enter state triggered by a jackpot, or a second easy-to-enter state triggered by the stop of the C time-saving symbol. Therefore, when the second specific effect is executed, the transition to the easy-to-enter state (that is, time-saving entry) is confirmed.

An example of the third specific performance is a full rotation performance, which is a performance in which a plurality of decorative pattern rows are synchronously and fluctuatedly displayed in a state where the plurality of decorative pattern rows have the same pattern. For example, the symbol combinations of three decorative symbol rows are displayed in a variable manner as 111→222→333→444→555→... The third specific performance is a performance in which a jackpot is determined, and after the execution of the third specific performance, it will always be a jackpot, and nothing other than a jackpot will occur.

If a jackpot is achieved after the execution of the specific performance, the decorative symbols may be temporarily stopped or displayed in a jackpot mode with the completion of the specific performance as an opportunity. For example, after the first specific performance, second specific performance, or third specific performance is executed, a plurality of decorative symbol rows become the same symbol (for example, 777) and are temporarily stopped or stopped, and the special symbol is a symbol indicating a jackpot. The display will stop at . When a plurality of decorative symbol rows have the same symbol, if it is 777, a 10R jackpot is confirmed, and if it is other than 777 (such as 222 or 666), a 4R jackpot is confirmed. In addition, if multiple decorative symbol rows are other than 777 (such as 222 or 666), it is not determined whether it will be a 4R jackpot or a 10R jackpot, and it may be a 4R jackpot or a 10R jackpot. Good too. The probability of a 10R jackpot is higher when the second specific performance is executed and a jackpot is achieved than when the first specific performance is executed and a jackpot is achieved. When the first specific performance is executed and a jackpot is achieved, and when the second specific performance is executed and a jackpot is achieved, the plurality of decorative symbol rows are more likely to be other than 777 than 777. Furthermore, the probability of a 10R jackpot is higher when the third specific performance is executed and a jackpot is achieved than when the second specific performance is executed and a jackpot is achieved. When the third specific performance is executed and a jackpot is achieved, the plurality of decorative symbol rows are more likely to become 777 than those other than 777.

A plurality of specific performances may be executed within one symbol variation period. The first specific performance and the second specific performance may be executed within one symbol variation period, and for example, the first specific performance may evolve into the second specific performance. On the other hand, it may be impossible to develop from the first specific performance to the third specific performance. It may be possible to develop from the second specific performance to the third specific performance, or it may not be possible to develop it. While it is not possible to directly develop from the first specific performance to the third specific performance, it may be possible to develop from the first specific performance to the third specific performance via the second specific performance. However, the second specific performance does not develop into the first specific performance, and the third specific performance does not develop into the first specific performance or the second specific performance. When the first specific performance develops into a second specific performance or a third specific performance, the first specific performance does not become a failure mode (a production mode in which the episode performance is not developed until the end), and the first specific performance becomes a jackpot mode (episode The first specific performance is a development mode (a production mode where the words "Battle development!" and "Full rotation!" are displayed in the middle of the episode production). After that, it develops into the second specific performance and the third specific performance. When the second specific performance develops into the third specific performance, the second specific performance does not become a loss mode (a performance mode in which you lose in a battle performance), and the second specific performance becomes a jackpot mode (a performance mode in which you win in a battle performance). Instead, the second specific performance becomes a development mode (during the battle performance, the movable accessory 66 emits rainbow colors and the screen gradually turns white) and then develops into the third specific performance. .

A revival performance may be executed upon completion of the specific performance. A comeback performance is a performance that appears to be a failure and then becomes a jackpot. For example, the resurrection performance is executed after the plurality of decorative symbol rows are temporarily stopped in a missed manner, and after the execution of the resurrection performance, the plurality of decorative symbol rows are stopped and displayed in a jackpot manner. In the revival effect, for example, a "button effect" which instructs to press the effect button 109 in a state where a plurality of decorative pattern rows are temporarily stopped in a dislocated manner, or a "lever effect" which instructs to pull the effect lever 112 is used. ' may be executed. In the revival performance, a notification performance that notifies the confirmation of a jackpot may be executed. An example of the notification performance is an accessory activation performance in which the movable accessory 66 is activated, and for example, the accessory activation performance is performed with rainbow lighting colors.

The revival performance may be executable upon completion of the second specific performance, but may not be performed upon completion of the first specific performance or the third specific performance. The revival performance that can be executed upon completion of the second specific performance is not a continuation of the battle performance, but a return to the background display when the normal reach performance is executed from the background display of the battle performance, and then the movable character Reference numeral 66 indicates an accessory action effect that operates with rainbow lighting colors, and a plurality of decorative symbol rows become the same symbol after the accessory action effect is executed. When a revival performance is executed upon completion of the second specific performance, a jackpot may be determined. That is, when the revival performance is executed with the end of the second specific performance as a trigger, the C time-saving symbol does not need to be stopped and displayed. That is, when the revival performance is executed with the end of the second specific performance as a trigger, the shift to the C time saving mode may be denied. When a revival effect is executed after the execution of the second specific effect, a failure effect indicating that the battle has been defeated may be executed before the revival effect is executed. If a failure effect (the failure mode described above) is executed after the execution of the second specific effect, there are cases where a revival effect is executed and a jackpot is achieved, and cases where the revival effect is not executed and the transition is made to C time reduction. You can. If the failure performance is not performed after the execution of the second specific performance, a success performance (the above-mentioned jackpot mode) indicating that the battle has been won is performed after the execution of the second specific performance, and a jackpot may be achieved.

In the symbol variation period during which the second specific performance is executed, one or more preview performances may be executable at least one of before and during the execution of the second specific performance. The preview performance may be a temporary stop display that makes it appear as if the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a pseudo-continuous variation performance, or a temporary stop display of a pseudo-continuous exclusive symbol that suggests the content of the performance after the temporary stop in the temporary stop display. . The notice performance may be a pre-reach notice executed at a timing before reaching the ready-to-reach mode, or a post-reach notice executed after reaching the ready-to-reach mode, in a reach variation performance accompanied by the ready-to-reach mode of the decorative pattern. Preview effects include cut-in effects in which words and character images that suggest expectations are displayed for a relatively short period of time (about a few seconds), and rush effects that suggest that expectations will enter or develop into a higher state. It may be. In the preview performance, different types of characters may be displayed depending on the level of expectation, and the display colors of characters, window frames, etc. may vary depending on the level of expectation. The preview performance may be an accessory operation performance that activates the movable accessory 66. The preview effect may be a button continuous effect in which the display contents and display colors on the screen change step by step by repeatedly pressing the effect button 109. The preview performance may not be performed at all, may be performed only once, or may be performed multiple times within the symbol variation period in which the second specific performance is performed. By making it possible to execute the preview performance multiple times within the symbol variation period in which the second specific performance is executed, a step-up preview performance (or chance-up performance) may be performed that gradually increases the level of expectation. . The preview performance that can be executed within the symbol variation period in which the second specific performance is executed may indicate the degree of expectation as to whether the game will hit the jackpot or shift to the C time saving mode. That is, the probability that the jackpot symbol will stop (or the probability that the C time-saving symbol will stop) may vary depending on the execution mode of the preview performance during the symbol variation period in which the second specific performance is executed. For example, if the first character is displayed as a pre-reach preview during the symbol fluctuation period when the second specific effect is executed, the probability that the jackpot symbol will stop is 40%, and the probability that the C time-saving symbol will stop is 60%. On the other hand, when the second character is displayed as a pre-reach notice, the probability that the jackpot symbol will stop is 70%, the probability that the C time-saving symbol will stop is 30%, and the third character is displayed as a pre-reach notice. In this case, the probability that the jackpot symbol will stop may be 100%. In addition, no matter which character is displayed as a pre-reach notice, the stop of the C time-saving symbol is not confirmed.

According to this aspect, depending on which of multiple types of specific effects is executed, it not only suggests the expectation level of a jackpot, but also the expectation level of transition to an easy-to-enter state (that is, the expectation level of time-saving entry). ) can be suggested. When the second specific performance is executed, it can be suggested that the expectation level of a jackpot is high and that the transition to the easy-to-enter state is confirmed. That is, when the second specific performance is executed, it can be suggested that the transition to the easy-to-enter state is triggered by a jackpot, or the transition to the easy-to-enter state is triggered by the stop of the C time-saving symbol. Therefore, even if a jackpot does not occur after the execution of the second specific effect, it can be expected that the transition to the easy-to-enter state (C time saving mode) will occur, making this a more promising effect for the development of the effect than in the past. be able to.

According to this aspect, since it is possible to suggest both the jackpot expectation level and the time-saving rush expectation level by the specific production, when the production suggesting the jackpot expectation level and the production suggesting the time-saving rush expectation level are prepared separately, By comparison, the interest of the performance can be increased. Furthermore, compared to the case where a performance suggesting a jackpot expectation level and a performance suggesting a time-saving expectation level are prepared separately, the number of types of performances can be reduced, and an excessive increase in development man-hours can be suppressed.

As a modification of this aspect, symbols other than the jackpot (for example, miss) that are different from the C time-saving symbol may be stopped upon completion of the second specific performance. In this modified example, when the second specific effect is executed, the transition to the easy-to-enter state (C time-saving mode) can be expected even if the jackpot does not occur, so there are high expectations for the development of the effect compared to the conventional example. It can be made into a performance that can last.

As a modification of this aspect, it may be possible to enter the B time saving mode upon completion of the second specific performance. For example, the remaining number of times the ceiling is reached in the fluctuation start process is 1, and the second specific performance may be executed in the case of a symbol fluctuation other than a jackpot. In this case, after the execution of the second specific performance, the special symbols other than the jackpot symbols are stopped and displayed, and the remaining number of times the player reaches the ceiling is subtracted to 0, thereby entering the B time saving mode. In this case, after the second specific effect is executed, a branching effect is executed to prompt whether to enter B time saving mode or C time saving mode, and after execution of the branching effect, a notification effect is executed to notify the transition destination. Good too.

(Aspect 2-2: Stage change production)
FIG. 55 is a diagram illustrating an example of switching timing of presentation modes. FIG. 55(a) shows the switching timing of the presentation mode in the normal mode. In the normal mode, the first special symbol 51 (special symbol 1) is variably displayed in a low probability and low ball entry state. The normal mode has a plurality of presentation modes, for example, a first normal presentation, a second normal presentation, and a third normal presentation. Note that each of these may be referred to as a first normal stage, a second normal stage, and a third normal stage, or these may be collectively referred to as a "normal stage." These correspond to the above-mentioned stages A to C, and a "prereading stage" may also be included. The plurality of production modes can be switched when the symbol starts to change, and for example, the production modes can be switched in the following order: 1st normal production → 2nd normal production → 3rd normal production → 1st normal production →... Switch to . For example, when switching from the first normal performance to the second normal performance triggered by the start of fluctuation of the symbols (switching 1), the first normal performance is being executed when the fluctuation of the first special symbol 51 starts, and the predetermined performance is changed from the start of fluctuation. After a period of time (for example, 0.5 seconds), the first normal performance ends, and the second normal performance starts. Similarly, when switching from the second normal performance to the third normal performance triggered by the start of fluctuation of the symbols (switch 2), the second normal performance is being executed when the fluctuation of the first special symbol 51 starts, and from the start of fluctuation. After a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds), the second normal performance ends, and the third normal performance starts. Switching the production mode is also called a stage change production. This stage change production may be one in which the stage changes instantaneously without any warning (for example, switching from the first normal production to the second normal production), or a production indicating a stage change (for example, "STAGE CHANGE" appears on the screen). The stage may be switched (for example, the first normal performance is switched to the second normal performance) through a performance in which characters are displayed in large size for 0.5 seconds. For each of the plurality of performance modes, for example, the background display of the screen on which the decorative pattern 61 is variably displayed differs from each other.

FIG. 55(b) shows the switching timing of the presentation mode in the special mode. In the special mode, the second special symbol 52 (special symbol 2) is variably displayed in a low probability and low ball entry state. Since the special mode is a low ball entry state, it is difficult for a new game ball to enter the second starting port 12. In the special mode, the second lottery value held in the high ball entry state (time saving mode, latent mode, or extension mode) before shifting to the special mode is used up. The special mode continues until all the reservations of the second lottery value are used up, and ends before the variable display of the special map 1 becomes possible after the reservation of the second lottery value is used up. When the special map 1 is displayed in a variable manner in a low probability and low ball entry state, the mode becomes normal mode.

In the time saving mode, latent mode, or extended mode, the performance mode corresponds to each mode. Note that the time saving mode corresponds to the above-mentioned chance mode, and the latent mode and extension mode correspond to the above-mentioned rush mode. In the final variation of the time saving mode, latent mode, or extended mode, an end suggestion effect indicating the end of each mode is executed. The termination suggestion performance may include a performance that encourages whether or not the high ball entry state will continue. When the time saving mode, hidden mode, or extended mode ends, an end effect is performed to notify the end of each mode, and the mode is shifted to the special mode. The ending effect is executed before the symbols stop being displayed in the final variation of each mode. After the end performance is executed, the performance mode is switched from the performance corresponding to the time saving mode, hidden mode, or extension mode to the special performance that can be executed only in the special mode. The start timing of the special performance is, for example, before the symbols stop being displayed in the final variation of the time saving mode, latent mode, or extended mode (switching 3). The start timing of the special performance may be after the stop display of the symbols in the final variation of the time saving mode, latent mode or extension mode, or during the stop display of the symbols in the final variation. In other words, it may be before the start of symbol variation in the first symbol variation in the special mode. Note that the special performance may be started with the start of symbol variation in the first symbol variation in the special mode.

If the special mode does not result in a jackpot, the special mode changes the fluctuation display of the second special symbol (special symbol 2), which starts with no reservation of the second lottery value, to the final fluctuation in a low ball entry and low probability state. ends as . The special performance ends during the final variation of the special mode, and the normal performance (for example, the first normal performance) is started before the symbols stop being displayed in the final variation of the special mode. In other words, the timing of switching from the special performance to the normal performance is before the symbols stop being displayed in the final variation of the special mode (switch 4). As a result, after the symbols are stopped and displayed in the final variation of the special mode, the special performance is not performed, but the normal performance is performed. In addition, when a jackpot occurs in the final variation of the special mode, it is not necessary to switch from the special performance to the normal performance before the symbols stop being displayed in the final variation of the special mode. For example, the special effect may be executed at the timing when the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped or stopped in a jackpot mode (for example, 777) in the final variation of the special mode.

According to this aspect, since the special effect is not executed after the symbols are stopped and displayed in the final variation of the special mode, if the game is stopped at the end of the high ball entry state (time saving mode, hidden mode, or extended mode) Even if the game is completed, it is possible to prevent the special performance from continuing to be displayed after the game ends. If the display of the special effect continues and it becomes clear that the state is immediately after the end of the special mode, it can be estimated that the remaining number of times the vehicle reaches the ceiling, which is the condition for entering B time reduction, is relatively large. . If you transition to A Time Saving Mode due to a jackpot, the remaining number of times you will reach the ceiling at the end of the special mode (special effect) that transitions after A Time Saving Mode ends will be from the ceiling number (for example, 900 times) to the end of A Time Saving Mode. It is approximately equal to the value (for example, 700 times) obtained by subtracting the number of times (for example, 200 times). If you switch to hidden mode due to a jackpot, the remaining number of times you reach the ceiling at the end of the special mode depends on the timing of winning the fall judgment, but the maximum number of times you reach the ceiling (e.g. 900 times) or the minimum number of times you reach the ceiling depends on the timing of winning the fall judgment. However, it is approximately equal to the value (for example, 680 times) obtained by subtracting the number of times the latent mode continues (for example, 220 times) from the ceiling number of times (for example, 900 times). If you switch to special mode (special performance) after B time saving mode ends, you cannot switch back to B time saving mode, so the remaining number of times you reach the ceiling at the end of special mode (special performance) is essentially unlimited. Becomes large. C. Only when the special mode (special effect) is entered after the end of the time saving mode, there is a possibility that the remaining number of times the ceiling is reached at the end of the special mode (special effect) is relatively small. Suppose that the special performance is designed to continue for at least 10 symbol changes, and a frequency notification performance that notifies the player of the number of symbol changes since the end of the special game (for example, "120 rotations after the jackpot!" or "387 rotations after the jackpot") !”) is executed, or the number of changes since the end of the special game is displayed on the data display, which is an external device connected to the gaming machine (the data display that the hall operator connects to the gaming machine). When the number of times the special game has changed since the end of the special game that the player can understand, and the current situation where the special effect continues to be displayed, it is determined that the remaining number of times the ceiling has been reached is large (that is, it is far from reaching the ceiling). There is a possibility that players can understand it. For example, in a situation where the special effect is displayed at the 600th rotation from the end of the special game, it can be seen that the special effect has shifted to the 591st to 600th rotation. In this embodiment, when the special effect is transitioned to after the 222nd spin after the end of the special game, the high probability state is maintained until the 220th spin, and the fluctuation of winning in the fall judgment after the 221st spin is Since this is a change immediately before the transition to the special performance, it can be understood that there is a high possibility that the state was in a high probability state immediately before the transition to the special performance. As a result, even if the number-of-time notification display displays "600 rotations after jackpot!", it is possible that the remaining number of times the ceiling is reached is not 300, but 891 to 900 (however, C time reduction There is a possibility that it will be transferred to a special mode (special effect) after the mode ends, and there is also a possibility that the remaining number of times it reaches the ceiling is not 891 to 900 rotations). Then, when another player tries to start playing, understanding that there is a possibility that the number of times remaining to reach the ceiling before entering B time reduction is very large (it is very far from reaching the ceiling) will reduce the desire to play. There is a possibility that it will decline. According to this aspect, by preventing the display of the special effect from continuing after the end of the game, when another player tries to start the game, the player does not start the game until the time shortening B starts. It is possible to prevent it from becoming possible to estimate the remaining number of times the ceiling is reached.

(Aspect 2-3: Operation instruction production)
FIG. 56 is a diagram illustrating an example of the execution process of the first performance triggered by the operation instruction performance. The operation instruction performance displays an operation means image 610 (also referred to as a button image) that imitates an input operation means that accepts an input operation from a player, such as the performance button 109 or the performance lever 112, and prompts the player to perform an input operation on the input operation means. It is a performance that instructs. FIG. 56(a) is an example of a screen for operation instruction presentation. In the operation instruction performance, an operation means image 610 imitating the performance button 109 is displayed in the center of the screen, and the words "Press!!" urging the player to operate the performance button 109 are displayed. A timer image 612 is displayed below the operation means image 610, which indicates the valid operation period during which the input operation is valid, and by gradually shortening the length of the bar 614 of the timer image 612, the timer image 612 is displayed until the valid operation period ends. The remaining time is shown. The illustrated example is an operation instruction performance executed during symbol variation, and a simple symbol 600 consisting of three symbol rows is displayed in a variable manner at the bottom right of the screen.

FIG. 56(b) is an example of the execution of the first effect that can be executed after the execution of the operation instruction effect. It is running. The accessory operation effect shown in FIG. 56(b) is triggered by the operation of the effect button 109 in the operation instruction effect shown in FIG. It is executed when the process ends. When the first effect is executed, the operating means image 610 is hidden. A performance other than the role object operation performance may be performed as the first performance, and an arbitrary preview performance may be performed after the operation instruction performance is performed. A plurality of types of first effects may be prepared, and any one of the plurality of types of first effects may be executable when the operation means image 610 becomes hidden. Note that if the operation valid period ends without the effect button 109 being operated in the operation instruction effect, the first effect may not be executed after the operation means image 610 is hidden.

FIG. 57 is a diagram illustrating an example of the process of executing the second performance triggered by the operation instruction performance. FIG. 57(a) shows a screen example of operation instruction performance, and is the same as FIG. 56(a) described above. FIGS. 57(b) and 57(c) show examples of execution of the second performance that can be executed after the execution of the operation instruction performance. The second effect, unlike the first effect, is executed while the operating means image 620 is displayed. The second performance includes a performance process in which the performance button 109 does not operate properly and is in a broken state. It should be noted that the performance button 109 is not actually malfunctioning during the second performance, but the performance is made to appear as if the performance button 109 is malfunctioning. The operation means image 620 for the second performance has a display mode different from the normal operation means image 610 for the operation instruction display, and has a display mode that suggests, for example, that the production button 109 is malfunctioning. The operation means image 620 for the second effect is, for example, a display mode in which the effect button 109 is melted and deformed due to high heat, a display mode in which the effect button 109 is broken due to impact, or a normal display mode. Noise is added to the operation means image 610 of , and the display appears to be distorted. The display mode of the operating means image 620 in the second performance is exclusive to the second performance, and is not used when executing the operation instruction performance. The display position of the operating means image 620 for the second effect is the same as the display position of the normal operating means image 610.

The second effect is not executed when the effect button 109 is operated, but when the bar 614 of the timer image 612 disappears and the effective period of operation ends, to indicate that the effect button 109 is malfunctioning. be done. Therefore, even if the effect button 109 is operated before the bar 614 of the timer image 612 disappears, no preview effect is executed. After the bar 614 of the timer image 612 disappears, although the operation means image 620 continues to be displayed, since the timer image 612 is not displayed, the valid operation period has passed and the input operation is not valid. While the second performance is being executed, a message indicating that the performance button 109 is malfunctioning, such as "Huh? Broken?" may be displayed. During execution of the second effect, a message such as "Maybe..." may be displayed suggesting that something will happen due to a malfunction of the effect button 109.

FIG. 57(d) shows an example of a screen after the end of the second effect, and shows an example of a screen of a ready-to-win effect in which the left and right symbol rows of the decorative pattern 602 are the same pattern, resulting in a ready-to-reach mode. In the illustrated example, it is suggested that execution of the second effect will result in a reach. The ready-to-win performance executed after the end of the second performance may be an SP ready-to-win performance that is highly expected to result in a jackpot. Note that, instead of generating the reach after the second performance ends, an arbitrary preview performance may be executed. The second performance may be a advance suggestion performance that suggests in advance the occurrence of a preview performance with a high expectation of a jackpot. Since the expectation of a jackpot is higher in the second performance than in the first performance, it may not become a reach after the first performance ends (or the possibility of becoming a reach is low), but after the end of the second performance It may be possible to make it reachable (or more likely to become reachable). After the first performance ends, the possibility of a preview performance with high expectations for a jackpot being executed may be lowered, and after the end of the second performance, the possibility of a preview performance with a high expectation of a jackpot being executed may be increased. .

A plurality of types of second effects may be prepared, and the display mode of the operating means image 620 and the execution time from the start to the end of the second effects may differ depending on the type of the second effect. Further, depending on the display mode and execution time of the operation means image 620 in the second performance, the expectation level of the preview performance that is executed after the end of the second performance may differ, and the jackpot will be reached after the end of the second performance. Expectations may differ. For example, the degree of expectation of a jackpot may be increased when the display mode of the operating means image 620 changes significantly or when the execution time of the second effect is long. Further, the normal operation means image 610 that is not malfunctioning may be displayed again upon completion of the second performance, and the preview performance may be executed without fail upon operation of the performance button 109. That is, when the normal operation means image 610 is displayed again upon completion of the second performance, the second performance may not be re-executable. In this case, the longer the execution time of the second performance, the higher the possibility that the operating means image 610 will be displayed in a display mode with a high expectation of jackpot after the second performance ends. Note that after the first performance ends, the operating means image 610 is not displayed again (or the probability that it will be displayed again is low), and after the second performance ends, the operating means image 610 is displayed again (or is not displayed again). It may be possible to increase the probability that the

Before executing the operation instruction effect shown in FIG. 56(a) or FIG. 57(a), a button generation suggestion effect (also referred to as a button appearance promotion effect) that suggests that an operation instruction effect will occur may be executed. The button generation suggestion effect when the first effect is executed may be the same as the button generation suggestion effect when the second effect is executed. In other words, it may be impossible to distinguish whether the first effect or the second effect is executed depending on the execution mode of the button generation suggestion effect. On the other hand, when displaying the normal operation means image 610 again after the second performance ends, a button generation suggestion performance with a different execution mode from the button generation suggestion performance that triggers the start of the second performance is executed after the second performance ends. You may. The execution mode of the button suggestion performance executed after the end of the second performance may be such that it can be distinguished that the first performance can be performed after that and that the second performance cannot be performed. In addition, the button generation suggestion effect is not executed before the operation instruction effect shown in FIG. 56(a) or FIG. Occurrence suggestion effects may be performed.

There may be a plurality of display modes of the operating means image 610 at the start of the operation instruction performance when the first performance is executed. For example, as the initial display mode of the operating means image 610, in addition to the normal color, a display mode with a high degree of expectation of a jackpot, such as red or a giraffe pattern, or a display mode that suggests confirmation of a jackpot, such as a rainbow color, may be used. It's okay to be hit. On the other hand, the initial display mode of the operating means image 610 when the second effect is executed may be smaller than when the first effect is executed. For example, the initial display mode of the operating means image 610 when the second effect is executed may be only the normal color. In addition, when displaying the operating means image 610 again after the second performance ends, the display mode of the operating means image 610 that is displayed again is better than the display mode of the operating means image 610 that is displayed at the start of the second performance. The display mode may have a high possibility of providing a high expectation of a jackpot.

According to this aspect, after the execution of the operation instruction performance, not only the case where the performance button 109 operates normally and the first performance is executed, but also the second performance when the performance button 109 does not operate normally and breaks down. A performance may be performed. By making such a second performance possible, it is possible to realize a performance accompanied by a sense of discomfort in which no response occurs even when the performance button 109 is operated, and it is possible to increase the interest of the performance.

According to this aspect, regardless of whether the first effect or the second effect is executed, the initial display mode of the operating means image 610 displayed in the operation instruction effect is the same (for example, normal color). Therefore, even if the normal color presentation button 109 is displayed, it is possible to create a presentation that gives hope for the development destination.

(Aspect 2-4: Suggestion of remaining number of times to reach the ceiling)
When a predetermined condition is satisfied, a special effect can be executed that indicates the remaining number of times the ceiling is reached, which is a condition for entering B time reduction. The special effect does not directly indicate a specific numerical value of the remaining number of times the player reaches the ceiling, but suggests which of a plurality of ranges the remaining number of times the player reaches the ceiling falls into. If the remaining number of times the ceiling is reached is in the first range (for example, 301 times or more), the first special effect is enabled, and if it is in a second range that is different from the first range (for example, 201 times or more and 300 times or less), the first special effect is executed. 2 special effects can be executed, and if the third range is different from the first range and the second range (for example, 101 times or more and 200 times or less), the third special effect can be performed. Further, if the remaining number of times the ceiling is reached is in the fourth range (for example, from 1 to 100 times), the fourth special effect can be performed. Note that it may be suggested that a specific range is applicable by not performing a special effect when the event falls within one of a plurality of ranges. For example, if the remaining number of times the ceiling has been reached falls within the fourth range (for example, from 1 to 100 times), the special effect may be not executed to indicate that the fourth range is reached.

The special performance may be executable only in a specific game state. The special effect may be executed only in a low probability and low ball entry state, for example, it may be executed only in the normal mode. The special effect may be executed in a specific time saving mode, for example, in C time saving mode. On the other hand, the special effect does not have to be executed in the A time saving mode or the B time saving mode. The special effect does not have to be executed in a high probability state, for example, it does not need to be executed in a hidden mode or an extended mode.

The special performance is executed when the special symbol starts changing. When a special performance is executed in response to the start of fluctuation of a symbol, the special performance is executed so as to end before the fluctuation of the symbol stops. The execution time from the start to the end of the special performance is set so as to fall within the shortest variation time among the selectable variation patterns in the game state in which the special performance can be executed. The execution time from the start to the end of the special effect is, for example, 2 seconds or 3 seconds.

The special performance may be a performance displayed on the performance display device 60. For example, a character dedicated to a special effect may appear with the start of symbol variation as an opportunity. In this case, it may be suggested to which of a plurality of ranges the remaining number of times the character has reached the ceiling falls, depending on the type of character or the display color. For example, when a blue character appears, it falls under the first range, when a green character appears, it falls under the second range, and when a red character appears, it falls under the third range. Good too. The special effect may be a sound effect output from the speaker 108, or the decorative lamp 111 may be colored in a specific color (blue if it falls within the first range, green if it falls within the second range, green if it falls within the third range, etc.). It may also be a lamp effect that flashes in red (if applicable).

The special performance may be performed over a plurality of consecutive symbol changes. For example, a plurality of special performances may be performed corresponding to each of a plurality of consecutive symbol variations. Specifically, the first special effect is executed when the symbol starts to change, the second special effect is executed when the next symbol starts to change, and the third special effect is executed when the next symbol starts to change. A special performance may be performed for the second time. When multiple special effects are executed in response to multiple consecutive symbol changes, the manner of execution of the multiple special effects may be the same, and the pattern change for which the first special effect is performed may be the same. The execution mode of the special performance may be determined based on the remaining number of times the ceiling is reached at the start. In addition, if the execution mode of the special performance is determined based on the remaining number of times the ceiling has been reached at the start of the symbol variation in which each special production is executed, multiple times executed in response to multiple consecutive symbol variations. The execution mode of the special performance may change midway through. For example, the number of times remaining to reach the ceiling when executing the first special effect is 201, the remaining number of times reaching the ceiling when executing the second special effect is 200, and the number of times remaining when executing the third special effect is 201. If the remaining number of attempts is 199, the second special effect (for example, a green character) may be executed the first time, and the third special effect (for example, a red character) may be executed the second and third times. Incidentally, as the special effects, a fifth special effect and a sixth special effect may be prepared which have the role of indicating the degree of expectation of a jackpot. For example, if the 5th special effect (for example, a golden character) is executed, it is suggested that the jackpot expectation of the symbol change for which the 5th special effect was executed is high, and the 6th special effect (for example, a rainbow-colored character) If this is executed, it may be suggested that the symbol variation for which the sixth special performance was executed is a guaranteed jackpot.

If multiple special effects are executed in response to multiple consecutive symbol changes, the time interval from the end of the special effect until the start of the next special effect is the same as the symbol for which the special effect is executed. The variation may vary depending on the variation time. For example, the variation time of the symbol variation when the first special production is executed is 10 seconds, the variation time of the symbol variation when the second special production is executed is 30 seconds, and the execution time of the special production is 2 seconds. In this case, the time interval from the end of the first special performance to the start of the second special performance is approximately 8 seconds, and the time interval from the end of the second special performance to the start of the third special performance is approximately 8 seconds. It is about 28 seconds.

The special performance may be executed when the number of symbol variations reaches a specific number (for example, 30 times) after RAM clear processing, after power-off recovery processing, or after displaying a standby demo screen. For example, a special effect counter is initialized and a specific number of times is set when the RAM clear process, power-off recovery process, or standby demo screen display is triggered, and when the symbols stop changing, the special effect counter is decremented by 1. You can. When the counter for the special performance reaches 0, the special performance may be executed with the start of the next symbol change as an opportunity. The counter for special effects is decremented only in a game state in which special effects can be executed, and does not need to be decremented in a game state in which special effects cannot be executed. The counter for special effects may be able to be decremented even in a gaming state where special effects cannot be executed.

The special performance counter may be initialized upon execution of the special performance. For example, if a special effect is executed in the normal mode and then the number of symbol variations in the normal mode reaches a specific number (for example, 30 times), the special effect may be executed again. The special performance may be performed every time the number of symbol variations reaches a specific number (for example, every 30 times) in a game state in which the special performance can be performed.

The standby demo screen is a screen display that indicates that the game is on standby, and is displayed for a predetermined period of time in a situation where the symbols are stopped in the normal game and neither the first lottery value nor the second lottery value is suspended. (For example, after 120 seconds) is displayed. The standby demonstration screen may be displayed when no game balls are launched for a certain period of time in the normal mode. The standby demo screen does not need to be displayed in any mode other than the normal mode. For example, in a high ball entry state such as C time saving mode, the standby demo screen does not need to be displayed even if game balls are not launched for a certain period of time.

According to this aspect, the special performance is executed when the number of symbol changes in the normal mode reaches at least a specific number of times, so by continuing the game in the normal mode, it is possible to know the approximate number of times remaining to reach the ceiling. Can be done. This allows the player to benefit from continuing the game. On the other hand, when a game ends in normal mode, a standby demo screen is displayed, and the counter for special effects is initialized using the display of the standby demo screen, so immediately after another player starts a new game. is prohibited from performing special effects. Thereby, it is possible to prevent a player who has not continued playing the game in the normal mode from easily knowing the remaining number of times the game reaches the ceiling. For example, it is possible to prevent the hyena act of looking for an advantageous gaming machine and starting a game while checking the remaining number of times the player reaches the ceiling.

(Aspect 2-5: Opening performance in hidden mode)
When the hidden mode is entered after the end of the special game, a special performance (also referred to as opening performance) that can continue for a special period from the start of the hidden mode until at least a predetermined time has elapsed is executed. The opening performance is executed over a symbol variation period within a specific number of times (for example, 20 times) from the start of the latent mode. If a jackpot is achieved by a symbol variation within a specific number of times (for example, 20 times) from the start of the latent mode, the opening performance ends with the symbol variation resulting in a jackpot. At the end of the opening performance, a branching performance will be performed to encourage whether you will hit the jackpot or continue in the hidden mode and enter the RUSH zone. In the case of a jackpot, an accessory action performance is performed to notify the confirmation of the jackpot in a branch performance, and then a variable performance (for example, a full rotation performance) is performed with the jackpot confirmed. If the jackpot does not occur within a specific number of symbol variations (for example, 20 times) from the start of the latent mode, the opening performance ends at the specific number of symbol variations (for example, the 20th time). If the jackpot does not occur within the special period, a branch performance is executed at the end of the opening performance, and entry into the RUSH zone is announced. In the production that notifies entry into the RUSH zone, the number of times the RUSH zone will continue (100 or 200 times) may be announced or suggested.

FIG. 58 is a diagram showing the execution process of the opening performance. FIG. 58 shows a case where the maximum number of symbol variations (that is, the specific number of times) that the opening performance can continue is 20 times. FIG. 58(a) shows the execution process when the opening effect is executed and all of the changes from the initial variation to the final variation are off. In the case of a deviant fluctuation, the fluctuation time of the initial fluctuation and the final fluctuation is relatively long, and the fluctuation time of the intermediate fluctuations (2nd to 19th fluctuations) excluding the first and final fluctuations is relatively short. For example, the fluctuation time of the initial fluctuation that results in a loss is 10 seconds, the fluctuation time of the intermediate fluctuation that results in a loss is 2.5 seconds, the fluctuation time of the final fluctuation that results in a loss is 25 seconds, and the fluctuation time of the initial fluctuation that results in a loss is 25 seconds. The elapsed time from the start to the end of the final fluctuation is 80 seconds. In the opening performance, a special moving image used only for the opening performance is continuously played using the 80 seconds elapsed time when there is a difference from the first fluctuation to the final fluctuation. The content of the dedicated video includes, for example, an overview and premise explanation of the effects that may occur in the RUSH zone. The reproduction of the dedicated video starts with the start of the first variation, and ends before the branch effect occurs in the final variation.

In the opening performance, a preview performance can be executed at multiple timings, and a step-up preview (or chance-up performance) can be executed by executing the preview performance multiple times. The execution timing and execution content of the multiple preview effects are synchronized with the playback content of the dedicated video. The execution timing of multiple preview performances is determined by the playback time of the dedicated video. For example, Preview 1 can be executed 30 seconds after the dedicated video starts playing, Preview 2 can be executed 38 seconds after the dedicated video starts playing, and Preview 3 can be executed 48 seconds after the dedicated video starts playing. Therefore, the preview 4 can be executed 55 seconds after the start of reproduction of the dedicated video. In preview 1, a preview effect is executed in which the characters in the title display change from a normal color to a highly anticipated color such as green or red in accordance with the title display of the opening effect included in the dedicated video. In the preview 2, a preview effect is executed that indicates the level of expectation based on the type of character that appears in the special video cut-in. In preview 3, a preview effect is executed that indicates the level of anticipation by the presence or absence of a cut-in such as ``A shocking development will take place after this!''. In preview 4, a preview effect is executed that indicates the level of expectation based on the content of the narration lines included in the dedicated video and the type of character in charge of the narration. If everything from the first variation to the final variation when the opening effect is executed is a miss, the notice 1 will be executed during the 9th symbol variation, the notice 2 will be executed during the 12th symbol variation, and the notice 2 will be executed during the 16th symbol variation. A notice 3 is executed during the 19th symbol change, and a notice 4 is executed during the 19th symbol change. The types of these notices 1 to 4 suggest the degree of expectation that after the execution of the branch performance, a notification performance for notifying the confirmation of a jackpot will be performed, and then a full rotation performance will be performed. The more highly anticipated performance content there is in previews 1 to 4, the higher the expectation of a jackpot later on.

FIG. 58(b) shows the execution process when a jackpot occurs in the final fluctuation when the opening effect is executed. The 1st to 19th symbol fluctuations, excluding the final fluctuation, all result in misses, resulting in the same execution process as in (a). When the final fluctuation results in a jackpot, a branch performance is executed after the dedicated video playback period ends, and after the execution of the branch performance, a notification performance for notifying the confirmation of the jackpot is executed, and then a full-rotation performance is executed. In order to secure the execution time of the full rotation performance, the fluctuation time of the final fluctuation that results in a jackpot is longer than the fluctuation time of the final fluctuation that results in a loss. The fluctuation time of the final fluctuation that results in a jackpot is, for example, 85 seconds, which is 60 seconds longer than the fluctuation time (25 seconds) of the final fluctuation that results in a loss. Using the difference of 60 seconds, a notification effect, a full rotation effect, and a jackpot effect when the symbols stop are executed.

FIG. 58(c) shows the execution process when the opening performance is executed and the jackpot occurs in the intermediate variation, and shows the case where the jackpot occurs in the 14th symbol variation. In other words, the first to 13th symbol fluctuations before the jackpot are all misses, and the 14th symbol fluctuation is a jackpot. The execution process of the opening performance when the jackpot occurs in the intermediate variation is the same as the execution process when the jackpot occurs in the final variation in (b). That is, after the end of the dedicated video playback period, a branch performance is performed, after the execution of the branch performance, a notification performance for notifying confirmation of a jackpot is performed, and then a full rotation performance is performed.

The symbol stop timing when the intermediate fluctuation results in a jackpot is the same as the symbol stop timing when the final fluctuation results in a jackpot. The fluctuation time of the intermediate fluctuation that results in a jackpot is equal to the fluctuation time of the final fluctuation that results in a jackpot plus the fluctuation time of the intermediate fluctuation that results in a loss. Let P (85 seconds) be the fluctuation time of the final fluctuation that results in a jackpot, let Q (2.5 seconds) be the fluctuation time of the intermediate fluctuation that results in a loss, and let the maximum number of symbol fluctuations in the opening performance be N (20 times). When the number of fluctuations from the first time to the intermediate fluctuation that results in a jackpot is K (14 times), the fluctuation time P _K of the intermediate fluctuation that results in a jackpot is P _K =P+Q (NK). In the case of K=14 times, the fluctuation time of the 14th symbol fluctuation that results in a jackpot is 85+2.5×6=100 seconds.

The execution timing of the preview performance in the case of a jackpot in the intermediate fluctuation is the same as in the case of a miss until the final fluctuation or in the case of a jackpot in the final fluctuation. Starting from the start of playback of the dedicated video, preview 1 will be executed after 30 seconds, preview 2 will be executed after 38 seconds, preview 3 will be executed after 48 seconds, and preview 4 will be executed after 55 seconds. As a result, notice 1 can be executed on the 9th symbol change that results in a loss, and notice 2 can be executed on the 12th symbol change that results in a loss, while notice 3 and notice 4 can be executed on the 12th symbol change that results in a loss. It becomes possible to execute this at the 14th symbol change. Therefore, the execution mode of the notice 3 and the notice 4 can be determined by utilizing the fact that the fluctuation (the 14th symbol change) when the notice 3 and the notice 4 are executed becomes a jackpot. In other words, the selection probabilities for the production lottery for previews 3 and 4 are set so that the highly anticipated production content is more likely to be selected in previews 3 and 4, compared to the case where the fluctuations are off (for example, the fluctuations are off until the final fluctuation). Can be set. Further, in advance notice 2, if the lottery value corresponding to the 14th symbol change is pending at the start of the 12th symbol change, the execution mode of the advance notice performance can be determined by pre-reading. In other words, the selection probability of the performance lottery of the preview 2 can be set so that the performance content with a high expectation level is more likely to be selected in the preview 2 compared to the case where the fluctuation is a loss (for example, the fluctuation is a loss until the final fluctuation).

FIG. 58(d) shows an execution process in which a jackpot occurs in the intermediate variation in which the opening performance is executed, and shows a case in which a jackpot occurs in the third symbol variation. In other words, the first and second symbol fluctuations before the jackpot are misses, and the third symbol fluctuation is a jackpot. The execution process of the opening performance when a jackpot occurs on the third symbol change is the same as the execution process of (b) and (c). The variation time of the third symbol variation that results in a jackpot is 85+2.5×17=127.5 seconds. The execution timing of the preview performance when the third symbol variation results in a jackpot is the same as the case where the final variation is a miss or the final variation results in a jackpot. As a result, all the preview performances (Notice 1 to Notice 4) can be executed at the third symbol change that becomes a jackpot, and the execution mode of Notice 1 to Notice 4 can be executed by taking advantage of the fact that this variation becomes a jackpot. You can decide. In other words, the selection probabilities for the production lottery for previews 1 to 4 can be set so that the production contents with high expectations are more likely to be selected in previews 1 to 4, compared to the case where the variation is a failure (for example, the variation is a failure until the final variation). .

FIG. 58(e) shows the execution process when a jackpot is achieved in the first fluctuation when the opening effect is executed. The execution process when a jackpot occurs in the first fluctuation is the same as the execution process in (b) to (d). The fluctuation time of the first fluctuation that results in a jackpot is the sum of the fluctuation time of the first fluctuation that results in a loss (10 seconds) and the fluctuation time of the intermediate fluctuation that results in a loss from the 2nd to the 19th time (2.5 x 18 = 45 seconds). The value is the sum (140 seconds) of the fluctuation time (85 seconds) of the final fluctuation that results in a jackpot. In other words, the fluctuation time of the initial fluctuation that results in a jackpot is equal to the elapsed time of the special period. The execution timing of the preview performance when the first symbol variation results in a jackpot is the same as when the player loses until the final variation or when the final variation results in a jackpot. As a result, all the preview performances (notice 1 to notice 4) can be executed in the first fluctuation that results in a jackpot, and the execution mode of notices 1 to 4 can be determined by utilizing the fact that the fluctuation becomes a jackpot. In other words, the selection probabilities for the production lottery for previews 1 to 4 can be set so that the production contents with high expectations are more likely to be selected in previews 1 to 4, compared to the case where the variation is a failure (for example, the variation is a failure until the final variation). .

At the execution timing of the preview performance in the opening performance, a command is transmitted from the control CPU 320 to the sub CPU 310 to notify the execution timing of the preview performance. The control CPU 320 transmits a command to the sub CPU 310 at a timing when the playback time of the video reaches a predetermined time starting from the playback start timing of the dedicated video. For example, when the dedicated video is played for 30 seconds, a command is sent from the control CPU 320 to the sub CPU 310 to notify that it is time to execute preview 1. Similarly, when the dedicated video is played for 38 seconds, a command is sent to notify that it is time to execute preview 2, and when it is played for 48 seconds, a command is sent to notify that it is time to execute preview 3. After 55 seconds of playback, a command is sent to notify that it is time to execute notice 4. The sub CPU 310 (performance determining means 303) determines the execution mode of the preview performance based on the fluctuation or pending lottery value when receiving the command from the control CPU 320, and controls the command to notify the execution mode of the preview performance. Send to CPU 320. The control CPU 320 (effect control device 313) causes the effect display device 60 to display the preview effect specified by the command received from the sub CPU 310.

For symbol variations from the first time the opening performance is executed to a specific number of times, a dedicated variation pattern selection state is used to fix the variation time. As an example, 20 types of variation pattern selection states are prepared that correspond to the maximum number of symbol variations that can continue the opening performance, and the variation pattern selection states are sequentially switched for each symbol variation. In the first-time variation pattern selection state, the 10-second loss variation pattern is selected in the case of a loss, and the 140-second jackpot variation pattern is selected in the case of a jackpot. In the second variation pattern selection state, the 2.5 seconds loss variation pattern is selected in the event of a loss, and the 130 second jackpot variation pattern is selected in the case of a jackpot. In the variation pattern selection state for the third time, a 2.5-second loss variation pattern is selected in the case of a loss, and a 127.5-second jackpot variation pattern is selected in the case of a jackpot. In the fourth variation pattern selection state, the 2.5 seconds loss variation pattern is selected in the case of a loss, and the 125 second jackpot variation pattern is selected in the case of a jackpot. Generalizing, in the K-th variation pattern selection state excluding the first and final, the 2.5 second variation pattern is selected in the case of a loss, and 130-(K-2) x 2 in the case of a jackpot. A jackpot fluctuation pattern of .5 seconds is selected. In the final variation pattern selection state, the 25-second loss variation pattern is selected in the case of a loss, and the 85-second jackpot variation pattern is selected in the case of a jackpot. Therefore, the fluctuation time of the jackpot fluctuation pattern selected in the symbol fluctuations from the first time of the special period to the specific number of times decreases as the number of symbol fluctuations increases. On the other hand, the fluctuation time of the losing fluctuation pattern selected in the specific number of symbol fluctuations from the first time in the latent mode is the same (2.5 seconds) for the intermediate fluctuations excluding the first and final ones.

During the special period, a special moving image may be played and a display counting down the number of symbol variations may be displayed. For example, at the first fluctuation, "19 more times" is displayed, at the second fluctuation, "18 more times" is displayed, at the 19th fluctuation, "1 more time" is displayed, and at the final fluctuation, "19 more times" is displayed. "0 times" is displayed. Note that in the final variation, the countdown display may be hidden after "0 more times" is displayed. In addition, the countdown display may be hidden using the start of the final variation as an opportunity, and in this case, it is not necessary to display "0 times left".

During the special period, a special moving image is played and a simple symbol 600 is displayed to indicate variation and stoppage of the symbol. The simple design 600 is also referred to as a "simple decorative design," "sub-decorative design," "sub-design," "mini-decorative design," or "mini-design." The simple symbol 600 is displayed in a variable manner when the special symbol starts to fluctuate, and is stopped and displayed in accordance with the stop display of the special symbol. If you hit the jackpot on the 1st to 19th times excluding the final fluctuation, even if the temporary stop display and re-fluctuation display of the simple symbol 600 are performed in accordance with the symbol stop and fluctuation start timing when all the results are misses up to the final fluctuation. good. For example, if you hit the jackpot the first time, the simple symbol 600 is temporarily stopped at the same timing as the symbol stop timing of the first fluctuation that results in a loss, and the simple symbol 600 is re-fluctuated at the same timing as the start timing of the second fluctuation that results in a loss. , thereafter, the temporary stop and re-variation of the simple symbol 600 are repeated. In the case of a jackpot for the first time, after the temporary stop and re-variation of the simple symbol 600 are executed 19 times, the branch effect, notification effect and full rotation effect are executed, and then the simple symbol 600 is stopped and displayed in a jackpot mode. Ru. If the K-th intermediate fluctuation results in a jackpot, the next fluctuation display will start after the simple symbol 600 is stopped and displayed for the first to K-1 missed fluctuations, and the simple symbol 600 will temporarily stop for the K-th jackpot fluctuation. It will be displayed again later. In the K-th jackpot variation, temporary stopping and re-variation of the simple symbol 600 are executed NK-1 times. As a result, a pseudo-continuous fluctuation display is executed that makes it appear as if the simple symbol 600 stops and fluctuates at the same timing as when all the fluctuations are off until the final fluctuation. By displaying the simple pattern 600 in pseudo-continuous variation, even if the jackpot occurs in the 19th symbol variation from the first time, it appears as if the jackpot occurred in the 20th symbol variation. Can be done. Further, by temporarily stopping and displaying the simple symbol 600 during the reproduction of the dedicated video, confirmation of a jackpot can be suggested. In addition, during the special period, the decorative pattern 602 is not displayed except during jackpot fluctuations, and is displayed only during the full rotation performance during jackpot fluctuations. In addition, in periods other than the special period (periods other than the period in the normal mode and the special period in the special mode), the decorative pattern 602 is displayed regardless of whether it is a jackpot variation or a loss variation, and the simple pattern 600 is also always displayed. However, even if the decorative pattern 602 temporarily stops (pseudo-continuous fluctuation), the simple pattern 600 will not temporarily stop, unlike the special period.

According to this aspect, even if the number of symbol changes executed during the special period during which the opening performance is executed is any number from 1 to N times (for example, 20 times), if a jackpot occurs during the special period, The stop display timing of the jackpot symbols will be the same. In other words, the symbols that become jackpots are stopped and displayed at the end of the special period. As a result, even if a jackpot occurs in any symbol change from the 1st to the Nth time, a common performance time can be secured, and a special performance including the playback of a dedicated video can be executed within the common performance time. can.

According to this aspect, symbol fluctuations can be executed up to N times (for example, 20 times) within the special period, so compared to the case where the special period consists of only one symbol fluctuation with a fixed fluctuation time. , it is possible to increase the probability that a jackpot will occur within a special period. As a result, it is possible to create a unique situation in which a jackpot is likely to occur at the end of the special period, and it is possible to further increase expectations for the opening performance.

In addition, if the specification is such that the variation pattern selection state is switched for each symbol variation, it is necessary to prepare 20 types of variation pattern selection states, and it is also necessary to prepare 20 types of jackpot variation patterns. This will cause the limited storage capacity of the main ROM 292 to become strained. Therefore, instead of switching the variation pattern selection state for each symbol variation, the specification may be such that the variation pattern selection state is switched for each plurality of symbol variations. For example, in the intermediate fluctuations from 2 to 19 times, the fluctuation pattern selection state may be switched every three symbol fluctuations. In this case, the first fluctuation pattern selection state for the first time, the second fluctuation pattern selection state for the second to fourth times, the third fluctuation pattern selection state for the fifth to seventh times, and the third fluctuation pattern selection state for the eighth to tenth times. the fourth variation pattern selection state for the 11th to 13th variations, the 6th variation pattern selection state for the 14th to 16th variations, and the 7th variation pattern for the 17th to 19th variations. A selection state and a final eighth variation pattern selection state are prepared. As a result, the number of types of variation pattern selection states can be reduced from 20 to 8. Further, since it is sufficient to prepare a jackpot variation pattern for each variation pattern selection state, the number of types of jackpot variation patterns can be reduced from 20 to 8. However, by consolidating the number of types of jackpot fluctuation patterns for each multiple symbol fluctuation and standardizing the fluctuation time, the jackpot will be determined depending on which fluctuation from the first time to a specific number of times the jackpot will be. There may be a difference in the timing of stopping.

FIG. 59 is a diagram showing an example of the execution process of the opening performance, and shows an example where there is a slight deviation in the timing of the stop of symbols that result in a jackpot depending on the number of fluctuations from the first time to the symbol fluctuation that results in a jackpot. . FIG. 59(a) shows a case where the final variation results in a jackpot, and is the same as the execution process in FIG. 58(b). FIGS. 59(b) to 59(d) show cases in which a jackpot occurs in the symbol variations in which the second variation pattern selection state for the second to fourth times is selected. Figure 59(b) shows the case where the jackpot occurs on the second symbol change, Figure 59(c) shows the case where the jackpot occurs on the third symbol change, and Figure 59(d) shows the case where the jackpot occurs on the fourth symbol change. This is a case where the jackpot occurs due to the symbol change. When a jackpot occurs in any of the second to fourth symbol variations, the common jackpot variation pattern is selected based on the common second variation pattern selection state, so the variation times are the same. In other words, what is the fluctuation time of the jackpot fluctuation pattern when it hits the jackpot the second time, the fluctuation time of the jackpot fluctuation pattern when it hits the jackpot the third time, and the fluctuation time of the jackpot fluctuation pattern when it hits the jackpot the fourth time. All are the same.

In the example of FIG. 59, the variation time is determined based on the execution process when the jackpot occurs on the third symbol variation, and the variation time is 127.5 seconds when the jackpot occurs on the third symbol variation in FIG. 58(d). It uses variable time. As a result, the timing at which the jackpot symbol stops when the third jackpot occurs in FIG. 59(c) is the same as the timing at which the jackpot symbol stops when the jackpot occurs at the final variation in FIG. 59(a). . On the other hand, the timing at which the jackpot symbol stops when the second jackpot occurs in FIG. 59(b) is a time t1 longer than the timing at which the jackpot symbol stops when the jackpot occurs in the final fluctuation in FIG. 59(a). It gets faster. The deviation time t1 of the symbol stop timing corresponds to the fluctuation time (2.5 seconds) of the intermediate fluctuation that becomes a deviation. This is because, in the case of FIG. 59(b), the number of intermediate fluctuations resulting in an error is one less than in the case of FIG. 59(c). Conversely, the timing at which the jackpot symbol stops when the fourth jackpot occurs in FIG. 59(d) is a time t2 longer than the timing at which the jackpot symbol stops when the jackpot occurs at the final variation in FIG. 59(a). only later. The deviation time t2 of the symbol stop timing corresponds to the fluctuation time (2.5 seconds) of the intermediate fluctuation that becomes the deviation. This is because in the case of FIG. 59(d), the number of intermediate fluctuations that result in an error is one more than in the case of FIG. 59(c).

The same applies to the case where the jackpot is reached from the 5th to the 19th time. For example, when a jackpot occurs at the 6th, 9th, 12th, 15th, and 18th symbol fluctuations that are multiples of 3, the timing at which the jackpot symbols stop is when the jackpot symbol stops at the final fluctuation. It's the same with timing. On the other hand, the timing at which the jackpot symbols stop when a jackpot occurs at the 5th, 8th, 11th, 14th, and 17th symbol fluctuations (subtracting 1 from a multiple of 3) is when the symbol that becomes a jackpot in the final fluctuation is A time t1 is earlier than the stop timing. Conversely, if the jackpot occurs at the 7th, 10th, 13th, 16th, and 19th symbol fluctuations, which are a multiple of 3 plus 1, the timing at which the jackpot symbol stops is determined by the symbol that will become a jackpot at the final fluctuation. The time t2 is later than the timing at which the stop occurs.

In the example in Figure 59, depending on which symbol change from the first time to the specific number of times results in a jackpot, there will be a shift in the stop timing of the symbols that result in a jackpot, but the shift time can be suppressed to ±2.5 seconds. Therefore, the stop timing of the symbols that result in a jackpot can be made substantially the same. As a result, a substantially common performance time can be secured for the opening performance, and the number of types of variation pattern selection states and jackpot variation patterns can be suppressed to prevent the storage capacity of the main ROM 292 from becoming overwhelmed. .

During the special period, a dedicated video is played, so either there is no performance that can be selected by a lottery that is executed at the start of the fluctuation, or the number of types of performances that can be selected by a lottery is relatively small. On the other hand, outside of the special period, instead of playing a special video, a fluctuating effect is performed according to the fluctuation pattern of the symbol, so there are effects that are selected by a lottery that is executed at the start of the fluctuation. The number of possible production types is relatively large.

During the special period, even if a jackpot occurs in any of the multiple symbol changes that can be executed from the start to the end of the special period, the execution timing of the jackpot effect based on the start of the special period will be the same or substantially are essentially the same. If they are substantially the same, the deviation in the execution timing of the jackpot performance may be the same as the shortest symbol variation time selectable in the special period. Here, the jackpot effect may be a notification effect executed immediately after the branch effect, a full rotation effect executed after the notification effect, or a jackpot effect in which the decorative pattern is a jackpot (for example, 777). The display may be temporarily stopped at .

The number of types of variation pattern selection states selected during the special period may be the same as the maximum number of symbol variations that can be executed during the special period, or may be less than the maximum number, and may be less than half of the maximum number. You can. The number of transitions of the variation pattern selection state during the special period may be less than the maximum number of symbol variations that can be executed during the special period, and may be less than half of the maximum number of times.

During the special period, a special performance (for example, reproduction of a dedicated moving image) can be performed regardless of the timing of the start and stop display of the symbols. During execution of the special performance, one or more preview performances can be performed, and it may be possible to perform multiple preview performances. A chance-up effect may be executed by executing the preview effect a plurality of times.

During the special period, the special performance may proceed regardless of the presence or absence of symbol variation. In other words, during the special period, even if the lottery value related to the symbol variation is not held and the symbol variation is stopped and the next symbol variation is not started, the special effect will continue to progress, for example, in the special video. Playback may continue. The preview performance that can be executed while the special performance is being executed may be performed at a timing that corresponds to the progress of the special performance. In other words, the preview performance may be executed regardless of the cumulative number of symbol changes or the presence or absence of symbol changes, and the lottery value related to the symbol change is not held, and the next symbol change starts while the symbol change is stopped. A preview performance may occur even if the event is not performed. If the special effect ends before the end of the final variation in the special period, the image displayed at the end timing of the special effect may be continuously displayed until the end of the final variation.

During the special period, if there is no symbol change, the progress of the special performance may be temporarily stopped. During the special period, if the lottery value related to the symbol variation is not held and the symbol variation stops and the next symbol variation does not start, the progress of the special effect will be temporarily stopped, for example, the playback of the special video will be paused. You can. The special performance may have a plurality of pause possible timings. If there is no symbol change at any of the multiple pause possible timings, the special effect will continue to progress until any of the pause possible timings, and when any of the pause possible timings is reached, the special effect will start. You may pause the progress. While the special performance is paused, a warning display to the effect that a game operation should be performed may be displayed. For example, a right hit warning display may be displayed superimposed on the pause screen of the dedicated video. The warning display may start at approximately the same timing as when the dedicated video is paused, or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the dedicated video was paused (for example, if the symbol fluctuation does not start even after the dedicated video is paused). (after 5 seconds have elapsed). If the symbol change starts while the special effect is paused, the right hit warning display will be hidden, the special effect will be paused, and the progress of the special effect may be resumed from any pause timing. . The preview performance that can be executed during the execution of the special performance may be performed at a timing that corresponds to the progress of the special performance, or may be performed at a timing that corresponds to the cumulative number of symbol changes.

As a modification of this aspect, when a jackpot occurs in the first variation of the special period, a jackpot performance different from the special performance may be executed. If a jackpot occurs in the first variation of the special period and a jackpot effect that is different from the special effect is executed, the stop timing of the symbol that becomes a jackpot is different from the stop timing of the symbol that becomes a jackpot in the final variation of the special period. You can. For example, if the number of symbol changes executed during the special period is from M times (M is 2 or more and less than N) to N times, the symbol that will become a jackpot may be stopped and displayed at the end of the special period. On the other hand, if the number of symbol variations performed during the special period is less than M times, the special performance may not be performed and the symbols that will result in a jackpot may be stopped and displayed before the end of the special period. In addition, if this modification is not used, if the number of symbol changes executed during the special period is from M times (M is 1 or more and less than N) to N times, the symbol that will become a jackpot will stop at the end of the special period. May be displayed.

(Aspect 2-6: Special color production)
As a pattern variation effect in which a decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner, there are a first effect in which a normal color effect is displayed on the effect display device 60, and a second effect in which a special color effect different from the normal color is displayed on the effect display device 60. is feasible. The second performance has the same performance process as the first performance, but differs from the first performance only in the display color of the performance. In the second effect, for example, the display color of the entire screen of the effect display device 60 becomes a special color different from the normal color. For example, in the first effect, a normal color display is performed, and in the second effect, a monochrome display or a negative/positive inverted display is performed. The second effect is executed by, for example, changing the display color of the display image for the first effect using the display control circuit 326. According to this aspect, by executing the second effect in which the display color of the entire screen is changed to a special color, an impactful effect can be executed. In addition, since the image for the second effect can be displayed simply by changing the display color of the image for the first effect through image processing, there is no need to prepare a separate image for the second effect, which would lead to an excessive increase in development man-hours. can be suppressed.

FIG. 60 is a diagram illustrating an example of the execution process of a normal color variation effect. FIG. 60(a) shows an example of the screen when the fluctuation is stopped, in which a plurality of symbol rows of simple symbols 630 are stopped and displayed at the bottom right of the screen at "112" in a discontinuous manner, and a plurality of decorative symbols 632 are displayed in the center of the screen. The symbol row is stopped and displayed at "112", which is in a disassembled manner. At the top right of the screen, a right-handed game image 634 is displayed, indicating that the player is in a gaming state in which right-handed batting is required, and at the bottom left of the screen, a staying zone image 636 of "RUSH-zone" indicating that the player is staying in the RUSH zone is displayed. Displayed.

Display colors for the simple pattern 630 and the decorative pattern 632 are determined according to the pattern type (number). For example, the symbol "1" is pink, the symbol "2" is light blue, the symbol "3" is red, the symbol "4" is purple, the symbol "5" is green, the symbol "6" is blue, and the symbol "7" is blue. It is golden. The correspondence between the number of the symbol and the display color is common to the simple symbol 630 and the decorative symbol 632. By standardizing the display color of the simple pattern 630 and the decorative pattern 632 according to the pattern type, the simple pattern 630 and the decorative pattern 632 can be displayed in correspondence, and the pattern type of the simple pattern 630 and the decorative pattern 632 can be This can be shown more easily to the player. As a modification, the simple pattern 630 may be unified into one color instead of using a plurality of colors in order to improve visibility; for example, all of the patterns "1" to "7" may be white.

FIG. 60(b) shows the state immediately after the start of the next symbol variation. The decorative pattern 632 at the center of the screen starts to be displayed in a variable manner starting from "112", which is the stop mode immediately before the start of variation. On the other hand, the simple symbol 630 at the bottom right of the screen starts to be displayed in a variable manner starting from the combination of symbol rows "123" instead of starting from "112", which is the stop mode immediately before the variation starts. In other words, the simple symbol 630 starts to be displayed in a variable manner starting from a fixed combination of symbol rows, regardless of the stopping mode immediately before the start of variation. A right-handed image 634 is continuously displayed at the top right of the screen, and a stay zone image 636 is continuously displayed at the bottom left of the screen.

Figure 60(c) is a preview performance that starts with the start of the fluctuation, and enters a "street battle performance" that suggests that you will win the jackpot (or develop into a super reach) by defeating all enemy characters. Show the screen. In the center of the screen, instead of the decorative pattern 632, a preview image 638 of "Street Battle Enters!!" is displayed. FIG. 60(d) shows a screen example of a street battle performance, and a performance image 640 showing a performance process in which the main character defeats a large number of enemy characters is displayed in the center of the screen. A simple pattern 630 is displayed in a changing manner at the bottom right of the screen. A right-handed image 634 is continuously displayed at the top right of the screen, and a stay zone image 636 is continuously displayed at the bottom left of the screen.

FIG. 61 is a diagram illustrating an example of the execution process of a special color variation effect. The presentation process in FIG. 61 is similar to the presentation process in FIG. 60, but the display color of the presentation is different from the middle. FIG. 61(a) is an example of a normal color screen before the special color variation effect is started, and is the same as FIG. 60(a). FIG. 61(b) shows an example of the screen at the start of the special color variation effect. In the example of FIG. 61(b), the display color of the entire screen is changed from color to grayscale. For example, the background display of the screen becomes black, the decorative pattern 642 at the center of the screen changes from color to monochrome, and the stay zone image 646 of "RUSH-zone" at the bottom left of the screen also changes from color to monochrome. That is, the display color of the decorative pattern 642 in the second performance is different from the display color of the decorative pattern 632 in the first performance. On the other hand, the display colors of the simple pattern 630 and the right-handed image 634 do not change, and the normal color display is maintained as in the normal color variation effect shown in FIG. 60(b). That is, the display color of the simple symbol 630 and the right-handed image 634 in the second performance is the same as the display color of the simple symbol 630 and the right-handed image 634 in the first performance.

FIG. 61(c) shows an example of a screen during execution of a special color variation effect, and the variation effect is executed while the display color of the entire screen remains gray scale. For example, the background display of the screen remains black, and the stay zone image 646 of "RUSH-zone" at the bottom left of the screen remains displayed in monochrome. Furthermore, the preview image 648 of "Street Battle Enters!!" in the center of the screen also changes from color display to monochrome display. Note that the display colors of the simple pattern 630 and the right-handed image 634 do not change, and the normal color display is maintained as in the normal color variation effect shown in FIG. 60(c).

FIG. 61(d) shows an example of a screen during execution of a special color variation effect, and the variation effect is executed while the display color of the entire screen remains gray scale. The background display of the screen remains black, and the stay zone image 646 of "RUSH-zone" at the bottom left of the screen remains displayed in monochrome. In addition, a performance image 640 showing a performance process in which a main character defeats a large number of enemy characters at the center of the screen is also displayed in monochrome. Note that the display colors of the simple pattern 630 and the right-handed image 634 do not change, and the normal color display is maintained as in the normal color variation effect shown in FIG. 60(c).

The second performance of the special color ends within one symbol variation period during which the second performance is executed. For example, when the second performance is started with the start of symbol variation, the second performance ends before the end of the symbol variation in which the second performance was started, and returns to the first performance of the normal color. Therefore, when the symbols start to fluctuate and when they are stopped, the first effect of the normal color is executed, and the second effect of the special color can be executed during the variable display of the symbols. By displaying the decorative pattern 632 in normal color when the decorative pattern 632 is stopped and displayed, the visibility of the type of the decorative pattern 632 can be improved.

At the start of the special color variation effect shown in FIG. 61(b), that is, when switching from the first effect to the second effect, a transition effect may be executed in which the display color of the entire screen is changed multiple times in a short period of time. . In the transition effect, for example, the display state of the normal color and the display state of the special color may be switched multiple times so that the entire screen blinks. In addition, the display state of the first special color, which is a grayscale image of a normal color image, and the display state of a second special color, which is a reversed luminance value of the grayscale image (so-called negative/positive inversion), may be switched multiple times. . In addition, in the transition effect, you may use a display state that increases the brightness of the entire screen to make it look whitish, a display state that decreases the brightness of the entire screen to make it darker, or display text such as "Color change!" Good too.

When the second effect is executed and the transition effect is executed, there may be a display object whose display color changes and a display object whose display color does not change. For example, displays related to performance, such as the display of decorative patterns 632, background display, display of stay zone image 636, pending display showing pending lottery values, and display of preview images showing characters that will appear in the process of production, are It may be a display object to be switched. On the other hand, display related to games such as the display of the simple symbol 630, the display of the right-handed image 634, and the error display may be display objects that are not subject to display color switching. By excluding the display color of important display items related to the game from being switched, it is possible to prevent the visibility of important display items related to the game from decreasing.

At the end of the special color variation effect, that is, when switching from the second effect to the first effect, the transition effect of switching the display color of the entire screen multiple times in a short period of time does not need to be performed. That is, when returning from the second performance to the first performance, the display color of the entire screen may be switched only once.

After performing a transition performance during execution of the first performance, a false transition performance may be performed in which the transition performance returns to the first performance without switching to the second performance. In other words, the transition to the second performance may be suggested by the execution of the transition performance, and there may be cases where the transition effect is switched to the second performance after execution of the transition performance, and cases where there is no switch to the second performance.

FIG. 62 is a diagram illustrating an example of the execution process of the accessory action effect. FIG. 62(a) shows an example of an execution example of an accessory action effect executed so that a movable accessory 660 appears in front of the effect display device 60 in a normal color variation effect (that is, the first effect). In the role-acting performance, a lamp or the like included in the movable role-playing object 660 lights up in a specific lighting mode (including lighting color and color change), and an auxiliary light is displayed on the performance display device 60 in conjunction with the movement of the movable role-playing object 660. An effect display 662 is displayed. When the movable accessory 660 operates in the first performance with the normal color, an auxiliary performance display 662 is displayed in a display color corresponding to the lighting mode of the movable accessory 660. For example, when the movable accessory 660 lights up in red, a red effect display 662 is made, and when the movable accessory 660 lights up in rainbow colors, a rainbow color effect display 662 is made. The display color of the auxiliary performance display 662 in the first performance may differ depending on the lighting color of the movable accessory 660.

FIG. 62(b) shows an example of execution of an accessory action effect executed so that a movable accessory 664 appears in front of the display screen of the special color variation effect (that is, the second effect). Also in the second performance, an auxiliary performance display 666 accompanying the movement of the movable accessory 664 is displayed. The lighting mode of the movable accessory 664 when the accessory action performance is performed in the second performance with the special color is the same as the lighting mode of the movable accessory 664 when the accessory action performance is performed in the first performance with the normal color. The lighting mode may be the same as that of 660. On the other hand, the display mode of the auxiliary performance display 666 that accompanies the movement of the movable accessory 664 in the second performance is different from the display format of the auxiliary performance display 662 that accompanies the movement of the movable accessory 660 in the first performance. You can. For example, even if the lighting color of the movable accessory 664 is red or rainbow color, the display color of the auxiliary performance display 666 may be grayscale or monochrome. The display color of the auxiliary performance display 666 in the second performance may be the same regardless of the lighting color of the movable accessory 664.

(Aspect 2-7: Suggestion production with selectable execution mode)
FIG. 63 is a diagram showing an example of a production process in which the execution mode of the suggestion production can be selected. After the start of symbol variation, a specific performance (also referred to as an execution mode selection performance) in which options are displayed for the player to select an execution mode can be executed. When the first mode or the second mode is selected in the execution mode selection mode, a suggestion mode is executed that suggests the degree of expectation of a jackpot, and after the suggestion mode is executed, a notification mode is executed that confirms the jackpot, or The symbols that are out of place are stopped and displayed. In the execution mode selection performance, by operating the performance button 109 or the cross key 110, the player can select whether the execution mode of the suggestion performance is the first mode or the second mode.

In the suggestive performance, for example, a cut-in display is made over the entire screen during a super reach performance such as the second specific performance, and the cut-in display is changed (developed) in stages to suggest the degree of expectation of a jackpot. When the first mode is selected, it is possible to perform a suggestion effect that leaves the cut-in display as it is in the first stage (silver color) or a suggestion effect that changes the cut-in display from the first stage (silver color) to the final stage (rainbow color). be. That is, when the first mode is selected, there are only two types of cut-in display at the end of the suggestive effect: the first stage and the final stage. On the other hand, when the second mode is selected, the cut-in display remains at the first stage (silver), or from the first stage (silver) to the second stage (purple), third stage (red), and fourth stage. It is possible to perform a suggestive effect that sequentially changes from the stage (giraffe pattern) to the final stage (rainbow color). Therefore, when the second mode is selected, there are five types of cut-in display at the end of the suggestive effect: the first stage, the second stage, the third stage, the fourth stage, and the final stage. In addition, in order to be able to see which execution mode was selected even after the selection, the display content included in the cut-in display (for example, the type of character appearing and the content of the dialogue) may be changed depending on the selected execution mode. good. For example, in the cut-in display when the first mode is selected, the first character appears or the content of the first line is displayed, and in the cut-in display when the second mode is selected, the second A character may appear or the content of the second line may be displayed.

If the cut-in display at the end of the suggestion effect is in the final stage (rainbow color), a jackpot is confirmed. Therefore, the final stage (rainbow colored) cut-in display in the suggestive performance is a definite performance in which the jackpot is confirmed. On the other hand, if the cut-in display at the end of the suggestion performance is at a stage other than the final stage, the jackpot is not determined because it may or may not be a jackpot. Therefore, a suggestive performance that does not show a cut-in display at the final stage (rainbow color) and ends its change (development) at any of the first to fourth stages is an unconfirmed performance in which the jackpot is not determined. .

When the first mode is selected, either one type of confirmed performance or one type of non-confirmed performance is executed. When the second mode is selected, either one type of confirmed performance or four types of non-confirmed performance is executed. Therefore, the number of types of non-determined effects that can be executed when the second mode is selected is greater than the number of types of non-confirmed effects that can be executed when the first mode is selected. When the second mode is selected and a non-confirmed performance is executed, the probability of a jackpot subsequently differs depending on which of the four types of non-confirmed performance is executed. Specifically, as the number of stages of change in the cut-in display in the suggestion effect increases, the probability of hitting the jackpot increases. The probability of hitting the jackpot increases in the order of <3rd stage <4th stage.

If a jackpot occurs after selecting the first mode, for example, a non-confirmed performance will be executed with a probability of 20%, and a confirmed performance will be executed with a probability of 80%. On the other hand, if a jackpot occurs after selecting the second mode, for example, a non-confirmed performance will be executed with a probability of 75%, and a confirmed performance will be executed with a probability of 25%. If you hit the jackpot after selecting the second mode, for example, there is a 5% probability that it will end in the first stage, a 10% probability that it will progress to the second stage (purple), and a 25% probability that it will reach the third stage (purple). There is a 35% chance that it will develop to stage 4 (giraffe pattern), and a 25% chance that it will develop to stage 5 (rainbow color). Therefore, the probability (for example, 80%) that a confirmed performance will be executed after the selection of the first mode and a jackpot will be achieved is higher than the probability (for example, 25%) that a confirmed performance will be executed and a jackpot will be achieved after the selection of the second mode. In addition, the probability (for example, 20%) that the suggestion effect will end in the first stage after selecting the first mode and you will hit the jackpot is that after selecting the second mode, the suggestion effect will finish in the first stage and you will hit the jackpot. Higher than the probability (eg 5%).

No matter which of the first aspect and the second aspect is selected, a revival performance that appears to be a loss and then becomes a jackpot is not performed after the execution of the confirmed performance. Conversely, regardless of which of the first mode and the second mode is selected, after the execution of the non-confirmed effect, a revival effect may be executed that appears to be a loss and then turns into a jackpot.

The period during which the first mode or the second mode can be selected in the execution mode selection production (for example, 15 seconds) is longer than the execution period (for example, 5 seconds) of the subsequent suggestion production (confirmed production or non-confirmed production). It can be long. During the period in which the first mode or the second mode can be selected in the execution mode selection effect, one or more preview effects may be executable. One or more preview performances that are executed during the period when the execution mode can be selected in the execution mode selection production may indicate the expectation of a jackpot, and the confirmed performance is performed after selecting the first mode or the second mode. Alternatively, it may indicate the level of expectation as to which of the non-determined effects will be executed. For example, the larger the number of small characters displayed at the edge of the screen, the higher the expectation that a confirmed effect or a non-determined effect with high expectations will be executed after selecting the first mode or the second mode. good. By making the period during which the first aspect or the second aspect can be selected longer and making it possible to perform one or more preview effects within that period, the first aspect or the second aspect can be selected depending on the execution content of the preview effect. It is possible to give the player time to worry about which of the two modes to use, and it is possible to increase the interest of the execution mode selection performance. As a modified example, the period during which the first mode or the second mode can be selected in the execution mode selection performance is made shorter than the execution period of the suggestion performance (confirmed performance or non-confirmed performance) to be executed afterwards, and the player It may also be a performance that forces the person to make an immediate decision.

The execution time of the suggestion effect may vary depending on the number of stages to be developed, and the execution time may be longer as the number of stages to develop is greater. For example, if each stage from the first stage to the final stage is executed for one second, the execution time of the suggestion effect is one second if the first stage ends, and it progresses to the second stage and ends. It is 2 seconds when it develops to the third stage and ends, it is 3 seconds when it develops to the fourth stage and ends, and it is 5 seconds when it develops to the final stage and ends. Seconds. Note that the execution time of each stage may be made different; for example, the execution time of the first stage and the final stage may be made relatively long, and the execution time of intermediate stages 2 to 4 may be made relatively short. You can. For example, the first stage may be 2 seconds, each of the second to fourth stages may be 0.5 seconds, and the final stage may be 3 seconds.

When a confirmed effect is executed after selecting the first mode or the second mode, regardless of whether the first mode or the second mode is selected, the execution timing of the first stage and the execution timing of the final stage are different. It may be common. For example, when the final effect is executed after selecting the second mode, the cut-in display of each stage from the second to the fourth stage is executed superimposed on the background display, while the final effect is executed after selecting the first mode. When this is executed, the cut-in display may not be superimposed and the background display may be visible during the interval period from the end of the first stage to the start of the final stage.

As a modification of this mode, the confirmed effect may be executable when the first mode is selected, but the confirmed effect may not be executed when the second mode is selected. In other words, if you select the first mode, you can progress from the first stage to the final stage, whereas if you select the second mode, your development will end at any stage from the first to the fourth stage. , it may not be possible to develop to the final stage.

(Aspect 2-8: Increased number of high balls remaining)
If the jackpot does not occur within a specific number of times (20 times) after shifting to the latent mode, that is, if the jackpot does not occur during the execution of the opening performance, the game enters the RUSH zone. The RUSH zone can continue for at least 100 or 200 symbol fluctuation periods. In the RUSH zone, the remaining number of symbol fluctuations that allow the high ball entry state to continue is displayed on the screen, and the remaining number of symbol fluctuations that can be displayed on the screen is subtracted by 1 when the symbol stops being displayed or the fluctuation starts. If the number of times that the high ball entry state can be continued after entering the hidden mode is the first number (120 times), the number of times that the high ball entry state can be continued at the beginning of the RUSH zone is from the first number (120 times). This is the number of times (100 times) minus the specific number of times (20 times). If the number of times that the high ball entry state can be continued after the transition to latent mode is the second number (220 times), the number of times that the high ball entry state can be continued at the beginning of the RUSH zone is from the second number (220 times). This is the number of times (200 times) minus the specific number of times (20 times).

At the end of the opening performance or at the start of the RUSH zone, a notification performance is executed to notify the number of times the high ball entry state can be continued in the RUSH zone. When the number of times that the high ball entry state can be continued after shifting to the hidden mode is the first number (120 times), a notification effect of "100 revolutions in the RUSH zone!" is executed at the start of the RUSH zone. When the number of times that the high ball entry state can be continued after shifting to the hidden mode is the second number (220 times), it is possible to execute the notification effect "RUSH zone enters 200 revolutions!" at the start of the RUSH zone. Further, when the number of times that the high ball entry state can be continued after shifting to the hidden mode is the second number (220 times), a notification effect of "100 revolutions in the RUSH zone!" can be executed at the start of the RUSH zone. This notification performance can be said to be a false notification performance because it notifies a false remaining number of times of 100 times, which is smaller than the actual remaining number of times, even though the actual remaining number of times is 200 times.

If a false remaining number of times is reported at the start of the RUSH zone, it is possible to perform a number-increasing effect that increases the false remaining number of times in the middle of the RUSH zone. For example, even though the number of continuous high ball entry states at the start of the RUSH zone is 200, if a false announcement of "RUSH zone enters 100 rotations!" is executed at the start of the RUSH zone, if the RUSH It is possible to perform an effect of increasing the number of times a display such as "+100 rotations!!" is displayed in the middle of the zone. On the other hand, when the actual remaining number of times is reported at the start of the RUSH zone, the number of times increasing effect that increases the remaining number of times in the middle of the RUSH zone is not performed.

FIG. 64 is a diagram illustrating an example of the execution process of the number-of-times increase effect. Figure 64(a) shows the notification effect at the start of the RUSH zone, and even though the actual number of times the RUSH zone continues is 200, a fake notification effect of "RUSH zone enters 100 rotations!" is executed. An example screen is shown below. A simple symbol 600 is displayed at the bottom right of the screen, and a right-handed image 634 is displayed at the top right of the screen. FIG. 64(b) shows an example of the screen when the RUSH zone changes for the first time. A decorative pattern 602 is displayed in a fluctuating manner in the center of the screen, and a stay zone image 636 of "RUSH-zone" is displayed at the bottom left of the screen. At the top of the screen, a remaining number image 652 of "99 remaining" is displayed, which indicates the false remaining number of times until the number of continuations of the RUSH zone is reached. FIG. 64(c) shows an example of a screen for increasing the number of times. In the example of FIG. 64(c), the message "+100 rotations!!" is displayed at the timing when the remaining number of fake rotations reaches 34. FIG. 64(d) shows an example of a screen after execution of the number-of-times increase effect, in which the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times image 652 has been increased to "134 times remaining" due to the number-of-times increase effect.

When a false remaining number of times is notified at the start of the RUSH zone, a performance determination means 303 executes a performance lottery for determining whether or not to perform the frequency increasing performance at the start of symbol variation in the RUSH zone. If the number of symbol variations from the start of the RUSH zone is less than a predetermined number (for example, 50 times), the number increasing performance will not be executed even if the performance lottery is won. In other words, when the symbol changes less than a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times) from the start of the RUSH zone, execution of the number-of-times increasing effect is prohibited. On the other hand, when the number of symbol variations from the start of the RUSH zone is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (for example, 50 times), the number-of-numbers increase production is executed in the symbol variation that wins the production lottery. In other words, when the symbols change a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times) or more from the start of the RUSH zone, the number-of-times increasing effect can be executed. In addition, if the false remaining number of times is announced at the start of the RUSH zone, and the number of times increase effect is not executed by the end of the symbol change when the false remaining number becomes 1 (that is, the 99th time from the start of the RUSH zone) , At the start of the symbol change when the remaining number of fakes becomes 0 (that is, the 100th time from the start of the RUSH zone), the number increase effect is forcibly executed, and the remaining number displayed on the screen becomes "100 remaining". To increase. As a modified example, if the number of symbol variations from the start of the RUSH zone is less than a predetermined number (for example, 50 times), a production for determining whether to execute a frequency increasing production at the start of the symbol variation in the RUSH zone. The lottery may not be executed, but the performance lottery may be executed when the symbols change a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times) or more from the start of the RUSH zone.

In the opening performance before moving to the RUSH zone, instead of displaying the remaining number of times that the high ball entry state can continue in the latent mode, the remaining number of symbol fluctuations or pseudo continuous fluctuations until the opening performance ends is displayed. You can. Therefore, at the start of the opening performance, a false remaining number of times is not displayed, and the remaining number of times starting from the maximum number of symbol variations (20 times) that can be executed in the opening performance is subtracted and displayed. In addition, in the opening performance, the remaining number of times is not necessarily subtracted in response to symbol fluctuations, but may be subtracted in response to pseudo fluctuations in symbols. Further, in the opening performance, a preview performance that suggests whether the number of times the RUSH zone can be continued is the first number or the second number can be executed. For example, when a second preview effect is executed in which the text "Number of times UP!?" is displayed, rather than a first preview effect in which the words "Number of times UP?" are displayed during the opening effect. It may be possible to execute a text preview effect that has a higher possibility of being used the second time.

According to this aspect, when a false remaining number of times is notified at the start of the RUSH zone, execution of the number increasing effect is prohibited when the symbol changes less than a predetermined number of times from the start of the RUSH zone, thereby increasing the number of times increasing effect. By implementing this, players' expectations can be effectively raised. If the number of symbol changes from the start of the RUSH zone is less than the predetermined number, the remaining number of times displayed is large (for example, 50 or more), so there is little fear that you may not hit the jackpot by the end of the RUSH zone. . On the other hand, if the number of symbol changes from the start of the RUSH zone is more than a predetermined number, the remaining number of times displayed is small (for example, less than 50), so there is a sense of impatience that the jackpot may not be hit by the end of the RUSH zone. becomes larger. By making it possible to execute the number-increasing effect at a timing when people are anxious that the RUSH zone may end, it is possible to effectively increase expectations for a jackpot due to an increase in the remaining number of times.

When it is decided to perform a number-of-times increasing performance through a performance lottery, the number-of-times increasing performance may be executed with the fluctuation that caused the performance lottery, or the number of times-increasing performance may be performed with a fluctuation that corresponds to the pending lottery value. You can. In other words, the effect of increasing the number of times may be an effect based on pre-reading. When performing the number increasing performance by pre-reading, a prior suggestion performance that suggests in advance the execution of the number increasing performance may be performed during a symbol variation before the symbol variation in which the number increasing performance is executed.

(Aspect 2-9: Variable performance in extended mode)
In the extended mode, a special performance is executed in which a plurality of types of individual performances can be executed in a predetermined order. Each individual performance can be executed over multiple symbol changes. As individual performances, for example, there are a first individual performance in which an ally character appears and a second individual performance in which an enemy character appears, and by performing the first individual performance and second individual performance alternately, the ally character An effect is executed in which a battle between enemy characters progresses. In the individual performance, for example, a video is played in which an ally character or an enemy character appears and utters specific lines or performs a specific special move. Note that the individual performance is a performance that is started immediately after the start of the fluctuating display, and is not started just before the end of the fluctuating display.

FIG. 65 is a diagram showing an example of the process of executing the individual performance, and shows a process in which the individual performance is executed multiple times with a plurality of symbol changes. In the example of FIG. 65, a first individual performance A (1A) in which an ally character appears, a second individual performance A (2A) in which an enemy character appears, a first individual performance B (1B) in which an ally character appears, and an enemy character 10 shows a flow in which the second individual performance B (2B) in which . Each individual performance 1A, 2A, 1B, 2B can be executed over multiple symbol variations. Incidentally, the variation time of the symbol variation in which each of the individual performances 1A to 2B is executed is not necessarily uniform, and may vary depending on the selected variation pattern. If the variation time of the symbol variation that triggers the start of the individual production is long, the individual production may start and end within one symbol variation, as in the case of individual production 1B. The execution time of each individual performance may be uniform regardless of the type of individual performance, or may be different depending on the type of individual performance.

In the extended mode, a performance selection means 303 executes a performance lottery to determine whether or not to perform an individual performance, and when the performance lottery is won, the individual performance is executed with the start of symbol variation as an opportunity. When an individual performance is executed, the performance lottery is prohibited until the individual performance ends in order to prevent the individual performance from being interrupted and another individual performance to be started. For example, if an individual performance is started with the start of a symbol variation, and the individual performance continues to be executed at the start of the next symbol variation, the performance lottery is prohibited while the individual performance continues. After that, when the individual performance ends, the prohibition on the performance lottery is lifted and the performance lottery is permitted. Therefore, with the start of the individual performance, the performance lottery is prohibited, and with the end of the individual performance, the performance lottery is permitted.

At the time of starting the individual performance, the sub CPU 310 (performance determining means 303) transmits a command to the control CPU 320 (performance control device 313) to instruct the start of the individual performance. When the sub CPU 310 transmits the start command to the control CPU 320, the sub CPU 310 changes the flag indicating whether or not the performance lottery can be executed to a prohibited state. The start command is transmitted, for example, after the start of the symbol variation in which the individual performance is started. The start command includes information specifying the type of individual performance. When the control CPU 320 receives the start command from the sub CPU 310, the control CPU 320 controls the operation of the display control circuit 326 so that the reproduction of the moving image corresponding to the type of individual effect specified by the start command is started. When the reproduction of the video of the individual performance is completed, the control CPU 320 transmits a command to notify the sub CPU 310 of the end of the individual performance. The end command may include information specifying the type of individual performance that has ended. Upon receiving the end command from the control CPU 320, the sub CPU 310 changes the flag indicating whether or not the performance lottery can be executed to a permitted state.

Since the individual performance may be executed over a plurality of symbol variations, it may be started only in a situation where a plurality of symbol variations can be executed. For example, the individual performance may be started only when there is a hold on the lottery value and it is certain that a plurality of symbol changes will be executed in succession. The individual performance may be started only when the number of reservations is equal to or greater than a specific number. For example, when the individual performance is executed over three symbol variations, the performance lottery may be executed only when the number of pending lottery values is 3 or more or 4. In other words, if the number of pending items immediately after the variable display starts is 3 (if the variable display starts due to one item being consumed from a situation where the number of pending items is 4), execution of the individual effect can be started. Become. On the other hand, if the number of reservations is less than the specific number, even if the performance lottery is permitted, the performance lottery may be skipped without being executed.

The types of individual performances may include low expectation individual performances and high expectation individual performances. If the lottery values that are held at the start of the symbol variation at which the individual performance starts include lottery values with high expectations, such as lottery values that will result in a jackpot or lottery values that will cause reach fluctuations, the high expectation individual performance will be started. You can. On the other hand, if the lottery values that are suspended at the start of the symbol variation when the individual performance starts do not include lottery values with high expectations, such as lottery values that result in a jackpot or lottery values that result in reach fluctuations, the individual performance with a low expectation level is may be started. Also, if the symbol variation that starts the individual production (that is, the variation) is a symbol variation with high expectations such as a symbol variation that results in a jackpot or a symbol variation that results in a reach variation, the high expectation individual production is started. Good too. On the other hand, if the symbol variation that starts the individual production (that is, the variation in question) is not a symbol variation with high expectations, such as a symbol variation that will result in a jackpot or a symbol variation that will result in a reach variation, a low expectation individual production will be started. However, if the lottery values that are suspended during the symbol change include lottery values with high expectations such as the lottery value that will result in a jackpot or the lottery value that will change the reach (in other words, they are read in advance), the high Expectation level individual performance may be started.

The number of types of high expectation level individual performances may be smaller than the number of types of low expectation level individual performances. For example, as low expectation level individual performances, five types of first individual performances and five types of second individual performances are prepared, and as high expectation level individual performances, two types of first individual performances and two types of second individual performances are prepared. 2 individual performances will be provided. If a situation continues where no lottery value with high expectations is included at the start of an individual performance, 10 types of low expectations, the sum of the 1st individual performance with low expectations (for allies) and the 2nd individual performance (for enemies) with low expectations. Each time, the individual performances are performed in a predetermined order (for example, in accordance with the progress order of the story or the progress order of the battles), and the first individual performance and the second individual performance are performed alternately. On the other hand, if a high expectation lottery value is included at the start of the individual performance, a high expectation individual performance may be executed instead of the low expectation individual performance that should be executed next in a predetermined order. That is, the high expectation level individual performance may be executed by being inserted in the middle of the execution order of the low expectation level individual performance. If a situation in which a lottery value with a high expectation level is included at the start of an individual performance continues, two or more high expectation individual performances may be performed in succession. Even when the highly anticipated individual performance is performed, a rule may be followed in which the first individual performance (for allies) and the second individual performance (for enemies) are performed alternately. After the first individual performance with a low expectation level, a second individual performance with a low expectation level or a high expectation level can be performed, even if the first individual performance with a low expectation level or a high expectation level cannot be performed. good. Next to the second individual performance with a low expectation level, the first individual performance with a low expectation level or a high expectation level can be performed, and even if the second individual performance with a low expectation level or a high expectation level cannot be executed. good. After the first individual performance with a high expectation level, a second individual performance with a low expectation level or a high expectation level can be performed, and even if the first individual performance with a low expectation level or a high expectation level cannot be performed. good. After the second individual performance with a high expectation level, the first individual performance with a low expectation level or a high expectation level can be performed, and even if the second individual performance with a low expectation level or a high expectation level cannot be performed. good.

The individual performance may not be executed during execution of a specific prefetch performance (a pending change performance or a background change performance that transitions to a prefetch stage). Even if the flag indicating whether or not the performance lottery can be executed is in the permitted state, when a specific pre-reading performance is being executed, priority will be given to the execution of the specific pre-reading performance and the performance lottery will be skipped without executing the individual performance. (Alternatively, the performance lottery may be executed, but the individual performance may not be executed even if the performance lottery is won).

If the power is restored during the execution of an individual performance, the execution of the individual performance is stopped by the power failure recovery process, and the video for the individual performance is hidden, but since the individual performance has not ended normally, the control CPU 320 The command to end the individual performance is not sent to the sub CPU 310. In this case, the execution of the performance lottery will continue to be prohibited after the power is restored, and the individual performance will not be executed in the extended mode after the power is restored. Therefore, when the power is restored from a power cut, the flag indicating whether or not the performance lottery can be executed may be forcibly changed to a permitted state, taking as an opportunity the end of the symbol variation at the time of the power cut and return. In this case, the performance lottery will continue to be prohibited until the symbol variation at the time of power-off recovery is completed, and the performance lottery will be permitted at the start of the next symbol variation after power-off recovery, and individual performances will no longer be executed. It becomes possible.

During execution of the individual performance or after the end of the individual performance, an operation instruction performance for instructing an input operation to the performance button 109 or the like may be performed, and after the end of the operation instruction performance, an accessory operation performance may be performed. When the power-off recovery process is executed, the movable accessory 66 may perform a predetermined initialization operation after the power-off recovery. When the individual performance is performed during the initialization operation of the movable accessory 66, the operation instruction performance may be performed afterwards. That is, an operation means image imitating the input operation means may be displayed during the initialization operation of the movable accessory 66. When the operation means image is displayed during the initialization operation of the movable accessory 66, even if an input operation is performed on the input operation means, the accessory operation effect does not need to be executed; An auxiliary effect display 662 accompanying the action may be executed.

According to this aspect, even when performing an individual performance that does not fit within one symbol change, it is possible to control so that another individual performance triggered by the start of the symbol change is not executed before the end of the individual performance. Therefore, the consistency of the performance can be guaranteed. Further, by switching between the permission state and the prohibition state of the performance lottery based on the start command and end command of the individual performance, it is possible to prevent the control from becoming complicated.

(Aspect 2-10: Opening production pause processing)
As explained in Aspect 2-5 above, a special performance (opening performance) can be performed over a special period from the start of the hidden mode until at least a predetermined time has elapsed, and a special video is played during the opening performance. A video playback effect is executed. The video reproduction performance is continuously executed over a plurality of symbol variation periods, and is continuously executed without depending on the variation start timing and stop display timing in the plurality of symbol variation periods. In this mode, while the video playback effect is being executed, if the lottery value related to the symbol variation is not held and the symbol variation is stopped and the next symbol variation is not started, the progress of the video playback effect is immediately stopped. , display the video in the maintenance stop state. This prevents the reproduction of the dedicated video from being continued in a situation where no game is being played.

When the lottery value related to the symbol variation is on hold, the variable display of the symbol corresponding to the next symbol variation is started after a first time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since the symbol was stopped and displayed. On the other hand, if the lottery value related to the symbol change is on hold, the symbol change display corresponding to the next symbol change will not start after the first time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since the symbol stopped being displayed. , the symbol continues to be displayed in a stopped state. Therefore, if the symbol corresponding to the next symbol variation is not displayed in a variable manner after a second time (for example, 1 second) that is longer than the first time has elapsed since the symbol was stopped and displayed, the progress of the video playback effect is immediately stopped. Stop. On the other hand, when the symbol corresponding to the next symbol variation starts to be displayed in a variable manner after the first time has elapsed since the symbol is stopped and displayed, the progress of the video playback effect is continued.

While the video playback performance is being executed, it is possible to perform an audio performance that outputs audio from the speaker 108 and a lamp performance that lights up the decorative lamp 111 according to the progress of the video. While the video playback effect is stopped, the image of the video in a paused state at the time when the second time has elapsed since the symbol was stopped and displayed will continue to be displayed, and the audio effects and lamp effects will also be paused. . On the other hand, even when the video playback performance is stopped, a right-hitting image is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen, and a large right-hitting warning is displayed in the center of the screen. Further, even when the video playback effect is stopped, any lamp display (error display, game status display, symbol display, etc.) on the symbol etc. display unit 120 continues without being paused.

The video playback performance may have a plurality of performance branching points, and the playback content of the dedicated video may be different after each performance branching point. The timing of each performance branching point in the video playback performance is determined according to the playback time of the dedicated video. Therefore, if the stopped state of the symbol continues during the video playback performance and the video playback is paused, the elapsed time from the start of the video playback performance to each performance branch point is equal to the video pause time. Become slow. When a performance branching point is reached during the execution of a video playback performance, a feedback command is sent from the control CPU 320 to the sub CPU 310 to notify that the performance branching point has been reached. The sub CPU 310 determines the execution mode of the lamp performance and preview performance after each performance branch point based on the notification command of the performance branch point received from the control CPU 320. By determining the execution mode of the production based on feedback commands, even if the elapsed time from the start of the video playback production to each production branch point changes due to pausing of video playback, a dedicated video can be played at each production branch point. It becomes possible to match the content with the execution timing of lamp effects and preview effects.

According to this aspect, when the progress of the video playback effect is temporarily stopped, the playback display of the video and the execution of the lamp effect or preview effect that are linked to the playback content of the video are temporarily stopped, thereby synchronizing with the playback content of the video. You can perform lamp effects and preview effects. On the other hand, when the progress of the video playback performance is temporarily stopped, important displays related to the game can be continued by continuing the error display, right hit display, etc.

(Aspect 2-11: Determination process based on the gaming state stored at the beginning of the fluctuation start process)
In this embodiment, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 51, since the validity determination is executed after the fall determination is performed in the fluctuation start process, the game state stored at the beginning of the fluctuation start process and the game state at the time of the validity determination Conditions may vary. For example, if you win a fall judgment in the extended mode, the probability is high and the ball enters the state at the start of the fluctuation start process related to the symbol change that won the fall judgment, but the probability is low when the subsequent judgment is executed. And it is a low ball entry state. Since the extended mode is a right-handed game state, the second special symbol 52 will fluctuate, but if the firing of the game ball is stopped and the lottery value related to the second special symbol 52 is no longer held, The first special symbol 51 may change. If the first special symbol 51 fluctuates in the extension mode, and the fall determination is won in the process of starting the fluctuation of the first special symbol 51, and the result of the determination becomes a jackpot, the determination of the success or failure that becomes a jackpot will result in a jackpot. The game state at the time of execution is a low probability and low ball entry state. Then, even though you stay in extension mode, the first special symbol 51 becomes a jackpot with low probability and low ball entry state, so it is considered as a jackpot in normal mode, and you switch from extension mode to A time saving mode. It becomes possible to migrate. Although the probability of such a situation occurring is extremely low, it is undesirable because the disadvantage to the player when it occurs is large.

Therefore, in this aspect, when the first special symbol 51 becomes a jackpot due to a low probability and low ball entry state while staying in the extended mode, it is possible to shift to the hidden mode instead of the A time saving mode. The game state after the special game ends is determined based on the game state stored at the beginning of the fluctuation start process. Specifically, in the case of a jackpot, the gaming state after the special game is determined based on the gaming state stored in the process of S1300 in FIG. 51. Since fall determination is not performed in the normal mode, when a jackpot occurs in the normal mode, the gaming state at the start of the fluctuation start process is a low probability and low ball entry state. On the other hand, since the gaming state at the start of the fluctuation start process before executing fall determination in the extended mode is a high probability and high ball entry state, by using the gaming state at the start of the fluctuation start process as the standard, Whether or not you win the fall judgment after that, if you win the jackpot, you can move to the same destination (hidden mode). This makes it possible to appropriately transition the gaming state.

According to this aspect, during a right-handed game (that is, A time saving mode, B time saving mode, C time saving mode, latent mode, and extended mode), the first special symbol 51 instead of the second special symbol 52 is used for the 4R jackpot. In this case, by determining the gaming state after the special game ends based on the gaming state (high ball entering state) stored in the process of S1300 in FIG. 51, a low probability and high ball entering state is set 200 times. It is possible to shift to a latent mode in which a low probability and high ball entry state of 220 times is set, instead of the A time saving mode. This makes it possible to appropriately transition the gaming state. As described above, by determining the gaming state after the special game ends based on the gaming state (high ball entry state) stored in the process of S1300 in FIG. 51, the first special symbol 51 is set in the final variation of the extension mode. Even if the result is a 4R jackpot, it is possible to shift to a latent mode in which a low probability and high ball entry state is set 220 times. On the other hand, a situation where the first special symbol 51 becomes a 4R jackpot during a left-handed game occurs only in the normal mode and cannot occur in the special mode. In the normal mode, the game state stored in the process of S1300 in FIG. 51 is a low ball entry state, so if the first special symbol 51 becomes a 4R jackpot in the low ball entry state, it is designed to transition to A time saving mode. By doing so, it becomes possible to appropriately transition the gaming state.

Further, in this embodiment, when the C time saving symbol stops in the normal mode, the mode is shifted to the C time saving mode. In principle, when the first special symbol 51 is stopped and displayed as a C time saving symbol in a low probability and low ball entry state, the mode is shifted to the C time saving mode. At this time, if it is possible to shift to the C time saving mode based on the gaming state when the C time saving symbol stops, the first special symbol 51 changes in the extension mode, and in the first special symbol 51 fluctuation start process. When the fall determination is won and the first special symbol 51 is stopped and displayed as the C time-saving symbol, the conditions for entering the C time-saving mode are satisfied. If a jackpot does not occur in the final variation of the extended mode, the game flow is such that the game moves to the normal mode via the special mode, so it is not preferable to be able to enter the C time saving mode from the extended mode. Therefore, in this aspect, as shown in the process of S1340 in FIG. 52, it is determined whether or not to shift to the C time saving mode based on the gaming state at the start of the fluctuation start process stored in S1300. In this case, even if the C time-saving symbol stops in the final variation of the extension mode with low probability and low ball entry state, the gaming state at the start of the variation start process of the final variation in which the C time-saving symbol stops has a high probability. In addition, since the ball is in a high ball input state, the conditions for shifting to the C time saving mode are not satisfied. This makes it possible to appropriately transition the gaming state.

(Aspect 2-12: Variation pattern selection state transition depending on whether there is a fall)
FIG. 66 is a diagram illustrating an example of the transition process of the variation pattern selection state when the mode is shifted to the latent mode. FIG. 66 shows the transition process of the losing variation pattern selection state that is selected when the result of the judgment is other than a jackpot (loss), and the winning variation pattern selection state that is selected when it is a jackpot is omitted. However, the transition process is the same as the transition process of the outlier variation pattern selection state, and includes a special period from the first variation to a specific number of times (for example, 20 times), and a special period from the first time of the RUSH zone to less than the final number of times of the RUSH zone (for example, The winning variation pattern selection state changes in the following order: 99 times or less or 199 times or less), the final number of RUSH zones (for example, 100 or 200 times), extension mode, and special mode. Note that the fluctuation pattern selection state for A time saving mode, the fluctuation pattern selection state for B time saving mode, and the fluctuation pattern selection state for C time saving mode are different fluctuation pattern selection states, and only one type is prepared for each. The type of variation pattern selection state is different from any variation pattern selection state for latent mode. Moreover, the variation pattern selection state does not change within each of the time saving modes A to C.

Broadly speaking, selection states A, B, C1, and C2 are prepared as the deviation variation pattern selection states for the latent mode. In the latent mode, the variation pattern selection state A is selected in a special period from the first variation to a specific number of times (for example, 20 times). The variation pattern selection state A is a selection state for executing the opening performance, and includes, for example, the first to eighth variation pattern selection states described in aspect 2-5. A specific number of symbol fluctuations (for example, 20 times) are completed from the first time in the latent mode, and at the next (for example, 21st) symbol fluctuation, fluctuation pattern selection state B is selected, and the fluctuation pattern selection state transitions from A to B. do. Fluctuation pattern selection state B is a selection state that is selected at a time other than the final fluctuation of the RUSH zone, and is selected at a symbol fluctuation from the first time of the RUSH zone to less than the final number of times of the RUSH zone (for example, 99 times or less or 199 times or less). be done. These variable pattern selection states A and B are always selected within the final number of times, regardless of whether it is a high probability state or a low probability state (whether or not the fall judgment has been won). The variation pattern selection state C1 or C2 is selected by the symbol variation that reaches the final number of times of the RUSH zone (for example, 100 or 200 times), and the variation pattern selection state changes from B to C1 or C2. Therefore, in the final variation of the latent mode, two types of deviation variation pattern selection states C1 or C2 can be selected. The fluctuation pattern selection state C1 is a selection state selected when the fall judgment is not won between the first fluctuation of the latent mode and the final fluctuation, and a high probability state is maintained in the final fluctuation of the latent mode. Selected in case. Fluctuation pattern selection state C2 is a selection state that is selected when the fall judgment is won in any of the stages from the first fluctuation to the final fluctuation of the latent mode, and is selected when the final fluctuation of the latent mode results in a low probability state. be done.

When the variation pattern selection state C1 is selected in the final variation of the latent mode, the mode is shifted to the extension mode from the next symbol variation. Two types of variation pattern selection states D1 and D2 are prepared as the deviation variation pattern selection states for the extension mode. The variation pattern selection state D1 is selected when a high probability state is maintained in the extension mode, that is, when the extension mode continues even in the next symbol variation. The variation pattern selection state D2 is selected when the extension mode falls to a low probability state, that is, when the extension mode is not continued in the next symbol variation and is shifted to the special mode. If the fall determination is not successful in the first variation in the extension mode, the variation pattern selection state D1 is selected in the first variation in the extension mode. When the variation pattern selection state D1 is selected, the variation pattern selection state D1 is selected until the fall judgment is won, and the variation pattern selection state D2 is selected in the symbol variation that wins the fall judgment, and the variation pattern selection state D2 is selected. transitions from D1 to D2. Note that if the fall determination is won in the first variation in the extension mode, the variation pattern selection state D2 is selected in the first variation, so the variation pattern selection state D1 is not selected in the extension mode. The symbol variation in which the variation pattern selection state D2 is selected in the extension mode becomes the final variation in the extension mode, and the next symbol variation is shifted to the special mode.

One type of selection state E is selected as the deviation variation pattern selection state for the special mode. The variation pattern selection state E is selected when the game state at the start of variation is a low probability and low ball entry state and the second special symbol 52 is varied. When all the reservations of the second special symbols 52 are exhausted, the mode is shifted to the normal mode. In the normal mode, a variation pattern selection state for normal mode is selected.

The fluctuation pattern selection state (C1 or C2) when determining a fluctuation pattern related to symbol fluctuation in which the number of symbol fluctuations after transitioning to a high probability and high ball entry state is a predetermined number (for example, 120 or 220 times) is as follows: Variation pattern selection state (A or B ), and also different from the variation pattern selection state (D1 or D2) when a variation pattern related to symbol variation exceeding a predetermined number of times (120 or 220 times) is determined. If the number of symbol variations after transitioning to the high probability and high ball entry state is less than a predetermined number (for example, 119 or less or 219 or less), the variation pattern selection state (A or B) determined after winning the fall judgment is the same as the variation pattern selection criterion (A or B) determined after not winning the fall judgment. If the number of symbol changes after transitioning to a high probability and high ball entry state is a predetermined number of times (for example, 120 or 220 times) or more, and the result of the win/fail judgment is a loss, after winning the fall judgment. The variable pattern selection criterion (D2) that is determined is different from the variable pattern selection criterion (D1) that is determined after the fall determination is not won.

If the final change in latent mode or the final change in extended mode (the change in which the fall judgment is won in the extended mode) results in a loss, there will be a production that notifies whether the high ball entry state can continue or not, or whether or not the fall judgment has been won. It is possible to perform the performance to inform. For example, when the losing variation pattern selection state C1, C2, or D2 is selected, a specific variation pattern that can perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the high ball entry state can be continued or whether or not the fall judgment has been won can be selected. When the deviation variation pattern selection state C1, C2, or D2 is selected, only a specific variation pattern that can perform the notification effect may be selectable. When the deviation variation pattern selection state C1 is selected, the right-hitting image 634 remains displayed, and the reach effect is not performed, and a continuous agitation effect is executed to incite whether or not the high ball entry state can be continued, and then the high ball entry state is A high ball entry state continuation effect that is confirmed to continue is executed. When the deviation variation pattern selection state C2 is selected, the right-hitting image 634 remains displayed, the reach effect is not performed, and a continuous agitation effect is executed to incite whether or not the high ball entry state can be continued, and the high ball entry state is changed. A high-hitting ball state ending performance that confirms that it will not continue, and a result performance that notifies the total number of prize balls acquired during the consecutive games until the high-balling state ends. When the miss variation pattern selection state D2 is selected, the right-handed hit image 634 is erased (hidden) at the start of the variation, the battle effect is executed and the result is a miss, and then the high ball entry state end effect and the result effect are performed. executed. Note that when the variable pattern selection state D1 is selected, the high ball entry state end effect is not executed.

If a jackpot occurs in the final variation of the latent mode or any symbol variation in the extension mode (variation in which the fall judgment is won in the extension mode or variation in which the fall judgment is not won in the extension mode), the winning variation pattern selection state is selected. be done. When the winning variation pattern selection state is selected in the final variation of the latent mode or any symbol variation in the extension mode, any of a plurality of winning variation patterns may be selectable based on the winning variation pattern selection state. Multiple winning variation patterns include a normal winning pattern that does not involve a battle performance, a reach normal winning pattern that becomes a jackpot after the battle performance, a resurrection winning pattern that pretends to be a loss after the battle performance and then becomes a jackpot, and a high hit pattern after the battle performance. A result revival winning pattern or the like may be prepared in which the player is revived and wins a jackpot after performing the state end effect and the result effect. When a jackpot is achieved with any symbol variation in the extension mode (variation in which the fall judgment is won in the extension mode or variation in which the fall judgment is not won in the extension mode), the right hit image 634 is erased at the start of the variation. The number of types of winning variation patterns that can be selected when a jackpot occurs in the final variation in the latent mode or any symbol variation in the extended mode may be, for example, 2 or more, 3 or more, or 4 or more. . The number of types of variation patterns that can be selected (for example, 4 types) when a jackpot is achieved by a symbol variation in which the number of symbol variations after transitioning to a high probability and high ball entry state is a predetermined number (for example, 120 or 220 times) or more. is the number of types of variation patterns that can be selected (for example, 1 types) may be more than 100%. In the case of a jackpot in the final variation of the latent mode, instead of performing the continuous inciting effect while the right hit image 634 is displayed, and then executing the high ball entry state continuation effect or the high ball entry state end effect, A jackpot effect may be executed in which 777 is suddenly displayed. If a jackpot occurs with any symbol variation in the extended mode (a variation that does not win the fall judgment in the extended mode), and if the variation pattern selection state D1 is selected, the battle effect is performed without erasing the right-hitting image 634. In the case of a jackpot, only the reach normal winning pattern that becomes a jackpot after the battle performance may be executed. When the variable pattern selection state D1 is selected, a battle effect is executed and the ball loses, but a continuous loss pattern may be executed to notify that the high ball entry state continues.

Two types of losing variation pattern selection states, which are selected when the fall determination is not won in the extension mode, may be prepared: a medium-speed time-saving variation pattern selection state D1a and a high-speed time-saving variation pattern selection state D1b. For example, if the fall judgment is not won in the first variation of the extension mode, the medium speed time saving variation pattern selection state D1a is selected, and if the predetermined condition is satisfied without winning the fall judgment after that, for example, in the extension mode When the number of symbol variations from the first time is a predetermined number or more (for example, 100 or more), the high-speed time saving variation pattern selection state D1b is selected. When the high-speed time-saving variation pattern selection state D1b is selected, the symbol variation efficiency is increased compared to the case where the medium-speed time-saving variation pattern selection state D1a is selected. For example, when the medium-speed time-saving variation pattern selection state D1a is selected, the medium-speed time-saving variation pattern is selected, and when the high-speed time-saving variation pattern selection state D1b is selected, the A high-speed time-saving variation pattern with a short variation time is selected. If the fall judgment is won without satisfying the predetermined conditions after selecting the medium-speed time-saving variation pattern selection state D1a, the system changes to the special mode variation pattern selection state E without transitioning to the high-speed time-saving variation pattern selection state D1b. You may transition. If a predetermined condition is satisfied after selecting the medium-speed time-saving variation pattern selection state D1a, the variation after the transition from the medium-speed time-saving variation pattern selection state D1a to the high-speed time-saving variation pattern selection state D1b (that is, the transition If the fall determination is successful in the following variations), the state may transition to the variation pattern selection state E for the special mode.

If the C time-saving symbol stops at a symbol fluctuation in which the number of symbol fluctuations after transitioning to a high probability and high ball entry state is a predetermined number of times (for example, 120 or 220 times) or more, the missed symbols other than the C time-saving symbol will The same variation pattern as in the case of stopping may be selectable, and the same effect may be executable. Also, if the C time-saving symbol stops due to a symbol fluctuation in which the number of symbol fluctuations after transitioning to a high probability and high ball entry state is less than a predetermined number (for example, 120 or 220 times), other than the C time-saving symbol The same variation pattern as in the case where the missed symbol stops may be selectable, and the same effect may be executable. Furthermore, if the C time-saving symbol stops after winning the fall judgment with a symbol fluctuation in which the number of symbol fluctuations after transitioning to a high probability and high ball entry state is a predetermined number of times (for example, 120 or 220 times) or more, The game state when the fluctuation is displayed and when the fluctuation is stopped is low probability and low ball entry state, but the same fluctuation pattern can be selected and the same effect can be executed when the losing symbols other than the C time-saving symbol stop. There may be.

According to this aspect, even if the game flow branches in a complicated manner depending on the timing of winning the fall judgment after transitioning to the high probability and high ball entry state, the limited number of variable pattern selection states can be used. Since the gaming state can be changed appropriately, control can be prevented from becoming complicated.

(Aspect 2-13: Symbol stop processing)
In this embodiment, three types of easy-to-enter states are prepared: A short time, B short time, and C short time. A short time is an easy-to-enter state that can be transitioned to when a special game is executed, and short time B and short time C are easy-to-enter states that can be transitioned to when the result of the judgment is other than a jackpot. . B time saving is a state where it is easy to enter the ball when the cumulative number of symbol changes reaches a specified ceiling number without a jackpot occurring in a low probability state, and C time saving is a state in which it is easy to enter the ball when the cumulative number of symbol changes reaches a specified ceiling number without a jackpot occurring in a low probability state. It is an easy-to-enter state that is triggered when the judgment result is other than a jackpot and the win/fail lottery value or symbol lottery value falls within a specific range.For example, it is possible to shift to C time saver when the C time saver symbol stops. It is.

As described above with reference to FIG. 52, the processing at the time of symbol stop related to the easy entry state includes the time saving number subtraction process, the C time saving entry process, and the B time saving number subtraction process. In the example of FIG. 52, when the symbol is stopped, the processing is executed in the order of time saving number subtraction process → C time saving entry process → B time saving number subtraction process. By executing the processes in this order, if the C time saving entry condition and the B time saving entry condition are met at the same time, by executing the B time saving entry process after the C time saving entry process, the C time saving entry process can be changed to the B time saving entry process. It can be overwritten by In other words, when the C time saving entry condition and the B time saving entry condition are satisfied at the same time, B time saving is given priority over C time saving, and the transition is made to B time saving. In this example, B time saving, which can be continued up to 200 times, is more advantageous to the player than C time saving, which can be continued up to 100 times, so priority is given to C time saving, which puts the player at a disadvantage. This can be prevented.

In a modified example, the degree of advantage for the player in time saving C may be greater than the degree of advantage for the player in time saving B. For example, the number of continuations of C time saver may be set to 200 times, the number of continuations of B time saver is set to 100 times, and the number of continuations of C time saver may be greater than the number of continuations of B time saver. In this case, the order of the C time saving entry process and the B time saving number subtraction process when the symbol is stopped may be reversed, and the processes may be executed in the order of time saving number subtraction process → B time saving number subtraction process → C time saving entry process. That is, after execution of the process related to time saving (B time saving) which has a relatively low advantage to the player, the process related to time saving (C time saving) which has a relatively high advantage to the player may be executed. Thereby, it is possible to prioritize C time saving over B time saving, and it is possible to prevent a disadvantageous situation for the player by giving priority to B time saving over C time saving.

The remaining number of high-input pitches subtracted in the time-saving number subtraction process and the remaining number of reaching ceilings subtracted in the B time-saving number subtraction process are initialized after the RAM clearing process. After the RAM clearing process, the ball is forced into a low-probability, low-input state, the remaining number of high-input balls becomes 0, and the remaining number of times the ceiling is reached becomes a predetermined initial value (for example, 900). On the other hand, the remaining number of high pitches that are subtracted in the time-saving number subtraction process and the remaining number of ceiling hits that are subtracted in the B-time saving number subtraction process are not initialized after the power-off recovery process, and are the same as the number before the power-off. maintain. The lamp display of the symbol etc. display unit 120 in a state where the game has not started after the RAM clear processing is in a special mode. For example, the display mode of the first special symbol display section 41 and the second special symbol display section 42 after the RAM clearing process becomes a special mode different from that when the symbol is stopped and when the symbol changes. And all the lamps included in the second special symbol display section 42 will be in a lit state. This special mode is common to the display mode immediately after recovery when the power-off recovery process is performed in a low probability and low ball entry state. In other words, by simply checking that all the lamps included in the first special symbol display section 41 and the second special symbol display section 42 are lit, it is possible to determine whether it has occurred after the RAM clear process or after the power-off recovery process. Can not. Note that the display mode immediately after the power-off recovery process is performed is the same regardless of the display mode of the symbol display unit 120 before the power-off.

(Aspect 2-14: Test signal and outer end signal regarding easy ball entry state)
The states related to ease of ball entry into the second starting port 12 include a normal ball entry state, a first ball entry easy state, and a second ball entry ready state. If a jackpot occurs in the normal ball entry state, it is possible to shift to the first ball entry easy state (for example, A time saving). When the normal ball entry state is other than a jackpot, it is possible to shift to the second ball entry easy state (for example, B time saving or C time saving).

In the first easy-to-enter state, the probability of winning the normal symbol lottery is high (for example, 100%), and the normal electric accessory 90 (so-called electric chew, also referred to as the ball entrance fluctuating mechanism) when the regular symbol lottery is won. The opening time is short (for example, 1.5 seconds). On the other hand, in the second ball entry easy state, the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is low (for example, 25%), and the opening time of the ordinary electric accessory 90 when the regular symbol lottery is won is long (for example, 5.5%). seconds). As a result, when the ball continues to be hit right in the ball entry easy state, the performance of the second starting port 12 regarding ball entry ease is approximately the same in the first ball entry easy state and the second ball entry easy state.

The pachinko game machine 100 has a test signal output terminal (not shown) for outputting a test signal and an external information output terminal 160 for outputting an outer end signal. The test signal output terminal outputs the signal created in the test signal output process (S348 in FIG. 19) to the test device. The test device is a device external to the gaming machine that sends signals corresponding to the gaming machine's status and situation to determine whether the current gaming status of the gaming machine and the operating status of special electric accessories and ordinary electric accessories are normal. This is a device for checking whether or not it is being output. The external information output terminal 160 transmits the signal created in the external information output process (S354 in FIG. 19) to, for example, a data display that is an external device connected to the gaming machine (a data display that the hall management side connects to the gaming machine). output to the device).

The test signal output terminals include a first terminal to which a first test signal indicating that the ball is in the easy entry state, and a second terminal to which a second test signal indicating that the ball is in the easy entry state. It has at least two terminals. The external information output terminal includes a third terminal that outputs a time-saving signal indicating that the first ball entry easy state, the second ball entry easy state, or a special game is in progress, and a third terminal that indicates the start of the second ball entry easy state. It has at least a fourth terminal to which the second time-saving start signal is output, and a fifth terminal to which the second time-saving medium signal indicating the second ball entry easy state is output. The test signal output terminal does not need to have a terminal that outputs a test signal indicating that the time is being shortened. Basically, the A time-saving mode, the latent mode, and the extension mode correspond to the first ball entry easy state, and the B time saving mode and the C time saving mode correspond to the second ball entry easy state.

FIG. 67 is a diagram showing an example of the output of the test signal and the outer end signal regarding the easy ball entry state. In FIG. 67, a jackpot is achieved in the normal mode (normal ball entry state), and after the special game ends, the state shifts to the first ball entry easy state, and a jackpot is not achieved in the first ball entry state, and the special mode (second special After the special mode ends, the mode changes to the normal ball entry state (where the hold on the symbol 52 is cleared), and after that, it moves to the second ball entry easy state. This shows a case in which the mode shifts to the special mode without any changes, and the mode shifts to the normal mode after the special mode ends.

The first test signal is in the ON state only in the first easy entry state, and is in the OFF state otherwise. The first test signal is in the off state in the normal ball entry state, the second ball entry easy state, and during execution of the special game. At the final change of the first easy-to-enter state (for example, the final change of the A time-saving mode or the final change of the latent mode in which the game state at the time of judgment is a low probability state), the game is lost and shifts to the special mode. In this case, the first test signal changes from the on state to the off state in response to the stop of the symbol in the final variation of the first easy-to-enter state. In addition, if you do not win the fall judgment in the hidden mode and move to the extension mode, the first test signal will change from the on state to the off state at the start of the symbol change that has won the fall judgment or the win/fail judgment in the extension mode. become.

The second test signal is in the ON state only in the second easy entry state, and is in the OFF state otherwise. The second test signal is in the off state in the normal ball entry state, the first ball entry easy state, and during execution of the special game. If the final variation of the second easy entry state (B time saving mode or C time saving mode) results in a miss and the transition to the special mode, the second test is triggered by the symbol stop of the final variation of the second easy entry state. The signal changes from on to off.

The first test signal is in the off state in the second ball entry easy state, and the second test signal is in the off state in the first ball entry easy state, so the first test signal and the second test signal are in the on state at the same time. It won't happen. By providing the first test signal and the second test signal separately, it is possible to clearly distinguish between the first easy-to-enter state and the second easy-to-enter state, and the time-saving type can be reliably distinguished in testing gaming machines. be able to.

The second test signal may be a signal common to B time saving and C time saving. The second test signal may be prepared separately for B time saving test signal and C time saving test signal (for example, the second test signal B which is the B time saving test signal and the second test signal C which is the C time saving test signal). ). The test signal output terminal may separately have a terminal that outputs the B time-saving test signal and a terminal that outputs the C time-saving test signal. The B time saving test signal is in an ON state only during B time saving, and is in an OFF state during C time saving. The C time saving test signal is in the ON state only during the C time saving period, and is in the OFF state during the B time saving period. Therefore, the B time saving test signal and the C time saving test signal are never turned on at the same time.

The time saving medium signal is a signal common to the first ball entry easy state and the second ball entry easy state, and is turned on when the high ball entry state continues. The time saving signal is turned on when the first test signal is turned on and when the second test signal is turned on. The time saving signal is in an on state while the special game is being executed. If a special game is executed by hitting the jackpot in the first easy-to-enter state or the second easy-to-enter state, and the transition is made to the first easy-to-enter state after the execution of the special game, the ease of entering the ball before and after the execution of the special game It remains on during the execution of the special game. The time saving medium signal is off when the first special symbol 51 is changed in a low probability and low ball entry state, that is, when staying in the normal mode, but in the first ball entry easy state or the second ball entry state. When the second special symbol 52 is changed in a low probability and low ball entry state immediately after the end of the ball easy state (that is, when staying in the special mode), the on state continues. The time saving signal continues to be on when the first ball entering easy state or the second ball entering easy state ends and shifts to the special mode, and at the timing when the special mode ends and shifts to the normal mode ( In other words, immediately after the first easy-to-enter state or the second easy-to-enter state ends, all the remaining second lottery values are cleared, and the second special symbol 52 corresponding to the last remaining second lottery value is It switches from the on state to the off state at the stop display timing). Note that the time saving signal may be turned off when the final fluctuation of the first ball entry easy state or the second ball entry easy state stops. In that case, even in a symbol variation in which a fall determination or a win/fail determination is won in the extended mode, the symbol is stopped and displayed, resulting in an off state.

The second time saving start signal turns on when the second ball entry easy state starts, and after the on state continues for a certain period of time (for example, one second), it switches to the off state. The second time saving start signal is turned on, for example, when the second time saving signal is switched from the off state to the on state. The second time saving start signal may be a signal common to the start of B time saving and C time saving. As the second time saving start signal, separate signals may be prepared for B time saving and C time saving. For example, the external information output terminal 160 may separately have a terminal that outputs the B time saving start signal and a terminal that outputs the C time saving start signal.

The second time saving medium signal is a time saving medium signal specialized for the second ball entering easy state, and is turned on when the high ball entering state continues with the start of the second ball entering easy state as a trigger. The second time saving medium signal is turned on when the low ball entry state is transitioned to the second ball entry easy state. The second time saving medium signal turns off at the timing when the second ball entry easy state ends, that is, when the final fluctuation of the second ball entry easy state stops. Therefore, when the first special symbol 51 is changed with low probability and low ball entry state, that is, when it stays in the normal mode, it is in the off state. When a jackpot occurs in the second easy-to-enter state, the second time-saving medium signal turns off when the symbol that becomes a jackpot stops. The second time saving medium signal is in an OFF state during the special game and during the first ball entry easy state that is transferred after the special game. In addition, as a modified example, when the second special symbol 52 is changed in a low probability and low ball entry state immediately after the second ball entry easy state ends (that is, when staying in the special mode), it is turned on. In that case, the on state continues when the second easy entry state ends and the transition to the special mode occurs, and the timing (second Immediately after the end of the easy-to-enter state, all the reservations of the remaining second lottery values are extinguished and the second special symbol 52 corresponding to the last remaining second lottery value stops being displayed. Switch to state.

By providing the time saving signal as the outer end signal, it is possible to easily understand whether or not a situation advantageous to the player continues. Furthermore, by providing the second time-saving start signal, it is possible to reliably know whether or not there is a time-saving entry that is not triggered by a jackpot. By providing the second time-saving signal separately from the time-saving signal, it is possible to more appropriately grasp the situation during the time-saving rush that is not triggered by a jackpot.

FIG. 68 is a diagram showing an example of the output of the test signal and the outer end signal related to the ball entry easy state, and shows an example in which a plurality of time saving states continue without a jackpot occurring. In Figure 68, in the first ball entry easy state, the jackpot does not occur and the transition is made to the special mode, and due to fluctuations in the special mode, the C time saving symbol stops and the second ball entry easy state (C time saving mode) is shown. This shows a case where the remaining number of times the ceiling is reached becomes 0 in the middle of C time saving mode, and the mode is shifted to B time saving mode. It is assumed that the second special symbol 52 is prepared with a C time-saving symbol.

In the example of FIG. 68, the first test signal is in the ON state only in the first ball entry easy state, and is in the OFF state in the special mode and the second ball entry easy state (C time saving mode and B time saving mode). The second test signal is in the OFF state in the first ball entry easy state and the special mode, and continues to be in the ON state in the second ball entry easy state (C time saving mode and B time saving mode). The time saving signal remains on. The second time saving start signal is turned on at the start of the C time saving mode, but is not turned on at the start of the B time saving mode. This is because the state that is not the second ball entry easy state has not been transitioned to the second ball entry easy state at the start of the B time saving mode. The second time saving medium signal is in the OFF state in the first ball entry easy state and the special mode, and continues to be in the ON state in the second ball entry easy state (C time saving mode and B time saving mode).

If the conditions for transition to the second easy-to-enter state are met during the first change from the special mode to the normal mode, the time saver signal will turn off at the start of the first change in the normal mode. The on state may continue without any interruption. In addition, if the conditions for transition to the second easy-to-enter state are met in the first fluctuation from the special mode to the normal mode, the time saving signal turns off with the start of the first fluctuation in the normal mode, and the second change occurs. The on state may be triggered by the start of the symbol variation in which the 2-ball easy-to-enter state starts.

The time-saving medium signal may remain on when transitioning to the second easy-ball entry state when the C time-saving symbol stops or the remaining number of times the ball reaches the ceiling becomes 0 in the easy-ball entry state. . On the other hand, if the second time-saving start signal is triggered by the stop of the C time-saving symbol or the remaining number of times the ball reaches the ceiling becomes 0 in the easy ball entry state, the second ball entry easy state is activated. It may or may not be turned on at the beginning of the easy state. When directly transitioning from the first ball entry easy state to the second ball entry easy state, the second time saving medium signal may remain in the off state in the second ball entry easy state, or may turn on. good.

The time saving signal may remain on when the C time saving symbol stops at the final variation of the first ball entering easy state and is transferred to the second ball entering easy state (C time saving mode). For example, in the final variation of the extension mode, the C time-saving symbol may stop in a state where the probability is low and the ball enters a low state. For example, if one of the conditions for entering the C time saving mode is that the symbols are in a low probability state when the symbols stop, the game state when the symbols stop in the final variation of the extension mode is a low probability state, so the extension When the C time saving symbol stops at the final variation of the mode, it becomes possible to shift to C time saving. In this case, after the extension mode ends, that is, after the first ball entry easy state ends, the second ball entry easy state may be entered, and the time saving signal may continue to be on. On the other hand, if it is possible to shift to C time saving mode on the condition that the fluctuation is in a low probability state at the start of the fluctuation, the gaming state at the start of fluctuation of the final fluctuation in the extended mode is a high probability state, so the final fluctuation in the extended mode is Even if the C time saving symbol stops, it will not shift to C time saving. In this case, the time saving signal may be switched from the on state to the off state upon the end of the extension mode, that is, the end of the first ball entry easy state (that is, it is not necessary to shift to the C time saving mode).

Several aspects of this embodiment have been described above. The technology described in this embodiment may be applied to the pachinko gaming machine 100 described in the first base technology or the first embodiment, or may be applied to the slot machine 1010 described in the second base technology. For example, the operation instruction performance described in Aspect 2-3 and the suggestion performance in which an execution mode can be selected as described in Aspect 2-7 can be applied to the slot machine shown in Prerequisite technology 2. It is also possible to apply the present invention to slot machines and gaming machines installed in arcades, game centers, and the like.

In the second embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the pachinko game machine 100 includes both the B time saver and the C time saver. In a modification, the pachinko gaming machine 100 may include only one of the B time saver and C time saver, and may not include the other.

The techniques described in the examples and modifications may be specified by the following items.

[Item 1]
A game board on which a game area is formed;
a first starting port provided in the gaming area;
a second starting port provided in the gaming area and having a ball entry variation mechanism operable to change the entry of the game ball from a relatively difficult state to an easy state;
a validity determination means for executing a validity determination based on a lottery value obtained when a ball enters the first starting port or the second starting port;
a symbol display device in which symbols are displayed in a fluctuating manner and the result of the validity determination is indicated by a stop display of the symbols;
When a symbol indicating that the result of the win/fail determination is a jackpot is displayed in a stopped state on the symbol display device, a special game control means that enables execution of a special game that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game after the symbol is stopped and displayed;
Ball entry state control means for transitioning from a normal ball entry state in which ease of ball entry into the second starting port is relatively low to an easy entry state in which ball entry into the second starting port is relatively high; ,
A performance control means for controlling the performance,
The easy ball entry state includes a first easy ball entry state that can be transitioned to when the special game is executed, and a second easy ball entry state that can be transitioned to when the result of the success/failure determination is other than a jackpot. There is,
A first specific performance and a second specific performance that indicate an expectation that the result of the validity determination is a jackpot are executable,
If a symbol indicating that the result of the win/fail determination is other than a jackpot is displayed in a stopped state after the execution of the first specific performance, the second ball entry easy state is not entered after the stopped display;
A pinball game in which, when a symbol indicating that the result of the win/fail determination is other than a jackpot is displayed in a stopped state after execution of the second specific performance, the state may be shifted to the second easy-to-enter state after the stopped display. Machine.

[Item 2]
A game board on which a game area is formed;
a first starting port provided in the gaming area;
a second starting port provided in the gaming area and having a ball entry variation mechanism operable to change the entry of the game ball from a relatively difficult state to an easy state;
Judgment determining means for executing a propriety judgment based on a first lottery value obtained when the ball enters the first starting port or a second lottery value obtained when the ball enters the second starting port. and,
a symbol display device in which symbols are displayed in a fluctuating manner and the result of the validity determination is indicated by a stop display of the symbols;
a holding control means for holding the first lottery value and the second lottery value up to a predetermined number of symbols at an upper limit until the symbol corresponding to the lottery starts changing;
special game control means that enables execution of a special game that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game after the stop display of a symbol indicating that the result of the win/fail judgment is a jackpot on the symbol display device;
Ball entry state control means for transitioning from a normal ball entry state in which ease of ball entry into the second starting port is relatively low to an easy entry state in which ball entry into the second starting port is relatively high; ,
A performance control means for controlling the performance,
A normal performance can be executed when a symbol corresponding to the first lottery value is displayed in a fluctuating manner in the normal ball entry state;
A special effect is performed when one or more second lottery values that are reserved when transitioning from the easy ball entry state to the normal ball entry state are digested in the normal ball entry state and the symbols are displayed in a variable manner. is feasible and
In the case where the symbol corresponding to the second lottery value is displayed in a fluctuating manner when the second lottery value is not held in the normal ball entry state, and the symbol indicating that the result of the win/fail determination is a loss is stopped and displayed. , a pinball game machine in which the normal performance is executed before the symbol is stopped and displayed, and the special performance is not executed after the symbol is stopped and displayed.

[Item 3]
a main control means for controlling the progress of the game;
a performance control means for controlling the performance;
an input operation means for accepting input operations from a player;
It is possible to perform an operation instruction performance that displays an operation means image imitating the input operation means and instructs the player to perform an input operation on the input operation means,
After the operation instruction performance is executed and an input operation is performed on the input operation means, there is a first performance that can be executed with the operation means image hidden;
After the operation instruction performance is executed and an input operation is performed on the input operation means, the gaming machine has a second performance that can be executed while displaying the operation means image.

[Item 4]
A game board on which a game area is formed;
a first starting port provided in the gaming area;
a second starting port provided in the gaming area and having a ball entry variation mechanism operable to change the entry of the game ball from a relatively difficult state to an easy state;
a validity determination means for executing a validity determination based on a lottery value obtained when a ball enters the first starting port or the second starting port;
a symbol display device in which symbols are displayed in a fluctuating manner and the result of the validity determination is indicated by a stop display of the symbols;
special game control means that enables execution of a special game that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game after the stop display of a symbol indicating that the result of the win/fail judgment is a jackpot on the symbol display device;
Probability state control means for shifting from a low probability state where the probability that the result of the validity determination is a jackpot is normal to a high probability state where the probability that the result of the validity determination is a jackpot is higher than normal;
Ball entry state control means for transitioning from a normal ball entry state in which ease of ball entry into the second starting port is relatively low to an easy entry state in which ball entry into the second starting port is relatively high; ,
A performance control means for controlling the performance,
It is possible to shift to the easy ball entry state when the number of consecutive symbol variations in which the result of the correctness judgment is wrong in the low probability state reaches a predetermined number;
A special performance with different execution modes can be executed depending on the number of times remaining until the number of consecutive times reaches the predetermined number of times,
In the pinball game machine, the special performance cannot be executed until the number of symbol changes reaches a specific number after RAM clear processing, after power-off recovery processing, or after displaying a standby demo screen.

[Item 5]
A game board on which a game area is formed;
a starting port provided in the gaming area;
a validity determination means for executing a validity determination based on a lottery value obtained when the ball enters the starting port;
a symbol display device in which symbols are displayed in a fluctuating manner and the result of the validity determination is indicated by a stop display of the symbols;
special game control means that enables execution of a special game that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game after the stop display of a symbol indicating that the result of the win/fail judgment is a jackpot on the symbol display device;
A performance control means for controlling the performance,
It is possible to carry out a special performance that can continue for a special period from the start of the fluctuation of the symbol until at least a predetermined time elapses,
During the special period, symbol fluctuations can be executed up to N times (N is 2 or more),
If the symbol fluctuation executed during the special period results in a jackpot, the special period ends regardless of the number of symbol fluctuations executed during the special period from M times (M is less than N) to N times. The symbol indicating that it will be a jackpot will be stopped and displayed.
It is possible to execute a specific performance that suggests the expectation of a jackpot during the special period, and even if the number of symbol changes executed during the special period is any number from M to N, from the start of the special period. A specific performance can be executed after a specific time has passed,
When the specific performance is executed after the specific time has elapsed from the start of the special period, depending on whether the number of symbol changes executed during the special period is from M to N times, the special period A pinball game machine in which the number of symbol variations executed from the start of the game to the execution of the specific performance can vary.

[Item 6]
A game board on which a game area is formed;
a starting port provided in the gaming area;
a validity determination means for executing a validity determination based on a lottery value obtained when the ball enters the starting port;
a special symbol display device in which a special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and the result of the validity determination is indicated by a stop display of the special symbol;
When a symbol indicating that the result of the win/fail judgment is a jackpot is displayed in a stopped state on the special symbol display device, a special game control means that enables execution of a special game that is more advantageous to the player than a normal game after the stop display; ,
A production display device for displaying a production;
When the special symbol is variably displayed, decorative symbols and simple symbols are variably displayed on the effect display device from the start of variation to the stop of variation of the special symbol;
There is a first effect in which the effect display device displays a normal color effect, and a second effect in which the effect display device displays a special color effect different from the normal color,
The display color of the decorative pattern that is variably displayed superimposed on the first performance is different from the display color of the decorative pattern that is variably displayed superimposed on the second performance,
In the pinball game machine, the display color of the simple symbols variably displayed superimposed on the first performance is the same as the display color of the simple symbols variably displayed superimposed on the second performance.

[Item 7]
a main control means for controlling the progress of the game;
a performance control means for controlling the performance;
an input operation means for accepting input operations from a player;
Suggestive performances that suggest the degree of expectation of an advantageous result to the player include definite performances that are certain to result in an advantageous outcome, and non-determined performances that are not certain that the advantageous results will occur,
The player is able to perform an input operation to select an execution mode of the suggestive performance while the game is in progress;
There are a first mode and a second mode as selection candidates for the execution mode of the suggestion production,
The number of types of non-determined effects that can be executed after selecting the first mode is smaller than the number of types of non-confirmed effects that can be executed after selecting the second mode,
The gaming machine wherein the probability that the confirmed performance is executed after the selection of the first mode is greater than the probability that the confirmed effect is executed after the selection of the second mode.

[Item 8]
A game board on which a game area is formed;
a first starting port provided in the gaming area;
a second starting port provided in the gaming area and having a ball entry variation mechanism operable to change the entry of the game ball from a relatively difficult state to an easy state;
a validity determination means for executing a validity determination based on a lottery value obtained when a ball enters the first starting port or the second starting port;
a symbol display device in which symbols are displayed in a fluctuating manner and the result of the validity determination is indicated by a stop display of the symbols;
special game control means that enables execution of a special game that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game after the stop display of a symbol indicating that the result of the win/fail judgment is a jackpot on the symbol display device;
Ball entry state control means for transitioning from a normal ball entry state in which ease of ball entry into the second starting port is relatively low to an easy entry state in which ball entry into the second starting port is relatively high; ,
A performance control means for controlling the performance,
When the state is transferred to the easy ball entry state after the end of the special game, the number of fluctuations of the symbol from the end of the special game until reaching a specific end of the easy ball entry state is the first number of times. In some cases, the second number of times is greater than the first number of times.
In the easy ball entry state, it is possible to display the actual remaining number of times until reaching the specific final stage or a false remaining number of times that is smaller than the actual remaining number of times,
When the remaining number of false appearances is displayed, if the number of fluctuations of the symbol after transitioning to the easy ball entry state is less than a predetermined number of times that is less than the first number of times, the remaining number of false appearances is increased. A pinball game machine in which the number-of-times-increasing performance cannot be performed, and the number-of-times-increasing performance can be performed if the number of fluctuations of the symbol after transitioning to the ball entry easy state is equal to or greater than the predetermined number of times.

[Item 9]
A game board on which a game area is formed;
a starting port provided in the gaming area;
a validity determination means for executing a validity determination based on a lottery value obtained when the ball enters the starting port;
a symbol display device in which symbols are displayed in a fluctuating manner and the result of the validity determination is indicated by a stop display of the symbols;
special game control means that enables execution of a special game that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game after the stop display of a symbol indicating that the result of the win/fail judgment is a jackpot on the symbol display device;
A performance control means for controlling the performance,
There are a first performance and a second performance that are executed over multiple symbol variations triggered by the start of the symbol variation,
When a new symbol variation is started after the end of the first production, a second production triggered by the start of the new symbol variation can be executed,
If a new symbol variation is started before the end of the first performance, a second performance triggered by the start of the new symbol variation cannot be executed.

[Item 10]
A game board on which a game area is formed;
a starting port provided in the gaming area;
a validity determination means for executing a validity determination based on a lottery value obtained when the ball enters the starting port;
a symbol display device in which symbols are displayed in a fluctuating manner and the result of the validity determination is indicated by a stop display of the symbols;
special game control means that enables execution of a special game that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game after the stop display of a symbol indicating that the result of the win/fail judgment is a jackpot on the symbol display device;
A performance control means for controlling the performance,
There is a video playback effect that continuously plays the video over multiple symbol changes of the symbol,
During execution of the video playback effect, if a new symbol variation is started after the first time has elapsed since the symbol is stopped and displayed, even during the period from the stop display of the symbol to the start of the new symbol variation. The video will continue to play,
During the execution of the video playback effect, if a new symbol variation is not started after a second time period that is longer than the first time has elapsed since the symbol was stopped and displayed, the video is not played back after the symbol is stopped and displayed. A pinball game machine that is paused and a video of the paused state is displayed.

[Item 11]
A game board on which a game area is formed;
a first starting port provided in the gaming area;
a second starting port provided in the gaming area and having a ball entry variation mechanism operable to change the entry of the game ball from a relatively difficult state to an easy state;
a validity determination means for executing a validity determination based on a lottery value obtained when a ball enters the first starting port or the second starting port;
a symbol display device in which symbols are displayed in a fluctuating manner and the result of the validity determination is indicated by a stop display of the symbols;
special game control means that enables execution of a special game that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game after the stop display of a symbol indicating that the result of the win/fail judgment is a jackpot on the symbol display device;
Probability state control means for shifting from a low probability state where the probability that the result of the validity determination is a jackpot is normal to a high probability state where the probability that the result of the validity determination is a jackpot is higher than normal;
Fall determination means for determining a fall from the high probability state to the low probability state;
Ball entry state control means for transitioning from a normal ball entry state in which ease of ball entry into the second starting port is relatively low to an easy entry state in which ball entry into the second starting port is relatively high; , comprising:
When the fluctuating display of the symbol is started, the fluctuating display of the symbol is started after execution of a fluctuating start process in which a validity determination regarding the symbol is executed;
When the fluctuation start process of the symbol is started in the high probability state, a fall determination is performed in the fluctuation start process related to that symbol, and then a win/fail determination is performed, and if the fall determination is won, the low probability The validity determination is executed in the state, and if the fall determination is not successful, the validity determination is executed in the high probability state,
If the player is transferred to the high probability state and the easy ball entry state after the end of the special game, and wins the fall judgment related to symbol fluctuations in which the number of symbol fluctuations after the end of the special game is within a predetermined number, the special game After the symbol fluctuations stop, the number of symbol fluctuations after the end of the symbol fluctuations reaches the predetermined number of times, the symbol fluctuations are shifted to the normal ball entering state,
If the player is transferred to the high probability state and the easy ball entry state after the end of the special game and wins a fall judgment regarding a symbol change whose number of symbol changes after the end of the special game exceeds the predetermined number of times, the winning After the fall is determined, the ball is transferred to the low probability state and the normal ball entry state,
If the symbol fluctuation start process is started in the low probability state and the normal ball entry state, and the result of the winning/failure determination regarding that symbol is other than a jackpot, the stop display of that symbol triggers the ball entry easy state. may be transferred to
The pattern fluctuation start processing is started in the high probability state and the easy ball entry state, and before the execution of the judgment regarding the symbol, the falling judgment is won and the state is shifted to the low probability state and the normal ball entry state. In this case, the pinball game machine does not shift to the ball entry easy state upon the stop display of the symbol, even if the result of the determination regarding the symbol is other than a jackpot.

[Item 12]
A game board on which a game area is formed;
a first starting port provided in the gaming area;
a second starting port provided in the gaming area and having a ball entry variation mechanism operable to change the entry of the game ball from a relatively difficult state to an easy state;
a validity determination means for executing a validity determination based on a lottery value obtained when a ball enters the first starting port or the second starting port;
a symbol display device in which symbols are displayed in a fluctuating manner and the result of the validity determination is indicated by a stop display of the symbols;
Fluctuation pattern determining means for determining a fluctuation pattern that determines a fluctuation time from the start of fluctuation of the symbol to the stop display based on a fluctuation pattern selection state;
special game control means that enables execution of a special game that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game after the stop display of a symbol indicating that the result of the win/fail judgment is a jackpot on the symbol display device;
Probability state control means for shifting from a low probability state where the probability that the result of the validity determination is a jackpot is normal to a high probability state where the probability that the result of the validity determination is a jackpot is higher than normal;
Fall determination means for determining a fall from the high probability state to the low probability state;
Ball entry state control means for transitioning from a normal ball entry state in which ease of ball entry into the second starting port is relatively low to an easy entry state in which ball entry into the second starting port is relatively high; , comprising;
When the fluctuating display of the symbol is started, the fluctuating display of the symbol is started after execution of a fluctuating start process in which a validity determination regarding the symbol is executed;
When the pattern fluctuation start process is started in the high probability state, a win/fail judgment is executed after a fall judgment is performed in the fluctuation start process, and if the fall judgment is won, a win/fail judgment is performed in the low probability state. Judgment is executed, and if the fall judgment is not successful, the judgment is executed in the high probability state,
If the player is transferred to the high probability state and the easy ball entry state after the end of the special game, and wins the fall judgment related to symbol fluctuations in which the number of symbol fluctuations after the end of the special game is within a predetermined number, the special game After the symbol fluctuations have stopped, the number of symbol fluctuations after the end of the symbol fluctuations reaches the predetermined number of times, the symbol fluctuations are shifted to the normal ball entering state,
If the player is transferred to the high probability state and the easy ball entry state after the end of the special game and wins a fall judgment regarding a symbol change whose number of symbol changes after the end of the special game exceeds the predetermined number of times, the winning After the fall is determined, the ball is shifted to the low probability state and the normal ball entry state,
When the symbol fluctuation start process is started, a fluctuation pattern selection state is determined after the validity judgment is performed in the fluctuation start process, and a fluctuation pattern that determines the fluctuation time of the symbol is determined based on the determined fluctuation pattern selection state. decided,
The variation pattern selection state when determining a variation pattern related to symbol variation in which the number of symbol variations after transitioning to the high probability state and the easy ball entry state is the predetermined number of times is the high probability state and the easy ball entry state. Unlike the variation pattern selection state when a variation pattern related to a symbol variation in which the number of symbol variations after transitioning to the state is less than the predetermined number of times is determined, when a variation pattern related to a symbol variation exceeding the predetermined number of times is determined. Unlike the fluctuation pattern selection state of
If the number of symbol variations after transitioning to the high probability state and the easy ball entry state is less than the predetermined number of times, the variation pattern selection state determined after winning the fall determination is determined after not winning the fall determination. is the same as the fluctuation pattern selection criteria,
If the number of symbol fluctuations after transitioning to the high probability state and the easy ball entry state is equal to or greater than the predetermined number of times, and the result of the win/fail determination is a loss, the fluctuation determined after winning the fall determination. The pattern selection standard is a pinball game machine that is different from the variable pattern selection standard determined after the fall judgment is not won.

[Item 13]
A game board on which a game area is formed;
a first starting port provided in the gaming area;
a second starting port provided in the gaming area and having a ball entry variation mechanism operable to change the entry of the game ball from a relatively difficult state to an easy state;
a validity determination means for executing a validity determination based on a lottery value obtained when a ball enters the first starting port or the second starting port;
a symbol display device in which symbols are displayed in a fluctuating manner and the result of the validity determination is indicated by a stop display of the symbols;
special game control means that enables execution of a special game that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game after the stop display of a symbol indicating that the result of the win/fail judgment is a jackpot on the symbol display device;
Probability state control means for shifting from a low probability state where the probability that the result of the validity determination is a jackpot is normal to a high probability state where the probability that the result of the validity determination is a jackpot is higher than normal;
Ball entry state control means for transitioning from a normal ball entry state in which ease of ball entry into the second starting port is relatively low to an easy entry state in which ball entry into the second starting port is relatively high; , comprising;
The ball entry easy state includes a first ball entry easy state and a second ball entry easy state that is more advantageous to the player than the first ball entry easy state,
If the fluctuation start process of the symbol is started in the easy ball entry state, and the result of the judgment regarding that symbol is other than a jackpot, the stop display of that symbol will be used as a trigger to change the pattern after the transition to the easy ball entry state. A first process of updating a first number of times related to the execution of symbol variation and shifting to the normal ball entry state when the updated first number of times satisfies a first condition is executed;
When the fluctuation start process of the symbol is started in the normal ball entry state, and the result of the judgment of the symbol is other than a jackpot, the stop display of the symbol will be used as a trigger, and the lottery value of the symbol will be changed based on the lottery value of the symbol. executing a transition determination to the first ball entry easy state and, if the transition determination is successful, a second process of causing the transition to the first ball entry easy state;
If the fluctuation start process of the symbol is started in the low probability state and the result of the determination regarding the symbol is other than a jackpot, the stop display of that symbol will be used as a trigger for the determination to be performed in the low probability state. A third process is executed in which a second number of symbol changes that result in a result other than a jackpot is updated, and when the updated second number of times satisfies a second condition, the second ball enters the easy state.
The first process can be executed at least before the third process,
In the pinball game machine, the second process can be executed at least before the third process.

[Item 14]
A game board on which a game area is formed;
a first starting port provided in the gaming area;
a second starting port provided in the gaming area and having a ball entry variation mechanism operable to change the entry of the game ball from a relatively difficult state to an easy state;
a validity determination means for executing a validity determination based on a lottery value obtained when a ball enters the first starting port or the second starting port;
a symbol display device in which symbols are displayed in a fluctuating manner and the result of the validity determination is indicated by a stop display of the symbols;
special game control means that enables execution of a special game that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game after the stop display of a symbol indicating that the result of the win/fail judgment is a jackpot on the symbol display device;
Ball entry state control means for transitioning from a normal ball entry state in which ease of ball entry into the second starting port is relatively low to an easy entry state in which ball entry into the second starting port is relatively high; ,
a test signal output terminal for outputting a test signal;
Equipped with an external information output terminal for outputting an external end signal,
The easy ball entry state includes a first easy ball entry state that can be transitioned to when the special game is executed, and a second easy ball entry state that can be transitioned to when the result of the success/failure determination is other than a jackpot. There is,
As the test signal output terminals, a first terminal outputs a test signal indicating that the first ball enters the easy state, and a second terminal outputs a test signal indicating that the second ball enters the easy state. There is
The external information output terminal includes a third terminal to which an outer end signal indicating that the first ball entry easy state, the second ball entry easy state, or the special game is in progress is output; and the second ball entry easy state. A pinball game machine having a fourth terminal to which an outer end signal indicating the start of the state is output, and a fifth terminal to which an outer end signal indicating the second ball entry easy state is output.

Reference Signs List 11 first starting port, 12 second starting port, 60 effect display device, 80 game board, 81 gaming area, 210 lottery means, 213 common symbol lottery means, 220 success/failure determination means, 230 fluctuation pattern determining means, 260 special game control means, 275 opening/closing control means, 303 presentation determining means, 304 presentation control means.

Claims (1)

A game board on which a game area is formed;
a starting port provided in the gaming area;
a validity determination means for executing a validity determination based on a lottery value obtained when the ball enters the starting port;
a symbol display device in which symbols are displayed in a fluctuating manner and the result of the validity determination is indicated by a stop display of the symbols;
a suspension control means for suspending the lottery value up to a predetermined number until the symbol corresponding to the lottery begins to fluctuate;
special game control means that enables execution of a special game that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game after the stop display of a symbol indicating that the result of the win/fail judgment is a jackpot on the symbol display device;
A production display device for displaying a production;
It is possible to perform a special effect in which an image that can be displayed on the effect display device is transformed into a special mode and displayed on the effect display device,
It has at least one or more first images that are transformation targets in the special performance, and at least one or more second images that are not transformation targets in the special performance,
As a pending image indicating the pending status of the lottery value, there is a normal pending image that can be additionally displayed when a pending event occurs corresponding to a new ball being entered, and a normal pending image that can be updated and displayed when a pending event that corresponds to a new ball entering the ball occurs. A simple pending image can be displayed on the effect display device,
The normal hold image can start to be displayed with an animation display when the hold occurs, while the simple hold image can be updated and displayed without the animation display when the hold occurs,
When the special effect is executed in a situation where the normal hold image and the simple hold image are displayed, the normal hold image can be transformed into the special mode, while the simple hold image can be transformed into the special mode. not deformed,
If the display of the normal hold image starts with the animation display when the hold occurs before the execution of the special effect starts, and the special effect starts while the animation display when the hold occurs, then when the hold occurs The animation display continues without being stopped,
When a new ball enters, based on the prior information regarding the lottery value corresponding to the new ball entering, a predetermined look-ahead effect that suggests the degree of expectation for moving to a special game related to the reservation corresponding to that prior information is applied to that prior information. It is possible to execute the symbol change before the symbol change related to the corresponding hold,
A first effect pattern in which, triggered by the occurrence of a hold corresponding to a new ball entering, the hold occurrence animation display is executed without executing the predetermined look-ahead effect; and a second effect pattern in which the animation display is executed when the hold occurs,
If a hold corresponding to a new ball entering occurs during execution of the special performance, the first performance pattern can be executed, while the second performance pattern is not executed,
The execution period of the special effect is longer than the execution period of the animation display when the suspension occurs,
The pinball game machine is capable of displaying a standby screen on the effect display device during game standby, and wherein the special effect is not executed while the standby screen is displayed.

Images